MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.
Introduction
This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the MITSUBISHI CNC700/70 Series.
This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MITSUBISHI
CNC700/70 Series functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation
by referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
Notes on Reading This Manual
(1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC.
For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine tool builder.
If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual
and the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.
(2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
(3) The "special display unit" explained in this manual is the display unit incorporated by the machine
tool builder, and is not the MITSUBISHI standard display unit.
Caution
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder’s instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered
"impossible".
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way or some function is not activated.
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached
documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is
mistaken.
When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if
handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as "
CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any
case, important information that must always be observed is described.
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated.
2. Items related to faults and abnormalities
If the battery low alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each
data item.
[Continued on next page]
CAUTION
[Continued]
3. Items related to maintenance
Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
Do not replace cooling fan while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced cooling fan according to the local laws.
Do not replace backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose of the spent backlights according to the local laws.
Do not touch backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks
due to high voltage.
Do not touch backlight while LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
LCD panel and backlight are made of glass, so do not apply impacts or pressure on them. Failure to
observe this could result in breakage.
Incorrect connections could cause the devices to damage. Connect the cable to the designated
connector.
Do not replace control units while the power is ON.
Do not replace display units while the power is ON.
Do not replace keyboard units while the power is ON.
Do not replace DX units while the power is ON.
Do not replace hard disk units while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced hard disk unit according to the local laws.
Hard disk unit is a precision device, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on it.
4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters
Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable.
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
CONTENTS
I Procedures for Starting up
1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series ........................................................................................1
1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration .........................................................................................1
1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures ..................................................................................................2
2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series ..........................................................................................3
2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration .........................................................................................3
2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures ..................................................................................................4
3. Setup Details ...............................................................................................................................5
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices .............................................................5
3.1.1 Setting the MDS-D/DH Series Rotary Switch and DIP Switch .........................................7
3.1.2 Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Rotary Switch......................................................9
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM) ...................................................................................10
3.3 Inputting the Parameters ......................................................................................................12
3.3.1 When There is No Parameter File..................................................................................12
3.3.2 When a Parameter File is Available ...............................................................................15
3.4 Formatting the File System...................................................................................................16
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program...............................................................................................17
3.6 Credit System .......................................................................................................................19
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal ..................................................................................................21
3.7.1 When Connecting with PC to Input ................................................................................21
3.7.2 When Connecting with NC to Input ................................................................................23
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection............24
3.8.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation.............................................................24
3.8.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures .......................................25
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System.....................................................................................31
3.9.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation.............................................................31
3.9.2 Starting up the Absolute Position Detection System ......................................................32
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation .....................................................................................................34
3.10.1 Preparations .................................................................................................................35
3.10.2 Absolute Position Initial Setting ....................................................................................36
3.10.3 Test Operation..............................................................................................................36
3.10.4 PLC device ...................................................................................................................37
3.10.5 Notes ............................................................................................................................40
3.11 Data Sampling ....................................................................................................................41
3.12 Data backup .......................................................................................................................41
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER ...................................................................................................42
3.13.1 Compatible Data and CF Card Folder Configuration ...................................................42
3.13.2 Operation Method.........................................................................................................44
3.13.3 List of Error Messages .................................................................................................49
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods.....................................................................................50
4.1 Durable Parts........................................................................................................................50
4.1.1 Control unit battery .........................................................................................................50
4.1.2 Cooling fan for control unit .............................................................................................52
4.1.3 Cooling fan for display unit (XP terminal) .......................................................................53
4.1.4 Backlight .........................................................................................................................54
4.2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................57
4.2.1 Control Unit.....................................................................................................................57
4.2.2 Display Unit ....................................................................................................................59
4.2.3 Keyboard unit .................................................................................................................60
4.2.4 DX Unit ...........................................................................................................................62
4.2.5 Hard Disk Unit ................................................................................................................63
4.3 Compact Flash......................................................................................................................64
4.3.1 Control Unit Compact Flash ............................................................................................64
4.4 IC card ..................................................................................................................................65
4.4.1 Front IC Card ..................................................................................................................65
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods .......................................................................................66
5.1 Durable Parts........................................................................................................................66
5.1.1 Control unit battery .........................................................................................................66
5.1.2 Backlight .........................................................................................................................68
5.2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................70
5.2.1 Control Unit.....................................................................................................................70
5.2.2 Display Unit ....................................................................................................................72
5.2.3 Keyboard unit .................................................................................................................73
5.2.4 DX Unit ...........................................................................................................................75
5.3 Compact Flash......................................................................................................................76
5.3.1 Front Compact Flash ......................................................................................................76
6. Cable ......................................................................................................................................77
II Explanation of Alarms
1. List of Alarms ...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Operation Alarms....................................................................................................................1
1.2 Stop Codes ...........................................................................................................................10
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms ...........................................................................................................15
1.4 MCP Alarm ...........................................................................................................................25
1.5 System Alarms......................................................................................................................35
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms.........................................................................41
1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors ..............................................................................44
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop.......................................................................................45
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms ............................................................................................................47
1.10 Computer Link Errors..........................................................................................................54
1.11 User PLC Alarms ................................................................................................................55
1.12 Network Service Errors.......................................................................................................57
2. Operation Messages..................................................................................................................58
2.1 Search-related Operation Messages ....................................................................................58
2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages ......................................................................59
2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages ......................60
2.4 PLC Switch-related Operation Messages.............................................................................60
2.5 Compensation-related (Tool compensation, coordinate system offset) Operation Messages60
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages ...................................................................61
2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages ..............................................................................64
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages.......................................65
2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages.............................................67
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages ..................................................................................68
2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages .............................................................................70
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages.........................................................................71
2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages......................................................................73
2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages .................................................74
2.15 System Setup-related Operation Messages.......................................................................74
2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages ................................................................75
2.17 Alarm History-related Operation Messages........................................................................75
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages ............................................................................76
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System............................................81
2.20 Other Operation Messages ................................................................................................83
3. Program Error ............................................................................................................................84
4. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................104
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................104
4.1.1 Troubleshooting at Power ON ......................................................................................104
4.1.2 Troubleshooting for each alarm No. .............................................................................105
4.1.3 Troubleshooting for each warning No. .........................................................................130
4.1.4 Parameter numbers during initial parameter error .......................................................132
4.1.5 Troubleshooting the spindle system when there is no alarm or warning......................133
III Explanation of Parameters
1. Outline .........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Screen Transition Chart..........................................................................................................1
1.2 Unit .........................................................................................................................................1
2. User Parameters..........................................................................................................................2
2.1 Process Parameters ...............................................................................................................2
2.2 Control Parameters ..............................................................................................................15
2.3 Axis Parameters ...................................................................................................................19
2.4 Operation Parameters ..........................................................................................................22
2.5 Barrier Data (For L system only) ..........................................................................................27
2.6 I/O Parameters .....................................................................................................................30
2.7 Ethernet Parameters ............................................................................................................49
2.8 Computer Link Parameters...................................................................................................56
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters......................................................................59
2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1......................................................................................................63
2.11 Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB-net) Parameter 1.........................................64
3. Setting the Machine Parameters ...............................................................................................65
4. Base Specifications Parameters................................................................................................66
5. Axis Specifications Parameters ...............................................................................................123
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters ..........................................................................................123
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters............................................................................................129
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters ............................................................................................134
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 .......................................................................................136
6. Servo Parameters ....................................................................................................................148
6.1 Details for servo parameters...............................................................................................148
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor ...............................................................166
6.3 Supplement.........................................................................................................................174
6.3.1 D/A Output No. .............................................................................................................174
6.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series................................................................................................................. 174
6.3.1.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series ............................................................................................................. 177
6.3.2 Electronic Gears ...........................................................................................................180
6.3.3 Lost Motion Compensation...........................................................................................181
7. Spindle Parameters .................................................................................................................182
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters............................................................................182
7.2 Spindle Parameters ............................................................................................................198
7.3 Supplement.........................................................................................................................221
7.3.1 D/A Output Numbers ....................................................................................................221
7.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series................................................................................................................. 221
7.3.1.2 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series ............................................................................................................. 225
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters.....................................................................................229
9. Machine Error Compensation ..................................................................................................235
9.1 Function Outline..................................................................................................................235
9.2 Setting Compensation Data................................................................................................239
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis ..............................................................241
9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis..............................................................245
10. PLC Constants.......................................................................................................................246
10.1 PLC Timer.........................................................................................................................246
10.2 PLC Integrated Timer .......................................................................................................247
10.3 PLC Counter .....................................................................................................................247
10.4 PLC Constants..................................................................................................................248
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit........................................................................................................248
11. Macro List ..............................................................................................................................251
12. Position Switch.......................................................................................................................253
12.1 Canceling the Position Switch ..........................................................................................255
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter ........................................................................................................256
14. Open Parameter ....................................................................................................................275
15. CC-Link Parameter ................................................................................................................276
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1 ........................................................................................................276
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2 ........................................................................................................287
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2....................................................................290
17. PLC Axis Parameters.............................................................................................................303
I
Procedures for Starting Up
1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series
1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration
1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series
This section explains the normal work required to newly start up the MITSUBISHI CNC 700 Series.
Start up the system following these setup procedures.
1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration
The names of the hardware used in this section's explanations are explained below.
Display unit
Next
Back
Keyboard
IC card interface on front of
display unit
Tab right
Control unit
LED1
SW1
LED2
CS1
E
D
C
B
A
F 0 1
9 8 7
2
6
3
4
5
Upper rotary switch
CS2
E
D
C
B
A
I-1
F 0 1
9 8 7
Lower rotary switch
2
6
3
4
5
INPUT
1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series
1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures
1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures
The procedures for setting up are explained with a flow chart.
Start
Refer to 3.1
Connecting the control unit
and peripheral devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive,
auxiliary axis, remote I/O).
Refer to 3.2
Erasing the backed up data (SRAM)
Erase the backed up data (SRAM).
Set CS1 to "0" and CS2 to "C" to erase the SRAM.
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 3.3
Inputting the parameters
If there is no parameter file, input the parameters with system setup or
by manual input operation.
If there is a parameter file, input the parameters with input/output screen.
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 3.4
Formatting the file system
Format the file system
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 700/70 Series Instruction Manual
Setting the data/time
Set the data and time in the integrated time display pop-up window.
Refer to 3.5
Inputting the ladder program
Input the ladder program using "GX Developer" or "PLC Onboard".
Refer to 3.6
Setting the credit system
This is necessary only if the credit system is valid.
Refer to 3.7
Setting the handy terminal
Input the customized data of handy terminal.
(Note) This is necessary only if the handy terminal is connected.
Inputting the machining program
End
Carry out the procedures below if necessary.
1 Adjustment of dog-type reference position return
2 Absolute position detection system
3 Auxiliary axis operation
4 Data sampling
5 Data backup
I-2
Refer to 3.8
Refer to 3.9
Refer to 3.10
Refer to 3.11
Refer to 3.12
2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series
2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration
2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series
This section explains the normal work required to newly start up the MITSUBISHI CNC 70 Series.
Start up the system following these setup procedures.
2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration
The names of the hardware used in this section's explanations are explained below.
Display unit
Back
Next
Keyboard
CF card interface on front
of display unit
Tab right
Control unit
Left rotary switch
I-3
Right rotary switch
INPUT
2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series
2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures
2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures
The procedures for setting up are explained with a flow chart.
Start
Connecting the control unit
Refer to 3.1
and peripheral devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive,
and remote I/O).
Refer to 3.2
Erasing the backed up data (SRAM)
Erase the backed up data (SRAM).
Set RSW1 to "0" and RSW2 to "C" to erase the SRAM.
Turning the power ON again.
Setting up with M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Refer to 3.13
Install the language data, custom data and custom startup screen.
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 3.3
Inputting the parameters
If there is no parameter file, input the parameters with system setup or
by manual input operation.
If there is a parameter file, input the parameters with input/output screen.
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 3.4
Formatting the file system
Format the file system
Turning the power ON again.
Refer to 700/70 Series Instruction Manual
Setting the data/time
Set the data and time in the integrated time display pop-up window.
Refer to 3.5
Inputting the ladder program
Input the ladder program using "GX Developer".
Refer to 3.6
Setting the credit system
This is necessary only if the credit system is valid.
Inputting the machining program
End
Carry out the procedures below if necessary.
1 Adjustment of dog-type reference position return
2 Absolute position detection system
3 Data sampling
4 Data backup
I-4
Refer to 3.8
Refer to 3.9
Refer to 3.11
Refer to 3.12
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive, auxiliary axis, remote IO, handy
terminal).
Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series Connection Manual" (IB-1500034), “Mitsubishi CNC 70 Series
Connection Manual” (IB-1500254), "MDS-D Specifications Manual" (IB-15000011), and "MDS-DH
Specifications Manual" (IB-1500003) for details.
(1) 700 Series
Control unit
Operation panel I/O unit
Machine operation
panel
Handy terminal
Serial connection (RS-232C)
Servo drive
Spindle drive
Auxiliary axis
Handy terminal handle
I-5
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
(2) 70 Series
Control unit
Servo drive
Spindle drive
Operation panel I/O unit
Serial communicaton
(RS-232C)
Handle
Machine operation
panel
I-6
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
3.1.1 Setting the MDS-D/DH Series Rotary Switch and DIP Switch
(1) Rotary switch setting
Before turning on the power, the axis No. must be set with the rotary switch. The rotary switch
settings will be validated when the drive units are turned ON.
1st axis
Servo drive unit
(MDS-D/DH-V1)
2nd axis
Servo drive unit
(MDS-D/DH-V2)
Spindle
Drive unit
(MDS-D/DH-SP□)
Power supply unit
(MDS-D/DH-CV)
L axis M axis
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
Details
Rotary switch setting
MDS-D/DH-V1/V2/SP
setting
0
1st axis
1
2nd axis
2
3rd axis
3
4th axis
4
5th axis
5
6th axis
6
7th axis
7
8th axis
8
9th axis
9
10th axis
A
11th axis
B
12th axis
C
13th axis
D
14th axis
E
15th axis
F
16th axis
I-7
MDS-D/DH-CV
setting
Normal setting
Setting prohibited
External emergency stop valid
(CN23 used)
Setting prohibited
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
(2) DIP switch setting
Setting the DIP switches is necessary prior to turning ON the power. Setting of the DIP switches at
the time of turning ON the power is validated. The DIP switches shall be as the standard setting (all
the switches OFF).
The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.
Turn this switch ON for the drive unit to which the terminator is connected.
Note that the switch must be turned OFF when the network configuration is valid.
M axis Setting unused axis
L axis Setting unused axis
Unused axis can be set by turning the switches ON.
When there is unused axis for the 2-axis drive unit,
set unused axis.
(Note) If the NC system is compatible with A1 or the prior version, set "1" to the base specifications
parameter "#1240 set12/bit4" and turn the last DIP switch ON.
I-8
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
3.1.2 Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Rotary Switch
Before turning on the power, the axis No. must be set with the rotary switch. The rotary switch settings will
be validated when the drive units are turned ON.
Servo drive unit
(MDS-D-SVJ3)
Spindle drive unit
(MDS-D-SPJ3)
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
5
4
3
67 8 9A
B
C
D
21 FE
0
Setting the
rotary switch
Details
Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3
0
1st axis
1
2nd axis
2
3rd axis
3
4th axis
4
5th axis
5
6th axis
6
7th axis
7
8th axis
8
9th axis
9
10th axis
A
11th axis
B
12th axis
C
13th axis
D
14th axis
E
15th axis
F
16th axis
I-9
3. Setup Details
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)
Use the following procedure if the backed up data (SRAM) needs to be cleared after the control unit is
replaced, etc. (There is no influence on the option parameters even if the backup data is deleted.)
(1) 700 Series
(a) With the NC power OFF, set the upper rotary
switch (CS1) on the control unit to "0" and the
lower rotary switch (CS2) to "C". Then, turn the
power ON.
LED1
SW1
LED1
LED2
CS1
E
D
C
B
A
LED2
F 0 1
9 8 7
2
6
3
4
5
CS2
F 0 1
E
2
3
D
C
4
B
5
A
6
9 8 7
(b) The LED display will change from "08." → "00" →
"01" ... "08". The process is completed when "0Y"
is displayed. (Required time: 8 seconds)
(c) Turn the NC power OFF.
(d) Set the lower rotary switch (CS2) to "0".
LED1
SW1
LED2
CS1
E
D
C
B
A
F0 1
9 8 7
2
6
3
4
5
CS2
E
D
C
B
A
F 0 1
9 8 7
2
6
3
4
5
(e) After turning the power OFF and ON, do nothing, and then turn the power OFF and ON again.
(Note) After the SRAM is cleared and the NC power is turned ON, the IP addresses are initialized to the
following values.
<Base common parameters>
#1934 Local IP address
: 192.168.100. 1
#1935 Local Subnet mask : 255.255.255. 0
To communicate with the screen, the parameter value and the "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" setting value
must match. Confirm that "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" is set to the above value.
Last line of C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini
•••
[HOSTS]
TCP1=192.168.100.1,683
I - 10
3. Setup Details
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)
(2) 70 Series
(a) With the NC power OFF, set the left rotary switch
(RSW1) on the control unit to "0" and the right
rotary switch (RSW2) to "C". Then, turn the power
ON.
NCLD1 NCLD2
NCLD1
F 0 1
E
D
C
B
A
9 8 7
2
E
3 D
4 C
5 B
6
A
RSW1
(b) The LED display will change from "08." → "00" →
"01" ... "08". The process is completed when "0Y"
is displayed. (Required time: 8 seconds)
(c) Turn the NC power OFF.
(d) Set the right rotary switch (RSW2) to "0".
NCLD2
F 0 1
9 8 7
F 0 1
9 8 7
RSW1
6
3
4
5
RSW2
NCLD1
E
D
C
B
A
2
2
NCLD2
E
3 D
4 C
5 B
6
A
F 0 1
9 8 7
2
6
3
4
5
RSW2
(e) After turning the power OFF and ON, do nothing, and then turn the power OFF and ON again.
I - 11
3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters
3.3 Inputting the Parameters
3.3.1 When There is No Parameter File
If there is no parameter file (ALL.PRM), input the parameters with system setup or by manual input operation.
(1) Parameter input with system setup
With the system setup function, various setups necessary for the NC to initially startup are available by
simply entering the minimum required items. File formatting can be done at the same time.
Items required for setting with system setup are as follows.
● Display language, number of spindle connections, number of auxiliary axis connections
(for 700 Series only)
● Number of axes and command type for each part system
● Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each spindle.
Also, type of converter connected with each spindle drive.
● Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each servo axis.
Also, type of converter connected with each servo drive.
For details, refer to the section "system setup screen" in the instruction manual.
(2) Parameter input by manual input operation
(a) Select "MAINTENANCE (Mainte)" → "Mainte" → "Psswd input", and input "MPARA". Then, press
INPUT.
(b) Select the "Retn" menu
→ "Param", and set the various parameters such as the base
specifications parameters and axis specification parameters according to the machine configuration.
The minimum required parameters are listed below. Refer to "III Explanation of Parameters" for
details on each parameter.
(b-1) Set the number of NC axes, number of spindles and number of auxiliary axes, and then turn the
power ON again.
Type
Base system
parameter
Base common
parameters
#
1002 axisno
Item
Number of axes
1039 spinno
1044 auxno
Number of spindles
MR-J2-CT connections (for 700 Series only)
I - 12
3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters
(b-2) Set the minimum required parameters such as the axis name.
Type
Base axis specification
parameters
Base common
parameters
#
1013
1021
1022
1155
Item
axname
mcp_no
axname2
DOOR_m
1156 DOOR_s
Axis specification
parameters
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2007
2008
2102
2103
Zero point return
parameter
Servo parameters
2029 grspc
Spindle specification
parameters
Spindle parameters
2201
:
2456
3001
3005
3024
3025
3031
3105
3107
3109
13001
:
13240
rapid
clamp
smgst
G0tL
G0t1
G1tL
G1t1
skip_tL
skip_t1
SV001
:
SV256
slimt1
smax1
sout
enc_on
smcp_no
sut
ori_spd
zdetspd
SP1001
:
SP1240
Axis name
Drive unit I/F channel No. (Servo)
2nd axis name
Signal input device 1 for door interlock II common for part
systems
Signal input device 2 for door interlock II common for part
systems
Rapid traverse rate
Cutting federate for clamp function
Acceleration/deceleration modes
G0 time constant (linear)
G0 time constant (primary delay)
G1 time constant (linear)
G1 time constant (primary delay)
Skip time constant linear
Skip time constant primary delay acceleration/
deceleration by software 2nd stage
Grid interval
Servo parameters
Limit rotation speed
Maximum rotation speed
Spindle connection
Spindle encoder
Drive unit I/F channel No. (Spindle)
Speed reach range
Orientation command speed
Z phase detection speed
Spindle parameters
I - 13
3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters
(Setting example) For 3 NC axes (X, Y, Z) and 1 spindle axis (S)
Power supply
unit
NC
X
Drive unit rotary switch
No.
#1021 mcp_no
#3031 smcp_no
Y
Z
S
0
1
2
1001
1002
1003
P
3
1004
3rd axis for 1st channel
I - 14
3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters
3.3.2 When a Parameter File is Available
If a parameter file is available, input the parameters using the input/output function.
(Example) When files are available on a compact flash (CF) card
(1) Insert the CF card into the IC card interface on the front of the display unit.
Display unit
Adapter
CF card
(Note) 70 Series, which has the CF card interface,
does not need adapter.
Select "MAINTENANCE (EDIT)" → "Input/Output".
Confirm that device A is selected, and then select "Device select" → "Memory card".
Select "File name" → "From list" → "ALL.PRM", and then press INPUT.
Press "Area change", and select device B.
Select "Device select" → "Memory".
Select "Dir" → "Param".
* "ALL.PRM" is directly input as the file name.
(8) Press "Transfr A → B", and execute parameter input.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
I - 15
3. Setup Details
3.4 Formatting the File System
3.4 Formatting the File System
The base specification parameter "#1037 cmdtyp" must be set before the file system is formatted.
M System specifications : Set 1 or 2 according to the tool compensation type.
L System specifications : Select and set from 3 to 8 according to the G code list.
→ "Format".
(1) Select "MAINTENANCE (Mainte)" → "NEXT" menu
(2) The message "Format NC memory (Y/N)?" will appear. Press "Y".
(3) When the memory is correctly formatted, the message "Format complete" will appear.
(Note) When the parameter is set with system setup, the file system does not need to be formatted.
I - 16
3. Setup Details
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program
The ladder program can be created and input using the GX Developer installed in an external personal
computer or with the PLC onboard editing screen.
Refer to the "MITSUBISHI CNC 700 Series PLC Programming manual" (IB-1500036) for details.
The ladder program creation and input procedures are explained below with a flow chart.
(1) 700 Series
Start
Creation methods
Create with GX Developer
Create with PLC onboard
Writing method
Write to NC temporary
memory
Write with GX Developer
Write with PLC onboard
Save ladder program on
IC card
Connection method
Write to NC temporary
memory with Ethernet
communication
Open ladder program in IC
card with PLC onboard
Write to NC temporary
memory with RS-232-C
Write to NC temporary
memory
Write ladder program to NC ROM
End
I - 17
3. Setup Details
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program
(2) 70 Series
Start
Create with GX Developer
Write with GX Developer
Connection method
Write to NC temporary
memory with Ethernet
communication
Write to NC temporary
memory with RS-232-C
Write ladder program to NC ROM
End
I - 18
3. Setup Details
3.6 Credit System
3.6 Credit System
Encryption key and decryption code need to be set in order to validate credit system.
(1) Enter code key in the input/output
screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and
file name in [A:Dev].
(b) Set "Memory" in device section and
"/CRE" in directory section of
[B:Dev].
Contens in directory section/file name
section will be written over.
Directroy section
"Encryption Key"
File name section
"ENCKEY.DAT"
(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A→B].
(2) Enter cancel code in the input/output
screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and
file name in [A:Dev].
(b) Set "Memory" in device section and
"/RLS" in directory section of [B:Dev].
(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A→B].
I - 19
Contens in directory section/file name
section will be written over.
Directory section
"Decryption Code"
File name section
"PASSCODE.DAT"
3. Setup Details
3.6 Credit System
(3) Turn the power ON again.
Confirm that the expiration date (time limit)
is indicated in [DIAGN]-[Self diag] screen.
I - 20
3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal
It is necessary to customize the display part composition, the key input, and the communication condition
with NC, etc. to connect the handy terminal (HG1T-SB12UH-MK1346-L*).
Create the customized data by "NC Designer HT", and download to the handy terminal.
There are two inputting methods of the handy terminal's costomaized data.
(1) Connecting PC and the handy terminal, the data is input from "NC Designer HT".
(2) Connecting NC and the handy terminal, the data is input from CF (Compact Flash).
3.7.1 When Connecting with PC to Input
Project data (*.p1t) handled as customized data is created by customized data creation tool "NC Designer
HT" and download to the handy terminal.
(1) Start the customized data creating tool "NC Designer HT" and create the project data (*.p1t).
(2) Connect PC and the handy terminal with serial (RS-232C).
(3) Select [Online] - [Communication setting] from the menu of "NC Designer HT", confirm the
communication condition is as follows.
Port
: Set the PC side port.
Transmission :19200 [bps]
Data
: 8 [bit]
Stop bit
:1
Parity
: None
I - 21
3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal
(4) Select [Online] - [Download] from the menu of "NC Designer HT".
(5) The following dialog box is displayed, so press the "Yes".
(6) If the passward is set to the downloaded costomazed data, the "Input password" dialog box is displayed.
So input the passward, press the "OK".
(7) The costomaized data is downloaded to the handy terminal.
(8) When the download has been completed, the following dialog box is displayed.
I - 22
3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal
3.7.2 When Connecting with NC to Input
Download data (handy.cod) is created from project data (*.p1t) created by customized data creation tool "NC
Designer HT", and the customized data is downloaded to the handy terminal.
(1) Start the customized data creating tool "NC Designer HT" and create the project data (*.p1t).
(2) Select [File] - [Writing download data] from the menu of "NC Designer HT", and save the download data
named as "handy.cod" in the root directory of CF.
(3) Insert the CF created in the step (2) to the control unit.
(4) Set the passward which has been set to the handy terminal to "#11011 Handy TERM. PW."
(Note) When downloading the data for the first time, nothing is set to the parameter.
(5) NC power supply is turned OFF, and the handy terminal is connected with NC.
I - 23
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
There are two types for the position detection system, the relative position detection and the absolute position
detection. The methods of returning to the reference position include the dog-type reference position return
and the dogless-type reference position return.
This section describes the method to adjust the dog-type reference position return for the relative position
detection. Refer to the section "3.9 Absolute Position Detection System" for the method of adjusting the
absolute position detection.
3.8.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation
(1)
(2)
(3)
Progress state
Executes dog-type reference position
return.
Detects near-point dog while travelling.
Reaches the first grid point leaving
near-point dog.
->
->
->
Operation of axis
Starts moving in G28 rapid traverse rate.
Decelerates to a stop, then resumes moving in G28
approach speed.
Stops.
This grid point where the axis stops with (3) is called the electrical zero point. Normally, this electrical
zero point position is regarded as the reference position.
(1)
Reference position
G28 rapid traverse rate
Grid point
(2)
G28 approach speed
(3)
-
+
Grid space
Near-point dog
Grid amount
Limit switch for
near-point detection
Direction of reference position return
Electrical zero point
The first reference position return after turning the power ON is carried out with the dog-type reference
position return. The second and following returns are carried out with either the dog-type reference
position return or the high-speed reference position return, depending on the parameter.
High-speed reference position return is a function that directly positions to the reference position saved
in the memory without decelerating at the near-point dog.
(Note) If reference position return has not been executed even once after turning the power ON, the program
error (P430) will occur when movement commands other than G28 are executed.
I - 24
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
3.8.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures
Adjust the dog-type reference position return with the following steps.
Refer to the next page and followings for details of parameters and the calculation method for grid mask
amount.
Procedures
(1) Set the following parameter to "0".
・Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft).
・Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask).
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(3) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
(4) Calculate the grid mask amount with the calculation method for grid mask amount.
(5) Set the grid mask amount.
(6) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(7) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
If the grid amount value is approx. half of the grid space, the grid mask amount has been set
correctly.
If the value is not approx. half, repeat the procedure from step (1).
(8) Set the reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft).
(9) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(10) Set the machine coordinate system offset amount (#2037 G53ofs).
I - 25
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
Reference position return operation and parameter related drawing
#2025 G28rap
(G28 rapid traverse rate)
#2030 dir(-) (Reference position return direction)
Reference position
(Position returned to with the reference
position return command)
#2026 G28crp (G28 approach speed)
Basic machine coordinate
system zero point
Electrical zero point
-
+
Grid point
Grid
mask
Near-point dog
#2029 grspc
#2027
G28sft
#2028
grmask
(Grid space)
(Grid mask
amount)
Grid
amount
#2037 G53ofs
(Machine zero point offset)
The grid located at the near-point dog or
the grid mask area is not the electrical
zero point.
Grid amount is displayed on
the drive monitor screen.
(Reference
position shift
amount)
The first grid out of the grid
mask is the electrical zero
point.
Reference point
The reference position is positioned when the dog-type reference position return is executed. Note that
the other method is available for the absolute position detection.
The reference position is positioned with the manual reference position return or G28 command in the
machining program.
Using parameters, the reference position can be shifted from the electrical zero point position.
Grid point
The position detector has a Z-phase that generates one pulse per rotation. The 0-point position of this
Z-phase is the grid point. Thus, there is a grid point per rotation of the position detector, and the machine
has many grid points at a regular pitch.
The grid point can be set at intervals of grid space by setting the grid space (#2029 grspc). Thus, multiple
grid points can be set per detector rotation.
Grid amount
The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point
dog to the grid point (electrical zero point) while the dog-type reference position return.
The grid amount can be confirmed on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the distance from the grid mask OFF to the grid point.
I - 26
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
G28 rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap)
Set the feedrate for dog-type reference position return in manual operation and automatic operation.
The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied for the feedrate during high-speed reference position
return.
G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp)
Set the approach speed (creep speed) to the reference position after decelerating to a stop by the
near-dog detection. Since the creep speed is accelerated and decelerated in steps
(no-acceleration/deceleration), the mechanical shock, etc., could occur if the speed is too large.
The creep speed should be set between 100 and 300 mm/min., or within 500 mm/min. at the fastest.
Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft)
Set the shift amount to shift the reference position from the electrical zero point.
The shift direction can be set only in the reference position return direction.
If the reference position shift amount is "0", the grid point (electrical zero point) will be the reference
position.
Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)
The first grid point after the dog OFF is regarded as the electrical zero point.
If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero
point may differ because of the delay of the limit switch operation, at the grid point where the dog is
kicked OFF or the next grid point. This causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid
space.
The position that the dog is kicked OFF should be at the approximate center of the grid space.
Reference position
Dog
Electrical zero point shits
depending on the speed of
limit switch delay.
Adjustments can be made by changing the near-point dog or by setting the grid mask amount.
Setting the grid mask has the same effect as lengthening the near-point dog.
If the grid amount is approximate the grid space or 0, the grid point may be at the position of near-point
dog OFF, so set a grid mask.
Set the grid mask amount so that the grid amount is one-half of the grid space.
The grid mask amount can be set only in the reference position return direction.
The grid amount and grid space can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen.
Refer to "calculation method for the grid mask amount" on the next page for the grid mask amount
values.
I - 27
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
Calculation method for grid mask amount
When
Grid space
2
Grid mask amount = Grid amount −
< Grid amount
Grid space
2
Reference position (Position returned to with
the reference position return command)
Electrical zero point
-
+
Grid mask
Near-point dog
Grid mask
amount
Grid space
2
#2016
Grid amount
When
Grid space
2
> Grid amount
Grid mask amount = Grid amount +
This will not be the electrical
zero point due to the grid mask.
Reference position
before grid mask is set.
Grid space
2
Reference position after
grid mask is set.
+
Near-point dog
Grid mask
Grid space
2
Grid amount
Grid mask amount
#2016
Grid amount after
grid mask is set.
I - 28
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
Grid space (#2029 grspc)
Set the distance between grids.
The normal grid space is the ball screw pitch value (#2218 PIT) or the movement amount per motor
rotation set as a mm unit.
To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.
Calculation method for movement amount per motor rotation
(1) When linear feed mechanism is ball screw:
Movement amount per
motor rotation =
Motor side gear ratio
Machine side gear ratio
∗ Ball screw pitch
(2) When linear feed mechanism is rack & pinion:
Movement amount per
motor rotation =
Motor side gear ratio
∗ Number of pinion gear teeth ∗ Rack pitch
Machine side gear ratio
(3) For rotary axis:
Movement angle per
motor rotation=
N=
PC1
PC2
∗ PIT
Motor side gear ratio
Machine side gear ratio
N
PC1
PC2
PIT
∗ 360
= Movement amount per motor rotation
= Motor side gear ratio
= Machine side gear ratio
= Ball screw pitch
I - 29
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
Reference position return direction (#2030 dir (−))
Set the direction to move after the limit switch kicks the dog causing a deceleration stop during dog-type
reference position return. The direction is either positive "0" or negative "1".
Set "0" if the reference position is in the positive direction from the near-point dog.
Set "1" if the reference position is in the negative direction from the near-point dog.
(a) When reference position return direction is positive (+)
To move in
+ direction
To move in
- direction
(-)
(+)
Dog
Reference position
(b) When reference position return direction is negative (−)
To move in
- direction
To move in
+ direction
(-)
(+)
Dog
Reference position
Axis with no reference position (#2031 noref)
Set "0" for the axis to carry out dog-type reference position return and the axis for absolute position
detection.
Set "1" for the axis without carrying out reference position return during relative position detection.
Machine coordinate system offset (#2037 G53ofs)
Set the amount to shift the basic machine coordinate system zero point position from the reference
position.
When "0" is set, the reference position will be the position of the basic machine coordinate system zero
point.
In “G53ofs” parameter, set the position of the reference position looking from the basic machine
coordinate system zero point with the coordinates of basic machine coordinate system. By the reference
position return after the power is turned ON, the machine position will be set and the basic machine
coordinate system will be established.
Selection of grid display type (#1229 set01/bit6)
Select the grid display type on DRIVE MONITOR screen during dog-type reference position return.
0: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (including grid mask amount)
1: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (excluding grid mask amount)
I - 30
3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System
The absolute position detection function detects the machine movement amount while the power is OFF. This
allows automatic operation to be started without carrying out reference position return after the power is
turned ON. This function is extremely reliable as it carries out a mutual check of the feedback amount from
the detector, and checks the absolute position unique to the machine, etc.
To carry out the absolute position detection, the machine zero point must be determined, and the absolute
position must be established. Following two methods are available depending on how the absolute position is
established.
(1) Dogless-type absolute position detection
The absolute position is established by setting an arbitrary coordinate at an arbitrary position without
using the dog.
The absolute position basic point can be determined with the following three methods.
・Machine end stopper method
・Marked point alignment method
・Marked point alignment method II
For the machine end stopper method, the manual initialization and automatic initialization methods can
be used.
(2) Dog-type absolute position detection
The absolute position is established by executing dog-type reference position return.
The validity and method of the absolute position detection system can be selected with parameters for each
axis. Note that the servo drive unit and detector must have the specifications compatible for the absolute
position detection.
3.9.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation
Using the mechanical basic position (machine end or marked point) or the electrical basic position (grid
point immediately before the machine end or marked point) as the absolute position basic point, the
basic machine coordinate system zero point will be set at the position "ZERO" value far from the absolute
position basic point in the direction of reversed “ZERO” sign.
The reference position is set at the position "G53ofs" value far from the basic machine coordinate
system's zero point.
Absolute position
basic point
Basic machine
coordinate system
"ZERO"
"G53ofs"
Reference position
Dogless absolute position coordinate system
ZERO
: Coordinate position of absolute position basic point looking from basic machine
coordinate system zero point. (ABS. POSITION PARAMETER screen "#2 ZERO")
G53ofs : Coordinate position of reference position looking from basic machine coordinate
system zero point. (axis specifications parameter "#2037 G53ofs")
(Note) Select with the parameter "#2059 zerbas" whether to use the mechanical basic position or electrical
basic position as the absolute position basic point for the machine end stopper method.
I - 31
3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System
3.9.2 Starting up the Absolute Position Detection System
The zero point initialization should be carried out before the absolute position detection system is started
up. The coordinate system is established and operation is enabled by zero point initialization.
In this section, only the outline is introduced. (Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.)
Refer to the chapter "III Parameters" for the parameter details.
Operation when absolute position is not established
If the zero point has not been initialized even once or if the absolute position is lost, the following alarm
and non-initialized axis will be output. The coordinate system is unstable in this point, so the limitations
given in following table will be applied to each mode. Initialize the zero point and establish the coordinate
system. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.
Alarm:
Z70 (Absolute position data error)
Z71 (Absolute position encoder failure)
Operation in each mode
Operation
mode
Memory/MDI
JOG feed
Rapid traverse
Handle
Step
Zero point return
Absolute position detection method
Dogless-type
Dog-type
Movement command invalid
Movement command invalid
(Note 1) (Including G28)
(Note 1) (G28 is valid)
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Starting not possible (Note 2)
Starting possible
(Note 1) The program error (P430) will occur.
(Note 2) If the axis before the absolute position establish is started, the error "M01 OPERATION ERROR
0024" will occur.
(This mode is valid for an axis for which the absolute position has been established.)
Selecting the zero point initialization method
Select the zero point initialization method with the following parameter.
#2049 type
1: Dogless type Machine end stopper method
2: Dogless type Marked point alignment method
3: Dog type
4: Dogless type Marked point alignment method II
I - 32
3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System
Dogless-type zero point initialization
The zero point is initialized using the ABS POSITION SET screen and JOG or handle.
The operation methods differ according to the zero point initialization method. Refer to the Instruction
Manual for details.
(1) Machine end stopper method
The machine end stopper method includes the manual initialization and automatic initialization
methods.
(a) Manual initialization
With this method, the axis is pushed against the machine end stopper using handle or JOG.
(b) Automatic initialization
With this method, the axis is pushed against the machine end stopper, and can be used when the
"INIT-SET" mode is selected. This method has the following features compared to the manual
initialization method.
・The axis is pushed with the same conditions (feedrate, distance) each time, so inconsistencies in
the zero point position can be reduced.
・Part of the operations is automated to simplify the zero point initialization.
(2) Marked point alignment method
With this method, the axis is aligned to the machine's basic point (marked point) using handle or
JOG. The first grid point where the axis reaches upon retraction in the opposite direction after
alignment to the marked point is regarded as the basic point.
(3) Marked point alignment method II
With this method, the axis is aligned to the machine's basic point (marked point) using handle or
JOG. The machine’s basic position (marked point) is regarded as the basic point.
Dog-type zero point initialization
By executing dog-type reference position return with the manual reference position return mode or
automatic reference position return command (G28), the zero point will be initialized.
I - 33
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
Auxiliary axis absolute position initial setting and test run are carried out on the auxiliary axis test screen.
In this section, only the outline is introduced. Refer to the Instruction Manual and "MR-J2-CT Specifications
and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)" for details.
Also, refer to "13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter" in "III Parameter" for details on the auxiliary axis parameters.
I - 34
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
3.10.1 Preparations
Before the screen is switched to auxiliary axis test screen, prepare the following things.
(1) Parameter settings
Set the following parameters.
No.
Name
Setting details
50102 Cont2
Control
bit7 = 1 (Absolute position detection)
parameter 2 Turn the NC power ON again after this parameter is set.
(Note) The alarm "Z70 Abs data error" occurs after the power
ON again.
50120 ABS
Type
Absolute
position
detection
parameter
bit1/bit2 : Select the absolute position detection method.
Method
bit2
bit1
Details
Dog-type method
(Note)
1
Mechanical end
stopper method
0
0
Marked point
alignment method
1
0
This decides the reference
position by the near point dog.
This decides the basic point by
pushing an axis to machine end
etc. when the torque (current)
limit is set.
This decides the basic point by
aligning an axis to machine origin
point.
(Note) When bit1 is "1", dog-type method is selected regardless of
bit2 setting.
bit3 : Select the electrical basic position direction at marked point
alignment method.
Direction
Electrical basic position direction +
Electrical basic position direction -
(2) Release servo OFF/interlock for auxiliary axis.
(3) Turn J2CT operation adjustment mode valid signal (R9998/bit0) ON.
I - 35
bit3
0
1
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
3.10.2 Absolute Position Initial Setting
The coordinate system is established and operation is enabled when the absolute position is initially set.
Carry this out when absolute position is not established.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.
3.10.3 Test Operation
Disconnect the auxiliary axis control from PLC and startup in a forward/reverse run by menu operation to
carry out a test operation.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.
I - 36
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
3.10.4 PLC device
Devices that are used for auxiliary axis operation adjustment and control are as follows.
Refer to "MR-J2-CT Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)" for details.
(1) Operation adjustment mode
Device No.
bit
R9998 bit0
Abbrev.
Signal name
J2CT Operation adjustment mode valid (Common for all axes)
R9948 bit0
J2CT 1st axis in operation adjustment mode
bit1
J2CT 2nd axis in operation adjustment mode
bit2
J2CT 3rd axis in operation adjustment mode
bit3
J2CT 4th axis in operation adjustment mode
(2) Auxiliary axis control command
Signal name
Abbrev.
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
command 4
command 3
command 2
command 1
command L
command H
CTCM4
CTCM3
CTCM2
CTCM1
CTCML
CTCMH
J2CT
1st axis
R9950
R9951
R9952
R9953
R9954
R9955
J2CT
2nd axis
R9956
R9957
R9958
R9959
R9960
R9961
J2CT
3rd axis
R9962
R9963
R9964
R9965
R9966
R9967
J2CT
4th axis
R9968
R9969
R9970
R9971
R9972
R9973
(a) CTCM1 (J2CT Control command 1)
bit
0 *SVF Servo OFF
(b) CTCM2 (J2CT Control command 2)
Details
0
bit
ST
Details
Operation start
1 QEMG PLC emergency stop
1 DIR
2 *PRT1 Data protect
2 STS Arbitrary point feed command valid
3 MRST MC reset
3 PUS Stopper positioning command valid
4
*IT+
Interlock +
4 MP1 Incremental feed magnification 1
5
*IT-
Interlock -
5 MP2 Incremental feed magnification 2
6 RDF
Ready OFF
6 PR1 Operation parameter selection1
7
H
Rotation direction
Handle mode
7 PR2 Operation parameter selection 2
8 AUT
Automatic operation mode
8
9 MAN
Manual operation mode
9
A
Jog mode
A
Reference position mode
B
J
B ZRN
C
C
D AZS
Zero point initialization mode
D
E ZST
Basic position set
E
F
Incremental mode
F
S
I - 37
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
(c) CTCM3 (J2CT Control command 3)
(b) CTCM4 (J2CT Control command 4)
bit
0 ST1
Details
Station selection 1
bit
Details
0 OVR1 Speed override 1
1
ST2
Station selection 2
1 OVR2 Speed override 2
2
ST4
Station selection 4
2 OVR4 Speed override 4
3
ST8
Station selection 8
3 OVR8 Speed override 8
4 ST16
Station selection 16
4 OVR16 Speed override 16
5 ST32
Station selection 32
5 OVR32 Speed override 32
6 ST64
Station selection 64
6 OVR64 Speed override 64
7 ST128 Station selection 128
7 OVR
8 ST256 Station selection 256
8
9
9
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
Speed override valid
(e) CTCML, CTCMH (J2CT Control command L, control command H)
CTCML Command position during arbitrary point feed command valid (32bit)
CTCMH
I - 38
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
(3) Auxiliary axis status
Signal name
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
J2CT
Status 4
Status 3
Status 2
Status 1
Abbrev.
CTST4
CTST3
CTST2
Machine position
CTST1
J2CT
1st axis
R9900
R9901
R9902
R9903
R9904,
R9905
J2CT
2nd axis
R9906
R9907
R9908
R9909
R9910,
R9911
J2CT
3rd axis
R9912
R9913
R9914
R9915
R9916,
R9917
J2CT
4th axis
R9918
R9919
R9920
R9921
R9922,
R9923
(a) CTST1 (J2CT Status 1)
(b) CTST2 (J2CT Status 2)
bit
0 RDY
Servo ready
bit
Details
0 AUTO In automatic operation mode
1
INP
Details
In-position
1 MANO In manual operation mode
2 SMZ
Smoothing zero
2
3
Axis selection output
3 ARNN In reference position return
4 MVP
In axis movement +
4 ZRNO In reference position return mode
5 MVN
In axis movement -
5 DOG
6 TLQ
In torque limit
6 AZSO In zero point initialization mode
7
ADJ
Adjusting machine
7
SO
In incremental mode
8
ZP
Reference position reached
8
AL1
Alarm 1
9 RST
In reset
9
AL2
Alarm 2
A
HO
In handle mode
A
AL4
Alarm 4
B
MA
Controller preparation complete
B BAT
Battery voltage drop
C
SA
Servo preparation complete
C ABS
Absolute position power shutoff
movement over
D ZSN
Absolute position loss
E ZSF
Initial setting completed
F ZSE
Initial setting error completed
AX1
D JSTA Automatic set position reached
E
JST
Set position reached
F NEAR Near set position
I - 39
JO
In jog mode
Near-point dog
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation
(c) CTST3 (Status 3)
(d) CTST4 (J2CT Status 4)
0
bit
STO1
Details
Station position 1
bit
Details
0 PSW1 Position switch 1
1
STO2
Station position 2
1 PSW2 Position switch 2
2
STO4
Station position 4
2 PSW3 Position switch 3
3
STO8
Station position 8
3 PSW4 Position switch 4
4 STO16
Station position 16
4 PSW5 Position switch 5
5 STO32
Station position 32
5 PSW6 Position switch 6
6 STO64
Station position 64
6 PSW7 Position switch 7
7 STO128 Station position 128
7 PSW8 Position switch 8
8 STO256 Station position 256
8 PMV
In positioning operation
9
9
PFN
Positioning complete
A
A
PSI
In stopper
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
3.10.5 Notes
(1) Do not turn "Auto operation "start" command signal (ST) " ON during Ope. test mode.
(2) NC does not retain auxiliary axis parameters. Parameters are retained at the auxiliary axis side.
(3) Auxiliary axis emergency stop has to be commanded by PLC interface.
(4) NC axis handle movement is invalid during auxiliary axis handle mode.
(5) If the screen shifts other screen, the auxiliary axis mode (Ope. test mode, Absolute posn set) is held.
Thus, the axis does not stop even if the axis is rotating.
I - 40
3. Setup Details
3.11 Data Sampling
3.11 Data Sampling
NC data sampling function allows a sampling of NC internal data (speed output from NC to drive unit,
feedback data from drive unit, etc.) so that the data is output as text data.
Item
Sampling cycle
Number of sampled axes
Number of sampled
channels
Sampling data size
Specifications
700 Series
1.7ms x setting value
70 Series (type A)
1.7ms x setting value
70 Series (type B)
3.5ms x setting value
700 Series
Servo axis : 1 to 16 axes
Spindle
: 1 to 4 axes
70 Series
Servo axis : 1 to 7 axes
Spindle
: 1 to 3 axes
1 to 8 points
700 Series
Maximum 1,310,720 points
70 Series
Maximum 655,360 points
(Note 1) This is the entire data size. The data size per channel will
decrease when the number of sampled channels
increases.
(Note 2) If the open DRAM memory is insufficient, the maximum
data size will decrease.
● Parameter output is not executed for the data set with this function.
● The state returns to "Sampling stop" when the power is turned ON.
Refer to the "diagnosis data collection setting screen" section in the Instruction Manual for detailed
operations.
3.12 Data backup
With this function, system data (program, parameter, R register, etc.), ladder (user PLC program), APLC data
can be backed up/restored.
Refer to the "all backup screen" section in the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.
I - 41
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Install the following data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER.
(1) Language data
(2) Custom data
• Custom screen
• PLC alarm guidance
(3) Custom startup screen
Use CF card to carry out the installation.
3.13.1 Compatible Data and CF Card Folder Configuration
(1) Compatible data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Type
Data
Details
Language data
lang0_xxx.bin
Language data (for FROM)
lang1_xxx.bin
Custom data
Custom startup
screen
Language data
(for expansion FROM)
Custom screen
module
config.ini
Remarks
Language
identification string
is shown instead of
xxx.
(ex. jpn: Japanese,
fra: french)
Interpreter data and
object data
A setting file to register custom
screen.
customdef.ini
A setting file to register custom
screen for the menus and
function buttons on the default
screen.
customload.txt
A setting file to register name
and load order of the object
data.
PLC alarm
HTML files and JPEG files to
guidance data
be displayed in the PLC alarm
guidance.
startupscreen.bmp A bitmap file to be displayed on Color: 256 Colors
the initial screen when power is
(8 bit)
turned ON.
Size: 640 * 440
I - 42
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
(2) CF card folder configuration
Compatible data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER is stored in CF card with the folder configuration as
follows.
CF Card
Lang (language data folder)
A0 (folder labeled by version)
lang0_jpn.bin (Japanese language data for FROM)
lang1_jpn.bin (Japanese language data for expansion FROM)
:
:
A1 (folder labeled by version)
custom (custom data folder)
PLCAlarm (PLC alarm guidance folder)
PLCAlarm_0001_jpn.htm (PLC alarm guidance data)
:
:
Custom screen modules
Setting files
startupscreen.bmp (bitmap data for custom startup screen)
Installer (installer folder)
installer.o (installer)
I - 43
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
3.13.2 Operation Method
Starting up M70 SETUP INSTALLER
(1) Insert the CF card for M70 SETUP
INSTALLER into the front panel CF.
(2) Turn the power ON while pressing the
menu
.
(Note) Keep pressing the menu
Startup screen appears. A bleep sounds
after a while, and then the mode selection
screen for M70 SETUP INSTALLER
appears.
until a bleep sounds.
I - 44
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Installing language data
(1) Press the menu key [Lang Pack] on the
mode selection screen.
Language data installation screen appears.
The language selection menu is displayed.
The language currently installed is shown in
the “Installed Language” field.
• The next language selection menu is displayed by pressing
(2) Select the language to install with the
menu key.
menu (Next menu >>).
The language selected is shown in the “Now
Selected Language” field.
• To change the language already selected, press the menu key [Clear] and select again.
• The 2nd language can be selected when the expansion FROM is provided. (Cursor moves to
the “2nd” field after the 1st language has been selected.)
(3) Press the menu key [Install].
A confirmation message appears.
(4) Press the menu key [Yes].
A message appears after the installation has
completed.
• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the language selection menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of language data.
(Note) Pressing the menu
(<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.
I - 45
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Installing custom data
(1) Press the menu key [Custom Data] on
the mode selection screen.
Custom data installation screen appears.
(2) Press the menu key [Install].
A confirmation message appears.
(3) Press the menu key [Yes].
A message appears after the installation has
completed.
• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of custom data.
Uninstalling custom data
(1) Press the menu key [Uninst] on the
custom data installation screen.
A confirmation message appears.
(2) Press the menu key [Yes].
A message appears after the installation has
completed.
• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation of custom data.
(Note) Pressing the menu
(<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.
I - 46
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Installing custom startup screen
(1) Press the menu key [Custom Startup] on
the initial screen of M70 SETUP
INSTALLER.
Custom Startup Screen Install screen
appears.
(2) Press the menu key [Install].
A confirmation message appears.
(3) Press the menu key [Yes].
A message appears after the installation has
completed.
• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of custom startup screen.
I - 47
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
Uninstalling custom startup screen
(1) Press the menu key [Uninst] on the
Custom Startup Screen Install screen.
A confirmation message appears.
(2) Press the menu key [Yes].
A message appears after the installation has
completed.
• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation of custom startup screen.
(Note) Pressing the menu
(<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.
I - 48
3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER
3.13.3 List of Error Messages
Message
The 1st language is not selected.
The same language is selected.
Details
The first language has not been selected at the
installation of language pack.
Specify the first language again.
The same language has been selected as both first and
second language at the installation of language pack.
Specify the language again.
The selected language does not exist.(1st)
The language data, selected as the 1st language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist .
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the
CF card, and that the version of the data is appropriate.
The selected language does not exist.(2nd)
The language data, selected as the 2nd language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist.
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the
CF card, and that the version of the data is appropriate.
The custom data does not exist.
The “custom” folder does not exist in the CF card.
Check the stored data in the CF card.
The file startupscreen.bmp" does not exist."
The "startupscreen.bmp" file does not exist in the CF
card.
Check the stored data in the CF card.
I - 49
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
4.1.1 Control unit battery
All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is
turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.
Battery
Q6BAT BKO-C10811H03 (SANYO CR17335SE-R with
Mitsubishi specifications)
Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if
the temperature is high.))
Battery life
Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
(Note) Replace the battery when the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0001" appears on the NC screen.
The internal data could be damaged if the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0003" appears.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the battery with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected
within 30 minutes, the data being backed up might be destroyed.)
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all
OFF.
(3) Open the front cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the front cover toward front.
(4) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector.
(5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
(6) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(7) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the
connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.
(8) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.
(9) Close the door of the electric cabinet.
Front cover
BAT connector
Battery holder
Connector connected
to the battery
Battery
I - 50
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
[Precautions for handling battery]
(1) Always replace the battery with the same type.
(2) Do not disassemble the battery.
(3) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(4) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(5) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
(6) Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.
!
CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to the local laws.
I - 51
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
4.1.2 Cooling fan for control unit
Type : 109P0412H731
Life : 60,000 hours (When the rotary speed decreased 30% less than the initial values)
Cooling fan (for control unit) life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 60°C
environment. Keep in mind that the value above is not a guaranteed value.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the cooling fan with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Remove the fan cover on the top center of the control unit. (Remove the fan cover by pushing up the
front tab.)
(4) Pull out the cooling fan from the control unit cooling fan housing.
(5) Pull the connector connected to the cooling fan out from the control unit PCB.
(6) Replace the cooling fan with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new cooling fan into
the control unit PCB.
(7) Put the cooling fan into the control section cooling fan housing. (Be sure the label side is on the top.)
(8) Arrange the cooling fan wiring neatly in the control unit cooling fan housing.
(9) Install the fan cover. (First install the back tabs in the control unit. Then install the front tabs in the
control unit.)
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Front tab
Fan cover
Cooling fan
Back
tab
!
Control unit
CAUTION
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Collect and dispose of the spent cooling fan according to the local laws.
I - 52
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
4.1.3 Cooling fan for display unit (XP terminal)
Type : MMF-06D24DS-RP3
Life : 50,000 hours (When the rotary speed decreased 20% less than the initial values)
Cooling fan (for display unit) life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 60°C
environment. Keep in mind that the value above is not a guaranteed value.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the cooling fan for display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Remove the fan cover of cooling fan housing (2 parts) that is installed to PCB on back of display unit.
(Remove the fan cover by pushing up the front tab.)
(4) Pull out the cooling fan from the control unit cooling fan housing.
(5) Pull the connector connected to the cooling fan out from the control unit PCB.
(6) Replace the cooling fan with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new cooling fan into
the control unit PCB.
(7) Put the cooling fan into the control section cooling fan housing. (Be sure the label side is on the top.)
(8) Arrange the cooling fan wiring neatly in the control unit cooling fan housing.
(9) Install the fan cover.
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Tab
Fan cover
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
housing
!
CAUTION
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Collect and dispose of the spent cooling fan according to the local laws.
I - 53
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
4.1.4 Backlight
● 8.4-type
LCD panel
Inverter
Backlight for replacement
Backlight life
● 10.4-type
LCD panel
Inverter
Backlight for replacement
Backlight life
NL6448BC26-01 (NEC)
65PWB31 (NEC)
84LHS01 (NEC)
30,000 hours (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial
value.)
NL6448BC33-53, NL6448BC33-54 (NEC)
104PW161 (NEC)
104LHS35 (NEC)
50,000 hours (ambient temperature 25°C) (Duration of time until
luminance drops to 50% of the initial value.)
Backlight life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25°C environment. Keep in mind that the
value above is not a guaranteed value.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Pull the connector connected to the backlight out from the backlight power supply PCB. (For 8.4 inch,
one each for top and bottom; for 10.4 inch, one for top.)
(4) Disconnect the menu key connector.
(5) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(6) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on
the front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(7) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in
until the locking claws click.)
(8) Mount the escutcheon with 2 fixing screws (1 each for the upper and lower sections of the left end).
(9) Connect the backlight connection connector to the backlight power supply PCB.
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
(11) Connect the menu key connector.
[Precautions for using LCD panel]
(1) Depending on the ambient temperature, response time, brightness and color may differ.
(2) Depending on the display contents, nonuniformity of brightness, flickers and streaks may be observed
on LCD display.
(3) Because cold cathod-tube is used for LCD display, optical characteristics (nonuniformity of brightness
and display) change according to the operation time. (Especially in low temperature.)
(4) Screen display color may be differed depending on the angle to view it.
I - 54
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
!
CAUTION
Do not replace the backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose the replaced backlight according to the local laws.
Do not touch the backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric
shocks due to high voltage.
Do not touch the backlight while the LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
Do not apply impact or pressure on the LCD panel or backlight. Failure to observe this could result in
breakage as they are made of glass.
[8.4-type display unit]
Escutcheon
Menu key connector
LCD panel
Backlight
Escutcheon
Menu key connector
I - 55
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts
[10.4-type display unit]
Control unit fittings
Escutcheon
Backlight
Menu key connector
LCD panel
Escutcheon
Menu key connector
I - 56
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
4.2 Unit
4.2.1 Control Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the control unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the control unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit, and remove the control unit from the control unit installation
fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove one upper fixing screw while
supporting the control unit with a hand. Then lift the control unit upward and take it off. The two lower
fixing screws do not need to be removed.)
(5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control unit installation fitting with the fixing
screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (3)
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 57
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
(Note) Wire the control unit optical cable as shown below.
Control unit
Optical communication cable
(section without reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 25mm or more
Optical communication cable
(section with reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 50mm or more
Recommended clamp material
CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES
I - 58
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
4.2.2 Display Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the display unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the display unit (at 4 places) and take the display unit off.
(5) Replace with a new display unit, and fix the display unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the display unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (4)
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the display unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 59
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
4.2.3 Keyboard unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the keyboard unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the keyboard unit and take the keyboard unit off.
(5) Replace with a new keyboard unit, and fix the keyboard unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the keyboard unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 60
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
[8.4-type Keyboard unit]
Fixing screws (4)
[10.4-type Keyboard unit]
Fixing screws (4)
I - 61
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
4.2.4 DX Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the DX unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the DX unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the DX unit and take the DX unit off.
(5) Replace with a new DX unit, and fix the DX unit onto the control unit with the fixing screws.
(Fix so that the DX unit connector slot is placed at the lower part.)
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the DX unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (4)
Connector slot
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the DX unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 62
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit
4.2.5 Hard Disk Unit
Hard disk unit life: 5 years or 20,000 hours of power ON, whichever comes first.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the hard disk unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all F140 cables connected to the hard disk in the hard disk unit.
(Always disconnect F140 cables holding the front and back of the hard disk securely with fingers.)
(4) Remove the screws fixing the hard disk unit (2 at upper part, 1 at lower part) and take the hard disk unit
off.
(5) Replace with a new hard disk unit, and fix the hard disk unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect F140 cables to the hard disk in the hard disk unit.
(Always connect F140 cables in the correct connector direction fixing the bottom of the hard disk with
fingers.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (2)
(Note) When mounting the hard disk unit, face the cable lead-out side directly straight up, and mount within
±15°.
15°
!
15°
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the hard disk unit while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced hard disk unit according to the local laws.
Hard disk unit is a precision device, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on it.
I - 63
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.3 Compact Flash
4.3 Compact Flash
4.3.1 Control Unit Compact Flash
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the compact flash with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all
OFF.
(3) Open the front cover of the control unit.
(4) Press the eject lever twice to eject the compact flash.
(5) Insert the new compact flash. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)
(6) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.
(7) Close the electric cabinet door.
Front
cover
Eject lever
Compact flash slot
Compact flash
(Note 1) There may be a compatibility problem with commercially available compact flash memory,
resulting in mulfunction.
I - 64
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.4 IC Card
4.4 IC card
4.4.1 Front IC Card
[Card insertion procedures]
(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Insert the IC card. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)
[Card ejecting procedures]
(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Press the eject lever twice to eject the IC card.
Eject lever
IC card
(Note 1) Do not eject an IC card during the data reading/writing.
(Note 2) There may be a compatibility problem between devices a commercially available IC card, so
illegal operations may occur.
I - 65
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts
5.1.1 Control unit battery
All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is
turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.
Battery
Q6BAT BKO-C10811H03 (SANYO CR17335SE-R with
Mitsubishi specifications)
Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if
the temperature is high.))
Battery life
Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
(Note) Replace the battery when the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0001" appears on the NC screen.
The internal data could be damaged if the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0003" appears.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the battery with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected
within 30 minutes, the data being backed up might be destroyed.)
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all OFF.
(3) Open the battery cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the battery cover toward front.
(4) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector.
(5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
(6) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(7) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the
connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.
(8) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.
Battery cover
Battery
Battery holder
BAT connector
I - 66
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts
[Precautions for handling battery]
(1) Always replace the battery with the same type.
(2) Do not disassemble the battery.
(3) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(4) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(5) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
(6) Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.
!
CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to the local laws.
I - 67
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts
5.1.2 Backlight
● 8.4-type
Inverter
Backlight for replacement
Backlight life
● 10.4-type
Inverter
Backlight for replacement
Backlight life
65PWB31
84LHS01
50,000 hours (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial
value.)
104PW161
104LHS35
50,000 hours (ambient temperature 25°C) (Duration of time until
luminance drops to 50% of the initial value.)
Backlight life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25°C environment. Keep in mind that the
value above is not a guaranteed value.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Pull the connector connected to the backlight out from the backlight inverter (one for top).
(3) Disconnect the MENU connector.
(4) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(5) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on
the front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(6) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in
until the locking claws click.)
(7) Mount the escutcheon with 4 fixing screws (1 each for 4 sections).
(8) Connect the backlight connection connector to the backlight inverter.
(9) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
(10) Connect the MENU connector.
[Precautions for using LCD panel]
(1) Depending on the ambient temperature, response time, brightness and color may differ.
(2) Depending on the display contents, nonuniformity of brightness, flickers and streaks may be observed
on LCD display.
(3) Because cold cathod-tube is used for LCD display, optical characteristics (nonuniformity of brightness
and display) change according to the operation time. (Especially in low temperature.)
(4) Screen display color may be differed depending on the angle to view it.
I - 68
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts
!
CAUTION
Do not replace the backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose the replaced backlight according to the local laws.
Do not touch the backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric
shocks due to high voltage.
Do not touch the backlight while the LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
Do not apply impact or pressure on the LCD panel or backlight. Failure to observe this could result in
breakage as they are made of glass.
[8.4-type/10.4-type display unit]
Backlight connector
MENU connector
Backlight inverter
Backlight
I - 69
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
5.2 Unit
5.2.1 Control Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the control unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Disconnect all the external cables connected to the control unit.
(3) Remove all the internal cables connected to the control unit. (MENU/INV/LCD connector)
(Note) Open the battery cover to remove LCD connector.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit, and remove the control unit from the control unit installation
fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove one upper fixing screw while
supporting the control unit with a hand. Then lift the control unit upward and take it off. The two lower
fixing screws do not need to be removed.)
(5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control unit installation fitting with the fixing
screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
INV connector
LCD connector
Battery cover
MENU connector
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 70
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
(Note) Wire the control unit optical cable as shown below.
Control unit
Recommended clamp material
CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES
Optical communication cable
(section without reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 30mm or more
I - 71
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
5.2.2 Display Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the display unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the display unit (at 4 places) and take the display unit off.
(5) Replace with a new display unit, and fix the display unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the display unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (4)
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the display unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 72
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
5.2.3 Keyboard unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the keyboard unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the keyboard unit and take the keyboard unit off.
(5) Replace with a new keyboard unit, and fix the keyboard unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the keyboard unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 73
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
[8.4-type Keyboard unit]
Fixing screws (4)
[10.4-type Keyboard unit]
Fixing screws (4)
I - 74
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit
5.2.4 DX Unit
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the DX unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the DX unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the DX unit and take the DX unit off.
(5) Replace with a new DX unit, and fix the DX unit onto the control unit with the fixing screws.
(Fix so that the NCKB connector slot is placed at the lower part.)
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the DX unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
NCKB cable can be easily inserted by fitting the Δ1st pin position with the connector.
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
Fixing screws (4)
NCKB connector
!
CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the DX unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
I - 75
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.3 Compact Flash
5.3 Compact Flash
5.3.1 Front Compact Flash
[Card insertion procedures]
(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Insert the compact flash. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)
[Card ejecting procedures]
(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Press the eject lever twice to eject the compact flash.
Compact flash
Eject lever
(Note 1) Do not eject a compact flash during the data reading/writing.
(Note 2) There may be a compatibility problem with non-recommended compact flashes, which may lead
illegal operations.
I - 76
6. Cable
6. Cable
If the cable is replaced without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be
damaged, and risks could be imposed.
Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.
(a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the
arrow, and pull the connector off.
(1) Press
(1) Press
Y
(2) Pull
(2) Pull
(1) Press
View from above
(1) Press
(2) Pull
(2) Pull
!
CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
I - 77
6. Cable
(b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull
the connector off.
(1) Open
(2) Pull
(c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull
the connector off.
(1) Hold with thumb and forefinger.
(2) Pull
(d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off.
(1) Loosen
(1) Loosen
(2) Pull
!
(2) Pull
CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
I - 78
6. Cable
(e) For the optical cable connector, pull off while holding down the lock button.
(1) Press
(2) Pull
(f) For the Ethernet connector, pull off while holding down the locked latch.
(1) Press
(2) Pull
!
CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
I - 79
II
Explanation of Alarms
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
MUU Message {{{{
Error No.
Message
Class
(1) Class: M01 Operation error
Alarms occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and those by machine
trouble are displayed.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0001
Dog overrun
When returning to the reference position‚ the
near-point detection limit switch did not stop
over the dog‚ but overran the dog.
•
•
Increase the length of the near-point dog.
Reduce the reference position return speed.
0002
Some ax does not pass Z phase
One of the axes did not pass the Z-phase
during the initial reference position return after
the power was turned ON.
•
Move the detector one rotation or more in the
opposite direction of the reference position‚ and
repeat reference position return.
0003
R-pnt direction illegal
When manually returning to the reference
position‚ the return direction differs from the
axis movement direction selected with the AXIS
SELECTION key.
•
The selection of the AXIS SELECTION key's
+/- direction is incorrect. The error is canceled
by feeding the axis in the correct direction.
0004
External interlock axis exists
The external interlock function has activated
(the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes
has entered the interlock state.
•
As the interlock function has activated‚ release
it before resuming operation.
Check the sequence on the machine side.
Check for broken wires in the interlock signal
line.
The servo OFF function is valid‚ so release it
first.
An axis that can be removed has been issued‚
so perform the correct operations.
The command is issued in the same direction
as the direction where manual skip turned ON‚
so perform the correct operations.
During the manual/automatic simultaneous
mode‚ the axis commanded in the automatic
mode became the manual operation axis. Turn
OFF the manual/automatic valid signal for the
commanded axis.
Turn ON the power again‚ and perform
absolute position initialization.
Turn OFF the tool length measurement 1 signal
to start the program by the manual speed
command.
0005
Internal interlock axis exists
The internal interlock state has been entered.
The absolute position detector axis has been
removed.
A command for the manual/automatic
simultaneous valid axis was issued from the
automatic mode.
The manual speed command was issued while
the tool length measurement 1 signal is ON.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0006
H/W stroke end axis exists
The stroke end function has activated (the input
signal is "OFF") and one of the axes is in the
stroke end status.
II - 1
•
•
•
Move the machine manually.
Check for broken wires in the stroke end signal
wire.
Check for trouble in the limit switch.
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0007
S/W stroke end axis exists
The stored stroke limit I‚ II‚ IIB or IB function
has activated.
•
•
Move it manually.
If the stored stroke limit in the parameter is
incorrectly set‚ correct it.
0008
Chuck/tailstock stroke end ax
The chuck/tail-stock barrier function turned ON‚
and an axis entered the stroke end state.
•
Reset the alarm with reset‚ and move the
machine in the reverse direction.
0009
Ref point return No. invalid
Return to the No. 2 reference position was
performed before return to the No. 1 reference
position was completed.
•
Execute No. 1 reference position return.
0019
• Turn the tool measurement mode signal input
Sensor signal illegal ON
OFF, and move the axis in a safe direction.
The sensor signal was already ON when the
• The operation alarm will turn OFF even when
tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was
the sensor signal is turned OFF.
validated.
The sensor signal turned ON when there was (Note) When the tool measurement mode signal
no axis movement after the tool measurement
input is turned OFF, the axis can be
mode (TLM) signal was validated.
moved in either direction. Pay attention to
The sensor signal turned ON at a position
the movement direction.
within 100μm from the final entry start position.
• Execute reference position return
Ref point retract invalid
Return to the reference position was performed
before the coordinates had not been
established.
0020
0021
Tool ofs invld after R-pnt
Reference position return was performed
during tool retract return, and therefore the tool
compensation amount became invalid after
reference position return was completed.
•
•
•
The error is cleared if the operation mode is
changed to other than reference position return
before the axis performs reference position
return.
The error is cleared when reference position
return is completed.
The error is cleared if reset 1 is input or the
emergency stop button is pushed.
0024
R-pnt ret invld at abs pos alm
A zero point return signal was input during an
absolute position detection alarm.
•
Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚
and then perform zero point return.
0025
R-pnt ret invld at zero pt ini
A zero point return signal was input during zero
point initialization of the absolute position
detection system.
•
Complete zero point initialization‚ and then
perform zero point return.
0030
Now skip on
The skip signal remains input when the skip
return operation changed to the measurement
operation.
•
Increase the skip return amount.
0031
No skip
Even though 1st skip was to the correct
position, the 2nd skip could not be found.
•
Check whether the measurement target has
moved.
0050
Chopping axis R-pnt incomplete
The chopping axis has not completed zero
point return before entering the chopping
mode.
All axes interlock will be applied.
•
Reset or turn the chopping signal OFF, and
then carry out zero point return.
II - 2
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0051
Synchronous error excessive
The synchronization error of the master and
slave axes exceeded the allowable value under
synchronous control.
A deviation exceeding the synchronization error
limit value was found with the synchronization
deviation detection.
•
•
•
•
Select the correction mode and move one of
the axes in the direction in which the errors are
reduced.
Increase the allowable value or reset it to 0
(check disabled).
When using simple C-axis synchronous
control, set the contents of the R435 register to
0.
Check the parameter (#2024 synerr).
0053
No spindle select signal
Synchronous tapping command was issued
when the spindle select signals (SWS) for all
spindles were OFF in the multiple-spindle
control II.
•
Turn ON the spindle select signal (SWS)
responding to the tapping spindle before
performing the synchronous tapping command.
0054
No spindle serial connection
Synchronous tapping command was issued
when the spindle that the spindle select signal
(SWS) was ON was not serially connected in
the multiple-spindle control II.
•
Make sure the spindle select signal (SWS) for
the responding spindle is ON.
When issuing a command, consider the
machine construction.
0055
Spindle fwd/rvs run para err
Asynchronous tapping command was issued
when M code of the spindle frd/rvs run
command set by the parameter "#3028
sprcmm" was one of the followings in the
multiple-spindle control II.
• One of M0, M1, M2, M30, M98, M99, M198
• M code No. that commands macro interrupt
signal valid/invalid
•
Change the value of the parameter #3028
sprcmm.
0056
Tap pitch/thread number error
The command of the pitch/thread number is not
correct in the synchronous tapping command of
the multiple-spindle control II.
The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation
speed.
Thread number is too large for the spindle
rotation speed.
•
Check the pitch/thread number and rotation
speed of the tapping spindle.
0060
Handle ratio too large
Handle ratio is too large for the rapid traverse
rate (or external deceleration speed when
external deceleration is valid).
• Set a smaller ratio.
0065
R-pos offset value illegal
• Set the reference position offset value (#2034
rfpofs) to 0, then turn the power ON again to
At the start of reference position initial setting,
setting of reference position offset value (#2034 perform reference position initial setting.
rfpofs) is other than 0.
0066
R-pos scan distance exceeded
Reference position could not be established
within the maximum scan distance.
II - 3
•
• Check the scale to see if it has dirt or damage.
• Check if the servo drive unit supports this
function.
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
0101
Details
Remedy
•
No operation mode
•
•
Check for a broken wire in the input mode
signal wire.
Check for trouble in the mode selector switch.
Check the sequence program.
•
0102
Cutting override zero
The "cutting feed override" switch on the
machine operation panel is set to zero.
The override was set to "0" during a single
block stop.
Set the "cutting feed override" switch to a value
other than zero to clear the error.
• When the "cutting feed override" switch is set to
a value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit
in the signal wire.
• Check the sequence program.
0103
External feed rate zero
"The manual feed speed" switch on the
machine operation panel is set to zero when
the machine is in the jog mode or automatic dry
run mode.
The "Manual feedrate B speed" is set to zero
during the jog mode when manual feedrate B is
valid.
The "each axis manual feedrate B speed" is set
to zero during the jog mode when each axis
manual feedrate B is valid.
•
•
•
Set "the manual feed speed" switch to a value
other than zero to release the error.
If "the manual feed speed" switch is set to a
value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit
in the signal wire.
Check the sequence program.
0104
F 1-digit feed rate zero
The F1-digit feedrate is set to zero when the
F1-digit feed command is being executed.
•
Set the F1-digit feedrate on the setup
parameter screen.
0105
Spindle stop
The spindle stopped during the synchronous
feed command.
•
•
•
Rotate the spindle.
If the workpiece is not being cut‚ start dry run.
Check for a broken wire in the spindle encoder
cable.
Check the connections for the spindle encoder
connectors.
Check the spindle encoder pulse.
Reconsider the program. (Command, address)
•
•
•
0106
Handle feed ax No. illegal
An axis not found in the specifications was
designated for handle feed or the handle feed
axis was not selected.
•
•
•
Check for broken wires in the handle feed axis
selection signal wire.
Check the sequence program.
Check the No. of axes listed in the
specifications.
0107
Spindle rotation speed over
The spindle rotation speed exceeded the axis
clamp speed during the thread cutting
command.
•
Lower the commanded spindle rotation speed.
0108
Fixed pnt mode feed ax illegal
An axis not found in the specifications was
designated for the fixed point mode feed or the
fixed point mode feedrate is illegal.
•
•
Check for broken wires in the fixed mode feed
axis selection signal wire and fixed point mode
feedrate wire.
Check the fixed point mode feed specifications.
0109
Block start interlock
An interlock signal that locks the start of the
block has been input.
•
Check the sequence program.
0110
Cutting block start interlock
An interlock signal that locks the start of the
cutting block has been input.
•
Check the sequence program.
II - 4
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0111
Restart switch ON
The restart switch was turned ON before the
restart search was completed, and the manual
mode was selected.
•
•
Search the block to be restarted.
Turn OFF the restart switch.
0112
Program check mode
The automatic start button was pressed during
program check or in program check mode.
•
Press the reset button to cancel the program
check mode.
0113
Auto start in buffer correct
The automatic start button was pressed during
buffer correction.
•
Press the automatic start button after buffer
correction is completed.
0115
In reset process
The automatic start button was pressed during
resetting or tape rewinding.
•
When rewinding the tape‚ wait for the winding
to end‚ or press the reset button to stop the
winding‚ and then press the automatic start
button.
During resetting‚ wait for resetting to end‚ and
then press the automatic start button.
During editing‚ cancel the function by pressing
the input or previous screen key‚ and then turn
ON the playback switch.
•
0117
Playback not possible
The playback switch was turned ON during
editing.
•
0118
Turn stop in normal line cntrl
The turning angle at the block joint exceeded
the limit during normal line control.
•
•
Normal line control type I
The normal line control axis turning speed
(#1523 C_feed) has not been set.
•
Check the program.
Set the normal line control axis turning speed.
(Parameter "#1523 C_feed")
Set the C axis turning diameter smaller than the
arc radius, or check the setting value of the C
axis turning diameter.
(Parameter "#8041 C rot. R")
Normal line control type II
When turning in the inside of the arc, the
parameter "#8041 C-rot. R" setting value is
larger than the arc radius.
0119
Reverse run impossible
Any of the following conditions are occurring.
a) There is no block to run backward
b) Eight blocks without a travel command
continued
•
•
a) Release with forward run.
b) Release with reset.
0120
In synchronous correction mode
The synchronous correction mode switch was
pressed in a non-handle mode.
•
•
Select the handle or manual feed mode.
Turn OFF the correction mode switch.
0121
No synchronous control option
The synchronous control system (register
R2589) was set with no synchronous control
option.
•
Set 0 in register R2589.
0123
Computer link B not possible
The cycle start was attempted before resetting
was completed.
An attempt was made to perform computer link
B operation at the second part system and
following in a multi-part system.
•
Perform the cycle start after resetting is
completed.
Set 0 in "#8109 HOST LINK", and then set 1
again before performing the cycle start.
The computer link B operation cannot be
performed at the second part system and
following in a multi-part system.
Turn the inclined axis and basic axis start OFF
for both axes. (This also applied for
manual/automatic simultaneous start.)
Invalidate the basic axis compensation, or
command one axis at a time.
0124
X/Z axes simultaneous prohibit
The basic axis corresponding to the inclined
axis was started simultaneously in the manual
mode while the inclined axis control was valid.
II - 5
•
•
•
•
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
0125
Details
Remedy
Rapid override zero
The "rapid traverse override" switch on the
machine operation panel is set to zero.
•
•
•
Set the "rapid traverse override" switch to a
value other than zero to clear the error.
When the "rapid traverse override" switch is set
to a value other than zero, check for a short
circuit in the signal wire.
Check the sequence program.
Release the machine lock before resuming
operations.
0126
Program restart machine lock
Machine lock was applied on the return axis
while manually returning to the restart position.
•
0127
Rot axis parameter error
The orthogonal coordinate axis name does not
exist.
The rotary axis name does not exist.
The orthogonal coordinate axis name is
duplicated.
The number of axes that were selected to
change tool length compensation along the tool
axis amount exceeds the maximum number of
axes.
The orthogonal coordinate axis name is that of
the rotary axis name.
•
Review the rotational axis configuration
parameters.
0128
Restart pos return incomplete
Automatic return was performed with an axis
whose return to the restart position was not
complete.
•
•
Perform restart position return manually.
Validate the parameter "automatic return by
program restart" (#1302 AutoRP), then execute
automatic start.
0150
Chopping override zero
The override became "0" while performing the
chopping operation.
•
•
Check the chopping override (R2530).
Check the rapid traverse override (R2502).
0151
Command axis chopping axis
A chopping axis movement command was
issued from the program during the chopping
mode. (This alarm will not occur when the
movement amount is commanded as 0.)
(All axes interlock state will be applied.)
•
Reset, or turn OFF the chopping signal. When
the chopping signal is turned OFF, the axis will
return to the reference position, and then the
program movement command will be executed.
0153
Bottom dead center pos. zero
The bottom dead center position is set to the
same position as the upper dead center
position.
•
Correctly set the bottom dead center position.
0154
Chopping disable for handle ax
Chopping was started when the chopping axis
was selected as the handle axis.
•
Select an axis other than the chopping axis as
the handle axis, or start chopping after
changing the mode to another mode.
0160
No speed set out of soft limit
Returned from the outside of the soft limit range
for the axis with no maximum speed set for the
outside of the soft limit range.
•
Set the maximum speed for the outside of the
soft limit range. (Parameter "#2021 out_f")
Change the soft limit range.
(Parameter "#2013 OT-" "#2014 OT+")
II - 6
•
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0166
Aux axis changeover error
One of the following attempts was made on an
axis that is switchable between NC axis and
auxiliary axis.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A command was issued to an auxiliary axis
from machining program.
When there were more than one NC axis
having a same name, a command was issued
to those axes from machining program.
NC axis control select signal was turned OFF
while the NC axis was in motion.
NC axis control select signal was turned ON
while the auxiliary axis was in motion.
•
If you wish to issue a command to the axis from
machining program, turn ON the NC axis
control select signal so as to set the axis as an
NC axis.
When more than one axis have a same name,
let only one of the axes work as an NC axis.
Do not change NC axis control select signal
while the axis is in motion.
0170
Ill. op during T tip control
An attempt was made to perform an incorrect
operation during tool tip center control.
•
Change to the previous operation mode and
reboot.
1005
G114.n command illegal
An attempt was made to execute G114.n
during execution of G114.n.
G51.2 was commanded when the G51.2
spindle-spindle polygon machining mode was
already entered with a separate part system.
•
•
Cancel with G113.
Issue the spindle synchronous cancel signal
(Y18B8: SPSYC).
Cancel with G50.2.
Cancel with the spindle-spindle polygon cancel
signal (YCD1).
•
•
1007
Spindle in-use by synchro tap
The spindle is being used in synchronized
tapping.
•
Cancel synchronized tapping.
1026
SP-C ax ctrl runs independntly
C axis mode command was issued for polygon
machining spindle.
C axis mode command was issued for
synchronized tapping spindle.
Polygon command was issued for
synchronized tapping spindle.
Spindle is being used as spindle/C axis.
•
•
•
Cancel the C axis command.
Cancel the polygon machining command.
Cancel the C axis with servo OFF.
1030
Synchronization mismatch
Different M codes were commanded in the two
part systems as the synchronization M codes.
Synchronization with the "!" code was
commanded in another part system during M
code synchronization.
Synchronization with the M code was
commanded in another part system during
synchronization with the "!" code.
•
Correct the program so that the M codes
match.
Correct the program so that the same
synchronization codes are commanded.
1031
Multiple C axes select invalid
The C axis selection signal was changed when
multiple C axes could not be selected.
An axis that cannot be controlled as the
multiple C axes selection was selected.
II - 7
•
•
Check and correct the parameters and
program.
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
Error No.
Details
Remedy
1032
Tap retract Sp select illegal
Tap return was executed when a different
spindle was selected. Cutting feed will wait until
synchronization is completed.
•
Select the spindle for which tap cycle was
halted before the tap return signal was turned
ON.
1033
Sp-Sp polygon cut interlock
Cutting feed will wait until synchronization is
completed.
•
Wait for synchronization to end.
1034
Mixed sync ctrl prmtr illegal
Mixed synchronization control exceeding the
number of control axes was attempted.
Mixed synchronization control with duplicated
axis addresses was attempted.
•
Check the parameter settings for mixed
synchronization control.
1035
Mixed sync ctrl disable modal
Mixed synchronization was commanded for a
part system in which mixed synchronization
control is disabled as shown below.
• During nose R compensation mode
• During pole coordinate interpolation mode
• During cylindrical interpolation mode
• During balance cut mode
• During fixed cycle machining mode
• During facing turret mirror image
•
Check the program.
1036
Synchro ctrl setting disable
The synchronous control operation method
selection (R2589 register) was set when the
mode was not the C axis mode.
The synchronous control operation method
selection (R2589 register) was set in the zero
point not set state.
•
Set the R2589 register to 0.
Mirror image disable state
The external mirror image or parameter mirror
image was commanded during facing turret
mirror image.
•
Check the program and parameters.
1037
Synchro start/cancel disable
Synchronous control was started or canceled
when synchronous control could not be started
or canceled.
•
Check the program and parameters.
1038
Move cmnd invld to synchro ax
A movement command was issued to a
synchronous axis in synchronous control.
•
Check the program.
1106
Sp synchro phase calc illegal
The spindle synchronization phase alignment
command was issued while the spindle
synchronization phase calculation request
signal was ON.
•
•
Check the program.
Check the sequence program.
II - 8
1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms
(2) Class: M90 Message: Parameter set mode
M90 Messages output when the setup parameter lock function is enabled are displayed.
Error No.
-
Details
Remedy
Setup parameter lock released
The setup parameter lock is released.
Automatic start is disabled when setup
parameters can be set.
Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
builder.
II - 9
1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes
1.2 Stop Codes
These codes indicate a status that caused the controller to stop for some reason.
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
TUU Message {{{{
Error No.
Message
Class
(1) Class: T01 Cycle start prohibit
This indicates the state where automatic operation cannot be started when attempting to start it from the
stop state.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0101
Axis in motion
Automatic start is not possible as one of the
axes is moving.
•
Try automatic start again after all axes have
stopped.
0102
NC not ready
Automatic start is not possible as the NC is not
ready.
•
Another alarm has occurred. Check the details
and remedy.
0103
Reset signal ON
Automatic start is not possible as the reset
signal has been input.
•
•
Turn OFF the reset input signal.
Check that the reset switch is not ON
constantly due to trouble.
Check the sequence program.
•
0104
Auto operation pause signal ON
The FEED HOLD switch on the machine
operation panel is ON (valid).
•
•
•
•
0105
H/W stroke end axis exists
Automatic start is not possible as one of the
axes is at the stroke end.
•
•
•
Check the FEED HOLD switch.
The feed hold switch is the B contact.
Check for broken wires in the feed hold signal
wire.
Check the sequence program.
If one of the axis' ends is at the stroke end‚
move the axis manually.
Check for broken wire in the stroke end signal
wire.
Check for trouble in the stroke end limit switch.
0106
S/W stroke end axis exists
Automatic start is not possible as one of the
axes is at the stored stroke limit.
•
•
Move the axis manually.
If an axis is not at the end‚ check the parameter
details.
0107
No operation mode
The operation mode has not been selected.
•
•
Select the automatic operation mode.
Check for broken wires in the automatic
operation mode (memory‚ tape‚ MDl) signal
wire.
0108
Operation mode duplicated
Two or more automatic operation modes are
selected.
•
Check for a short circuit in the mode selection
signal wire (memory‚ tape‚ MDl).
Check for trouble in the switch.
Check the sequence program.
Return to the original automatic operation
mode‚ and start automatic start.
0109
Operation mode changed
The automatic operation mode changed to
another automatic operation mode.
II - 10
•
•
•
1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0110
Tape search execution
Automatic start is not possible as tape search is
being executed.
•
Begin automatic start after the tape search is
completed.
0112
Restart pos. return incomplete
Automatic start is not possible as the axis has
not been returned to the restart position.
•
•
Manually return to the restart position.
Turn the automatic restart valid parameter ON,
and then execute automatic start.
0113
CNC overheat
Automatic start is not possible because a
thermal alarm (Z53 CNC overheat) has
occurred.
•
The NC controller temperature has exceeded
the specified temperature.
Take appropriate measures to cool the unit.
•
0115
Cycle st. prohibit(Host comm.)
Automatic start cannot be executed as the NC
is communicating with the host computer.
•
Execute automatic start after the
communication with the host computer is
completed.
0116
Cycle st prohibit(Battery alm)
Automatic start cannot be executed because
the voltage of the battery inserted in the NC
control unit has dropped.
•
•
Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
Contact the service center.
0117
R-pnt offset value not set
• Perform the initial reference position setting,
then set the reference position offset value
As the reference position offset value has not
(#2034 rfpofs).
been set, automatic operation cannot be used.
0138
In absolute position alarm
A start signal was input during an absolute
position detection alarm.
•
Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚
and then input the start signal.
0139
In abs posn initial setting
A start signal was input while initializing the
absolute position detector's zero point.
•
Complete zero point initialization before
inputting the start signal.
0180
Cycle start prohibit
Automatic start is disabled in servo auto turning
valid.
•
Set "0" to "#1164 ATS" when the servo auto
turning is not executed.
0190
Cycle start prohibit
Automatic start is disabled because setup
parameters can be set.
•
Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
builder.
0191
Cycle start prohibit
Automatic start was caused during file deletion
or writing.
•
Cause automatic start after file deletion or
writing is completed.
0193
Cycle st. prohibit (Term exp'd)
Automatic start is disabled because the valid
term has been expired.
•
Enter the decryption code and turn the power
ON again.
II - 11
1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes
(2) Class: T02 Feed hold
The feed hold state been entered due to a condition in the automatic operation.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
•
0201
H/W stroke end axis exists
An axis is at the stroke end.
•
Manually move the axis away from the stroke
end limit switch.
The machining program must be corrected.
0202
S/W stroke end axis exists
An axis is at the stored stroke limit.
•
•
Manually move the axis.
The machining program must be corrected.
0203
Reset signal ON
The reset signal has been input.
•
The program execution position has returned to
the start of the program. Execute automatic
operation from the start of the machining
program.
0204
Auto operation pause signal ON
The FEED HOLD switch is ON.
•
Resume automatic operation by pressing the
"CYCLE START" switch.
0205
Operation mode changed
The operation mode changed to another mode
during automatic operation.
•
Return to the original automatic operation
mode‚ and resume automatic operation by
pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.
0206
Acc/dec time cnst too large
The acceleration and deceleration time
constants are too large. (This problem occurs
at the same time as system alarm Z59.)
•
Increase the set value of the parameter "#1206
G1bF".
Decrease the set value of the parameter
"#1207 G1btL".
Lower the cutting speed.
Reset the absolute position detection alarm.
•
•
0215
Abs posn detect alarm occurred
An absolute position detection alarm occurred.
•
0220
Aux axis changeover error
A movement command was issued to an
auxiliary axis.
•
II - 12
When NC axis control selection signal is ON,
automatic operation can be resumed by
pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.
1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes
(3) Class: T03 Block stop
This indicates that automatic operation stopped after executing one block of the program.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0301
Single block stop signal ON
The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine
operation panel is ON.
The single block or machine lock switch
changed.
•
Automatic operation can be resumed by turning
the CYCLE START switch ON.
0302
Block stop cmnd in user macro
The block stop command was issued in the
user macro program.
•
Automatic operation can be resumed by turning
the CYCLE START switch ON.
0303
Operation mode changed
The automatic mode changed to another
automatic mode.
•
Return to the original automatic operation
mode‚ and resume automatic operation by
turning the CYCLE START switch ON.
0304
MDI completed
The last block of MDI was completed.
•
Set MDI again‚ and turn the CYCLE START
switch ON to resume MDl operation.
0305
Block start interlock
The interlock signal that locks the block start is
entered.
•
Check the sequence program.
0306
Cutting blck start interlock
The interlock signal that locks the block cutting
start is entered.
•
Check the sequence program.
0310
Inclined Z offset change
Whether to validate the offset of the inclined
Z-axis switched during program operation.
•
Automatic operation can be restarted by turning
ON the CYCLE START switch.
0330
Aux axis changeover error
NC axis control selection signal was OFF while
traveling NC axis.
•
When NC axis control selection signal is ON,
automatic operation can be resumed by
pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.
(4) Class: T04 Collation stop
This indicates that collation stop was applied during automatic operation.
Error No.
0401
Details
Remedy
•
Collation stop
Collation stop occurred.
II - 13
Automatic operation can be restarted with
automatic start.
1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes
(5) Class: T10 Fin wait
This indicates the operation state when an alarm did not occur during automatic operation‚ and nothing
seems to have happened.
Error No.
0†††
Details
The error number is displayed while each of the completion wait modes listed in the table below is
ON. It disappears when the mode is canceled.
0
Alarm
No.
Unclamp In dwell
signal
execuwait
tion
Alarm
No.
(Note 2)
Door
open
(Note 1)
0
Waiting
for
spindle
position
to be
looped
0
×
1
8
×
9
×
×
Alarm
No.
Waiting
for
spindle
orientation to
complete
Waiting
for
cutting
speed
deceleration
Waiting
for rapid
traverse
deceleration
Waiting
for MSTB
completion
0
×
1
8
×
9
×
×
×
1
2
×
3
×
4
×
5
×
6
×
×
7
×
×
×
×
8
×
9
×
A
×
×
B
×
×
C
×
×
D
×
×
E
×
×
×
F
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
(Note 1) This mode is enabled by the door interlock function.
(Note 2) The system is waiting for the index table indexing unclamp signal to turn ON or OFF
II - 14
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
This section describes alarms occurred by the errors in the servo system such as the drive unit‚ motor and
encoder, etc. The alarm message‚ alarm No. and axis name will display on the alarm message screen. The
axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No. will also display on the servo monitor screen and the spindle
monitor screen respectively. If several alarms have occurred‚ up to two errors per axis will display on the
servo monitor screen and the spindle monitor screen respectively.
(Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset method combinations are preset.
Alarm class
Reset method
Resetting methods
S01
PR
After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the NC power ON again.
S02
PR
After correcting the parameter, reset the alarm by
turning ON the NC power again.
S03
NR
After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by inputting the NC RESET key.
S04
AR
After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the drive unit power ON again.
S51
This is cleared if a correct value is set.
S52
(Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class.
For example, even if "S03 SERVO ALARM: NR" is displayed, it may be necessary to turn the NC
power ON again.
S{{
Message
:
xx
ΔΔΔΔ
†
Servo
Axis name
: Axis name
Spindle : "S1","S2","S3","S4"
Alarm No. (Parameter No.)
Reset method
Message
Alarm class
II - 15
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
(1) Class: S01/S03/S04
Servo alarm
(a) Servo drive unit alarm
No.
Message
0010 Insufficient voltage
0011 Axis selection error
0012 Memory error 1
0013 Software processing error 1
0016 Init mag pole pos detect err
0017 A/D converter error
0018 Motor side dtc: Init commu err
001A Machine side dtc: Init comu er
001B
001C
001D
001E
001F
Machine side dtc: Error 1
Machine side dtc: Error 2
Machine side dtc: Error 3
Machine side dtc: Error 4
Machine side dtc: Commu error
0021 Machine side dtc: No signal
0024 Grounding
0025 Absolute position data lost
0026 Unused axis error
0027
0028
0029
002A
002B
002C
002D
002E
002F
Machine side dtc: Error 5
Machine side dtc: Error 6
Machine side dtc: Error 7
Machine side dtc: Error 8
Motor side dtc: Error 1
Motor side dtc: Error 2
Motor side dtc: Error 3
Motor side dtc: Error 4
Motor side dtc: Commu error
0030 Over regeneration
0031 Overspeed
0032 Power module overcurrent
0033 Overvoltage
0034 NC-DRV commu: CRC error
Details
Reset
method
PR
AR
AR
Stop method
A drop of bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
The axis selection rotary switch has been incorrectly set.
A hardware error was detected during the power ON
self-check.
An error was detected for the software execution state.
PR
The initial magnetic pole position, detected in the initial
PR
magnetic pole position detection control, is not reliable.
In the DC excitation function, this error will be detected
when the servo ON has been set before the magnetic
pole shift amount is set while the absolute position
detector is used.
A current feedback error was detected.
PR
An error was detected in the initial communication with
PR
the motor side detector.
An error was detected in the initial communication with
PR
the machine side detector.
An error was detected by the detector connected to the machine
side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Dynamic stop
Initial error
Initial error
An error was detected in the communication with the
PR
machine side detector.
An error was detected in the ABZ-phase in the full closed
PR
loop control system.
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame
PR
Ground).
The absolute position was lost in the detector.
AR
A power module error was detected on the axis set to
PR
Free.
An error was detected by the detector connected to the machine
side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Initial error
Initial error
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Initial error
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
An error was detected by the detector connected to the motor side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Dynamic stop
An error was detected in the communication with the
motor side detector.
Over-regeneration level exceeded 100%. The
regenerative resistor is overloaded.
The motor speed exceeded the allowable speed.
PR
Dynamic stop
PR
Dynamic stop
PR
Deceleration stop
enabled
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
The power module detected the overcurrent.
The bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable
value.
An error was detected in the data received from the NC.
II - 16
PR
PR
PR
Deceleration stop
enabled
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
No.
Message
0035 NC command error
0036 NC-DRV commu: Commu error
Details
The travel command data received from the NC was
excessive.
The communication with the NC was interrupted.
Reset
method
PR
PR
0037 Initial parameter error
0038
0039
003A
003B
003C
003D
003E
0041
0042
0043
0045
0046
0048
0049
004A
004B
004F
0050
An incorrect set value was detected among the
PR
parameters send from the NC at the power ON.
NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 1 An error was detected in the communication frames
PR
received from the NC.
NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 2 An error was detected in the axis data received from the
PR
NC.
Overcurrent
Excessive motor drive current was detected.
PR
Power module overheat
The power module detected an overheat.
PR
Regeneration circuit error
An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in
PR
the regenerative resistor.
Pw sply volt err acc/dec
A motor control error, due to an input voltage failure, was
PR
detected.
Magnet pole pos detect err
The magnetic pole position, detected in the magnetic pole
AR
position detection control, is not reliable.
Feedback error 3
Either a missed feedback pulse in the motor side detector
PR
or an error in the Z-phase was detected in the full closed
loop system.
Feedback error 1
Either a missed feedback pulse in the detector used for
PR
the position detection or an error in the Z-phase was
detected.
PR
Feedback error 2
An excessive difference in feedback was detected
between the machine side detector and the motor side
detector.
Fan stop
An overheat of the power module was detected during
PR
the cooling fan stopping.
Motor overheat
Either the motor or the motor side detector detected an
NR
overheat.
An error was detected by the detector connected to the motor side.
Motor side dtc: Error 5
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Motor side dtc: Error 6
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Motor side dtc: Error 7
Motor side dtc: Error 8
Instantaneous power interrupt
The control power supply has been shut down for 50ms
NR
or more.
Overload 1
Excessive load current was detected.
NR
0051 Overload 2
0052
0053
0054
Excessive error 1
Excessive error 2
Excessive error 3
0058 Collision detection 1: G0
0059 Collision detection 1: G1
005A Collision detection 2
005B Sfty obsrvation: Cmd spd err
Excessive load current was detected.
NR
A position tracking error was detected. (during servo ON)
NR
A position tracking error was detected. (during servo
OFF)
The anomalous motor current was detected at the
detection of Excessive error 1.
A disturbance torque exceeded the tolerable disturbance
torque in rapid traverse modal (G0). The tolerable
disturbance torque is decided by SV060:TLMT.
A disturbance torque exceeded the tolerable disturbance
torque in the cutting feed modal (G1). The tolerable
disturbance torque is decided by SV060:TLMT and
SV035:SSF4/clG1(bitC, bitD and bitE).
A current command with the maximum capacity current
value was detected.
A commanded speed exceeding the safe speed was
detected in speed monitoring mode.
II - 17
NR
Stop method
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Initial error
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Dynamic stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
Dynamic stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Dynamic stop
NR
Dynamic stop
NR
Maximum capacity
deceleration stop
NR
Maximum capacity
deceleration stop
NR
Maximum capacity
deceleration stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
PR
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
No.
Message
Details
005D Sfty obsrvation: Door stat err
005E Sfty obsrvation: FB speed err
005F External contactor error
The door state signal input in the NC does not coincide
with the door state signal input in the drive unit.
Otherwise, door open state was detected in normal
mode.
A motor speed exceeding the safe speed was detected in
the speed monitoring mode.
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
Reset
method
PR
PR
NR
0060 Power supply alarm
~
0077
0080 Motor side dtc: cable err
Stop method
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Dynamic stop
The power supply unit detected an error.
The error details are different according to the connected power
supply unit. Refer to "Power supply alarm".
A difference of type was detected between the motor side
AR
Initial error
detector and the cable connected to the detector.
Otherwise, the cable type for the motor side detector was
not successfully achieved.
0081 Machine side dtc: cable err
A difference of type was detected between the machine
AR
Initial error
side detector and the cable connected to the detector.
Otherwise, the cable type for the machine side detector
was not successfully achieved.
0087 Drive unit communication error
The communication frame between drivers was aborted.
PR
Dynamic stop
0088 Watchdog
The drive unit does not operate correctly.
AR
Dynamic stop
008A Drivers commu data error 1
The communication data 1 between drivers exceeded the
PR
Dynamic stop
tolerable value in the communication between drivers.
008B Drivers commu data error 2
The communication data 2 between drivers exceeded the
PR
Dynamic stop
tolerable value in the communication between drivers.
(Note1) Definitions of terms in the table are as follows.
Motor side detector: Detector connected to CN2
Machine side detector: Detector connected to CN3
(Note2) Resetting methods
NR: Reset with the NC RESET button. This alarm can also be reset with the PR and AR resetting conditions.
PR: Reset by turning the NC power ON again. This alarm can also be reset with the AR resetting conditions.
When the control axis is removed, this alarm can be reset with the NC RESET button. (Excluding alarms 32 and 37.)
AR: Reset by turning the servo drive unit power ON again.
Separate table : Detector alarm
(Servo drive unit)
Alarm number when the detector
2B
is connected to the motor side
Alarm number when the detector
1B
is connected to the machine side
OSA17
OSE104, OSE105
Memory
OSA104, OSA105
alarm
OSA405, OSA166 MITSUBISHI
OSA18
CPU alarm
2C
2D
2E
48
49
4A
4B
1C
1D
1E
27
28
29
2A
LED alarm
Data alarm
-
-
-
-
-
Scale not
connected
-
Data alarm
-
MDS-B-HR
Memory error
-
Data error
-
AT343, AT543
Initialization
error
EEPROM
error
LC191M, LC491M
Initialization
RCN723, RCN223 HEIDENHAIN
error
APE391M
EEPROM
error
Mitutoyo
Photoelectric
type, static
capacity type
data
mismatch
Relative/
absolute
position data
mismatch
-
-
-
-
-
-
Photoelectric
Static
Photoelectric
type
capacity type
type error
overspeed
error
ROM/RAM
error
CPU error
ROM/RAM
error
CPU error
Overspeed
Absolute
Relative
position data position data
error
error
Futaba absolute
position scale
Futaba
-
-
-
-
-
-
Waveform
error
Overspeed
Absolute
position is
lost
MP scale,
MPI scale
Mitsubishi
Heavy
Industries
Installation
accuracy
fault
-
Detection
position
deviance
Scale
breaking
Absolute
value
detection
fault
-
Gain fault
Phase fault
MJ831
SONY
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Detector
alarm
(Note1) Definitions of terms in the table are as follows.
Motor side detector: Detector connected to CN2
Machine side detector: Detector connected to CN3
(Note2) A driver processes all reset types of alarms as "PR". However, "AR" will be applied according to the detector.
II - 18
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
(b) Spindle drive unit alarm
No.
Message
0010 Insufficient voltage
0011 Axis selection error
0012 Memory error 1
0013 Software processing error 1
0016 Init mag pole pos detect err
0017 A/D converter error
0018 Motor side dtc: Init commu err
0019 Detector commu err in syn cont
001A Machine side dtc: Init comu er
001B
001C
001D
001E
001F
Machine side dtc: Error 1
Machine side dtc: Error 2
Machine side dtc: Error 3
Machine side dtc: Error 4
Machine side dtc: Commu error
0020 Motor side dtc: No signal
0021 Machine side dtc: No signal
Excessive speed error
0023 Grounding
0024 Machine side dtc: No signal
0026 Unused axis error
0027
0028
0029
002A
002B
002C
002D
002E
002F
Machine side dtc: Error 5
Machine side dtc: Error 6
Machine side dtc: Error 7
Machine side dtc: Error 8
Motor side dtc: Error 1
Motor side dtc: Error 2
Motor side dtc: Error 3
Motor side dtc: Error 4
Motor side dtc: Commu error
0030 Over regeneration
0031 Overspeed
0032 Power module overcurrent
0033 Overvoltage
0034 NC-DRV commu: CRC error
0035 NC command error
0036 NC-DRV commu: Commu error
0037 Initial parameter error
Details
Reset
method
PR
AR
AR
A drop of bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
The axis selection rotary switch has been incorrectly set.
A hardware error was detected during the power ON
self-check.
An error was detected for the software execution state.
PR
The magnetic pole position, detected in the initial
PR
magnetic pole position detection control, is not reliable.
A current feedback error was detected.
PR
An error was detected in the initial communication with
PR
the motor side detector.
An error was detected in the communication with the
PR
extended connection detector.
An error was detected in the initial communication with
PR
the machine side detector.
An error was detected by the detector connected to the machine
side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
An error was detected in the communication with the
PR
machine side detector.
The cable type of the motor side detector does not
PR
coincide with the detector type set with the parameter.
The cable type of the machine side detector does not
PR
coincide with the detector type set with the parameter.
An error was detected in the ABZ-phase in the full closed
PR
loop control system.
An excessive speed tracking error was detected (during
NR
servo ON).
A grounding of the motor power cable or motor was
AR
detected.
A power module error was detected on the axis set to
PR
Free.
An error was detected by the detector connected to the machine
side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Stop method
Coast to a stop
Initial error
Initial error
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Initial error
Coast to a stop
Initial error
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Initial error
Initial error
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
An error was detected by the detector connected to the motor side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
Refer to "Detector alarm".
Coast to a stop
An error was detected in the communication with the
motor side detector.
Over-regeneration level exceeded 100%.
The regenerative resistor is overloaded.
The motor speed exceeded the allowable speed.
PR
Coast to a stop
PR
Coast to a stop
PR
Deceleration stop
enabled
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
The power module detected the overcurrent.
The bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable
value.
An error was detected in the data received from the NC.
PR
PR
An error was detected in the travel command data
received from the NC.
The communication with the NC was interrupted.
PR
An incorrect set value was detected among the
parameters send from the NC at the power ON.
PR
II - 19
PR
PR
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Initial error
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
No.
Message
Details
Reset
method
PR
0038 NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 1 An error was detected in the communication frames
received from the NC.
0039 NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 2 An error was detected in the axis data received from the
PR
NC.
003A Overcurrent
Excessive motor drive current was detected.
PR
003B Power module overheat
The power module detected an overheat.
PR
003C Regeneration circuit error
An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in
PR
the regenerative resistor.
003E Magnet pole pos detect err
The magnetic pole position, detected in the magnetic pole
AR
position detection control, is not reliable.
0041 Feedback error 3
An error was detected in the feedback of the motor side
PR
detector.
0042 Feedback error 1
An error was detected in the feedback of the machine
PR
side detector.
0043 Feedback error 2
An excessive difference in feedback was detected
PR
between the motor side detector and the machine side
detector.
0045 Fan stop
A cooling fan in the drive unit stopped.
PR
0046 Motor overheat
Either the motor or the motor side detector detected an
NR
overheat.
0048 Motor side dtc: Error 5
An error was detected by the detector connected to the motor side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
0049 Motor side dtc: Error 6
Refer to "Detector alarm".
004A Motor side dtc: Error 7
004B Motor side dtc: Error 8
004C Current err mag pole estim
Current detection failed at the pulse-applied magnetic
NR
pole estimation by IPM spindle motor.
004E NC command mode error
An error was detected in the spindle control mode send
NR
from the NC.
004F Instantaneous power interrupt
The control power supply has been shut down for 50ms
NR
or more.
0050 Overload 1
Excessive load current was detected.
NR
0051 Overload 2
Excessive load current was detected.
NR
0052 Excessive error 1
A position tracking error was detected. (during servo ON)
NR
0054 Excessive error 3
The anomalous motor current was detected at the
detection of Excessive error 1.
A commanded speed exceeding the safe speed was
detected in speed monitoring mode.
The door state signal input in the NC does not coincide
with the door state signal input in the drive unit.
Otherwise, door open state was detected in normal
mode.
A motor speed exceeding the safe speed was detected in
the speed monitoring mode.
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
NR
005B Sfty obsrvation: Cmd spd err
005D Sfty obsrvation: Door stat err
005E Sfty obsrvation: FB speed err
005F External contactor error
0060 Power supply alarm
~
0077
0080 Motor side dtc: cable err
0081 Machine side dtc: cable err
0087 Drive unit communication error
0088 Watchdog
008A Drivers commu data error 1
008B Drivers commu data error 2
(Note)
PR
PR
PR
NR
The power supply unit detected an error.
The error details are different according to the connected power
supply unit. Refer to "Power supply alarm".
The connected cable type does not coincide with the
PR
motor side detector type.
The connected cable type does not coincide with the
PR
machine side detector type.
The communication frame between drivers was aborted.
PR
The drive unit does not operate correctly.
AR
The communication data 1 between drivers exceeded the
PR
tolerable value in the communication between drivers.
The communication data 2 between drivers exceeded the
PR
tolerable value in the communication between drivers.
Stop method
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Coast to a stop
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Deceleration stop
enabled
Coast to a stop
Initial error
Initial error
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Resetting methods
NR: Reset with the NC RESET button. This alarm can also be reset with the PR and AR resetting conditions.
PR: Reset by turning the NC power ON again. This alarm can also be reset with the AR resetting conditions.
When the control axis is removed, this alarm can be reset with the NC RESET button. (Excluding alarms 32 and 37.)
AR: Reset by turning the servo drive unit power ON again.
II - 20
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
Separate table : Detector alarm (Spindle drive unit)
Alarm number when the detector
is connected to the motor side
Alarm number when the detector
is connected to the machine side
TS5690
TS5691
2B
2C
2D
2E
48
49
4A
4B
1B
1C
1D
1E
27
28
29
2A
Memory error
Waveform
error
-
-
-
Overspeed
-
Relative
position data
error
-
Data error
-
-
-
-
-
Data error
-
Connection
error
-
-
-
-
MITSUBISHI
Initialization
error
CPU error
MDS-B-HR
OSA18
ERM280
+
APE391M
HEIDENHAIN
Initialization
error
EEPROM
error
-
-
CPU error
Overspeed
-
Relative
position data
error
MPCI scale
Mitsubishi
Heavy
Industries
Installation
accuracy
fault
-
Detection
position
deviance
Scale
breaking
-
-
Gain fault
Phase fault
(Note)
A driver processes all reset types of alarms as "PR". However, "AR" will be applied according to the detector.
(c) Power supply alarm
No.
LED
display
Message
Details
Reset
method
0061
Pw sply: Pwr module overcurnt
Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its
operation.
PR
0062
Pw sply: Frequency error
The input power supply frequency increased above the
specification range.
PR
0067
Pw sply: Phase interruption
An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
PR
0068
Pw sply: Watchdog
The system does not operate correctly.
AR
0069
Pw sply: Grounding
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
PR
006A
Pw sply: Ext contactor weld
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
PR
006B
Pw sply: Rush relay welding
A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF.
PR
006C
Pw sply: Main circuit error
An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit
capacitor.
PR
006E
Pw sply: Memory error/AD error
An error was detected in the internal memory or A/D converter.
AR
006F
Power supply error
No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication
error was detected.
AR
0070
Pw sply: Ext emergency stp err
A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and NC
emergency stop input continued for 30 seconds.
PR
0071
Pw sply: Instant pwr interrupt
The power was momentarily interrupted.
NR
0072
Pw sply: Fan stop
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat
occurred in the power module.
PR
0073
Pw sply: Over regeneration
NR
0075
Pw sply: Overvoltage
0076
Pw sply: Ext EMG stop set err
Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The
regenerative resistor is overloaded. This alarm cannot be reset for
15 min from the occurrence to protect the regeneration resistor.
Leave the drive system energized for more than 15 min, then turn
the power ON to reset the alarm.
L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
As the voltage between L+ and L- is high immediately after this
alarm, another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time.
Wait more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
The rotary switch setting of external emergency stop is not correct,
or a wrong external emergency stop signal is input.
0077
Pw sply: Power module overheat
Thermal protection function in the power module has started its
operation.
NR
AR
PR
(Note 1) If a power supply alarm (60 to 77) occurs, all servos will stop with the dynamic brakes, and all spindles will coast to a stop.
(Note 2) "b", "C" and "d" displayed on the power supply unit's LED as a solid light (not flickering) do not indicate an alarm.
II - 21
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
(2) Class: S02 Message: Initial parameter error
An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the controller to the drive unit when the power
was turned ON.
Remove the cause of the alarm, and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once.
Alarm
No.
Details
Remedy
2201
to
2264
The servo parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter
where the error occurred.
Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
parameters and correct them.
2301
The number of constants to be used in the
following functions is too large:
• Electronic gears
• Position loop gain
• Speed feedback conversion
Check that all the related parameters are
specified correctly.
sv001:PC1, sv002:PC2, sv003:PGN1
sv018:PIT, sv019:RNG1, sv020:RNG2
2302
When high-speed serial incremental detector
Check that all the related parameters are
(OSE104, OSE105) is connected, parameters for specified correctly.
absolute position are set to ON.
sv017:SPEC, sv025:MTYP
Set the parameters for absolute position
detection to OFF.
To detect an absolute position, replace the
incremental specification detector with an
absolute position detector.
2303
No servo option is found.
The closed loop (including the ball screwend detector) or dual feedback control is an
optional function.
No servo option is found.
The SHG control is an optional function.
Check that all the related parameters are
specified correctly.
sv025:MTYP/pen
sv017:SPEC/dfbx
Check that all the related parameters are
specified correctly.
sv057:SHGC
sv058:SHGCsp
2305
No servo option is found.
The adaptive filtering is an optional function.
Check that all the related parameters are
specified correctly.
sv027:SSF1/aflt
13001
to
13256
Parameter error
The spindle parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle
parameter where the error occurred.
Check the descriptions for the appropriate
spindle parameters and correct them.
Refer to Alarm No.37 in Spindle Drive
Maintenance Manual.
2304
(3) Class: S51 Message: Parameter error
This warning is displayed if a parameter outside the tolerance range is set.
Illegal settings will be ignored.
This alarm will be reset when a correct value is set.
Alarm
No.
Details
Remedy
2201
to
2264
13001
to
13256
Servo parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter
where the warning occurred.
Spindle parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle
parameter where the warning occurred.
Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
parameters and correct them.
II - 22
Check the descriptions for the appropriate
spindle parameters and correct them.
Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual.
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
(4) Class: S52 Servo warning
When a warning occurs, a warning No. will appear on the NC monitor screen and with the LEDs on the
front of the drive unit. Check the warning No., and remove the cause of the warning by following this list.
(a) Servo drive unit warning
No.
Message
0096 Scale feedback error
0097 Scale offset error
009E Absolute position detector:
Revolution counter error
009F Battery voltage drop
00A6 Fan stop warning
00E0 Overregeneration warning
00E1 Overload warning
00E4 Set parameter warning
00E6 Control axis detachment warning
00E7 In NC emergency stop state
Details
An excessive difference in feedback amount was
detected between the motor side detector and the MPI
scale in MPI scale absolute position detection system.
An error was detected in the offset data that is read at
the NC power-ON in MPI scale absolute position
detection system.
An error was detected in the revolution counter data of
the absolute position detector. The accuracy of absolute
position is not guaranteed.
The battery voltage to be supplied to the absolute
position detector is dropping.
A cooling fan in the drive unit stopped.
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
A level of 80% of the Overload 1 alarm state was
detected.
An incorrect set value was detected among the
parameters send from the NC in the normal operation.
A control axis is being detached. (State display)
In NC emergency stop. (State display)
Reset
method
*
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
-
PR
-
*
-
*
-
*
*
*
-
*
-
*
*
Deceleration stop
enabled
*EA:
Deceleration stop
enabled
00E8 Power supply warning
~
00EF
(Note1)
Stop method
The power supply unit detected a warning. The error
*
details are different according to the connected power
supply unit.
Refer to "Power supply warning".
Definitions of terms in the table are as follows.
Motor side detector: Detector connected to CN2
Machine side detector: Detector connected to CN3
Resetting methods
*: Automatically reset once the cause of the warning is removed.
NR: Reset with the NC RESET button. This warning can also be reset with the PR and AR resetting conditions.
PR: Reset by turning the NC power ON again. This warning can also be reset with the AR resetting conditions.
When the control axis is removed, this warning can be reset with the NC RESET button. (Excluding warning 93.)
AR: Reset by turning the servo drive unit power ON again.
Servo and spindle motor do not stop when the warning occurs.
When an emergency stop is input, servo and spindle motor decelerate to a stop.
(When SV048, SV055 or SV056 is set for servo and when SP055 or SP056 is set for spindle.)
(b) Spindle drive unit warning
No.
Message
00A6 Fan stop warning
00E0 Overregeneration warning
00E1 Overload warning
00E4 Set parameter warning
00E6 Control axis detachment warning
00E7 In NC emergency stop state
00E8 Power supply warning
~
00EF
Details
A cooling fan in the drive unit stopped.
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
A level of 80% of the Overload 1 alarm state was
detected.
A parameter was set to the value over the setting range.
A control axis is being detached. (State display)
In NC emergency stop. (State display)
The power supply unit detected a warning.
The error details are different according to the
connected power supply unit.
Refer to "Power supply warning".
Reset
method
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Stop method
Deceleration stop
enabled
-
(Note 1) Resetting methods
*: Automatically reset once the cause of the warning is removed.
NR: Reset with the NC RESET button. This warning can also be reset with the PR and AR resetting conditions.
PR: Reset by turning the NC power ON again. This warning can also be reset with the AR resetting conditions.
When the control axis is removed, this warning can be reset with the NC RESET button. (Excluding warning 93.)
AR: Reset by turning the servo drive unit power ON again.
(Note 2) Servo and spindle motor do not stop when the warning occurs.
(Note 3) When an emergency stop is input, servo and spindle motor decelerate to a stop.
(When SV048, SV055 or SV056 is set for servo and when SP055 or SP056 is set for spindle.)
II - 23
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms
(c) Power supply warning
No.
LED
display
Message
Details
Reset
method
00E9
Instantaneous power interruption
warning
The power was momentarily interrupted.
00EA
In external emergency stop state
External emergency stop signal was input.
*
00EB
Power supply: Over regeneration
warning
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
*
00EE
Pw sply: Fan stop warning
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
*
NR
(Note 1) Resetting methods
*: Automatically reset once the cause of the warning is removed.
NR: Reset with the NC RESET button. This warning can also be reset with the PR and AR resetting conditions.
PR: Reset by turning the NC power ON again. This warning can also be reset with the AR resetting conditions.
When the control axis is removed, this warning can be reset with the NC RESET button. (Excluding warning 93.)
AR: Reset by turning the servo drive unit power ON again.
(Note 2) Servo and spindle motor do not stop when the warning occurs.
II - 24
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
1.4 MCP Alarm
An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces. (The bold characters are the messages displayed
on the screen.)
YUU Message {{{{
{{{{
Alarm No.
Error No.
Message
Class
II - 25
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(1) Class: Y02 System alarm
An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and drive unit after the power was turned
ON.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0050
System alm: Process time over
The software or hardware may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
0051
Alarm No.
A communication error has occurred between the
controller and drive unit.
• Take measures against noise.
• Check that the communication cable connector
between the controller and drive unit and one
between the drive units are tight.
• Check whether the communication cable
between the controller and drive unit and one
between the drive units are disconnected.
• A drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of the
7-segment LED contents of each drive unit and
report to the Service Center.
• Update the drive unit software version.
0000
SV commu er: CRC error 1
(10 times/910.2 ms)
0001
SV commu er: CRC error 2
(2 continuous times)
0002
SV commu er: Recv timing err
(2 continuous times)
xy03
SV commu er: Data ID error
(2 continuous times)
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Drive unit rotary switch No.
(0 to)
xy04
SV commu er: Recv frame No.
(2 continuous times)
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Number of reception frame -1
(0 to)
x005
SV commu er: Commu error
(No error classification)
x: Channel No. (0 to)
x006
SV commu er: Connect error
x: Channel No. (0 to)
xy20
SV commu er: Init commu error
The drive unit could not shift to the
initial communication run time and
stopped.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Drive unit rotary switch No.
(0 to)
xy30
SV commu er: Node detect error
No response from drive unit to the
request from NC when setting
network configuration.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Station No. (0 to)
xy31
SV commu er: Commu not
support
Drive unit's software version
doesn't support the
communication mode that the
controller requires.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Station No. (0 to)
(Note) When two or more "Y02 System alarms" occur at the same time, only the alarm which occurs first is
displayed.
II - 26
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(2) Class: Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped
The drive unit is not correctly connected.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
Check the drive unit mounting state.
• Check the end of the cable wiring.
• Check the cable for broken wires.
• Check the connector insertion.
• The drive unit input power is not being input.
• The drive unit axis No. switch is illegal.
Alphabet Servo axis drive unit not mounted
(axis
name)
1 to 4 PLC axis drive unit not mounted
S
No.1 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
T
No.2 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
M
N
No.3 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
No.4 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
(3) Class : Y05 Message: Initial parameter error
Details
Remedy
There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes or Check the value set for the corresponding
the number of part systems.
parameters.
#1001 SYS_ON
#1002 axisno
#1039 spinno, etc.
(4) Class: Y06 Message: mcp_no setting error
There are differences in the MCP and axis parameters when the NC power is turned ON.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0001
There is a skipped number in the channels.
0002
The random layout setting is duplicated.
0003
The drive unit fixed setting "0000" and random
layout setting "∗∗∗∗" are both set.
The spindle/C axis "#1021 mcp_no" and "#3031
smcp_no" are not set to the same values.
0004
0005
A random layout is set for the "#1154 pdoor" =1
two-part system.
0006
The channel No. parameter is not within the
setting range.
II - 27
Check the values set for the following
parameters.
#1021 mcp_no
#3031 smcp_no
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(5) Class: Y07 Message: Too many axes connected
The number of connected axes exceeds the number allowed in the system.
(Alarm No.)
0
0
Exceeded number of axes
at drive unit interface channel 1
Exceeded number of axes
at drive unit interface channel 2
Alarm No.
0000
to
00FF
Details
Remedy
The number of axes connected to each Remove connected axes from the channel
channel exceeds the maximum number of whose alarm No. is other than 0 for the
connectable axes.
number displayed as the alarm No. Keep the
The exceeded number of axes per channel number of connected axes to or less than the
maximum that can be connected.
is displayed as alarm No.
This alarm occurs when the drive unit is
connected only with the 2nd channel without
connecting with the 1st channel.
(Note 1) The number of axes is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2) Maximum number of axes that can be connected differs depending on whether or not an
expansion unit is available or the setting of "#11012 16 axes for 1ch". The maximum number of
connectable axes is as shown below.
Extension unit
#11012 16 axes for 1ch
Yes
0/1
No
Maximum number of axes to be connected
(Per 1 channel)
8 axes
0
1
16 axes
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm "Y08 Too many drive units connected"
and "Y09 Too many axisno connected".
II - 28
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(6) Class: Y08 Message: Too many drive units connected
The number of connected drive units exceeds the number allowed in the system.
(Alarm No.)
0
0
Exceeded number of drive units
at drive unit interface channel 1
Exceeded number of drive units
at drive unit interface channel 2
Alarm No.
0000
to
00FF
Details
Remedy
The number of drive units connected to each Remove drive units from the channel whose
channel exceeds 8.
alarm No. is other than 0 for the number
The exceeded number of drive units per displayed as the alarm No. Keep the number
of connected drive units to 8 or less.
channel is displayed as alarm No.
(Note 1) The drive unit is not counted when all the axes connected to it are invalid.
(Note 2) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 3) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" and "Y09 Too many axisno connected" are
displayed taking precedence over this alarm.
II - 29
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(7) Class: Y09 Message: Too many axisno connected
The connected axes No. (drive unit's rotary switch No.) is bigger than the No. allowed in the system.
(Alarm No.)
0
0
"1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 1
is too big
"1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 2
is too big
Alarm No.
0000
to
Details
Remedy
The No. of the axis (drive unit's rotary switch For the channel whose alarm No. is 1, keep
No.) connected to each channel is bigger the axis No. (drive unit's rotary switch No.)
than the No. allowed.
not bigger than the No. allowed.
0011
(Note 1) The axis No. is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2) The biggest allowed connected axis No. differs depending on whether or not an expansion unit
is available or the setting of "#11012 16 axes for 1ch". The biggest connectable axis No. is as
shown below.
Extension unit
#11012 16 axes for 1ch
Yes
0/1
No
0
Highest allowed connected axis No.
(Per 1 channel)
0 to 7
1
0 to F
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm "Y08 Too many drive units
connected".
(Note 5) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" is displayed taking precedence over this alarm.
(8) Class: Y12 Message: No commu. with axis drv unit
Details
Remedy
Even though the high-speed synchronous Replace it with a drive unit that supports the
tapping option is valid, drive unit that doesn't option.
support the option is connected.
(9) Class: Y13 Message: No commu. with sp drv unit
Details
Remedy
Even though the high-speed synchronous Replace it with a drive unit that supports the
tapping option is valid, drive unit that doesn't option.
support the option is connected.
(10) Class: Y14 Message: Comm btwn drives not ready
Details
Remedy
•
Connection
of
drive
units may be wrong.
Communication of drive units failed to be
• Check if any of drive units is broken.
ready within a specified time.
II - 30
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(11) Class: Y20 Safety observation alarm
When this alarm is output, emergency stop mode is applied.
Refer to "remedy" of each alarm as to how to cancel the alarm.
Error No.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Alarm No.
Details
Axis name Parameter compare error
The speed monitoring parameter
in the NC and the parameter
transmitted to the drive unit are not
matched.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
Axis name Sfty obsrvation: Cmd spd err
The speed exceeding the speed
set with the parameter was
commanded during the speed
monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
Axis name Sfty obsrvation: FB pos err
The commanded position
transmitted to the servo drive unit
from NC and the feedback position
to be received from the servo drive
unit are totally different during the
speed monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
Axis name Sfty obsrvation: FB speed err
Actual rotation speed of the motor
is exceeding the speed set with
speed monitoring parameter
during the speed monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
Door No. Door signal: Input mismatch
Door state signals on the NC side
and the drive side do not match. It
may be caused by the followings:
• Cable disconnection
• Damaged door switch
• Damaged NC or servo drive unit
Door No. No spd obsv mode in door open
The door open state was detected
when the speed monitoring mode
was invalid.
The causes may be same as the
ones for 0005 (Door signal: Input
mismatch). Also the user PLC may
not be correct.
II - 31
Remedy
The NC or the servo drive unit may be
damaged.
Contact the service center.
Check the speed monitoring parameter
and the user PLC.
Restart the NC.
The NC or the servo drive unit may be
damaged.
Contact the service center.
Check the speed observation parameter
and the user PLC.
Restart the NC.
Check the cable.
Check the door switch.
Restart the NC.
Check the user PLC.
Restart the NC.
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
Error No.
0007
0008
Alarm No.
Details
Axis name Speed obsv: Para incompatible
Two speed monitoring parameters
are not matched at the rising edge
of the speed monitoring mode
signal.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
Contactor Contactor welding detected
No.
Contactor welding was detected.
0009
-
0010
-
Remedy
Change the relevant parameters so that
the two speed monitoring parameters
match.
Restart the NC.
Make sure that contactor's auxiliary b
contact signal is output correctly to the
device set on "#1380 MC_dp1" and
"#1381 MC_dp2".
If welding, replace the contactor.
Restart the NC.
Turn OFF the servo parameter SV113/bitF,
the spindle parameter SP229/bitF and the
spindle type servo parameter SV113/bitF.
Then, restart the NC.
No spec: Safety observation
The servo parameter and the
spindle parameter of the speed
monitor are set for a system with
no safety observation option.
Check the wiring. Supply 24VDC power to
SDIO connector input volt err
the SDIO connector.
24VDC power is not supplied to
Restart the NC.
SDIO connector correctly. (SDIO
4A pin supply voltage was dropped
to 16V or less, or 1ms or more
instant power interrupt was
detected.)
In this case, "Pw sply:Inst pw
interpt(DC24V)" alarm occurs
because the contactor control
output signal cannot be controlled.
This state remains until restarting
the NC even if the cause of the
alarm has been removed.
(12) Class: y21 Safety observation warning
The warning will be cancelled when the cause of the warning is removed.
Error No.
0001
Alarm No.
Details
Axis name Speed obsv signal: Speed over
The speed exceeds the safety
speed limit when the speed
monitoring mode signal is ON.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
II - 32
Remedy
When decelerated, the warning will be
removed, and the speed monitor will be
started.
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(13) Class: Y51 Parameter error
An error occurred in a parameter that causes an alarm while the control axis was operating.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
0001
Parameter G0tL illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2004 G0tL”.
0002
Parameter G1tL illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2007 G1tL”.
0003
Parameter G0t1 illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2005 G0t1”.
0004
Parameter G1t1 illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2008 G1t1”.
0009
Parameter grid space illegal
•
Check “#2029 grspc”.
0012
Parameter stapt1-4 illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check spindle parameters” #3017 stapt1” to
“#3020 stapt4”.
0015
Parameter skip_tL illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2102 skip_tL”.
0016
Parameter skip_t1 illegal
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
•
Check “#2103 skip_t1”.
0017
Parameter G0bdcc illegal
“#1205 G0bdcc” for the 2nd part system is set to
acceleration/deceleration before G0
interpolation.
•
Check “#1205 G0bdcc”.
0018
OMR-II parameter error
The OMR-II related parameter settings are
incorrect. In this case, the OMR-II is disabled.
•
Check the related parameter settings.
0019
PLC indexing stroke length err
When the linear axis equal indexing is validated
for the PLC indexing axis, "#12804 aux_tleng"
has not been set. Otherwise, it is out of the
setting range.
•
Check "#12804 aux_tleng".
0020
No hi-accu acc/dec t-const ext
Option to extend the high-accuracy
acceleration/deceleration time constant is
unavailable.
•
Set "#1207 G1btL" to the value with which
high-accuracy time constant extension
specification is unavailable.
0101
Values of PC1/PC2 too large
The PC1 and PC2 settings used for the rotary
axis are too large.
•
Check "#2201 PC1" and "#2202 PC2".
II - 33
1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm
(14) Class: Y90 Message: No spindle signal
(Alarm No.)
Alarm No.
0
1
0
No.1 spindle
No.2 spindle
No.3 spindle
No.4 spindle
Z open
phase
B open
phase
×
×
×
2
3
4
5
6
7
A open
phase
×
×
×
×
Alarm
No.
Details
0001
to
0007
There is an error in the spindle encoder signal.
The data transmission to the drive unit is stopped
when this error occurs.
×
×
×
×
×
Remedy
II - 34
•
Check the spindle encoder's feedback cable
and the encoder.
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
Z31 DataServer error
{{{{
Warning No.
Message
Warning No.
0001
Socket open error(socket)
Explanation
0002
Socket bind error(bind)
0003
Connection wait queue error(listen)
0004
Connection request error(accept)
0005
Data recv error(socket error)
0006
0007
Data recv error(data error)
Data send error(socket error)
0008
Data send error(data error)
000A
Socket close error(close)
(Note) If warning No. 0001, 0002, 0003, or 000A is displayed, set the parameters, then turn power OFF and
turn it ON again.
II - 35
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
Message
Details
Remedy
Z40
Format
mismatch
This appears when the parameter MemVal
is formatted at 0, and MemVal is set to 1.
•
Either return the MemVal setting, or format
and restart.
Z51
E2PROM error
00xx
<Type>
Z51 E2PROM error 0011: Read error
Z51 E2PROM error 0012: Write error
•
If the same alarm is output by the same
operation, the cause is an H/W fault.
Contact the Service Center.
Z52
Battery fault
000x
The voltage of the battery inserted in the NC
control unit has dropped. (The battery used
to save the internal data.)
0001: Battery warning
0002: Battery detecting circuit error
0003: Battery alarm
(Note 1)
The controller or operation board
temperature has risen above the designated
value.
(Note 2)
•
•
Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
Check for disconnection of the battery
cable.
After treating the battery‚ check the
machining program.
•
•
Cooling measures are required.
Turn OFF the controller power‚ or lower
the temperature with a cooler‚ etc.
This occurs when an error occurs in the
communication between the controller and
remote l/O unit.
• Cable breakage
• Remote l/O unit fault
• Power supply to remote l/O unit fault
(Note 3)
The program memory capacity setting value
Z57
System warning cannot be formatted.
The expansion cassette (HR437) is not
mounted after formatting.
An expansion cassette different from the
expansion cassette (HR437) mounted
during formatting is mounted.
The machine tool builder macro program
Z58
was not written to the FROM after being
ROM write not
registered, edited, copied, condensed,
completed
merged, the number changed, or deleted.
•
•
•
Check and replace the cables.
Replace the remote I/O unit.
Check the power supply. (existence of
supply‚ voltage)
Z53
CNC overheat
Z55
RIO
communication
stop
Z59
Acc/dec time
cnst too large
Acceleration and deceleration time
constants are too large.
(This alarm is output at the same time as
"T02 Acc/dec time cnst too large 0206.")
Z60
Fieldbus
communication error
Z64
Valid term soon
to be expired
xx
Z65
Valid term has
been expired
Communication error has occurred on the
Fieldbus communication using
HN571/HN573/HN575.
•
Check the state of the following items.
• Program memory capacity
• Status of expansion cassette (HR437)
mounting
• APLC open option
• Write the machine tool builder macro
program to the FROM.
• If the operations, such as editing, done
while the NC power was OFF can be
invalidated, the program does not need to
be written to the FROM.
• Increase the value specified as the "#1206
G1bF" parameter.
• Decrease the value specified as the
"#1207 G1btL" parameter.
• Lower the feedrate.
• Refer to (Note 4) for details.
The valid term will be expired in less than a • Obtain a decryption code by making a
week. Remaining valid term is xx more days. payment. Enter the decryption code.
No decryption code was input before the
valid term was expired.
II - 36
• Obtain a decryption code by making a
payment. Enter the decryption code.
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
Message
Z67
CC-Link
communication
error
Z68
CC-Link
unconnected
!
Details
Remedy
A communication error occurred during
CC-Link communication using CC-Link unit.
•
Refer to "List of Messages" in CC-Link
(Master/Slave) Specification manual
(BNP-C3039-214).
The cable connected between CC-Link unit
and each device is disconnected or broken.
•
•
Connect the cable.
Check whether or not the cable is broken.
CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery following local laws.
(Note 1) The display of Z52 battery fault 0001 can be removed by resetting. However, the warning state will
not be cancelled until the battery is replaced.
(Note 2) Temperature warning
If the alarm is displayed when an overheat alarm is detected‚ the overheat signal will be output
simultaneously. If the machine is in automatic operation‚ the operation will be continued‚ but
restarting will not be possible after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible
after block stop or feed hold.) The alarm will be reset and the overheat signal will turn OFF when the
temperature drops below the specified temperature.
Z53 CNC overheat
000x
↑
0001 : The temperature in the controller is high.
0002 : The temperature around the communication terminal
(setting and display unit) is high.
0003 : The temperature in the controller and around the communication
terminal (setting and display unit) is high.
The ambient temperature must be lowered immediately when a "Z53 CNC overheat" alarm occurs‚
but if machining must be continued‚ the alarm can be invalidated by turning the following parameter OFF.
PLC parameter bit selection #6449
76543210
††††††††
Communication terminal
(setting and display unit)
Controller
II - 37
0: Detection invalid
1: Detection valid
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
(Note 3) RIO communication interrupt
If communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit fails, the alarm and remote I/O unit
number are displayed.
Board connection remote I/O
communication interrupted station
(a)(b)
Z55 RIO communication stop
↓↓
††††††††
Remote I/O 3rd part system
communication interrupted station
Remote I/O 1st part system
communication interrupted station
Remote I/O 2nd part system
communication interrupted station
(a) and (b) above indicate the following matters.
Alarm
number
RIO
(seventh
station)
RIO
(sixth
station)
RIO
(fifth
station)
RIO
(fourth
station)
0
×
×
×
2
3
×
×
×
×
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
RIO
(third
station)
RIO
(second
station)
RIO
(first
station)
RIO
(0th
station)
0
1
8
Alarm
number
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
2
×
3
×
×
×
×
4
×
×
×
5
6
×
7
8
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
1
9
A
×
B
C
×
×
×
D
E
×
F
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
This also applies for the remote I/O 1st part system communication interrupted station, remote I/O 3rd part
system communication interrupted station and board connection remote I/O communication interrupted
station.
II - 38
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
(Note 4)
Z60 Fieldbus communication error
n1 n2 n3 n4
Classification No.
Message
Class.
No.
n1
n2
Details
Shows state of the master channel (shown in hexadecimal number)
00: Offline
In initializing
40: Stop
Cutting I/O communication
80: Clear
Resetting output data of each slave by sending 0 data.
C0: In operation
In I/O communication
Shows error state (shown in hexadecimal number)
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BIT
Details
0
Control error: Parameter error
1
Auto clear error: Communication with all the slave channels was cut because
a communication with one slave channel had an error.
2
Non exchange error: Slave channel with communication error is found
3
Fatal error: The communication cannot be continued because sever network
failure exists.
4
Event error: Short-circuit was found on the network.
5
Not ready: CNC communication is not ready.
6
Time out error: Time out was detected in communication with each channel.
7
Not used
n3
Shows error No. (shown in hexadecimal number)
Refer to "(a) Error in master channel" and "(b) Error in slave channel" for details.
n4
Shows slave No. where communication error has occurred.
number)
"FF" means an error in master channel.
II - 39
(shown in hexadecimal
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms
(a) Error in master channel (when remote address with an error is FF (hexadecimal number))
Value in
n3
Details
Remedy
0
No error
Operating normally
32
No USR_INTF-task
Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
33
No global data field
34
No FDL-task
35
No PLC-task
37
Master parameter incorrect
39
Slave parameter incorrect
3C
Data offset exceeding allowable set
value received
3D
Slave data send range overlap
3E
Slave data receive range overlap
3F
Not set data hand shake
40
RAM range exceeded
41
Slave parameter data set illegal
CA
No segment
Check the configuration setting.
Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
D4
Data base read illegal
Download the configuration data again.
D5
Operating system illegal
Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
DC
Watch dog error
DD
Hand shake mode
No data communication by 0
DE
Master auto clear mode
When setting auto clear mode, the auto clear
mode was performed because one slave was
not able to connect in run time.
(b) Error in slave channel (when remote address with an error is other than FF (hexadecimal
number))
Value in
n4
Details
Remedy
2
Station overflow reported
3
Station stopped responding to
master command
9
No slave required responding data
11
No station respond
12
No master to logical token ring
15
Illegal parameter requested
II - 40
Check the configuration of slave channel in
which error has occurred. Check if there is
any short-circuit in wire to bus.
1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
ZUU Message {{{{ ††††
Axis name
Error No.
Message
Class
(1) Class: Z70 Abs data error
This error is displayed if the absolute position data is lost in the absolute position detection system.
Error
No.
Details
Remedy
Alarm reset
Zero point
when power
initialization
is turned OFF
Required
-
Servo
alarm
No.
-
0001 Abs posn base set
incomplete
Zero point initialization is
incomplete.
Otherwise, the spindle was
removed.
Complete zero point
initialization.
0002 Absolute position lost
The absolute position
reference point data saved in
the NC has been destroyed.
Input the parameters. If the
reference point data cannot be
restored‚ perform zero point
initialization.
(Required)
-
-
0003 Abs posn param changed
The parameters used to
detect the absolute position
have been changed.
Correctly set the parameters.
Turn the power on again‚ and
perform zero point initialization.
Required
-
-
0004 Abs posn initial set illegal
The zero point initialization
point is not at the grid
position.
Reperform zero point
initialization.
Required
-
-
0005 Abs posn param restored
Restoration was possible
with parameter input in the
above No.0002 state.
Turn the power on again‚ and
operation will be possible.
Not required
-
-
Required
-
(9E)
etc.
#1003
#1016
#1017
#1018
#1040
#2049
iunit
iout
rot
ccw
M_inch
type
#2201
#2202
#2218
#2219
#2220
#2225
PC1
PC2
PIT
RNG1
RNG2
MTYP
Replace the detector and
0080 Abs posn data lost
The absolute value data was complete zero point
initialization.
lost, because the
multi-rotation counter data in
the detector was incorrect,
etc.
II - 41
1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms
Error
No.
Details
Remedy
0101 Abs posn error(servo alm 25) Reperform zero point
initialization.
The power was turned ON
again after the servo alarm
No. 25 displayed.
0106 Abs posn error(servo alm
E3)
The power was turned ON
again after the servo alarm
No. E3 displayed.
Reperform zero point
initialization.
Alarm reset
Zero point
when power
initialization
is turned OFF
Required
-
Required
-
Servo
alarm
No.
(25)
(E3)
(Note) To release alarm "Z70 Abs data error", enter the parameter data output when establishing the
absolute position and turn ON the power again. For the rotary axis, however, the alarm cannot be
released by entering the parameter data.
(2) Class: Z71 Abs encoder failure
This alarm is displayed if an error is found in the detector for the absolute position detection system.
Alarm reset
Zero point
when power
initialization
is turned OFF
Required
0001 AbsEncoder:Backup voltage Replace the battery‚ check the
cable connections‚ and check
(Z70-0101
drop
the detector. Turn the power
displays after
The backup voltage in the
ON again‚ and perform zero
power is
absolute position detector
point initialization.
turned ON
dropped.
again.)
Error
No.
Details
Remedy
Servo
alarm
No.
25
0003 AbsEncoder: Commu error
Communication with the
absolute position detector
was not possible.
Check and replace the cables‚
card or detector. Turn the
power ON again‚ and perform
zero point initialization.
(Required)
Only when
detector is
replaced.
Reset
91
0004 AbsEncoder: Abs data
changed
The absolute position data
fluctuated when establishing
the absolute position.
Check and replace the cables‚
card or detector. Turn the
power ON again‚ and perform
zero point initialization.
(Required)
Only when
detector is
replaced.
Reset
93
0005 AbsEncoder: Serial data
error
An error was found in the
serial data from the absolute
position detector.
Check and replace the cables‚
card or detector. Turn the
power ON again‚ and perform
zero point initialization.
(Required)
Only when
detector is
replaced.
Reset
92
0006 AbsEncoder: Abs/inc posn
diffr
Servo alarm E3
Absolute position counter
warning
Operation is possible until the
power is turned off.
0007 AbsEncoder: Initial commu
err
Initial communication with the
absolute position detector
was not possible.
Check and replace the cables‚
card or detector. Turn the
power ON again‚ and perform
zero point initialization.
II - 42
(Required)
Reset
When power
(Z70-0106
is turned ON displays after
again.
power is
turned ON
again.)
(Required)
Only when
detector is
replaced.
Reset
E3
18
1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms
(3) Class: Z72 Message: Position check error
This alarm is displayed if an error is detected when comparing the detector's absolute position and
controller coordinate values in the absolute position system.
(4) Class: Z73 Message: Absolute position data warning
This warning is displayed for the absolute position detection system.
Alarm
No.
0001
Details
Remedy
Battery for abs data fault
Servo alarm 9F
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is low or the cable is
damaged, there is no need to initialize the
absolute position.
(Note) When this alarm occurs, do not turn OFF the drive unit power to protect the absolute position data.
Replace the battery while the drive unit power is ON.
II - 43
1. List of Alarms
1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors
1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
ZUU Message {{{{
††††
Axis name
Error No.
Message
Alarm class
(1) Class: Z80 Distance-coded ref scale err
Error
No.
Details
Remedy
0001
Basic position lost
The basic point data memorized by the NC is
broken.
•
Input the parameter. If the basic point data
cannot be recovered, perform the initial
reference position setting.
0002
Basic position restore
The basic point data is recovered by
parameter input.
•
Operation can be started after turning the power
ON.
0003
No spec: Distance-coded scale
Even if the distance-coded reference scale is
not included in the specification, it is set to be
available.
•
•
Check the specification.
If you do not use this function, set the detector
type in servo parameters correctly.
(2) Class: Z81 Synchronous control
Error
No.
0001
0002
Details
Remedy
R-pos adjustment data lost
Reference position adjustment value data in
the NC is damaged.
•
Input the parameter. If the data cannot be
recovered by the parameter, establish the
reference position again.
R-pos adjustment data restored
After the error 0001, by inputting the
parameter, the data was recovered.
•
After the reference position establishment, you
can continue the operation.
II - 44
1. List of Alarms
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
EMG
Emergency stop
††††
Error items
Error Item
Details
Remedy
PLC
The user PLC has entered the emergency stop
state during the sequence process.
• Investigate and remove the cause of the user
PLC emergency stop.
EXIN
The emergency stop input signal for machine
operation board or handy terminal is significant
(open).
• Cancel the emergency stop input signal.
• Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken.
SRV
An alarm occurred in the servo system causing
an emergency stop.
The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not running.
• Investigate and remove the cause of the servo
alarm.
• Check if the rotary switch CS2 on the top of the
controller front panel is set to 1.
• Check if the PLC edit file save screen (onboard
function) [4RUN/SP] (run/stop) switch is turned
ON.
SPIN
Spindle drive unit not mounted
The spindle drive unit is not mounted.
• Cancel the causes of the other emergency
stop.
• Check emergency stop signal input in the
spindle drive unit.
PC_H
High-speed PC processing abnormal
• Check the sequence program.
(To stop monitoring the high-speed PC
processing temporarily, set 1 in "#1219
aux03/bit1". Disable the monitoring function
only as a temporary measure.)
PARA
Setting of the door open II fixed device is illegal.
The dog signal random assignment parameter
setting is illegal.
• Specify the "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156
DOOR_s" parameters correctly.
(When the door open II fixed device is not
used, set "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156
DOOR_s" to "100".)
• Correctly set the "#2073 zrn_dog", "#2074
H/W_OT+", "#2075 H/W_OT-" and "#1226
aux10/bit5" parameters.
STOP
II - 45
1. List of Alarms
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop
Error No.
LINK
Details
Remedy
If the FROM/TO instruction is not executed within • Try to execute the FROM or TO instruction one
500 ms, an emergency stop occurs.
or more times every 500 ms.
MELSEC is held in error and reset states.
The contents of MELSEC-specific code area in
buffer memory have been destroyed.
* Measure the time in which no interrupt request
is issued from MELSEC and store the result in
the R register.
R10190: Current time-out counter
R10191: Counter for maximum time-out after
power-on
R10192: Counter for maximum time-out after
system start-up (backed up)
• Check the MELSEC states.
• Check the MELSEC states.
• Check that HR571 card wiring and external
sequencer transmission are normal.
(Note) When "WAIT" is entered for the PLC
• Check the diagnostic screen for link
serial link, only the preparation sequence
communication errors.
has been established before the
• Check whether the basic specification
communication stops. Therefore, it is
parameters related to serial link parameters are
supposed that the basic specification
specified correctly.
parameters related to serial link
parameters #1902 and #1903 are
incorrect or the #1909 set-time is too
short.
PLC serial link communication has stopped.
WAIT
The preparation sequence is not sent from the
master station. Otherwise, the contents of the
received preparation sequence are inconsistent
with those of the parameters, so that the usual
sequence cannot be started.
• Check that the HR571 card rotary switch and
wiring and the external sequencer transmission
are normal.
• Check the diagnostic screen for link
communication errors.
(Note) When "LINK" is also entered for the PLC
serial link, refer to "Note" in the section,
"LINK".
The HR571 card operates abnormally or the
rotary switch is set incorrectly.
• Check the HR571 card rotary switch and
replace the HR571 card if required.
LAD
The user PLC (ladder sequence) has an illegal
code.
• Check the user PLC (ladder sequence) to see if
it uses illegal device numbers or constants.
CVIN
The external emergency stop function for power
supply is valid. So, the emergency stop input
signal for power supply is significant (open).
• Cancel the emergency stop input signal.
• Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken.
MCT
An emergency stop occurs because the
contactor shutoff test is executing.
• Automatically cancel the emergency stop after
the contactor shutoff is confirmed.
• When the contactor shutoff cannot be
confirmed within 5 seconds after contactor
shutoff test signal (Y742) is input, "Y20
Contactor welding detected" alarm will occur,
and the emergency stop status remains.
• Turn the power ON again after confirming
"contactor's auxiliary b contact" signal is
correctly output to the device that is set with
"#1330 MC_dp1" and "#1331 MC_dp2".
XTEN
II - 46
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
Refer to "1.3 Servo/spindle alarms" for details of the alarm class and alarm clear class combination.
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
S{{ Message UUUU
††††
Axis No. 1 to 4
Alarm information
(Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information)
Message
Alarm class
(1) Class: S01 Aux ax servo alarm
Alarm
information
Details
Remedy
0011
Aux ax PCB err (Drive circuit)
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal PCB.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0013
Aux ax S/W processing error
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal reference
clock.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0016
Aux ax motor/detector type err
Motor type error.
•
Use a correct drive unit and motor
combination.
Detector initial communication error.
•
•
•
Connect correctly.
Replace the motor.
Replace or repair cable.
Detector CPU error.
•
0017
Aux ax PCB error(A/D err)
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal A/D converter.
•
Replace the motor (detector).
Replace servo drive unit.
0025
Aux ax absolute posn lost
An error occurred in the detector's internal absolute
position data.
•
•
Turn the power ON for 2 to 3
minutes while the alarm is
occurring, and then turn the power
ON again.
Replace the battery, and initialize
the absolute position again.
0034
Aux ax CRC error
An error occurred in the communication with the NC.
•
Take countermeasures against
noise.
0036
Aux ax communication timeout
Communication with the NC was cut off.
•
•
•
Connect correctly.
Turn the NC power ON.
Replace the drive unit or NC.
0037
Aux ax parameter error
The parameter setting value is incorrect.
•
Set the parameter correctly.
0038
Aux ax frame error
An error occurred in the communication with the NC.
•
Take countermeasures against
noise.
0039
Aux ax commu INFO error
Undefined data was transferred from the NC.
•
Change the NC software version to
a compatible version.
II - 47
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
(2) Class: S02 Aux ax servo alarm
Alarm
Details
information
0011
Aux ax PCB err (Drive circuit)
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal PCB.
Remedy
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0013
Aux ax S/W processing error
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal reference
clock.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0015
Aux ax EEROM error
A write error occurred to the EEROM in the drive unit.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0017
Aux ax PCB error(A/D err)
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal A/D converter.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0018
Aux ax PCB error(LSI err)
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal LSI.
•
Replace servo drive unit.
0020
Aux ax detector error
An error occurred in the communication between the servo
drive unit and detector.
•
•
Connect correctly.
Replace or repair cable.
0024
Aux ax ground fault detection
A ground fault of the output was detected when the power
was turned ON.
•
•
Repair the ground fault section.
Replace the cable or motor.
(3) Class: S03 Aux ax servo alarm
Alarm
information
Details
0010
Aux ax under voltage
The power voltage is 160V or less.
0030
Aux ax regeneration error
Remedy
The tolerable regeneration power of the internal
regenerative resistor or external regenerative option was
exceeded.
•
•
Review the power supply.
Replace the servo drive unit.
•
•
•
•
Set the parameter #50002 correctly.
Connect correctly.
Lower the positioning frequency.
Change the regenerative option to
a larger capacity.
Lower the load.
Review the power supply.
Replace the servo drive unit.
•
•
0031
0032
Regenerative transistor error
•
Aux ax overspeed
The motor's rotation speed exceeded the tolerable
momentary speed.
•
Aux ax overcurrent
A current exceeding the servo drive unit's tolerable current
flowed.
•
•
•
II - 48
•
•
Increase the acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
Review the gear ratio.
Replace the detector.
Repair the wiring.
Replace the servo drive unit.
Take countermeasures against
noise.
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
Alarm
information
0033
Details
Remedy
Aux ax overvoltage
The voltage of the converter in the servo drive unit was
400V or more.
•
•
•
•
Wire correctly.
Replace the servo drive unit.
For the internal regenerative
resistor, replace the drive unit.
For the external regenerative option,
replace the regenerative option.
0046
Aux ax motor overheating
An operation state causing the motor to overheat
continued.
•
•
Reduce the motor load.
Review the operation pattern.
0050
Aux ax overload 1
The servo drive unit or servomotor overload protection
function activated.
•
•
•
Reduce the motor load.
Review the operation pattern.
Change to a motor or drive unit
with large output.
Change the setting of the
automatic tuning response
characteristics.
Correct the connection.
Replace the servomotor.
•
•
•
0051
Aux ax overload 2
The max. output current flowed for several seconds due to
a machine collision or overload.
•
•
•
•
0052
Aux ax excessive error
A position deflection exceeding the excessive error
detection setting value occurred.
II - 49
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Review the operation pattern.
Change the setting of the
automatic tuning response
characteristics.
Correct the connection.
Replace the servomotor.
Increase the acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
Increase the torque limit value.
Review the power facility capacity.
Review the operation pattern.
Replace the servomotor.
Connect correctly.
Repair or replace the cable.
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
(4) Class: S52 Message: Aux ax servo warning
Alarm
Details
information
0092
Aux ax battery voltage drop
The absolute position detection battery voltage dropped.
Remedy
•
•
Mount a battery.
Replace the battery and initialize
the absolute position.
Aux ax overregeneration warning
The regeneration power may have exceeded the tolerable
range of the built-in regenerative resistor or external
regenerative option.
•
•
•
Lower the positioning frequency.
Change the regenerative option to
a larger one.
Lower the load.
00E1
Aux ax overload warning
The overload alarm 1 could occur.
•
Refer to the items for S03 0050.
00E3
Aux ax abs position counter warning
There is an error in the absolute position detector internal
data.
•
•
Take countermeasures against
noise.
Replace the servomotor.
Aux ax main circuit OFF warning
The servo ON signal was input while the main circuit
power was OFF.
The contactor operation is faulty.
•
Turn ON the main circuit power.
00E0
00E9
(5) Class: Z70 Message: Aux ax abs position error
Alarm
information
Details
Remedy
0001
Aux ax abs posn base set incomplete
The zero point (reference point) has not been initialized in
the absolute position system.
•
Initialize the zero point (reference
point).
0002
Aux ax absolute position lost
The absolute position coordinate data in the drive unit has
been lost.
•
Initialize the zero point (reference
point).
0003
Aux ax abs posn param changed
The absolute position system related parameters have
been changed or lost.
•
Correctly set the parameters and
then initialize the zero point
(reference point).
(6) Class: Z71 Message: Aux ax drop voltage
Alarm
information
0001
Details
Remedy
Aux ax abs encoder: back up voltage drop
The data in the detector has been lost.
Battery voltage drop.
Detector cable wire breakage or looseness.
II - 50
•
Check the battery and detector
cable and then initialize the zero
point (reference point).
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
(7) Class: Z73 Message: Aux ax system warning
Alarm
Details
information
0001
Aux ax battery for abs data fault
Battery voltage drop.
Detector cable wire breakage or looseness.
0003
Aux ax absolute position counter warning
An error occurred in the detector's absolute position
counter.
Remedy
•
Check the battery and detector
cable. The zero point does not
need to be initialized.
•
Replace the detector.
(8) Class: M00 Aux ax operation error
Alarm
information
Details
Remedy
0001
Aux ax dog overrun
When executing dog-type reference position, the zero
point return speed is too fast or the dog length is too short.
•
Lower the zero point return speed
or increase the dog length.
0003
Aux ax R-pnt direction illegal
When executing reference position return, the axis was
moved in the opposite of the designated direction.
•
Move the axis in the correct
direction.
0004
Aux ax external interlock
The axis interlock function is valid.
•
Cancel the interlock signal
0005
Aux ax internal interlock
An interlock was established by the servo OFF function.
•
Cancel the servo OFF.
0007
Aux ax soft limit
The soft limit was reached.
•
Check the soft limit setting and
machine position
0024
Aux ax R ret invld at abs alm
Reference position return was executed during an
absolute position alarm.
•
Initialize the absolute position
reference point and then fix the
absolute position coordinates.
0025
Aux ax R ret invld at ini
Reference position return was executed while initializing
the absolute position.
•
Initialize the absolute position
reference point and then fix the
absolute position coordinates.
II - 51
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
(9) Class: M01 Aux ax operation error
Alarm
Details
information
0101
Aux ax no operation mode
The operation mode is not designated, or the operation
mode was changed during axis movement.
Remedy
•
Correctly designate the operation
mode.
0103
Aux ax feedrate 0
The operation parameter's feedrate setting is zero.
The operation parameter feedrate setting is zero.
Or, the override is valid, and the override value is zero.
•
Set a value other than zero in the
feedrate setting or override value.
0160
Aux ax sta No. illegal
A station No. exceeding the No. of indexed divisions was
designated.
•
Correctly designate the station No.
0161
Aux ax R-pnt ret incomplete
Automatic/manual operation was started before reference
position return was executed with the incremental system.
•
Execute the reference position
return.
0162
Aux abs position initializing
The start signal was input while initializing the absolute
position reference point.
•
Complete the absolute position
reference point initialization.
0163
Aux ax abs position error
The start signal was input during an absolute position
alarm.
•
Initialize the absolute position
reference point and then fix the
absolute position coordinates.
0164
Aux ax arbitrary positioning
The manual operation mode was started during the
random positioning mode.
•
Turn the random positioning mode
OFF before switching to the
manual operation mode.
0165
Aux uneven index sta No. ilgl
The commanded station No. was higher than 9 or the
number of indexing stations during uneven indexing.
•
Check the commanded station No.
and the parameter "#50100 station"
setting.
II - 52
1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms
(10)
Class: Y02 Auxiliary axis MCP alarms
An error occurred during data transfer between the MCP and auxiliary axis drive unit after turning on the
power.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
The software or hardware may be damaged.
0050
Aux ax sys alm: Proc time over
Contact the service center.
0051
(11)
0000
Aux ax commu er:CRC error 1
(10 times/910.2ms)
0001
Aux ax commu er:CRC error 2
(2 continuous times)
0002
Aux ax commu er:Recv timing
(2 continuous times)
xx03
Aux ax commu er:Data ID
(2 continuous times)
xx: Axis No.
xx04
Aux ax commu er:Recv frame no.
(2 continuous times)
xx: Axis No.
A communication error has occurred between the
controller and drive unit.
• Take measures against noise.
• Check that the communication cable connector
between the controller and drive unit and one
between the drive unit are tight.
• Check whether the communication cable
between the controller and drive unit and one
between the drive units are disconnected.
• A driving drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of
the 7-segment LED contents of each driving
drive unit and report to the Service Center.
Class: Y03 Message: Aux ax drive unit unequipped
The drive unit is not properly connected.
Error No.
Details
Remedy
Axis No. bit correspondence (bit 0: 1st axis, bit 1: 2nd axis, Check the auxiliary axis drive unit mounting
state.
1 to 4 bit 2: 3rd axis, bit 3: 4th axis)
• Check the end of the cable wiring.
• Check the cable for broken wires.
• Check the connector insertion.
The auxiliary axis drive unit input power is not
being input.
The auxiliary axis drive unit axis No. switch is
illegal.
II - 53
1. List of Alarms
1.10 Computer Link Errors
1.10 Computer Link Errors
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
LUU Message {
Error No.
Message
Alarm class
(1) Class: L01 Computer link error
Error
No.
-2
-4
-10
Details
Remedy
Serial port being used
Serial port has already being opened or
cannot be used.
•
Timeout error
Communication ends with timeout
CNC has a 248-byte receive buffer.
The time during which CNC receives 248
bytes exceeds the "TIME-OUT" value set in
the I/O device parameter.
•
Host ER signal OFF
HOST ER (CNC DR) signal is not turned ON.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check whether the same port being used by
Anshin-net, etc.
Recheck the parameters for tape operation port.
Set a greater timeout value in the input/output
device parameter.
Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
the HOST transmits data in response to DC1
from CNC (data request).
Check whether or not start code of computer link
parameter is set to 0.
Check whether or not the cable is disconnected
from the connector.
Check whether or not the cable is broken.
Check whether or not the HOST power is turned
ON.
Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
the data to be transmitted to CNC is ISO code.
-15
Parity H error
Communication ends with parity H.
•
-16
Parity V error
Communication ends with parity V.
•
Recheck the data to be transmitted to CNC.
-17
Overrun error
Although CNC transmits DC3 (request to stop
data transfer) to the HOST, it receives data of
10 bytes or more from the HOST, thus
terminates communication.
When CNC is transmitting data to the HOST, it
receives data of 10 bytes or more from the
HOST.
•
Recheck the software as to whether or not the
HOST stops transmitting data within 10 bytes
after receiving DC3.
Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
the HOST transmits data such as a command or
header to CNC during receiving a work program.
II - 54
•
1. List of Alarms
1.11 User PLC Alarms
1.11 User PLC Alarms
(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)
UUU Message {{{{ {{{{
Sub-status 2
Sub-status 1
Message
Alarm class
Message
U01
No user
PLC
Sub-status
1
-
2
-
Details
Remedy
PLC program is not input.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
Download the PLC program of the
format selected with the PLC
environment selection parameters
(bit selection #51/bit 4).
U10
0x0010
Illegal PLC
-
PLC scan time error
The scan time is 1 second or
longer.
Edit the PLC program size to a
smaller size.
0x0040
-
PLC program operation mode
illegal
PLC program different from the
designated mode was
downloaded.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
Download the PLC program
having the same format as when
the power was reset or turned
ON.
0x0080
-
GPPW ladder code error
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
Download the correct GPPW
format PLC program.
0x008x
-
PLC4B ladder code error
An illegal circuit was found in the
PLC4B ladder.
bit1: PC medium-speed circuit
illegal
bit2: PC high-speed circuit illegal
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
Download the correct PLC4B
format PLC program.
0x0400 Number of
ladder
steps
Turn the power ON again.
Software illegal interrupt
The PLC program process stopped If the error is not reset, download
the correct PLC program.
abnormally due to an illegal
software command code.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
II - 55
1. List of Alarms
1.11 User PLC Alarms
Message
Sub-status
1
2
U10
0x800x Number of
Illegal PLC
PLC
program
steps
Details
Remedy
Software exception
The PLC program process stopped
abnormally due to a bus error, etc.
bit 0: BIN command operation error Refer to the methods for using the
bit 1: BCD command operation
BCD and BIN function
error
commands.
bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET
command error
bit7: IRET command execution
error
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) is
applied for bit 6/7.
Turn the power ON again.
If the error is not reset, download
the correct PLC program.
U50
PLC
stopped
The PLC program is stopped.
Start the PLC program.
U55
PLC
stopped /
is not
saved
U60
Ladder is
not saved
The PLC program is stopped and not Write the PLC program into ROM.
written into ROM.
The PLC program is not written into
ROM.
Write the PLC program into ROM.
(Note) The number of PLC program steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of error
occurrence steps because of the PLC program timing. Use this as a guideline of the occurrence
place.
II - 56
1. List of Alarms
1.12 Network Service Errors
1.12 Network Service Errors
Message
N001
Modem initial
error
Details
• There is an error in the modem
connection when the power is turned
ON.
N002
Redial over
• The dial transmission failed more than • Wait a while, and then transmit again.
the designated No. of redial times.
N003
TEL unconnect
• The phone line is not connected.
• Check the modem’s phone line connection.
N004
Net
communication
error
• An error other than the above errors
occurred during communication.
• Note down the circumstances under which
this error occurred, and contact the Service
Center.
N005
Invalid net
communication
• The modem connection port is being
used for another function such as
input/output.
• The modem connection port settings
are incorrect.
• Quit using the modem connection port with
the other function, and then turn the power
ON again.
• Check the modem connection port settings.
N006
Received result
of diagnosis
• The diagnosis data file has been
received
• Erase the message.
N007
Send data size
over
• A file larger than Anshin-net server
capacity (64Kbyte) has been
transmitted during machining data
sharing.
• Reduce the size of machining program file
so that it won't exceed the capacity of
Anshin-net server.
N008
No file on server
• When machining data sharing function • Before receiving file, confirm that a
is being executed, file reception
machining program file exists on Anshin-net
fails, as the file does not exist on
server.
Anshin-net server.
• File reception fails due to wrong
• Input the password again.
password when machining data
sharing is being executed.
• Data reception fails due to wrong
• Input the customer number again.
customer number when machining
data sharing is being executed.
N009
Password error
N010
Customer
number error
Remedy
• Check the connection between the NC and
modem, connection port and modem power.
• As the size of file to be received is
• Ensure sufficient free space on the NC side.
bigger than free space on the NC side,
file reception fails during machining
data sharing.
• A file on Anshin-net server cannot be • Check if the file exists on Anshin-net server.
N012
File deletion error deleted when machining data sharing • Note down the circumstances under which
is being executed.
this error occurred, and contact the Service
Center.
N011
Storage capacity
over
II - 57
2. Operation Messages
2.1 Search-related Operation Messages
2. Operation Messages
The following messages display on each screen.
2.1 Search-related Operation Messages
Message
Searching
Details
• The operation search is being executed.
Search completed
•
The operation search was completed correctly.
Verifying
•
The program is being verified.
Verifying stopped
•
The program verification stopped.
Search error
•
Setting error
•
Restart search is completed
•
The restart search was completed.
Executing restart search
•
The restart search is being executed.
Execute operation search
•
The program is not searched.
Execute the operation search.
Can't cancel verify stop
•
The compare stop cannot be canceled because the operation is not
in a compare stop.
Executing top search
•
The top search is being executed correctly.
Top search completed
•
The top search was completed correctly.
Top search not completed
•
The restart search (type 2) was executed without the top search.
Can't input data
•
Data input was attempted during M, S, T, B history display.
Input some of ONB
• Awaiting
Verifying stop posn already
registered
•
The verify stop position has already been registered.
No searched program
•
The program has not been searched.
Program restarting
•
The program is being restarted.
Program error
•
The restart search was executed in the program with an error.
N/B block not found
•
The restart search was executed, designating N or B No. not exist.
Restart search interrupted by
reset
•
Reset was executed during the restart search.
No. of repetitions exceeded
•
The restart search was executed, designating the number of
repetitions exceeding the number set in the program.
Program not found
•
The restart search was executed, designating a program No. not
exist.
Could not find the designated ONB number.
Review the ONB number or machining program settings.
• The operation search could not be completed correctly.
• When the parameter (#9005) of the tape mode port was set out of the
range or when the port was not connected, an operation search of
NC serial was performed.
• The T code list search failed. Review the program name.
• Could not find the machining program in HD or IC card.
• Check the parameters for HD operation or IC card operation.
• Tape search was executed during the HOST LINK communication.
The directory name exceeded the display range.
A directory path for which the entire directory cannot be displayed
cannot be designated in the directory name area.
• The search is not possible because ONB number is not designated.
ONB number input
II - 58
2. Operation Messages
2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages
2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Searching
•
Search error
•
Executing automatic operation
• An
Setting error
•
Execute operation search
•
The program is not searched.
Execute the operation search.
Checking
•
The program check is being executed.
Check stopped
•
The program check is being stopped.
Work form is illegal
• A workpiece is not drawn correctly because the two or more
workpiece widths are set to "0".
Push [Check reset] menu
•
An error occurred in the graphic check.
Press the [Check reset] menu key to reset the error.
Executing trace
•
The trace mode is valid.
Program check completed
•
The trace in the program check completed with an M02/M30 code.
Reset complete
•
The program check was reset.
Tool interfere with work
•
The tool contacted the workpiece when performing rapid traverse
(G0) movement with the interference check enabled.
Program checking
•
The program check is being executed.
Executing reset operation
•
The program check is being reset.
Executing trace(tip posn)
•
The tip position trace mode is valid.
Executing BG simulation
•
The back ground simulation is being executed.
Draw library inside error (n)
•
Contact the service center.
The check search is being executed.
Could not find the designated ONB number.
Review the ONB number or machining program settings.
• The check search could not be completed correctly.
• When the parameter (#9005) of the tape mode port was set out of the
range or when the port was not connected, an operation search of
NC serial was performed.
attempt was made to perform operations such as parameter, tool
compensation amount data and coordinate system offset settings
during auto operation. (Input/output also possible during auto
operation)
• The machining program and MDI data that the operator is attempting
to edit cannot be edited during auto operation.
• It is not possible to be executed a check search or check start-up
during auto operation.
• An attempt was made to set the verify stop position during auto
operation.
The directory name exceeded the display range.
A directory path for which the entire directory cannot be displayed
cannot be designated in the directory name area.
• The check search is not possible because ONB number is not
designated.
• A non-existent axis name or setting that does not exist in the format
was made when making the display mode settings.
Set using an existing axis name.
• Incorrect tool No. was specified at the execution of tool clear.
II - 59
2. Operation Messages
2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Program check not possible
•
Graphic check was attempted during the Computer link B operation.
Execute check search
•
The program check is disabled. Execute the check search.
Solid check disabled (memory
shortage)
•
The 3D program check is disabled due to the memory shortage.
Separate the programs and execute the check drawing again.
Press the menu [Work init] once before performing the check
drawing again.
2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages
Message
Erase? (Y/N)
Details
•
Message to confirm the line erase.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Variables are deleted.
[N]
: Variables are not deleted.
2.4 PLC Switch-related Operation Messages
Message
Set up parameter ?(Y/N)
Details
•
Message to confirm the parameter setup.
[Y] or [INPUT] : It will be possible to make settings.
[N]
: It will not be possible to make settings.
2.5 Compensation-related (Tool compensation, coordinate system offset) Operation
Messages
Message
Details
Erase? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the erasing.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data.
[N]
: Do not erase the data.
Clear all axes? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the all axes clear.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Clear the data for all axes.
[N]
: Do not clear the data.
Cannot return to origin
•
Clear all? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the clearing the all data.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Clear all data.
[N]
: Do not clear the data.
Input P number
•
•
The coordinate system [Coord G54.1 P] menu was pressed.
The expansion workpiece coordinate system P No. was input.
Data clear complete
•
Clearing of the collection data is complete.
Execute the collection data
clear?
•
Determines whether to clear the collection data. Press [Y] or [INPUT]
to clear the data.
Operations other than line paste, paste and data input cannot be
undone.
• It is the initial state. Cannot undo.
• The last operation was performed in another part system. Cannot
undo the operation.
II - 60
2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Overwrite this file?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the overwriting.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Overwrite the file.
[N]
: Do not overwrite the file.
Over run error
•
The buffer overran or overflowed.
Memory over
•
The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
Edit lock B
•
It is not possible to change machining program B (8000 to 8999: user
standard subprogram) or machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock B is enabled.
Edit lock C
•
It is not possible to change machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock C is enabled.
Can't make directory on this
device
•
Creation of a directory was attempted for a device that cannot have a
directory.
Designated file does not exist
•
The file specified in device A, and B does not exist.
The applicable file does not exist in the specified directory.
•
The file name is a directory
•
A directory was designated for the file transfer. A directory cannot be
transferred.
Change complete
•
The data conversion completed correctly.
Changing
•
The data is being converted.
Erase complete
•
The file has been erased.
Erase ended. Some file not
erased
•
The file erasing completed, but there are some files that could not be
erased.
Verify error
• An
Compare error. Compare next
file?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the comparison
[Y] or [INPUT] : Compare the next file.
[N]
: Do not compare the next file.
Compare complete
•
The data comparison completed.
Verifying
•
The data is being compared.
The file already exists
•
Can't erase designated file
•
Erasing was attempted of a file that cannot be erased.
Can't rename designated file
•
An attempt was made to change the name of a file that cannot be
renamed.
Can't condense designated file
•
Condensing of a file that cannot be condensed was attempted.
Designated file is locked
•
Changing was attempted of a locked file.
Can't open file for dev A
•
Could not find the file for device A.
Or, the file is in a state in which it cannot be accessed.
Can't open file for dev B
•
Could not find the file for device B.
Or, the file is in a state in which it cannot be accessed.
Can't read file for dev A
•
Could not read in the file for device A.
Recheck the connection status for device A or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't read file for dev B
•
Could not read in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device B or the input/output
parameter setting.
error occurred when performing a file verification.
The input file name already exists.
• The file name after renaming already exists.
II - 61
2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Can't close file for dev A
•
Contact the service center
Can't close file for dev B
•
Contact the service center.
Can't write file for dev A
•
Could not write in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device A or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't write file for dev B
•
Could not write in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device B or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't seek file for dev A
•
Contact the service center.
Can't seek file for dev B
•
Contact the service center.
File name not designated for dev
A
•
A file name was not designated for device A.
File name not designated for dev
B
•
A file name was not designated for device B.
Can't open directory for dev A
•
Could not find a directory corresponding to device A.
Can't open directory for dev B
•
Could not find a directory corresponding to device B.
Different devices designated in A
and B
•
The same device must be designated for devices A and B, but
differing devices were designated.
Timeout error
•
A timeout error occurred when communicating with the external
device.
Checking
•
Cannot be executed during a check
Make directory complete
•
Creation of the directory has been completed.
Dir create Complete
•
Creation of the directory has been completed.
Can't make directory
•
An error occurred while creating the directory.
The directory is not empty
• A file
Directory pass is illegal
•
The designated directory path name is illegal.
Input a correct directory path name.
Data protect
•
Setting, erasing, parameter setting, etc., of the various data is
prohibited, because the data protect key is validated.
Transfer complete
•
The data transfer completed correctly.
Transferring
•
The data is being transferred.
Parity H error
•
A parity H error was detected.
Parity V error
•
A parity V error was detected.
File entry over
•
The No. of registration files designated in the specifications was
exceeded, so the file could not be registered.
Program No. not found in the file
•
There is no program number in the selected file.
Executing format
•
The formatting is being executed.
Format complete
•
The formatting completed.
Format error
•
The formatting failed.
Framing error
•
An error occurred between the NC and the external device.
Variable conversion error
•
An error occurred during the M2 macro conversion, and the
conversion failed.
was found in the directory.
Erase the file in the directory.
II - 62
2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Merge complete
•
The data merge completed.
Merge execution
•
The data merge is being executed.
Memory alloc error
•
Securing of the communication data range failed.
Rename complete
•
OK? (Y/N)
The rename has been completed.
• Message to confirm the operation.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Execute the operation
[N]
: Cancel the operation.
I/O not ready
•
An error occurred between the NC and the external device.
I/O parameter error
•
The external device settings and input/output parameters do not
match.
I/O port busy
•
Input/output was not possible as the I/O port is busy.
FD write protect
•
The FD is write-protected.
Release the write protection.
PLC running
• An
FD not ready
• An
attempt was made to input a user PLC during PLC RUN.
• Stop the PLC on the maintenance screen.
• An
attempt was made to perform an FD operation search with no FD.
attempt was made to display the FD list with no FD.
MemoryCard not ready
• An
attempt was made to perform operations with no memory card.
DS not ready
• An
attempt was made to perform operations with no data server.
Can't write in READ-ONLY file
•
Contact the service center.
Condense complete
•
Condensing has been completed.
A directory does not exist
•
The specified directory does not exist.
Setting complete normally
•
Decryption code setting file of the credit system was set normally.
II - 63
2. Operation Messages
2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages
2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Designate copy end posn
•
The copy start position was specified using the cursor. Continue and
specify the copy end position using the cursor.
Copy start posn and end posn
reversed
•
When the copy range was designated, a position before the start
position was designated as the end position.
Columns of copy start and end
different
•
A different column (axis or part system) was specified for the copy
start/end position at the screen with the arrangement configuration
for each axis and part system.
Copy range is inadequate
•
Could not find the parameter No. for the copy start position.
A value larger than the last parameter No. was designated as the
copy end position parameter No.
Check the designated copy range.
•
Setting error
•
•
The port is already being used.
The parameter HOST LINK was turned ON during the Anshin-net
communication.
Setting error: column n
• The nth column setting data is inappropriate when multiple axes were
set at the same time (/ division). (Settings have been made up to the
(n-1)th column.)
Password is illegal
• The password designated for displaying the Machine
Parameter screen is illegal.
Input the password
•
The menu key for first displaying the Machine Parameter
screen was pressed after the power was turned ON.
Paste error
•
An attempt was made to paste in a different parameter from the copy
parameter.
Paste? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the operation when pasting.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Paste the data at the current cursor position.
[N]
: Do not paste the data.
Data protect
•
Setting, erasing, parameter settings, etc., of the various data is
prohibit, because the data protect key is validated.
Executing automatic operation
•
An attempt was made to make parameter settings during auto
operation.
Can't select
•
No odd number for R register
start No.
The password designated for displaying the machine parameters has
not been input.
• Display of the machine parameters was attempted on the [Param
No.] menu, but the password has not been input.
Press the [Machine param] menu, and input the password for
displaying the machine parameters.
• An odd number cannot be used for R register start No.
Use an even number.
II - 64
2. Operation Messages
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages
Message
Details
TLM switch OFF
•
Can't take-in skip posn
•
Can't write coordinates data
•
Measurement, retrieving of the skip position, writing the coordinates
data etc. was attempted when the TLM switch was OFF.
Could not retrieve the skip position.
Check the following:
< When measuring the workpiece >
1. Is the name of the axis to be measured designated in the basic axis
(I, J, K)?
2. Is the axis that executed the axis movement a measurement axis?
< When measuring the rotation >
1. Is the name of the axis to be measured designated in the coordinate
rotation plane (horizontal axis, vertical axis)?
2. Is the axis that executed the axis movement a measurement axis?
Could not obtain the measured axis No.
The measured angle was illegal.
• Could not write into the coordinate system offset.
Measure again.
• The work coordinate offset data was attempted to set when the
measurement counter does not have the necessary values.
• The work coordinate offset date was attempted to set in the slave
axis.
•
Sensor take in not possible
•
Could not retrieve the position measured with the touch sensor.
Measure again.
Can't measure
•
Measurement failed.
Sensor signal was illegally
turned on
•
Can't write compensation data
•
Offset No. not found
•
TLM axis is illegal
•
During 2 or more axes movement, the tool length measurement was
executed by turning the sensor ON. Keep the tool away from the
sensor and execute the measurement by one axis.
TLM axis not returned to ref.
position
•
The tool length measurement was executed by tuning the sensor ON
for the axis in which dog-type reference point return has not been
executed. Carry out reference point return for the measurement axis.
Can't write rotation parameter
•
The measured result cannot be set in the process parameter.
The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode
(TLM) signal was validated.
• The sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement after
the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.
• The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100µm from the final
entry start position.
• Move the axis in a safe direction after turning the sensor signal OFF
or turning the tool measurement mode signal OFF.
The cursor position and the cell for writing the compensation amount
(length dimension, radius dimension) do not match.
Match the cursor position with the cell for writing the compensation
amount.
During manual tool length measurement, the sensor was turned ON
designating tool compensation No. not exist.
• During manual tool length measurement, the measurement method
was switched to manual tool length measurement 2 designating tool
compensation No. not exist.
• Correctly set the R register of compensation No.
II - 65
2. Operation Messages
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages
Message
Can't calculate center & angle for
rot
Details
•
Three points necessary for calculation are not retrieved.
•
Center shift amount or censor radius was failed to retrieve.
•
Calculation of the center and the angle was failed.
Input 0 to coord center & angle
for rot
•
The center and the angle are not "0".
Can't calculate
•
Hole center cannot be determined.
Meas axis not returned to ref.
position
•
The workpiece measurement was executed when dog-type reference
point return has not been executed. Carry out reference point return
for the measurement axis.
Set "0" in the parameter "#8623 Coord rot centr (H)", "#8624 Coord
rot centr (V)" and "#8627 Coord rot angle".
II - 66
2. Operation Messages
2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages
2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages
Message
Designated group already exists
Details
•
•
An already existing group No. was designated when changing the
group No. (Tool life screen (grp))
An already existing group No. was designated when newly creating
the group. (Tool life screen (grp list))
Designate a group No. that does not already exist.
Designated group does not exist
•
Erasing was attempted on the Tool life screen (grp list) of a group that
does not exist.
Can't register group
•
The group registration process on the Tool life screen (grp list) failed.
Can't delete group
•
The group deletion process on the Tool life screen (grp list) failed.
Erase? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the erasing.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data
[N]
: Do not erase the data.
Delete all groups? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the erasing of all groups.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase all groups
[N]
: Do not erase all groups.
Can't delete all groups
•
All groups' deletion cannot be executed because data protection key
(KEY 1) is validated or automatic operation mode is validated, etc.
during all groups' deletion. All groups' deletion cannot be executed
because nothing has been registered to group, also.
Pot number not exist
•
The set pot number does not exist.
Check the pot number.
Create new file? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the operation when newly creating data, files,
etc.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Newly create.
[N]
: Cancel the operation.
Input the tool number
•
Waiting tool number input.
Clear not possible
•
The clear range is incorrect.
Spindle/stndby tool display not
possible
•
The spindle standby cannot be displayed due to the user PLC setting.
Contact the machine tool builder.
Format tool life data? (Y/N)
•
Determines whether to format the tool life management data. When
[Y] is input, the formatting is executed.
Tool life format complete
•
The tool life management data formatting completed.
Exists in spindle/standby. Set?
(Y/N)
•
Exists in magazine 1. Set? (Y/N)
•
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 2. Set? (Y/N)
•
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 3. Set? (Y/N)
•
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 4. Set? (Y/N)
•
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 5. Set? (Y/N)
•
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. for
spindle/standby.
II - 67
2. Operation Messages
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages
Message
Buffer correct not possible
Details
•
•
Buffer correction cannot be performed for this program.
Buffer correction was attempted during the BTR operation.
Can't write into file
•
Could not write the data to the memory with the buffer correction.
Contact the service center.
Overwrite this file?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm when registering MDI
[Y] or [INPUT] : Overwrite the file.
[N]
: Do not overwrite the file.
Memory over
•
The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
Designated character string not
found
•
Could not find the search results and character string in the program.
Save current file ?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the saving.
[Y] : Save the changes to the current file.
[N] : Do not save the changes to the current file.
A file does not exist
• An
Executing
•
Designated file does not exist
• An
Erase complete
•
The data erasing completed.
Can't erase designated file
•
The selected file cannot currently be erased.
Designated file does not exist
•
A file that does not exist was designated when file editing.
Designated file already exists
•
When creating a new file, a file name was designated that already
exists.
Replace? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the character string replacement.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Replace the character string.
[N]
: Do not replace the character string.
File access error
•
Contact the Service Center.
File open error
•
The designated file is already open.
Editing
•
A program is being edited on the screen.
Save the program to write it into the memory.
Program entry over
•
The program could not be registered in the memory when attempted,
because the No. of registrations designated in the specifications
would be exceeded.
Block char nos over
•
The character number limitation in one block was exceeded.
Paste error
•
Pasting was attempted within the copy range of the same file.
Copy range is inadequate
•
Area designation is inadequate
Designated line is out of
program range
attempt was made to select and edit a non-existent file.
Following menu's process is executing now:
"Line paste", "Line clear", "Undo", "String search", "String replace",
"Miss warning", or "Next miss".
attempt was made to select and erase a non-existent file.
The copy range designation is inadequate.
Check whether the designated range exists.
• The range was designated exceeding 100 lines during mass editing.
• The area designation is inadequate.
Check whether the designated area exists.
•
Designation was attempted of a line No. larger than the No. of lines in
the entire program.
II - 68
2. Operation Messages
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
•
MDI search complete
Editing of the MDI was started, but the MDI setting was incomplete.
• During playback editing:
G90 was set when control parameter "Playback G90" was OFF.
G91 was set when control parameter "Playback G90" was ON.
• The MDI search completed.
Can't search in MDI mode
•
MDI no setting
Abs/Inc mode is illegal
•
The restart search was attempted during MDI mode.
Execute the restart search after switching other than MDI mode.
MDI Set ended
•
MDI setting cannot be executed.
MDI Setting error
•
MDI setting was completed.
MDI search error
•
Could not execute the MDI search.
MDI entry complete
•
MDI entry has been completed.
Can't edit except in MDI mode
•
"#1144 mdlkof" (MDI setting lock) is "0" and therefore it is not possible
to edit the MDI program in a mode other than MDI mode.
Input miss was detected
• An
Input miss was not detected
• A search
Can't edit a file except in NC
memory
Save it
•
Editing cannot be performed at the edit window for programs other
than those in the NC memory.
•
The cursor was tried to move beyond the editable range during
mass-editing. Save, then operate again.
Save not possible
• A special
Save left side file? (Y/N)
• Message to confirm whether saving the left side file of the
multi-program display type
[Y]: Save the change
[N]: Do not save the change
Save right side file?
(Y/N)
• Message to confirm whether saving the right side file of the
multi-program display type
[Y]: Save the change
[N]: Do not save the change
Can't edit because of size over
• The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
• If the memory capacity of the transfer designation device is exceeded
during the automatic backup, increase the available memory of the
device.
Can't edit the searched file
•
The serial file cannot be edited.
DS not ready
•
Operation was attempted when a DS was not inserted.
Creating or opening a program was attempted when a DS was not
inserted.
was performed for an input miss, however, none was found.
file (history file etc.) that cannot be saved was edited and an
attempt was made to save it. Perform an operation to quit editing.
• Failed saving due to file size over, etc. during mass-editing.
• Setting of "#1166 fixpro" was illegal. Use the settings for a regular
program.
• MDI cannot be entered due to MDI editing mode. Press INPUT key
and finish editing.
•
FD not ready
input miss was detected.
•
The FD operation search was attempted when an FD was not
inserted.
• The FD list display was attempted when an FD was not inserted.
• Creating or opening a program was attempted when an FD was not
inserted.
II - 69
2. Operation Messages
2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
MemoryCard not ready
•
Operation was attempted when a memory card was not inserted.
This cannot be specified
•
Invalid special characters (/E, etc.) were set.
Loading
•
Loading file.
Saving
•
Saving file.
Can't execute playback edit
•
The playback editing cannot be executed because the right side
area is mass-editing mode.
•
Playback editing was attempted while program file to be edited is not
designated. Display a program file in the right side area.
•
The program display or search cannot be executed. Review the
parameter "#1121 pglk_c" (program display lock).
Program display lock C
2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Erase? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm alarm history clear operation
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data
[N]
: Do not erase the data.
Can't write data
•
The data cannot be written.
Device is illegal
•
The designated device is inadequate.
Modal output not possible
•
The modal output process failed.
Modal clear not possible
•
The modal cancel process failed.
Continue display not possible
•
Continuous display is not possible because data is not set at the
cursor position.
One-shot output not possible
•
The one-shot output process failed.
Setting data not found
•
The data has not been set.
Select a menu
•
A device No. was set without selecting a menu operation.
Press any operation menu and input the device No. with a menu
highlighted.
II - 70
2. Operation Messages
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Password is illegal
•
The input password is incorrect.
Input password
•
The [Password] menu key was pressed, and the password input
mode was entered.
Input a password.
Now making back-up
•
Currently backing up system data and the user PLC program to a
specified device.
Backupping
•
The SRAM data is being backed up on the HD.
Backup complete
•
Backup error
•
An error occurred while backing up the SRAM data on the HD.
Select directory to backup
•
Select area by moving cursor, using ↑ and ↓ keys.
Press the "INPUT" key to confirm.
Select directory to restore
•
Select file by moving cursor, using ↑ and ↓ keys.
Press the "INPUT" key to confirm.
Executing format
•
The formatting is being executed correctly.
Format complete
•
The formatting completed correctly.
Format error
•
The NC memory formatting failed.
Contact the nearest service center.
Quit HMI ?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the HMI quitting
[Y] or [INPUT] : Quit the HMI.
[N]
: Do not quit the HMI.
Format NC memory?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the NC memory formatting
[Y] or [INPUT] : Start formatting the NC memory.
[N]
: Do not format the NC memory.
Execute SRAM backup ?(Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the SRAM back up
[Y] or [INPUT] : The SRAM data is backed up to the HD.
[N]
: The SRAM data is not backed up to the HD.
PLC running. Does it stop? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the PLC STOP
[Y] or [INPUT] : Backup the SRAM data on the HD.
[N]
: Do not backup the SRAM data on the HD.
Restoring
•
The system data and user PLC program are now being restored to
the NC from a specified device.
Restore complete
•
Restoration of system data and user PLC program to the NC from a
specified device has been completed.
Auto adjust error
•
Change Ope. test mode
•
Operation of the Operation test screen was attempted when the
operation adjustment mode was not selected.
Test mode sig valid signal is now
OFF
•
The operation adjustment mode cannot be selected because the
operation adjustment mode valid signal (R9998/bit0) is 0.
Backup of the SRAM data on the HD has been completed.
• Back up of system data and user PLC program to a specified device
has been completed.
The H/W status cannot be read properly, and therefore it is not
possible to perform auto adjustments.
Check the remote I/O unit.
Perform manual adjustments.
• The unit is defective. Replace the unit.
II - 71
2. Operation Messages
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Auto adjust complete
• Analog
Auto adjust execution
•
Performing analog output adjustment normally.
Execute? (Y/N)
•
Message to confirm the operation
[Y] or [INPUT] : The currently selected operation is performed.
[N]
: The currently selected operation is not performed.
Unit not equipped
•
The machine is not equipped with an analog output unit.
A serial number is inaccurate
•
The system data to be restored and the serial number in the NC do
not match, and therefore it is not possible to restore.
Check to ensure that the serial number in the NC has been set and
that the system data to be restored matches.
•
Operating aux axis
output adjustment completed normally.
•
It is not possible to set parameter and input/output data during
auxiliary axis operation.
• It is not possible to change the display axis during auxiliary axis
operation.
II - 72
2. Operation Messages
2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages
2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Executing sampling
•
The waveform data is being sampled.
Input the axis name
•
This appears when the data type is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Input the name of the axis to be sampled.
Input axis name/signal No./bit
•
This appears when the data type is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Set the sampling conditions common for Ch1 and Ch2.
Input device name/device No.
• Input
Input file/sub-ID/item/data
•
This appears when an NC file is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Change the area
•
Change the area.
Sampling conditions are illegal
•
The data cannot be sampled as the setting conditions are illegal.
Review the data, vertical scale, sampling rate and horizontal scale on
the Condition setting screen.
Can't start sampling
•
"#1224 aux08/bit0" is "0" and sampling start-up cannot be performed.
The collection invalid
•
The parameters are set to prevent data being collected. Check the
parameters.
The collection begin?
•
Determines whether to start data collection. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
start data collection.
The collection stop?
•
Determines whether to stop data collection. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
stop data collection.
The collection is being executed
•
An attempt was made to start data collection while data collection
was being performed.
The collection is stopping
• An
The collection invalid
•
device name/device No.
attempt was made to stop data collection while data collection was
stopped.
Scroll execution
The data collection is set invalid in the parameter. Check the
parameter.
• The waveform display is being scrolled.
Refresh execution
•
The waveform is being refreshed.
II - 73
2. Operation Messages
2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages
2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Setting absolute position set
•
Setting from the screen was attempted of absolute position detection
data when the "Absolute Position Set" was not ON.
Press the menu key [Absolute Position Set] to turn it ON.
Not the abs position detection
system
•
An absolute position detection system has not been selected for the
currently selected axis.
The machine parameter (Axis specification parameter "#2049 type")
must be set.
Axis name inappropriate
•
The set axis name is inappropriate. Check the axis name.
Not passed on grid
•
The absolute position basic point was set without passing the grid
after the power ON in the dogless-type absolute position detection.
Return one grid back and repeat the procedure.
Can't start
• Settings
•
Illegal direction
•
of "#0 absolute posn set", "#2 Z-point" and "#2055 pushf" are
not adequate.
"AbsEncoder: Serial data error" alarm (Z71 0005) has occurred.
Check the parameter and the alarm.
JOG starting direction is illegal in the machine end stopper method of
the dogless-type absolute position detection.
2.15 System Setup-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Initial parameter creating
•
The initial parameter is being created.
Initial parameter transferring
•
The initial parameter is being transferred.
Spindle initial parameter
transferring
•
The spindle initial parameter is being transferred.
Can't write data
•
The data cannot be written.
Setting of the initial parameter failed.
Contact the service center.
•
•
Param set ended.
Format NC memory? (Y/N)
•
After completing the parameter setting, it determines whether
executing the file format or not.
Enter [Y] or [INPUT] to execute the file format.
Write sample ladder? (Y/N)
•
It determines whether executing writing the sample PLC program or
not. Enter [Y] or [INPUT] to start writing the sample PLC program.
Sample ladder not found
•
The file to set the sample PLC program is lost.
Contact the service center.
II - 74
2. Operation Messages
2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages
2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
Auto backup disabled
(Device illegal)
• Set
Auto backup disabled (No DS)
•
When turning ON the power next time, insert DS.
Auto backup disabled
(No memory card)
•
When turning ON the power next time, insert the memory card.
Auto backup proceeding
•
Wait for the automatic backup to complete.
Auto backup completed
•
The automatic back up is completed.
Memory over
•
The memory capacity of the transfer designation device was
exceeded during the automatic backup. Increase the available
memory of the transfer designation device.
File access error
•
A file access error occurred during the automatic backup. Contact
the service center.
Can't make directory
•
The storage destination directory of the automatic backup data
described in the custom definition file does not exist. Create the
directory of the storage destination.
Write protect
•
The memory card is write-protected. Release the write protection.
a correct value in the device No. of the automatic backup device.
2.17 Alarm History-related Operation Messages
Message
Details
The collection begin? (Y/N)
• Determines whether to start alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
start alarm history.
The collection stop? (Y/N)
• Determines whether to stop alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
stop alarm history.
The collection is being executed • An attempt was made to start alarm history while alarm history was
being performed.
The collection is stopping
• An attempt was made to stop alarm history while alarm history was
being stopped.
Execute the collection data
clear?(Y/N)
• Determines whether to clear alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
clear alarm history.
Data clear complete
• The alarm history cleared was completed.
The collection begin
• The alarm history was started.
The collection stop
• The alarm history was stopped.
II - 75
2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
(1) Messages related to all Anshin-net screens
Message
Details
• Communication has not been started.
Press one-touch call to
• A call is being placed with automatic alarm
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF notification or one-touch call, and a call is being
received from the NC service.
during the one-touch call.
(None)
(2) Messages related to automatic alarm notification
Message
dialing
Details
Do not turn the power OFF
until the automatic alarm
notification ends.
•
•
•
•
Waiting for dialing
Verifying the user
registration
A call is being placed with automatic alarm
notification.
Communication starts when an alarm occurs,
but the line is not connected yet in this state.
This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
Communication has been started with
emergency stop by the servo, spindle or PLC
alarm, or by the establishment of the conditions
set in the parameters.
Do not turn the power OFF ● Redialing since the NC service is using the line
until the automatic alarm for other communication.
notification ends.
Do not turn the power OFF • User authentication is being executed by the
NC service side.
until the automatic alarm
notification ends.
Connecting
Do not turn the power OFF
until the automatic alarm
notification ends.
•
The line is connected with automatic alarm
notification.
Receiving
Do not turn the power OFF
until the automatic alarm
notification ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being received with
automatic alarm notification.
Sending
Do not turn the power OFF
until the automatic alarm
notification ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being sent with automatic
alarm notification.
Transmission
completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Automatic alarm notification has ended, and the
line has been disconnected.
Reception completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
(Status of
communication with
NC service)
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
II - 76
Automatic alarm notification has ended, and the
line has been disconnected.
• This is displayed when at least one file has
been received.
In connection standby state since line is being
used by Anshin-net.
2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
(3) Messages related to automatic alarm notification
Message
Details
Operator notice
effective
If automatic operation
stops while operator
notification is valid, the
designated telephone
number will be contacted.
•
Dialing
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
Operator notification is valid.
• If machining ends normally or abnormally in this
state, communication with operator notification
will start.
•
•
Data is being transmitted with operator
notification.
Communication will start when machining ends
normally or abnormally, but the line is not
connected yet in this state.
This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
Waiting for dialing
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
Redialing since the NC service is using the line
for other communication.
Verifying the user
registration
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
User authentication is being executed by the
NC service side.
Connecting
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
The line is connected with operator notification.
Receiving
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being received with
operator notification.
Sending
Do not turn the power OFF
until the operator
notification ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being sent with operator
notification.
Transmission
completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Operator notification has ended, and the line
has been disconnected.
Reception completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Operator notification has ended, and the line
has been disconnected.
This is displayed when at least one file has
been received.
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
(Status of
communication with
NC service)
II - 77
•
In connection standby state since line is being
used by Anshin-net.
2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
(4) Messages related to automatic alarm notification
Message
Carry out one-touch
call? (Y/N)
Details
Press "Y" to make a
one-touch call and "N" to
cancel.
If the line is being in use, a
connection with NC
service will be established
as soon as the line
becomes idle.
•
•
•
Message
A connection with NC service has not been
established.
The system is confirming whether to actually
make a one-touch call.
This is displayed when the Call menu is
pressed. Press Y or INPUT to execute
one-touch call.
Details
Dialing
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
Waiting for dialing
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
Redialing since the NC service is using the line
for other communication.
Verifying the user
registration
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
User authentication is being executed by the
NC service side.
Connecting
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
The line is connected with one-touch call.
Receiving
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being received with
one-touch call.
Sending
Do not turn the power OFF
until the one-touch call
ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being sent with one-touch
call.
Transmission
completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Communication with one-touch call has ended,
and the line has been disconnected.
Reception completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Communication with one-touch call has ended,
and the line has been disconnected.
This is displayed when at least one file has
been received.
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
(Status of
communication with
NC service)
II - 78
Data is being transmitted with one-touch call.
• Communication will start when one-touch call is
executed, but the line is not connected yet in
this state.
• This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
•
In connection standby state since line is being
used by Anshin-net.
2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
(5) Messages related to transmission request from NC service
Message
Details
Verifying the
distination
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
User authentication is being executed by the
NC system side.
Connecting
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
The line is connected upon transmission
request from NC service.
Receiving
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
Data is being received upon transmission
request from NC service.
Sending
Connecting with NC
service.
Wait for communication to
end.
•
Data is being sent upon transmission request
from NC service.
Transmission
completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Transmission request from NC service has
been completed, and the line has been
disconnected.
Reception completed
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
Transmission request from NC service has
been completed, and the line has been
disconnected.
This is displayed when at least one file or
message has been received.
•
(6) Messages related to number 1 to 3 menu operations
Message
(None)
Details
Press one-touch call to
call the NC service.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
•
The selected telephone No. will be set as the
telephone No. to be notified to the NC service.
• Hereafter, the telephone No. set with one-touch
call or operator notification will be notified to the
NC service.
(7) Messages related to arbitrary number setting
Message
(None)
Details
Input the telephone No. to
be notified.
II - 79
•
The input telephone No. will be set as the
telephone No. to be notified to the NC service.
• Hereafter, the telephone No. set with one-touch
call or operator notification will be notified to the
NC service.
2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages
(8) Messages related to sharing of machining data
Message
Details
Transmit by the set
password?(Y/N)
•
OK? (Y/N)
•
dialing
• A call
The line is not connected with NC service.
• The system is confirming whether to transfer machining data. Press
"Y" or "INPUT" to transfer machining data, "N" to cancel.
The line is not connected with NC service.
• The system is confirming whether to erase machining data. Press
"Y" or "INPUT" to erase machining data, "N" to cancel.
•
is being placed.
"Transmit by the set password?(Y/N)" or "OK? (Y/N)" is shown.
Pressing "Y" or "INPUT" starts the communication. The line is not
connected yet in this state.
Connecting
•
The line is connected for sharing of machining data.
Transmitting
•
The machining data is being transmitted.
Transmission completed
•
Machining data transmission has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Receiving
•
The machining data is being received.
Reception completed
•
Machining data reception has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Erase complete
•
Machining data erasing has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Waiting for dialing
•
In dialing standby state since the line is being used.
Input the password
•
The password, which is required for the transmission/reception of
machining data, has not been set. Input the password set on the
Anshin-net parameter 1 screen.
Input the user number
•
The user number, which is required for the transmission/reception
of machining data, has not been set. Input the user number set on
the Anshin-net parameter 1 screen.
II - 80
2. Operation Messages
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System
(1) Messages related to all Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB net) Screens.
Message
(None)
Details
Press the [Send] menu
when you transmit the
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.
•
Communication has not been started.
Message
Details
Network service is connected
• The settings of the MTB net parameter 1,2 cannot be changed
since the system is communicating with Call Center or machine
tool builder. Set again after the communication has ended.
(2) Messages related to transmission of diagnosis data
Message
Details
Transmit diagnosis
data? (Y/N)
Press Y (transmit the
diagnosis data) or N (cancel).
You'll connect with MTB
when it gets available if line
used.
•
The system is confirming the transmission of
diagnosis data.
dialing
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The diagnosis data is being transmitted.
The line is not connected yet in this state.
Verifying the user
registration
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The system is waiting for an authentication
response from remote diagnosis tool kit.
Waiting for the reply
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The line has been disconnected once, and
the system is waiting for a connection with
the machine tool builder.
Verifying the
destination
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The line has been connected corresponding
to the received call from the machine tool
builder. The system is confirming the
destination of connection.
Connecting
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The system is connected or connecting with
machine tool builder.
Transmitting
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The diagnosis data is actually being
transmitted.
Transmission
completed
Press Y (transmit the
diagnosis data) or N (cancel).
You'll connect with MTB
when it gets available if line
used.
•
The transmission of diagnosis data has
ended, and the line has been disconnected.
II - 81
•
2. Operation Messages
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System
Message
Details
Waiting for dialing
Don't turn OFF a power
supply until diagnosis data
transmission ends.
•
The machine tool builder is using the line for
other communication.
(Status of
communication with
NC service)
Connecting with NC service.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
•
In connection standby state since line is being
used by Anshin-net.
(Status of
communication with
machine
manufacturer)
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
•
In connection standby state since line is being
used by the machine tool builder.
(3) Messages related to reception of the diagnosis results
Message
Details
Verifying the
destination
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
• The line has been connected corresponding
to the received call from the machine tool
builder. The system is confirming the
destination of connection.
Connecting
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
• The system is connected or connecting with
machine tool builder.
Receiving
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
• The diagnosis results are actually being
received.
Reception completed
Press the [Send] menu
when you transmit the
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.
• Reception of the diagnosis results has ended,
and the line has been disconnected.
(4) Messages related to reception of messages
Message
Details
Verifying the
destination
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
• The line has been connected corresponding to
the received call from the machine tool builder.
The system is confirming the destination of
connection.
Connecting
Connecting with MTB.
Please wait until the
communication ends.
• The system is connected or connecting with
machine tool builder.
Reception completed
Press the [Send] menu
• Reception of the message has ended, and the
line has been disconnected.
when you transmit the
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.
II - 82
2. Operation Messages
2.20 Other Operation Messages
2.20 Other Operation Messages
Message
Details
Executing automatic operation
•
Setting error
•
Data range error
•
The input data exceeded the range.
Set the value again within the range.
Data protect
•
Setting, erasing, parameter setting, etc., of the various data is
prohibited, because the data protect key is validated.
Reconsider the data protect key setting.
Write protect
• Attempted to create a new program file in the write-protected device
Cannot be performed during automatic operation.
Perform the operation again after automatic operation has been
completed.
The setting data is inadequate. (Alphabetic characters were set
where only numeric characters can be set, etc.)
• The data has not been set.
• There is no specification.
• Opened the program file of the write-protected device
• Attempted to save the program file of the write-protected device
• Attempted to correct the buffer for the write-protected file.
• Attempted to edit or correct the buffer for the read-only program file.
Edit lock B
•
It is not possible to change machining program B (8000 to 8999: user
standard subprogram) or machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock B is enabled.
Edit lock C
•
It is not possible to change machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock C is enabled.
Origin set not possible
•
Can't command manual value
•
The manual numerical value protect is valid and therefore it is not
possible to perform a manual numerical value command.
Getting T code list
•
T code list is being retrieved.
T code list complete
•
Retrieving T code list is completed.
Load meter display not possible
•
The load meter cannot be displayed.
Contact the machine tool builder.
Pallet running
• Each setting was executed during pallet running.
APC executing
• Each setting was executed during automatic pallet changer
executing.
The operation is in a state in which origin set is not possible.
Check the parameter "#1123 origin (Origin set prohibited)" setting.
• Check that the axis has stopped.
• Check that idling (post-reset status) is currently being performed.
II - 83
3. Program Error
3. Program Error
(The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.)
These alarms occur during automatic operation‚ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors
which occur‚ for instance‚ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or
when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.
Error No.
P 10
Details
Remedy
• Divide the alarm block command into two.
No. of simultaneous axes over
The number of axis addresses commanded in • Check the specifications.
the same block exceeds the specifications.
• Revise the axis names in the program.
P 11
Illegal axis address
The axis address commanded by the
program and the axis address set by the
parameter do not match.
P 20
• Check the program.
Division error
An axis command which cannot be divided by
the command unit has been issued.
P 29
Not accept command
The normal line control command (G40.1,
G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the
modal in which the normal line control is not
acceptable.
• Check the program.
P 30
Parity H error
The number of holes per character on the
paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for
ISO code.
• Check the paper tape.
• Check the tape puncher and tape reader.
P 31
Parity V error
The number of characters per block on the
paper tape is odd.
• Make the number of characters per block on
the paper tape even.
• Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.
P 32
• Check and revise the program address.
Illegal address
An address not listed in the specifications has • Check and correct the parameters values.
• Check the specifications.
been used.
P 33
Format error
The command format in the program is not
correct.
P 34
• Check and correct the G code address in the
Illegal G code
program.
A G code not listed in the specifications has
been used.
An illegal G code was commanded during the
coordinate rotation command (G68).
• Check the program.
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the
• Check the parameter setting values.
rotary tool axis No. (#1501 polyax) was set to
"0".
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the
tool axis was set to the linear axis (#1017 rot
"0").
P 35
• Check the program.
Setting value range over
The setting range for the addresses has been
exceeded.
P 36
Program end error
"EOR" has been read during tape and
memory mode.
II - 84
• Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end
of the program.
• Enter the M99 command at the end of the
subprogram.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• The program Nos. are designated across a
range from 1 to 99999999.
• The sequence Nos. are designated across a
range from 1 to 99999.
P 37
O, N number zero
A zero has been specified for program and
sequence Nos.
P 38
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Add. Op block skip
"/n" has been issued even though there are
no optional block skip addition specifications.
• Check the specifications.
No specifications
• A non-specified G code was specified.
• The selected operation mode is not used.
P 39
P 40
Pre-read block error
When tool radius compensation is executed‚
there is an error in the pre-read block and so
the interference check is disabled.
• Reconsider the program.
P 48
Restart pos return incomplete
Movement command was executed before
executing the block that is restart-searched.
• Carry out program restart again. Movement
command cannot be executed before
executing the block that is restart-searched.
P 49
Invalid restart search
• Restart search was attempted for the
3-dimensional circular interpolation.
• Restart search was attempted during the
cylindrical interpolation, polar coordinate
interpolation, and tool tip center control.
• Reconsider the program.
• Reconsider the restart search position.
P 50
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Inch/Metric change
Inch/Metric changeover (G20/G21) command
was issued even though there is no
inch/metric conversion specification.
P 60
Compensation length over
The commanded movement distance is
excessive. (Over 231)
• Reconsider the axis address command.
P 61
No spec: Unidirectional posit.
Unidirectional positioning (G60) was
commanded even though there is no
unidirectional positioning specification.
• Check the specifications.
P 62
No F command
• No feed rate command has been issued.
• There is no F command in the cylindrical
interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation immediately after the G95
mode is commanded.
P 63
No spec: High-speed machining
High-speed machining cancel (G5P0) was
commanded even though there is no
high-speed machining mode specification.
• The default movement modal command at
power ON is G01. This causes the machine
to move without a G01 command if a
movement command is issued in the
program, and an alarm results. Use an F
command to specify the feed rate.
• Specify F with a thread lead command.
• Check the specifications.
P 65
No spec: High speed mode 3
• Check the high-speed mode III specifications.
II - 85
3. Program Error
Error No.
P 70
Details
Remedy
• Check the numerical values of the addresses
Arc end point deviation large
that specify the start and end points, arc
• There is an error in the arc start and end
center as well as the radius in the program.
points as well as in the arc center.
• The difference of the involute curve through • Check the "+" and "-" directions of the
address numerical values.
the start point and the end point is large.
• When arc was commanded, one of the two • Check the scaling valid axis.
axes configuring the arc plane was a
scaling valid axis.
• Check the numerical values of the addresses
in the program.
• Check whether the start point or end point is
on the inner side of the base circle for involute
interpolation. When carrying out tool radius
compensation, check that the start point and
end point after compensation are not on the
inner side of the base circle for involute
interpolation.
• Check whether the start point and end point
are at an even distance from the center of the
base circle for involute interpolation.
P 71
Arc center error
• The arc center is not sought during
R-specified circular interpolation.
• The curvature center of the involute curve
cannot be obtained.
P 72
• Check the helical specifications.
No spec: Herical cutting
A helical command has been issued though it • An Axis 3 command was issued by the
circular interpolation command. If there is
is not included in the specifications.
no helical specification, the linear axis is
moved to the next block.
P 73
• The G02.1 and G03.1 commands are issued
No spec: Spiral cutting
A spiral command was issued despite the fact for circular interpolation.
• Check the spiral specifications.
that such a command does not exist in the
specifications.
P 74
• Reconsider the program.
Can't calculate 3DIM arc
The end block was not specified during
3-dimension circular interpolation
supplementary modal, and therefore it is not
possible to calculate the 3-dimension circular
interpolation.
Furthermore, it not possible to calculate the
3-dimension circular interpolation due to an
interruption during 3-dimension circular
interpolation supplementary modal.
P 75
3DIM arc illegal
An unusable G code was issued during
3-dimension circular interpolation modal.
Or, a 3-dimension circular interpolation
command was issued during a modal for
which a 3-dimension circular interpolation
command cannot be issued.
• Reconsider the program.
P 76
No spec: 3DIM arc interpolat
G02.4/G03.4 was commanded even though
there is no 3-dimension circular interpolation
specification.
• Check the specifications.
P80
No spec: Hypoth ax interpolat
Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) was
commanded even though there is no
hypothetical axis interpolation specification.
• Check the specifications.
II - 86
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
P 90
No spec: Thread cutting
A thread cutting command was issued even
though there is no thread cutting command
specification.
P 91
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Var lead threading
Variable lead thread cutting (G34) was
commanded even though there is no variable
lead thread cutting specification.
P 93
Illegal pitch vaule
The thread lead (thread pitch) when
performing the thread cutting command is
incorrect.
• Set the correct thread lead command for the
thread cutting command.
P100
No spec: Cylindric interpolat
A cylindrical interpolation command was
issued even though there is no cylindrical
interpolation specification.
• Check the specifications.
P110
Plane select during figure rot
Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) was
commanded during figure rotation.
• Check the machining program.
P111
Plane selected while coord rot
Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19)
were issued during a coordinate rotation
command (G68).
• After command G68, always issue a plane
selection command following a G69
(coordinate rotation cancel) command.
P112
• Issue plane selection commands after
Plane selected while R compen
completing (axis movement commands
• Plane selection commands (G17, G18,
issued after G40 cancel command) tool
G19) were issued while tool radius
radius compensation and nose R
compensation (G41, G42) and nose R
compensation commands.
compensation (G41, G42, G46) commands
were being issued.
• Plane selection commands were issued
after completing nose R compensation
commands when there are no further axis
movement commands after G40, and
compensation has not been cancelled.
P113
Illegal plane select
The circular command axis differs from the
selected plane.
• Issue a circular command after correct plane
selection.
P120
No spec: Feed per rotation
Feed per rotation (G95) was commanded
even though there is no feed per rotation
specification.
• Check the specifications.
P121
F0 command during arc modal
F0 (F 1-digit feed) was commanded during
the arc modal (G02/G03).
• Check the machining program.
P122
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Auto corner override
An auto corner override command (G62) was • Delete the G62 command from the program.
issued even though there is no auto corner
override specification.
P123
• Check the specifications.
No spec: High-accuracy control
High-accuracy control command was issued
even though there is no high-accuracy control
specification
II - 87
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
P124
No spec: Inverse time feed
There is no inverse time option.
P125
G93 mode error
• A G code command that cannot be issued
was issued during G93 mode.
• G93 command was issued during a modal
for which inverse time feed cannot be
performed.
• Reconsider the program.
P126
Invalid cmnd in high-accuracy
An illegal command was issued during the
high-accuracy control mode.
• A G code group 13 command was issued
during the high-accuracy control mode.
• Milling, cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
during the high-accuracy control mode.
• Reconsider the program.
P127
No spec: SSS Control
The SSS control valid parameter was set to
ON although there is no SSS control
specification.
• Check the specifications.
If there is no SSS control specification, set the
parameter #8090 SSS ON to 0.
P130
2nd M function code illegal
The 2nd miscellaneous function address
commanded in the program differs from the
address set in the parameters.
miscellaneous function.
• Check and correct the 2nd miscellaneous
function address in the program.
P131
No spec: Cnst surface ctrl G96
A constant surface speed control command
(G96) was issued even though there is no
specification.
• Check the specifications.
• Change the constant surface speed control
command (G96) to a rotation speed
command (G97).
P132
Spindle rotation speed S=0
No spindle rotation speed command has
been issued.
• Reconsider the program.
P133
• Reconsider the parameter specified for the
Illegal P-No. G96
An invalid constant surface speed control axis constant surface speed control axis.
has been specified.
P140
No spec: Pos compen cmd
The position compensation command (G45
to G48) specifications are not available.
• Check the specifications.
P141
Pos compen during rotation
Position compensation was commanded
during the figure rotation or coordinate
rotation command.
• Reconsider the program.
P142
Pos compen invalid arc
A position compensation invalid arc
command was commanded.
• Reconsider the program.
II - 88
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
P150
No spec: Nose R compensation
• Even though there were no tool radius
compensation specifications, tool radius
compensation commands (G41 and G42)
were issued.
• Even though there were no nose R
compensation specifications, nose R
compensation commands (G41, G42, and
G46) were issued.
P151
Radius compen during arc mode
A compensation command (G40‚ G41‚ G42‚
G43‚ G44‚ G46) has been issued in the arc
modal (G02‚ G03).
P152
• Reconsider the program.
No intersection
In interference block processing during
execution of a tool radius compensation (G41
or G42) or nose R compensation (G41‚ G42‚
or G46) command‚ the intersection point after
one block is skipped cannot be determined.
P153
• Reconsider the program.
Compensation interference
An interference error has arisen while the tool
radius compensation command (G41‚ G42) or
nose R compensation command (G41‚ G42‚
G46) was being executed.
P154
• Check the specifications.
No spec: 3D compensation
A three-dimensional compensation command
was issued even though there are no
three-dimensional compensation
specifications.
P155
Fixed cyc exec during compen
A fixed cycle command has been issued in
the radius compensation mode.
P156
• Change the vector to that with which the
R compen direction not defined
compensation direction is defined.
At the start of G46 nose R compensation‚ the
• Exchange with a tool having a different tip
compensation direction is undefined if this
point No.
shift vector is used.
P157
R compen direction changed
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the
compensation direction is inverted.
P158
Illegal tip point
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the tip
point is illegal (other than 1 to 8).
II - 89
• Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid
traverse command (G00) in the
compensation command block or cancel
block.
(Set the modal to linear interpolation.)
• The radius compensation mode is established
when a fixed cycle command is executed and
so the radius compensation cancel command
(G40) should be issued.
• Change the G command to that which allows
inversion of the compensation direction (G00‚
G28‚ G30‚ G33‚ or G53).
• Exchange with a tool having a different tip
point No.
• Turn ON the "#8106 G46 NO REV-ERR"
parameter.
• Change the tip point No. to a legal one.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Add the compensation No. command to the
compensation command block.
• Check the number of compensation No. sets
a correct it to a compensation No. command
within the permitted number of tool
compensation sets.
P170
No offset number
The compensation No. (DOO‚ TOO‚ HOO)
command was not given when the radius
compensation (G41‚ G42‚ G43‚ G46)
command was issued. Alternatively‚ the
compensation No. is larger than the number
of sets in the specifications.
P171
No spec:Comp input by prog G10
Compensation data input by program (G10)
was commanded even though there is no
specification of compensation data input by
program.
• Check the specifications.
P172
G10 L number error
(G10 L-No. error)
The L address command is not correct when
the G10 command is issued.
• Check the address L-No. of the G10
command and correct the No.
P173
• First check the number of compensation sets
G10 P number error
and then set the address P designation to
(G10 compensation error)
within the permitted number of sets.
When the G10 command is issued‚ a
compensation No. outside the permitted
number of sets in the specifications has been
commanded for the compensation No.
command.
P174
No spec:Comp input by prog G11
Compensation data input by program cancel
(G11) was commanded even though there is
no specification of compensation data input
by program.
P177
• The tool life management data cannot be
Tool life count active
Registration of tool life management data with registered when counting the used data. Turn
G10 was attempted when the used data count the used data count valid signal OFF.
valid signal was ON.
P178
Tool life data entry over
The number of registration groups‚ total
number of registered tools or the number of
registrations per group exceeded the
specifications range.
P179
• The group No. cannot be commanded in
Illegal group No.
duplicate. When registering the group data‚
• When registering the tool life management
register it in group units.
data with G10‚ the group No. was
• Correct to the correct group No.
commanded in duplicate.
• A group No. that was not registered was
designated during the T…………99
command.
• An M code command must be issued as a
single command but coexists in the same
block as that of another M code command.
• The M code commands set in the same
group exist in the same block.
P180
No spec: Drilling cycle
A fixed cycle command was issued though
there are not fixed cycle (G72 - G89)
specifications.
II - 90
• Check the specifications.
• Review the number of registrations.
• Check the specifications.
• Correct the program.
3. Program Error
Error No.
P181
Details
Remedy
• Issue the spindle rotation speed command
No spindle command (Tap cycle)
(S) when the fixed cycle for drilling command
The spindle rotation speed command has not
G84‚ G74 (G84‚ G88) is given.
been issued when the fixed cycle for drilling
• Enter "S*****" type S command.
command is given.
"S*****" type S command does not exist in the
same block with the synchronous tapping
cycle.
P182
• Check connection to the main spindle.
Synchronous tap error
• Connection to the main spindle unit was not • Check that the main spindle encoder exists.
• Set 1 to the parameter #3024 (sout).
established.
• The synchronous tapping was attempted
with the spindle not serially connected
under the multiple-spindle control I.
P183
• Specify the pitch data and the number of
No pitch/thread number
The pitch or thread number command has not threads by F or E command.
been issued in the tap cycle of a fixed cycle
for drilling command.
• Check the pitch or the number of threads per
Pitch/thread number error
inch.
• The pitch or the number of threads per inch
is illegal in the tap cycle of the fixed cycle
for drilling command.
• The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation
speed.
• The thread number is too large for the
spindle rotation speed.
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Sync tapping cycle
Synchronous tapping cycle (G84/G74) was
commanded even though there is no
synchronous tapping cycle specification.
P184
P185
P186
Illegal S cmnd in synchro tap
S command was issued during synchronous
tapping modal.
• Cancel the synchronous tapping before
P190
No spec: Turning cycle
A lathe cutting cycle command was input
although the lathe cutting cycle was
undefined in the specification.
• Check the specification.
• Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.
P191
• The radius set value in the lathe cycle
Taper length error
command must be smaller than the axis shift
In the lathe cutting cycle‚ the specified length
amount.
of taper section is illegal.
P192
Chamfering error
Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is
illegal.
• Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the
cycle.
P200
No spec: MRC cycle
The compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I (G70 to G73) was commanded
when the compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I specifications were not
provided.
• Check the specification.
II - 91
issuing the S command.
3. Program Error
Error No.
P201
Details
Remedy
• Delete the following G codes from this
Program error (MRC)
subprogram that is called with the compound
• When called with a compound type fixed
type fixed cycle for turning machining I
cycle for turning machining I command, the
commands (G70 to G73): G27‚ G28‚ G29,
subprogram contained at least one of the
G30‚ G31‚ G33‚ G34, and fixed cycle G
following commands:
codes.
• Reference position return command
• Remove G2 and G3 from the first move block
(G27, G28, G29, G30)
of the finish shape program in compound type
• Thread cutting (G33, G34)
fixed cycle for turning machining I.
• Fixed cycle skip-function (G31, G31.n)
• The first move block of the finish shape
program in compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I contains an arc
command.
P202
Block over (MRC)
The number of blocks in the shape program
of the compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I is over 50 or 200 (this differs
according to the model).
• Specify 50 or a less value. The number of
blocks in the shape program called by the
compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I commands (G70 to G73) must be
decreased below 50 or 200 (this differs
according to the model).
P203
D cmnd figure error (MRC)
The compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I (G70 to G73) shape program
could not cut the work normally because it
defined an abnormal shape.
• Check the compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I (G70 to G73) shape
program.
P204
• Check the compound type fixed cycle for
E cmnd fixed cycle error
A command value of the compound type fixed turning machining (G70 to G76) command
value.
cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76) is
illegal.
P210
No spec: Pattern cycle
A compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining II (G74 to G76) command was
input although it was undefined in the
specification.
• Check the specification.
P220
No spec: Special fixed cycle
No special fixed cycle specifications are
available.
• Check the specifications.
P221
No. of special fixed holes = 0
A 0 has been specified for the number of
holes in special fixed cycle mode.
• Reconsider the program.
P222
G36 angle error
A G36 command specifies 0 for angle
intervals.
• Reconsider the program.
P223
• Reconsider the program.
G12/G13 radius error
The radius value specified with a G12 or G13
command is below the compensation
amount.
P224
No spec: Circular (G12/G13)
There are no circular cutting specifications.
II - 92
• Check the specifications.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
P230
Subprogram nesting over
• A subprogram has been called 8 or more
times in succession from the subprogram.
• The program in the data server contains the
M198 command.
• The program in the IC card has been called
more than once (the program in the IC card
can be called only once at a time).
P231
• Specify the sequence Nos. in the call block of
No sequence No.
the subprogram.
At subprogram call time‚ the sequence No.
set at return from the subprogram or specified
by GOTO‚ was not set.
P232
• Enter the machining program.
No program No.
• The machining program has not been found • Check the subprogram storage destination
parameters.
when the machining program is called.
• The file name of the program registered in • Ensure that the external device (including IC
card) that contains the file is mounted.
IC card is not corresponding to O No.
• Execute the program again after completion
Program editing
of program editing.
Operation was attempted for the file under
program editing.
P235
Remedy
• Check the number of subprogram calls and
correct the program so that it does not exceed
8 times.
P240
Program editing
Operation was attempted for the file under
program editing.
• Check the specifications.
P241
No variable No.
The variable No. commanded is out of the
range specified in the specifications.
• Check the specifications.
• Check the program variable No.
P242
• Designate the "=" sign in the variable
= not defined at vrble set
definition of the program.
The "=" sign has not been commanded when
a variable is defined.
• Correct the program.
Can't use variables
An invalid variable has been specified in the
left or right side of an operation expression.
P243
P244
• Date or time cannot be changed.
Invalid set date or time
Date or time was set earlier than current date • Reconsider the program.
or time in the system variables (#3011,
#3012) when the credit system was valid.
P250
No spec: Figure rotation
Figure rotation (M98 I_J_P_H_L_) was
commanded even though there is no figure
rotation specification.
• Check the specifications.
P251
Figure rotation overlapped
Figure rotation command was issued during
figure rotation.
• Check the machining program.
P252
• Reconsider the program.
Coord rotate in fig. rotation
A coordinate rotation related command (G68,
G69) was issued during figure rotation.
P260
No spec: Coordinates rotation
Even though there were no coordinate
rotation specifications, a coordinate rotation
command was issued.
II - 93
• Check the specifications.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
P270
No spec: User macro
A macro specification was commanded
though there are no such command
specifications.
P271
No spec: Macro interrupt
A macro interruption command has been
issued though it is not included in the
specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P272
NC and macro texts in a block
A statement and a macro statement exist
together in the same block.
• Reconsider the program and place the
executable statement and macro statement in
separate blocks.
P273
• Reconsider the program and correct it so that
Macro call nesting over
The number of macro call nests exceeded the the macro calls do not exceed the limit
imposed by the specification.
specifications.
P275
Macro argument over
The number of macro call argument type II
sets has exceeded the limit.
• Reconsider the program.
P276
Illegal G67 command
A G67 command was issued though it was
not during the G66 command modal.
• Reconsider the program.
• The G67 command is the call cancel
command and so the G66 command must be
designated first before it is issued.
P277
Macro alarm message
An alarm command has been issued in
#3000.
• Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG
screen.
• Refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine tool builder.
P280
Brackets [ ] nesting over
The number of parentheses "[" or "]" which
can be commanded in a single block has
exceeded five.
• Reconsider the program and correct it so the
number of "[" or "]" is five or less.
P281
• Reconsider the program and correct it so that
Brackets [ ] not paired
"[" and "]" parentheses are paired up properly.
The number of "[" and "]" parentheses
commanded in a single block does not match.
P282
Calculation impossible
The arithmetic formula is incorrect.
• Reconsider the program and correct the
formula.
P283
Divided by zero
The denominator of the division is zero.
• Reconsider the program and correct it so that
the denominator for division in the formula is
not zero.
P290
IF sentence error
There is an error in the IF conditional
GOTO… statement.
• Reconsider the program.
P291
WHILE sentence error
There is an error in the WHILE conditional
DO…-END… statement.
• Reconsider the program.
P292
SETVN sentence error
There is an error in the SETVN… statement
when the variable name setting was made.
P293
DO-END nesting over
The number of DO-END nesting levels in
WHILE conditional DO…-END… statement
has exceeded 27.
• Reconsider the program.
• The number of characters in the variable
name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or
less.
• Reconsider the program and correct it so that
the nesting levels of the DO - END statement
does not exceed 27.
II - 94
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Reconsider the program and correct it so that
the DO's and END's are paired off properly.
P294
DO and END not paired
The DO's and END's are not paired off
properly.
P295
• During tape operation‚ a program which
WHILE/GOTO in tape
includes a WHILE or GOTO statement cannot
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the
be executed and so the memory operation
tape during tape operation.
mode is established instead.
• Review the program.
No address (macro)
A required address has not been specified in
the user macro.
P296
P297
• Review the program.
Address-A error
The user macro does not use address A as a
variable.
P298
G200-G202 cmnd in tape
User macro G200‚ G201‚ or G202 was
specified during tape or MDI mode.
• Review the program.
P300
Variable name illegal
The variable names have not been
commanded properly.
• Reconsider the variable names in the
program and correct them.
P301
Variable name duplicated
The name of the variable has been
duplicated.
• Correct the program so that the name is not
duplicated.
P310
Not use GMSTB macro code
G, M, S, T, or B macro code was called
during fixed cycle.
• Review the program.
• Review the parameter.
P350
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Scaling command
The scaling command (G50, G51) was
issued when the scaling specifications were
not available.
P360
No spec: Program mirror
A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command
has been issued though the programmable
mirror image specifications are not provided.
• Check the specifications.
P370
No spec: Facing t-post MR
The facing turret mirror image specifications
are not provided.
• Check the specifications.
P371
Facing t-post MR illegal
Mirror image for facing tool posts was
commanded to an axis for which external
mirror image or parameter mirror image is
valid.
Mirror image for facing tool posts validating
mirror image for a rotary axis was
commanded.
• Check the program.
• Check the parameters.
P380
• Check the specifications.
No spec: Corner R/C
The corner R/C was issued when the corner • Remove the corner chamfering/corner
rounding command from the program.
R/C specifications were not available.
II - 95
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
P381
No spec: Arc R/C
Corner chamfering II /corner rounding II was
specified in the arc interpolation block
although corner chamfering/corner rounding II
is unsupported.
P382
No corner movement
The block next to corner chamfering/
corner rounding is not a movement
command.
• Replace the block succeeding the corner
chamfering/corner rounding command by
G01 command.
P383
Corner movement short
In the corner chamfering/corner rounding
command‚ the movement distance was
shorter than the value in the corner
chamfering/corner rounding command.
• Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
less than the movement distance since this
distance is shorter than the corner chamfering/
corner rounding.
P384
• Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
Corner next movement short
less than the movement distance since this
When the corner chamfering/corner rounding
distance in the following block is shorter than
command was input‚ the movement distance
the corner chamfering/corner rounding.
in the following block was shorter than the
length of the corner chamfering/corner
rounding.
P385
Corner during G00/G33
A block with corner chamfering/corner
rounding was given during G00 or G33
modal.
• Recheck the program.
P390
No spec: Geometric
A geometric command was issued though
there are no geometric specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P391
No spec: Geometric arc
There are no geometric IB specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P392
Angle < 1 degree (GEOMT)
The angular difference between the
geometric line and line is 1° or less.
• Correct the geometric angle.
P393
• Specify this block by an absolute value.
Inc value in 2nd block (GEOMT)
The second geometric block was specified by
an incremental value.
P394
No linear move command (GEOMT)
The second geometric block contains no
linear command.
• Specify the G01 command.
P395
Illegal address (GEOMT)
The geometric format is invalid.
• Recheck the program.
P396
Plane selected in GEOMT ctrl
A plane switching command was executed
during geometric command processing.
• Execute the plane switching command before
geometric command processing.
P397
• Recheck the geometric circular arc command
Arc error (GEOMT)
and the preceding and following commands.
In geometric IB‚ the circular arc end point
does not contact or cross the next block start
point.
P398
No spec: Geometric1B
Although the geometric IB specifications are
not included‚ a geometric command is given.
II - 96
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
• Check the specifications.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Before commanding G111, cancel the
following commands.
• Milling mode
• Nose R compensation
• Constant surface speed
• Mixed synchronization control
• Fixed cycle
• Polar coordinate interpolation
• Cylindrical interpolation
P411
Illegal modal G111
• G111 was issued during milling mode.
• G111 was issued during nose R
compensation mode.
• G111 was issued during constant surface
speed.
• G111 was issued during mixed
synchronization control.
• G111 was issued during fixed cycle.
• G111 was issued during polar coordinate
interpolation.
• G111 was issued during cylindrical
interpolation mode.
P412
P412 No spec: Axis name switch
Axis name switch (G111) was issued even
though there is no axis name switch (G111)
specification.
• Check the specifications.
P420
No spec: Para input by program
Parameter input by program (G10) was
commanded even though there is no
specification of parameter input by program.
• Check the specifications.
P421
• Check the program.
Parameter input error
• The specified parameter No. or set data is
illegal.
• An illegal G command address was input in
parameter input mode.
• A parameter input command was input
during fixed cycle modal or nose R
compensation.
• G10L50, G10L70, G11 were not
commanded in independent blocks.
P430
• Execute reference position return manually.
R-pnt return incomplete
• The command was issued to an axis for
• A command was issued to move an axis‚
which axis removal is validated so invalidate
which has not returned to the reference
axis removal.
position‚ away from that reference position.
• A command was issued to an axis removal
axis.
P431
No spec: 2,3,4th R-point ret
A command for second‚ third or fourth
reference position return was issued though
there are no such command specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P432
No spec: Start position return
Start position return (G29) was commanded
even though there is no start position return
specification.
• Check the specifications.
P433
No spec: R-position check
Reference position check (G27) was
commanded even though there is no
reference position check specification.
• Check the specifications.
II - 97
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the program.
P434
Compare error
One of the axes did not return to the
reference position when the reference
position check command (G27) was
executed.
P435
• An M code command cannot be issued in a
G27 and M commands in a block
An M command was issued simultaneously in G27 command block and so the G27
command and M code command must be
the G27 command block.
placed in separate blocks.
P436
• An M code command cannot be issued in a
G29 and M commands in a block
An M command was issued simultaneously in G29 command block and so the G29
command and M code command must be
the G29 command block.
placed in separate blocks.
P438
G52 invalid during G54.1
A local coordinate system command was
issued during execution of the G54.1
command.
• Review the program.
P450
No spec: Chuck barrier
The chuck barrier on command (G22) was
specified although the chuck barrier was
undefined in the specification.
• Check the specification.
P451
No spec: Stroke chk bef travel
Stroke check before travel (G22/G23) was
commanded even though there is no stroke
check before travel specification.
• Check the specification.
P452
• Review the coordinate values of the axis
Limit before travel exists
address commanded in the program.
An illegal command such as the start or end
point of the traveling axis is inside the
prohibited area or the axis passes through the
prohibited area, was detected when Stroke
check before travel (G22) was ON.
P460
Tape I/O error
An error has arisen in the tape reader or‚
alternatively‚ in the printer during macro
printing.
• Check the power and cable of the connected
devices.
• Check the I/O device parameters.
P461
File I/O error
A file of the machining program cannot be
read.
IC card has not been inserted.
• In memory mode, the programs stored in
memory may have been destroyed. Output
all of the programs and tool data once and
format them.
• Ensure that the external device (including an
IC card, etc) that contains the file is mounted.
• Check the parameters for HD operation or IC
card operation.
P462
Computer link commu error
A communication error occurred during the
BTR operation.
• "L01 Computer link error" is displayed
simultaneously, so remedy the problem
according to the error No.
P480
No spec: Milling
• Milling was commanded when the milling
specifications were not provided.
• Polar coordinate interpolation was
commanded when the polar coordinate
interpolation specifications were not
provided.
• Check the specification.
II - 98
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
P481
Illegal G code (mill)
• An illegal G code was used during the
milling mode.
• An illegal G code was used during
cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation.
• The G07.1 command was issued during the
tool radius compensation.
P482
• Check the machining program, parameters
Illegal axis (mill)
and PLC I/F signal.
• A rotary axis was commanded during the
milling mode.
• Milling was executed even though an illegal
value was set for the milling axis No.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during mirror
image.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded before the
tool compensation was completed after the
T command.
• G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical
interpolation was not possible (there is no
rotary axis, or external mirror image is ON).
• An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate
system axis was commanded during
cylindrical interpolation.
P484
• Carry out manual reference position return.
R-pnt ret incomplete (mill)
• Movement was commanded to an axis that
had not completed reference position return
during the milling mode.
• Movement was commanded to an axis that
had not completed reference position return
during cylindrical interpolation or polar
coordinate interpolation.
II - 99
Remedy
• Check the program.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
P485
Illegal modal (mill)
• The milling mode was turned ON during
nose R compensation or constant surface
speed control.
• A T command was issued during the milling
mode.
• The mode was switched from milling to
cutting during tool compensation.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during the
constant surface speed control mode
(G96).
• The command unacceptable in the
cylindrical interpolation was issued.
• A T command was issued during the
cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
• A movement command was issued when
the plane was not selected just before or
after the G07.1 command.
• A plane selection command was issued
during the polar coordinate interpolation
mode.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during tool
radius compensation.
• The G16 plane in which the radius value of
a cylinder is 0 was specified.
• A cylindrical interpolation or polar
coordinate interpolation command was
issued during coordinate rotation by
program (G68).
P486
• Check the program.
Milling error
• The milling command was issued during the
mirror image (when parameter or external
input is turned ON).
• Polar coordinate interpolation, cylindrical
interpolation or milling interpolation was
commanded during mirror image for facing
tool posts.
• The start command of the cylindrical
interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was issued during the normal
line control.
• Check the program.
Synchronization M code error
• Two or more synchronization M codes were
commanded in the same block.
• The synchronization M code and "!" code
were commanded in the same block.
• Synchronization with the M code was
commanded in 3rd part system or more.
(Synchronization with the M code is valid
only in 1st part system or 2nd part system.)
P511
P550
No spec: G06.2(NURBS)
There is no NURBS interpolation option.
II - 100
•
•
•
•
•
Remedy
Check the program.
Before issuing G12.1, issue G40 or G97.
Before issuing G12.1, issue a T command.
Before issuing G13.1, issue G40.
Specify the radius value of a cylinder other
than 0, or specify the X axis's current value
other than 0 before issuing G12.1/G16.
• Check the specifications.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Reconsider the program.
• Specify the knot by monotone increment.
P551
G06.2 knot error
The knot (k) command value is smaller than
the value for the previous block.
P552
Start point of 1st G06.2 err
The block end point immediately before the
G06.2 command and the G06.2 first block
command value do not match.
• Match the G06.2 first block coordinate
command value with the previous block end
point.
P554
Invld manual interrupt in G6.2
Manual interruption using a block was
performed while in G06.2 mode.
• Perform for blocks other than G06.2 mode
when manually interrupting.
P555
Invalid restart during G06.2
Restart was attempted from the block in
G06.2 mode.
• Restart from the block other than in G06.2
mode.
P600
No spec: Auto TLM
An automatic tool length measurement
command (G37) was execute though there
are no such command specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P601
No spec: Skip
A skip command (G31) was issued though
there are no such command specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P602
No spec: Multi skip
A multiple skip command (G31.1‚ G31.2 or
G31.3) was issued though there are no such
command specifications.
• Check the specifications.
P603
Skip speed 0
The skip speed is 0.
• Specify the skip speed.
P604
TLM illegal axis
No axis or more than one axis was specified
in the automatic tool length measurement
block.
• Specify only one axis.
P605
T & TLM command in a block
The T code is in the same block as the
automatic tool length measurement block.
• Specify this T code before the block.
P606
•
T cmnd not found before TLM
The T code was not yet specified in automatic
tool length measurement.
•
TLM illegal signal
Before the area specified by the D command
or decelerating area parameter d‚ the
measurement position arrival signal went ON.
The signal remains OFF to the end.
•
Skip during radius compen
A skip command was specified during radius
compensation processing.
P607
P608
P610
Illegal parameter
• The parameter setting is not correct.
• G114.1 was commanded when the spindle
synchronization with PLC I/F command was
selected.
• G113 was commanded when the
spindle-spindle polygon machining option
was OFF and the spindle synchronization
with PLC I/F command was selected.
II - 101
Specify this T code before the block.
Check the program.
Specify a radius compensation cancel (G40)
command or remove the skip command.
• Check whether "#1549 Iv0vR1" to "#1553
Iv0vR5" are set in descending order (in order
of large values).
• Check whether "#1554 Iv0rd2" to "#1557
Iv0rd5" are set in descending order.
• Check and correct "#1514 expLinax" and
"#1515 expRotax".
• Check the program.
• Check the parameter.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specification.
P611
No spec: Exponential function
Specification for exponential interpolation is
not available.
P612
Exponential function error
A movement command for exponential
interpolation was issued during mirror image
for facing tool posts.
P700
• Check the program.
Illegal command value
Spindle synchronization was commanded to a • Check the parameter.
spindle that is not connected serially.
P900
No spec: Normal line control
A normal line control command (G40.1,
G41.1, G42.1) was issued when the normal
line control specifications were not provided.
• Check the specifications.
P901
Normal line control axis G92
A coordinate system preset command (G92)
was issued to a normal line control axis
during normal line control.
• Check the program.
P902
Normal line control axis error
• The normal line control axis was set to a
linear axis.
• The normal line control axis was set to the
linear type rotary axis II axis.
• The normal line control axis has not been
set.
• The normal line control axis was the same
as the plane selection axis.
• Correct the normal line control axis.
P903
Plane chg in Normal line ctrl
The plane selection command (G17, G18,
G19) was issued during normal line control.
• Delete the plane selection command (G17,
G18, G19) from the program for normal line
control.
P920
No spec: 3D coord conv
There is no specification for 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion.
• Check the specifications.
P921
• Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
Illegal G code at 3D coord
A G code command that cannot be performed Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
Center Series)" for further details of usable G
was made during 3-dimensional coordinate
commands.
conversion modal.
• When the basic specification parameter
"#1229 set01/bit3" is ON, turn the parameter
OFF or specify the constant surface speed
control cancel (G97).
P922
Illegal mode at 3D coord
A 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
command was issued during a modal for
which 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
cannot be performed.
P923
• Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
Illegal addr in 3D coord blk
Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
A G code for which G68 to combination could
Center Series)" for further details of usable G
not be performed was specified for the same
commands.
block.
II - 102
• Check the program.
• Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
Center Series)" for further details of usable G
commands.
3. Program Error
Error No.
Details
Remedy
• Check the specifications.
P930
No spec: Tool axis compen
A tool length compensation along the tool axis
command was issued even though there is no
tool length compensation along the tool axis
specification.
P931
Executing tool axis compen
A G code that cannot be commanded exists
during tool length compensation along the
tool axis.
P932
• Set the correct value and reboot.
Rot axis parameter error
There is a mistake in the linear axis name and
rotary axis name in the rotary axis
configuration parameters.
P940
No spec: Tool tip control
There is no tool tip center control
specification.
P941
• Reconsider the program.
Invalid T tip control command
A tool tip center control command was issued
during a modal for which a tool tip center
control command cannot be issued.
P942
Invalid cmnd during T tip ctrl
A G code that cannot be commanded was
issued during tool tip center control.
P943
• Reconsider the program.
Tool posture command illegal
In the case of tool tip center control type 1, if
the signs at the tool-side rotary axis or table
base-side rotary axis start and finish points
differ, a tool base-side rotary axis or table
workpiece-side rotary axis rotation exists for
the same block, and does not pass a singular
point.
In the case of tool tip center control type 2,
the posture vector command is incorrect.
P990
• Reduce the number of commands that
PREPRO error
require pre-reading or delete such
Combining commands that required
commands.
pre-reading (nose R offset‚ corner
chamfering/corner rounding‚ geometric I‚
geometric IB‚ and compound type fixed cycle
for turning machining) resulted in eight or
more pre-read blocks.
• Reconsider the program.
• Check the specifications.
II - 103
• Reconsider the program.
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.1 Troubleshooting at Power ON
If the NC system does not start up correctly and a system error occurs when the NC power is turned ON, the
drive unit may not have been started up properly. Check the LED display on the drive unit, and take
measures according to this section.
LED
display
AA
Symptom
Cause of occurrence
Investigation method
Initial communication with The drive unit axis No.
Is there any other drive unit that has the Set correctly.
the CNC was not
setting is incorrect.
same axis No. set?
completed correctly.
The CNC setting is incorrect. Is the No. of CNC controlled axes
Set correctly.
correct?
Communication with CNC is Is the connector (CN1A, CN1B)
connected?
incorrect.
Ab
12
Remedy
Is the cable broken?
Initial communication with The axis is not used, the
Is the DIP switch set correctly?
the CNC was not carried setting is for use inhibiting.
out.
Communication with CNC is Is the connector (CN1A, CN1B)
connected?
incorrect.
Is the cable broken?
An error was detected in The CPU peripheral circuit is Check the repeatability.
the unit's memory and IC abnormal.
Check whether there is any abnormality
during the self-diagnosis
with the unit's surrounding environment,
at power ON.
etc.
Connect correctly.
Replace the cable.
Set correctly.
Connect correctly.
Replace the cable.
Replace the unit.
Improve the
surrounding
environment.
The drive unit has started up normally if the following type of emergency stop (E7) is displayed on the display
unit's LED display.
F1
F+axis No.
E7
Emergency stop
F2
F+axis No.
E7
Emergency stop
Normal drive unit LED display at NC power ON (for 1st axis)
II - 104
Not lit
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.2 Troubleshooting for each alarm No.
Alarm No.
10
1
2
3
4
Investigation details
Check the timing when the alarm
occurs.
Investigation results
The moment of READY ON
Remedies
Check the investigation item No. 2.
During operation
Review the power supply capacity.
Did the external contactor turn ON at
the READY ON?
The external contactor did not turn
ON.
The external contactor turned ON,
but the alarm occurred immediately.
The wiring is correct.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
The wiring is not correct.
The input voltage is normal.
Rewire.
Replace the drive unit.
The input voltage is abnormal.
Review the power supply capacity.
Check the wiring of contactor
excitation circuit.
Check the input voltage of the drive
unit. (Voltage between L1 and L2, L2
and L3, L1 and L3)
Alarm No.
11
1
Insufficient voltage
Insufficient bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
Investigation details
Check whether the servo or spindle
software version was changed
recently.
2
Check the repeatability.
3
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
1
2
3
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remedies
Correctly set the axis No.
0 = No. 1 axis, 1 = No. 2 axis, ...
Correctly set the axis No.
0 = No. 1 axis, 1 = No. 2 axis, ...
Replace the drive unit.
SV SP
{
{
Memory error 1
A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the power ON self-check.
1
Alarm No.
13
Replace the contactor.
{
Axis selection error
Setting of the axis No. selection switch is incorrect.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Check the setting of the axis
The same axis No. is set for the L and
selection switch (rotary switch) on the M axes.
top of the unit.
The value is duplicated with other
axis.
No abnormality is found in particular.
Alarm No.
12
Check the investigation item No. 4.
SV SP
Investigation results
The version was changed.
Remedies
SV SP
There is a possibility that the spindle
software was downloaded into servo,
or the servo software was
{ {
downloaded into spindle. Download
servo/spindle software again.
The version was not changed.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
{ {
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
{ {
Software processing error 1
Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
Investigation details
Check whether the servo or spindle
software version was changed
recently.
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
The version was changed.
Remedies
Change software version back to the
original.
The version was not changed.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 105
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
16
1
2
3
Investigation details
Check the parameters.
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
17
1
2
2
3
4
5
Investigation results
Remedies
The parameters specified with the
Replace the drive unit.
adjustment are not set.
Correct parameters are set.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
SV SP
{
{
{
A/D converter error
An error was detected in the A/D converter for detecting current FB.
Investigation details
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
18
1
Magnetic pole position detection error
An error was detected in the magnetic pole detection for controlling the motor.
Investigation results
Remedies
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 2.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
Motor side detector: Initial communication error
Initial communication with the motor side detector failed.
Investigation details
Check the servo parameter
(SV025.ent) setting value.
OSE104: 0, OSA104: 1
Are all others set to 2?
(Excluding slave axis for
synchronous control)
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive
unit side and detector side) and
check if they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a
tester.
Replace with another unit, and check
whether the fault is on the unit side or
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the detector's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
The value is not set correctly.
The value is set correctly.
Remedies
Correctly set SV025.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
SV SP
{
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Correctly install.
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the detector cable.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
{
{
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
The alarm is on the detector side.
Replace the drive unit.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
{
{
{
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 106
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
1A
1
2
3
4
5
Machine side detector: Initial communication error
Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw side detector failed.
Investigation details
Check the servo parameter
(SV025.pen) setting value.
Are the serial communication type
detector parameters set for the pulse
type detector?
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive
unit side and detector side) and
check if they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a
tester.
Replace with another unit, and check
whether the fault is on the unit side or
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the detector's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
The value is not set correctly.
The value is set correctly.
Remedies
Correctly set SV025.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
SV SP
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Correctly install.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the detector cable.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
{
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
The alarm is on the detector side.
Replace the drive unit.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
{
{
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
{
Machine side detector: Error 1
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV
Check whether the servo axis has
The axis has operated.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
{
moved and the spindle has rotated
The axis has not operated.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
when an alarm occurred.
Check whether the operation at low
The operation is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
speed is normal.
The operation is not normal.
Check the cautions at power ON.
{
• Wiring check
• Parameter check
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or
Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and
loose).
{
check if they are disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
The connection is faulty.
Replace the detector cable.
{
detector cable connection with a
The connection is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
tester.
Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side.
Replace the drive unit.
{
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
Machine side detector: Error 2
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
1
Machine side detector: Error 3
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
1
Machine side detector: Error 4
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
Alarm No.
1C
Alarm No.
1D
Alarm No.
1E
II - 107
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Machine side detector: Communication error
An error was detected in communication data with the linear scale or the ball screw side detector. Or
the communication was interrupted.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or
Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and
loose).
{
check if they are disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Is the detector cable wired in the
The cables are wired near each
Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power
other. (Noise is entering from the
{
cable, or are the two cables laid in
power cable.)
parallel near each other?
The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on
Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it?
the motor side.
connecting the wires together on the
{
(Is the motor grounded to one point?)
drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
The connection is faulty.
Replace the detector cable.
{
detector cable connection with a
The connection is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side.
Replace the drive unit.
{
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
1F
1
2
3
4
5
6
Alarm No.
21
1
2
3
4
5
Machine side detector: No signal
When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the machine side detector was detected.
Investigation details
Check the servo parameter (SV025.
pen) setting value.
Are the pulse type detector
parameters set for a serial
communication type detector?
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive
unit side and detector side) and
check if they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a
tester.
Replace with another unit, and check
whether the fault is on the unit side or
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the detector's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
The value is not set correctly.
The value is set correctly.
Remedies
Correctly set SV025.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Correctly install.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Replace the detector cable.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
The alarm is on the detector side.
Replace the drive unit.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
{
{
{
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 108
SV SP
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Excessive speed error
A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was continuously exceeding 50 r/min
for longer than the setting time.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check the U, V and W wiring
The wires are not correctly
Correctly connect.
between the spindle drive unit and
connected.
{
spindle motor.
The wires are correctly connected.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the spindle parameter (SP017, The correct values are not set.
Correctly set.
{
SP018, SP019, SP020, SP117 and
The correct values are set.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
SP129 or later) setting value.
Measure the acceleration/
12sec or more.
Increase the spindle
deceleration time up to the point
acceleration/deceleration time
where the spindle speed reaches its
constant setting value.
maximum.
Less than 12sec.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
If the alarm occurs when forward run
{
is changed to reverse run, measure
the acceleration/ deceleration time
from the forward run's maximum
speed to reverse run's maximum
speed.
Check the load amount when the
Load amount is 120% or more.
Reduce the load.
{
alarm occurred during cutting.
Load amount is less than 120%.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Check the fluctuation of the input
Voltage drop during acceleration
Review the power supply capacity.
voltage into the power supply unit.
does not satisfy the motor voltage.
{
Voltage drop during acceleration
Check the investigation item No.6.
satisfies the motor voltage.
Check the capacity of the drive unit. The capacity does not satisfy the
Increase the capacity.
motor output.
{
The capacity satisfies the motor
Replace the unit.
output.
Alarm No.
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
Alarm No.
24
1
2
3
4
Grounding
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
Investigation details
Measure the insulation across the
power cables (U,V,W) for connected
motors and the ground. (Carry out a
megger test.)
Has oil come in contact with the
motor or power cable?
Investigation results
Less than 100kΩ.
100kΩ or more.
Oil has come in contact.
Oil has not come in contact.
Less than 1MΩ.
1MΩ or more.
Measure the resistance across the U, Less than 100kΩ.
V, W phase terminals of the
100kΩ or more.
servo/spindle drive unit and the
ground.
(Do not measure the insulation as the
unit could be damaged.)
Measure the insulation again.
II - 109
Remedies
The motor or power cable may be
ground faulted.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Take measures so that oil does not
come in contact. Check the motor's
cannon connector and the inside of
the terminal box, and clean as
necessary.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the motor or cable.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the drive unit.
Replace the power supply unit.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
25
1
2
3
4
5
Investigation details
Is warning 9F occurring at the same
time?
Measure the battery voltage with a
tester.
Did alarm No.18 occur when the
power was turned ON the last time?
Was the detector cable or battery
cable left disconnected from the unit
for a long time?
Check the detector cable or battery
cable connection with a tester.
Alarm No.
26
1
2
Absolute position data lost
The absolute position was lost, as the backup battery voltage dropped in the absolute position detector.
Investigation results
The warning is occurring.
The warning is not occurring.
Less than 3V.
3V or more.
Alarm No.18 occurred.
Alarm No.18 did not occur.
The unit was left disconnected for a
long time.
Guide at delivery : 20 hours or more
After 5 years
: 10 hours or more
The cables were not left
disconnected.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Remedies
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the battery, and establish the
zero point.
Check the NC bus cable connection.
Turn the drive unit control power ON
again, and establish the zero point.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Turn the drive unit control power ON
again, and establish the zero point.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Replace the cable.
Replace the drive unit.
{
Unused axis error
A power module error occurred in the axis whose axis No. selection switch was set to "F"(free axis).
Investigation details
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
Remedies
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 2.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
1
Machine side detector: Error 5
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
1
Machine side detector: Error 6
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
1
Machine side detector: Error 7
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
1
Machine side detector: Error 8
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
Alarm No.
27
Alarm No.
28
Alarm No.
29
Alarm No.
2A
II - 110
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
1
Motor side detector: Error 1
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
1
Motor side detector: Error 2
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
1
Motor side detector: Error 3
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
1
Motor side detector: Error 4
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
Alarm No.
2B
Alarm No.
2C
Alarm No.
2D
Alarm No.
2E
Motor side detector: Communication error
An error was detected in communication data with the motor side detector or with the linear scale of a
linear servo system. Or the communication was interrupted.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or
Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and
loose).
{ {
check if they are disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Is the detector cable wired in the
The cables are wired near each
Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power
other. (Noise is entering from the
{ {
cable, or are the two cables laid in
power cable.)
parallel near each other?
The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on
Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it?
the motor side.
connecting the wires together on the
{ {
(Is the motor grounded to one point?)
drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
The connection is faulty.
Replace the detector cable.
{ {
detector cable connection with a
The connection is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side.
Replace the drive unit.
{ {
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
2F
1
2
3
4
5
6
II - 111
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Over-regeneration
The over-regeneration level exceeded 100%. The regenerative resistor is in the overload state.
Investigation details
Check again if the regenerative
capacity exceeds the regenerative
resistor tolerable capacity.
Check if the parameter is set
incorrectly, and check the values of
sv036 and sp032.
Is an external regenerative resistor
used?
Is the short wire connected between
P and D terminal?
Are there any problems with the
connection condition?
Is the connection of the regenerative
resistor or regeneration resistor
cable correct?
Is the regeneration resistor or the
regeneration resistor cable broken?
Disconnect the regenerative resistor
terminal and check the resistance
value with a tester.
Check if the power supply voltage is
too high.
Investigation results
The regenerative capacity exceeds
the regenerative resistor tolerable
capacity.
The regenerative resistor selection
is appropriate.
The parameters are set incorrectly.
The parameters are correct.
Remedies
Add the option regenerative resistor
or replace it.
An external regenerative resistor is
used.
A built-in regenerative resistor is
used.
The wire is not connected.
The connector is disconnected.
The connector has a contact fault.
The connection is correct.
The connection is incorrect.
The connection is correct.
To the investigation item No. 5.
The regeneration resistor is broken.
Or the resistance value is large.
The regeneration resistor cable is
broken.
The resistance value is normal.
The power supply voltage exceeded
253V.
The power supply voltage is normal.
2
3
4
5
6
{
{
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Change the parameters.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
To the investigation item No. 4.
Connect the wire.
Reconnect the connector.
Replace the connector.
To the investigation item No. 6.
Rewire.
To the investigation item No. 6.
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Replace the regenerative resistor
Replace the cable.
To the investigation item No. 7.
Review the power supply.
Replace the drive unit.
Overspeed
The motor was detected to rotate at a speed exceeding the allowable speed. (In the case of linear
motor, it was detected to move at a speed exceeding the allowable speed.)
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check if the unit in which the alarm
The alarm was detected in servo.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
{ {
was detected is servo or spindle.
The alarm was detected in spindle.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check the servo parameters SV001 The settings are incorrect.
Correctly set.
{
(PC1), SV002 (PC2), SV018 (PIT)
Correctly set.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
and SV025 (MTYP) settings.
Check the spindle parameter SP017 The setting is incorrect.
Correctly set.
(TSP) setting.
The alarm is detected at 115% of
{
SP017.
Correctly set.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Check the PLG output waveform.
There is a problem.
Adjust the PLG output waveform.
{ {
Normal.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Check whether the speed waveform The waveform is overshooting.
Increase the acceleration/
is overshooting.
deceleration time constant.
Check if there is any abnormality in
The waveform is not overshooting.
{ {
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex.: Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Check the investigation item No. 6.
Check the repeatability.
The alarm occurs when the motor is Replace the detector or detector
stopped.
cable.
{ {
The alarm occurs at all time.
Check the investigation item No. 7.
Alarm No.
31
1
SV SP
II - 112
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Power module overcurrent
Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.
Investigation details
Disconnect the power cable (U, V, W)
from the unit’s terminal block and
motor, and check whether a
short-circuit between the power cable
or whether conduction at both end of
wiring occurs with a tester.
Check the motor insulation with a
(megger) tester under the condition
of the investigation item No. 1.
(between motor power and ground
earth)
Check the parameter setting values.
•
Refer to the adjustment
procedure.
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive
unit side and detector side) and
check if they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a
tester.
Check the repeatability.
Replace with another unit, and check
whether the fault is on the drive unit
side or detector side.
Check for any abnormalities in the
unit's ambient environment.
(Ex.: Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
33
Investigation results
Short-circuited or not conducted.
There is no problem.
Remedies
Replace the power cables (U, V, W).
Check the investigation item No. 2.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 8.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
The error is always repeated.
Check the investigation item No. 7.
{
{
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
The alarm is on the detector side.
{
{
{
{
Less than 1MΩ. (Grounding)
1MΩ or more. (Normal)
Replace the motor.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
The value is not set correctly.
The value is set correctly.
Correctly set.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
Connection is faulty.
Connection is normal.
Correctly install.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Replace the detector cable.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
Replace the drive unit.
Replace the detector.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
Overvoltage
The main circuit bus voltage exceeded the tolerable value.
Investigation details
1 Is an external regenerative resistor
used?
2 Is the short wire connected between
P and D terminal?
Are there any problems with the
connection condition?
3 Is the combination of the used
regenerative resistor and drive unit
appropriate?
4 Is the connection of the
regenerative resistor or
regeneration resistor cable correct?
5 Is the regeneration resistor or the
regeneration resistor cable broken?
Disconnect the regenerative resistor
terminal and check the resistance
value with a tester.
6 The acceleration/deceleration time
constant is too short.
At acceleration/deceleration, has
the speed overshoot reached to the
current limit?
Investigation results
An external regenerative resistor is
used.
A built-in regenerative resistor is
used.
The wire is not connected.
The connector is disconnected.
The connector has a contact fault.
The connection is correct.
The combination is incorrect.
The combination is normal.
The connection is incorrect.
The connection is correct.
The regeneration resistor is broken.
Or the resistance value is large.
The regeneration resistor cable is
broken.
The resistance value is normal.
Reached to the current limit
The speed overshoot is applied.
The connection is normal.
II - 113
Remedies
To the investigation item No. 3.
To the investigation item No. 2.
Connect the wire.
Reconnect the connector.
Replace the connector.
To the investigation item No. 6.
Replace the correct regenerative
resistor.
To the investigation item No. 4.
Rewire.
To the investigation item No. 5.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
Replace the cable.
{
{
To the investigation item No. 6.
Increase the acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
Replace the drive unit.
{
{
Replace the regenerative resistor.
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
34
1
2
3
4
5
Investigation details
Manually shake the connection
connectors between NC and drive
unit, battery unit and drive unit, or
among multiple drive units to check if
they are disconnected.
Also, check if an excessive force is
not applied on them.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
connection of the communication
cables indicated in item 1 with a
tester. Or, replace with a correct
cable.
Check whether the NC or drive unit
software version was changed
recently.
Replace with another drive unit, and
check whether the fault is on the NC
side or drive unit side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
35
1
1
2
3
4
Remedies
Correctly install.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Replace the communication cable.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Change software version back to the
original.
The version was not changed.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
Replace the drive unit.
The alarm is on the unit connections. Check the investigation item No. 5.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
The version was changed.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
{ {
Remedies
SV SP
{ {
NC-DRV communication: Communication error
The communication with the CNC was interrupted.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "34" items.
Alarm No.
37
Investigation results
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
NC command error
The travel command data that was received from the CNC was excessive.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "34" items.
Alarm No.
36
1
NC-DRV communication: CRC error
An error was detected in the data received from the CNC.
Investigation results
Initial parameter error
An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received from the CNC at the power ON.
Investigation details
Check if the unit in which the alarm
was detected is servo or spindle.
An error parameter No. is displayed
on the NC diagnosis screen. Check
the servo parameter with the
parameter adjustment procedure.
An error parameter No. is displayed
on the NC diagnosis screen. Check
the servo parameter with the
parameter adjustment procedure.
Check the alarm No. "34" items.
Investigation results
The alarm was detected in servo.
The alarm was detected in spindle.
Wrong parameters were set.
SV001 to SV005
-1
The electronic gears are overflowing.
-2
The absolute position detection
parameter is valid when OSE104 and
OSE105 are connected. (Absolute
position control cannot be used.)
Correct parameters were set.
SP001 to SP384
Remedies
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Correct the parameter.
Set the value within the designated
setting range.
Check SV001, SV002 and SV018.
SV SP
In order to use the absolute position
control function, an absolute position
option is required.
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Set the value within the designated
setting range.
{
{
II - 114
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
38
1
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "34" items.
Alarm No.
39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
Remedies
Investigation results
SV SP
{ {
Remedies
SV SP
{ {
Overcurrent
Excessive current was detected in the motor drive current.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Check whether vibration is occurring. Vibration is occurring.
The speed loop gain setting is larger
than the standard value.
Servo: SV005 / Spindle: SP005
Check the current loop gain.
Servo: SV009,SV010,SV011,SV012
Spindle: SP081,SP082,SP083,SP084
Disconnect the power cable (U,V,W)
from the terminal block and the
cannon plug from the motor. Check
the insulation with a tester.
Check the insulation between the
motor power cable and FG.
Connect the cannon plug, and check
the insulation between the power
cable and FG.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the motor's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, cutting
water)
Alarm No.
3B
1
Investigation results
NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 2
An error was detected in the axis information data received from the CNC.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "34" items.
Alarm No.
3A
1
NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 1
An error was detected in the communication frames received from the CNC.
Remedies
• Set a filter.
• Lower the speed loop gain
(SV005/SP005).
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Set an appropriate value.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
Set the standard value.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
{
{
The power cable is short-circuited.
There is no problem.
Replace the motor power cable.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
{
There is a ground fault at the power
cable.
There is no problem.
There is a ground fault in the motor.
Replace the motor power cable.
{
{
{
{
{
{
There is no vibration.
The setting is too large.
The setting is approximately the
same as the standard value.
The setting is incorrect.
The standard value is set.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
Replace the motor.
(With the absolute position system,
the zero point must be established.)
There is no problem.
Check the investigation item No. 7.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
Power module overheat
Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.
Investigation details
Check that the fan is rotating
correctly.
Check whether the heat dissipating
fins are dirty.
Measure the drive unit's ambient
temperature.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
Large amounts of cutting oil or cutting
chips, etc., are adhered, or the
rotation is slow.
The fan is rotating properly.
Cutting oil or cutting chips, etc., are
adhered, and the fins are clogged.
The fins are normal.
55°C or more.
Remedies
Clean or replace the fan.
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Clean the fins.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Improve the ventilation and cooling
for the power distribution panel.
Less than 55°C.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 115
SV SP
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
3C
1
2
3
4
Regeneration circuit error
An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the regenerative resistor.
Investigation details
Is an external regenerative resistor
used?
Is the short wire connected between
P and D terminal?
Are there any problems with the
connection condition?
Is the connection of the regenerative
resistor or regeneration resistor
cable correct?
Is the regeneration resistor or the
regeneration resistor cable broken?
Disconnect the regenerative resistor
terminal and check the resistance
value with a tester.
Investigation results
An external regenerative resistor is
used.
A built-in regenerative resistor is
used.
The wire is not connected.
The connector is disconnected.
The connector has a contact fault.
The connection is correct.
The connection is incorrect.
The connection is correct.
The regeneration resistor is broken.
Or the resistance value is large.
The regeneration resistor cable is
broken.
The resistance value is normal.
2
To the investigation item No. 2.
Connect the wire.
Reconnect the connector.
Replace the connector.
Replace the drive unit.
Rewire.
To the investigation item No. 4.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
Replace the regenerative resistor.
Replace the cable.
Replace the drive unit.
Feedback error 1
An error was detected in the feedback signals of the position detector in a servo system, or in PLG's
feedback signals in a spindle system.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check SP019 and SP020.
Parameter is set incorrectly.
Correctly set.
{
Parameter is set correctly.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
{
Check the alarm No. "2C" items.
Alarm No.
42
1
Remedies
To the investigation item No. 3.
II - 116
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Feedback error 2
Excessive difference was detected in position data between the motor side detector and the machine
side detector in a servo system. In a spindle system, an error was detected in the encoder feedback
signals.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or
Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and
loose).
{
check if they are disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Is the detector cable wired in the
The cables are wired near each
Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power
other. (Noise is entering from the
{
cable, or are the two cables laid in
power cable.)
parallel near each other?
The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on
Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it?
the motor side.
connecting the wires together on the
{
(Is the motor grounded to one point?)
drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
The connection is faulty.
Replace the detector cable.
{
detector cable connection with a
The connection is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side.
Replace the drive unit.
{
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
detector side.
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Check SP019 and SP020.
Parameter is set incorrectly.
Correctly set.
{
Parameter is set correctly.
Check the investigation item No. 8.
{
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
Alarm No.
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm No.
45
1
2
3
Fan stop
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and overheat occurred in the power module.
Investigation details
Turn the unit power ON again, and
confirm the rotation of the fan.
Investigation results
The fan is rotating, and an alarm did
not occur again.
Note) Assure more than 10 seconds
for the time from when the
power is turned OFF till when it
is turned ON. For the fan used
for the drive unit, assuring
more than 10 seconds for the
time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned
ON is required.
Check if the connector connected to
a fan is disconnected.
The fan did not rotate. Or, an alarm
occurred again.
Check if oil or cutting chips are
adhered to the fan.
The connector is disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Oil or cutting chips are adhered.
Oil or cutting chips are not adhered.
The cable may be broken.
II - 117
Remedies
SV SP
Continue to use.
The power may be turned ON without
assuring more than 10 seconds for
the time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned ON.
Leave for more than 10 seconds, and { {
turn the power ON again.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Correctly connect the connector.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Improve the use environment and
replace the drive unit.
Replace the drive unit.
{
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
46
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Motor overheat
Thermal protection function of the motor or in the detector, has started its operation.
Investigation details
Check the repeatability.
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive
unit side and detector side) and
check if they are disconnected.
Investigation results
The alarm occurs before operation.
The alarm occurs occasionally after
operation is started.
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected.
The connection is faulty.
The connection is normal.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
detector cable connection with a
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
When using MDS-B-HR, check if the SV034/bit2 = 0
motor is validated even if a motor
SV034/bit2 = 1
thermal is not provided?
Check the overload % (servo) or load The load is large.
meter (spindle).
Is the unbalance torque high?
Was the overload alarm (50) forcibly
reset by turning the drive unit power
OFF?
8
Check the parameter settings.
9
Measure the motor temperature
when the alarm occurs.
10 When using a motor with fan, check
whether the fan is stopped, or it is
clogged with dust, etc.
11 Check the fan wiring.
12 Replace the drive unit or motor with
another drive unit or motor, and
check whether the fault is on the
drive unit side or motor side
13 Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Remedies
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
{
Correctly install.
{
{
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the cable.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
{
{
Set SP034/bit2 to 1.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
{
Servo : Check the investigation
item No. 6.
Spindle : Check the investigation
item No. 8.
The load is not large.
Check the investigation item No. 9.
The constant load torque (friction +
Select the motor so that the constant
unbalance) is 60% or more.
load torque is 60% or less.
The constant load torque is less than Check the investigation item No. 7.
60%.
The alarm was forcibly reset.
Do not turn the drive unit's power
OFF when an overload alarm occurs.
(The NC power can be turned OFF.)
The alarm was not forcibly reset.
Check the investigation item No. 9.
The parameter is not set correctly.
Correctly set.
The parameter is set correctly.
Check the investigation item No. 9.
The motor is hot.
Check the investigation item No. 10.
The motor is not hot.
Check the investigation item No. 12.
The motor fan was stopped.
Check the investigation item No. 11.
The motor fan wind flow is poor.
Clean the fan.
There is no problem.
The cable is broken.
The cable is not broken.
The alarm is on the drive unit side.
The alarm is on the motor side.
SV SP
Check the investigation item No. 12.
Replace the cable.
Replace the fan.
Replace the drive unit.
Replace the motor.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
Motor side detector: Error 5
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
1
Motor side detector: Error 6
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{
Alarm No.
48
Alarm No.
49
II - 118
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
1
Motor side detector: Error 7
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
1
Motor side detector: Error 8
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm No. "1B" items.
SV SP
{ {
Alarm No.
4A
Alarm No.
4B
Alarm No.
4E
1
Investigation details
Check the wiring and setting
environment.
1) Correctly grounded?
2) Any noise generating devices
around the unit?
3) Are the speed/position detector
cables correctly shielded?
Alarm No.
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC command mode error
The mode outside the specification was input in spindle control mode selection.
Investigation results
1) The grounding is incomplete.
2) The alarm occurs easily when a
specific device operates.
3) The cable is not correctly shielded.
No abnormality is found in particular.
Overload 1
Overload detection level became over 100%.
Investigation details
Check the overload parameters.
Servo : SV021, SV022
Spindle : SP063, SP064
Remedies
Correctly ground.
Use noise measures on the device
described on the left.
Correctly shield the cable.
Replace the drive unit.
SV SP
{
The motor or the drive unit is overloaded.
Investigation results
The standard values (below) are not
set.
Servo : SV021 = 60, SV022 = 150
Spindle : SV063 = 60, SP064 = 110
The standard values are set.
Check the overload % (servo) or load The load is large.
meter (spindle).
The load is not large.
Check whether machine resonance is Resonance is occurring.
occurring.
Remedies
Set the standard values.
Investigate item 2.
Servo : Investigate item 3.
Spindle : Investigate item 7.
Investigate item 9.
Adjust the parameters.
• Set the notch filter.
• Lower VGN1 (SV005).
Resonance is not occurring.
Investigate item 4.
Check whether the shaft sways when The motor is hunting.
Adjust the parameters.
the motor is stopped. (Hunting)
• Increase VGN1 (SV005).
• Lower VIA (SV008).
The motor is not hunting.
Investigate item 5.
Check the brake operation.
The motor brakes are not released.
Correct the faulty section.
• Check the brake relay.
The motor brake operation is normal. Investigate item 6.
• Check the connector (CN20)
connection.
Check the load current with the NC
The cutting load is large.
Lower the cutting load.
Servo Monitor, and investigate the
There is interference with the
When using the positioning pin, turn
machine load.
positioning pin.
the servo OFF when stopped.
An excessive force is applied from
Check whether the ball screw is bent,
the machine.
or whether there is a fault in the
guide.
The machine load is not large.
Investigate item 8.
Check the PLG output waveform.
There is a problem.
Adjust the PLG output waveform.
Normal
Investigate item 8.
Confirm the motor capacity selection The motor performance is
Lower the acceleration/deceleration
again.
insufficient.
rate or cutting load.
The motor performance is sufficient. Investigate item 9.
Try replacing the drive unit.
Improved.
Replace the drive unit.
Not improved.
Replace the motor.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(Note) NR and PR resetting are not possible when the overload level is 50% or more. Do not forcibly reset (AR) by turning the unit power
OFF. If AR resetting is used at 50% or higher, the level is set to 80% when the power is turned ON next. (Servo)
II - 119
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Overload 2
Current command of more than 95% of the unit's max. current was being continuously given for longer
than 1 second in a servo system. In a spindle system, current command of more than 95% of the
motor's max. current was being continuously given for longer than 1 second.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Did the alarm occur immediately after The alarm occurred after ready ON
Investigate item 2.
READY ON?
before operation starts.
{
The alarm occurred after normal
Investigate item 5.
operation.
Check that the PN voltage is supplied The voltage is not supplied.
Correctly supply the PN voltage.
{
to the drive unit.
Approx. 300V is correctly supplied.
Investigate item 3.
• Is the CHARGE lamp ON?
Check the motor power cable (U, V,
The connections are incorrect.
Connect correctly.
W phases).
{
• The power cable is not connected.
The connections are correct.
Investigate item 4.
• Is the cable connected to the motor
for another axis?
Check the detector cable connection. The connections are incorrect.
Connect correctly.
{
• Is the cable connected to the motor The connections are correct.
Investigate item 5.
for another axis?
Check whether the machine has
The machine has collided.
Check the machining program and
collided.
soft limit settings.
{
The machine has not collided.
Investigate item 6.
Check whether the current value on
The current is saturated during
Increase the acceleration/
the NC Servo Monitor screen is
acceleration/deceleration.
deceleration time constant.
saturated during
{
The current value during
Investigate item 7.
acceleration/deceleration.
acceleration/deceleration is
appropriate.
Check the detector FB.
The FB signal is abnormal.
Replace the detector.
(With the absolute position system,
{
the zero point must be established.)
The FB signal is normal.
Replace the drive unit.
Check the load meter value.
The load is large.
Lower the load.
{
The load is not large.
Investigate item 9.
Check the PLG output waveform.
There is a problem.
Adjust the PLG output waveform.
{
Normal
Replace the drive unit.
Alarm No.
51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Excessive error 1
A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo ON exceeded the setting
value.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check the excessive error detection The excessive error detection width is Set appropriate values.
width.
too small.
SV023 (Servo)
Servo standard value:
RAPID
SP102 (Orientation control)
SV023 = 60 × PGN1 ÷ 2
SP154, SP155 (C-axis control)
For the spindle, a value larger than
{ {
SP177/bitD, SP186
the droop amount:
(Spindle synchronous control)
Droop amount =
SP193/bitD, SP218
Spindle rotation speed × No. of pulses
(Synchronous tap)
Alarm No.
52
1
60 × position loop gain
2
3
Check the position detector polarity.
SV017/bit4 (Servo)
SP097/bit5 (Orientation control)
SP129/bit5 (C-axis control)
SP177/bit5
(Spindle synchronous control)
SP193/bit5
(Synchronous tap control)
Check the alarm No. "51" items.
Appropriate values are set.
The polarity is reversed.
Normal.
II - 120
Investigate item 2.
Correctly set the parameters.
Investigate item 3.
{
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Excessive error 2
A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo OFF exceeded the setting
value.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check the follow-up function while
The axis detachment function (NC
Check the investigation item No. 2.
the NC is in the servo OFF state.
parameter) is invalid.
(Note) For the axis detachment
function, refer to the NC
manual.
{
The axis detachment function (NC
Check the investigation item No. 3.
parameter) is valid.
(Note) For the axis detachment
function, refer to the NC
manual.
Check whether the axis has moved
The axis has moved.
Adjust the brakes, etc. so that the
during servo OFF, and check the
axis does not move.
{
motor brake operation.
The axis has not moved.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check the excessive error detection The excessive error detection width is Set an appropriate value.
width.
too small.
RAPID
SV026 (Servo)
SV026 = 60 × PGN1 ÷ 2
{
Alarm No.
53
1
2
3
An appropriate value is set.
Alarm No.
54
1
2
Check for problems on the NC side,
such as the position FB follow-up
control.
Excessive error 3
When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current failed.
Investigation details
Check that the PN voltage is supplied
to the drive unit.
• Is the CHARGE lamp ON?
Check the motor power cable (U, V,
W phases).
• The power cable is not connected.
• Is the cable connected to the motor
for another axis?
Investigation results
The voltage is not supplied.
Approx. 300V is correctly supplied.
Remedies
Correctly supply the PN voltage.
Investigate item 2.
The connections are incorrect.
Connect correctly.
The connections are correct.
Replace the drive unit.
SV SP
{
{
Supplement (servo)
Depending on the ideal machine position in respect to the command position, the actual machine
position could enter the actual shaded section shown below, which is separated more than the distance
set in OD1.
Position
Command position
OD1
Ideal machine position
OD2
OD2
OD1
Time
Servo OFF
Servo ON
II - 121
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
1
Collision detection 1: G0
When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in rapid traverse (G0) exceeded the
collision detection level.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check whether the machine has
The machine has collided.
Check the machining program and
collided.
soft limit settings.
The machine has not collided.
Increase the detection level (SV060). {
(The detection level should be set as
1.5-times the maximum torque or
more.)
1
Collision detection 1: G1
When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in cutting feed (G1) exceeded the
collision detection level.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check whether the machine has
The machine has collided.
Check the machining program and
collided.
soft limit settings.
The machine has not collided.
Increase the detection level (SV035. {
clG1).
(Set the detection level larger than
the maximum cutting load.)
Alarm No.
58
Alarm No.
59
Alarm No.
5A
1
2
3
Collision detection 2
When collision detection function was valid, the command torque reached the max. motor torque.
Investigation details
Check whether the machine has
collided.
Check whether the current value on
the NC Servo Monitor screen is
saturated during
acceleration/deceleration.
Can the acceleration/deceleration
time constant be changed?
Investigation results
The machine has collided.
The machine has not collided.
The current is saturated during
acceleration/deceleration.
The current value during
acceleration/deceleration is
appropriate.
The constant can be changed.
The constant cannot be changed.
Alarm No.
5B
1
SV SP
Investigate the cause of the load
fluctuation.
{
Increase the acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
Set to ignore collision detection
method 2.
{
{
Safety observation: Commanded speed error
In safety monitoring mode, the commanded speed was detected to exceed the safe speed.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Check the commanded speed on the The commanded speed and safe
NC side.
speed limit value are the same.
The commanded speed is slower
than the safe speed.
Remedies
Reduce the commanded speed on
the NC side or increase the safe
speed limit value.
SV SP
{
{
Replace the drive unit.
Safety observation: Door state error
In safety monitoring mode, the door state signal from the NC and the same signal from the drive unit
don't match. Otherwise, door open state was detected in normal mode.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check the DI input timing.
Both NC side and drive unit side input Review the DI input sequence.
timings match one another within
Check if the cable for the DI input
500ms.
signal is broken.
{ {
NC side and drive unit side inputs do Investigate the wiring and connection
not match one another within 500ms. environment.
Alarm No.
5D
1
Remedies
Check the machining program and
soft limit settings.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
II - 122
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
5E
1
2
Safety observation: Feedback speed error
In safety monitoring mode, the motor speed was detected to exceed the safe speed.
Investigation details
Check the DI input timing.
Check the wiring and setting
environment.
1) Correctly grounded?
2) Any noise generating devices
around the unit?
3) Are the speed/position detector
cables correctly shielded?
Alarm No.
5F
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
The feedback speed and safe speed Reduce the commanded speed on
limit value are the same.
the NC side or increase the safe
speed limit value.
{ {
The feedback speed is slower than
Replace the drive unit.
the safe speed.
1) The grounding is incomplete.
Correctly ground.
2) The alarm occurs easily when a
Use noise measures on the device
specific device operates.
described on the left.
{ {
3) The cable is not correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cable.
No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
External contactor error
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
Investigation details
1 Check whether the contactor's
contact has melted.
Investigation results
The contactor has melted.
The contactor has not melted.
Remedies
Replace the contactor.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the axis where an
alarm occurred was a contactor
control axis.
The alarm occurred at the axis where
the contactor control is not executed.
The alarm occurred at the axis where
the contactor control is executed.
Set the parameter correctly.
Alarm No.
61
1
2
3
4
5
6
Replace the drive unit.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
Power supply: Power module overcurrent
Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.
Investigation details
Check the state of the operation
when the alarm occurs, and check
the repeatability.
Check the load state of all motors,
and the starting/stopping frequency.
Check the power capacity.
Measure the voltage across wires.
• Is the voltage 170V or more even
when the motor is accelerating?
Measure the power voltage with a
synchroscope, and check whether
there is any distortion.
• Are there any other devices
causing the power distortion?
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Investigation results
The alarm occurs each time
immediately after 200VAC is supplied
or after READY is turned ON.
The alarm occurs frequently during
READY ON.
The alarm occurs after continuous
operation for a long time.
The unit is hot.
The total load of all motors exceeds
the rated capacity of the power
supply unit.
The total does not exceed the
capacity.
The power capacity is insufficient.
The specified power capacity is
secured.
The voltage drops to 170V or less
occasionally.
The difference of the voltage across
wires is 10V or more.
The difference of the voltage across
wires is less than 10V.
The power voltage is distorted.
The power voltage waveform is not
abnormal.
Remedies
Replace the unit.
CV
Check the investigation item No. 3.
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Lower the motor load and operation
frequency.
{
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Increase the power capacity.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Increase the power capacity.
Improve the power phase balance.
{
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Improve the source of the distortion.
Install an AC reactor.
Check the investigation item No. 6.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 123
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
62
1
2
3
4
Power supply: Frequency error
The input power supply frequency increased above the specification range.
Investigation details
Check the state of the operation
when the alarm occurs, and check
the repeatability.
Investigation results
Remedies
The alarm occurs each time
Check the investigation item No. 2.
immediately after the power is turned
ON. Or, the alarm occurs
occasionally regardless of the
operation state.
The alarm occurs only while the
Check the investigation item No. 3.
motor is accelerating/decelerating.
Measure the power voltage waveform The frequency is deviated from
Review the power facilities.
during normal operation.
50Hz±3% or 60Hz±3%.
The voltage waveform dips at some
Improve the source of the distortion.
sections.
Install an AC reactor.
There is no problem.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Measure the power voltage when the The frequency greatly fluctuates
Review the power facilities.
motor is accelerating/decelerating.
during acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage waveform during
Improve the source of the distortion.
deceleration dips in some sections.
Install an AC reactor.
There is no problem.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment.
environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Alarm No.
67
Investigation details
Check the voltage for each input
phase.
2
Check the alarm No. "71" items.
1
2
{
{
{
{
Power supply: Phase interruption
An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
1
Alarm No.
68
CV
Investigation results
There are phases with no voltage.
There is no problem.
Remedies
Correct the power supply.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
CV
{
{
Power supply: Watchdog
The system does not operate correctly.
Investigation details
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Investigation results
Remedies
The alarm occurs each time READY Replace the unit.
is turned ON.
The alarm occurs occasionally.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 124
CV
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
69
1
2
3
4
5
Investigation details
Measure the insulation across the
power cables (U,V,W) for all motors
and the ground. (Carry out a megger
test.)
Has oil come in contact with the
motor or power cable?
2
3
2
3
100kΩ or more. (Normal)
Oil has come in contact.
Oil has not come in contact.
Less than 1MΩ. (Grounding)
1MΩ or more. (Normal)
Measure the resistance across the U, Less than 100kΩ.
V, W phase terminals of the
100kΩ or more.
servo/spindle drive unit and the
ground.
(Do not measure the insulation as the
unit could be damaged.)
Check whether there is any axis in
There is an axis in which alarm has
which alarm has occurred.
occurred.
There is no axis in which alarm has
occurred.
Remedies
The motor or power cable may be
ground faulted.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Take measures so that oil does not
come in contact. Check the motor's
cannon connector and the inside of
the terminal box, and clean as
necessary.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the motor or cable.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the drive unit.
Replace the power supply unit.
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Check the alarm No. "24" items.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Power supply: External contactor welding
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
Investigation details
Check whether any alarm has
occurred on the drive unit side.
Investigation results
An alarm has occurred.
An alarm has not occurred.
The contactor has melted.
The contactor has not melted.
Check that the contactor excitation
The connection is correct.
wiring is correctly connected from the The connection is incorrect.
power supply unit's MC1 terminal.
Check whether the contactor's
contact has melted.
Alarm No.
6B
1
Investigation results
Less than 100kΩ. (Grounding)
Measure the insulation again.
Alarm No.
6A
1
Power supply: Grounding
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
Remedies
Remove the cause of the alarm on
the drive side, and check the
investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the contactor.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Correctly connect.
Replace the power supply unit.
CV
Remedies
Remove the cause of the alarm on
the drive side, and then carry out the
investigation details 2.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the unit.
CV
{
{
{
Power supply: Rush relay welding
A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF.
Investigation details
Check whether any alarm has
occurred on the drive unit side.
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Investigation results
An alarm has occurred.
An alarm has not occurred.
The alarm occurs each time READY
is turned ON.
The alarm occurs occasionally.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 125
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Alarm No.
6C
1
2
Power supply: Main circuit error
An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit capacitor.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Check the CHARGE lamp state when The CHARGE lamp remains ON for
the alarm occurs.
some time.
The lamp turns ON instantly, but
when the alarm occurs and the
contactor turns OFF, the lamp turns
OFF immediately.
The lamp never turns ON.
Disconnect the power supply unit's
PN terminal block wiring, and
measure the resistance value at 1)
and 2) shown below.
Drive unit
Power supply
unit
2)
1)
P
N
Alarm No.
6E
1
2
1
1) and 2) are both normal.
Tester
Polarity
Normal
measurement point +
P
N Several 100Ω
1)
N
P
∞Ω
P
N Several 100Ω
2)
N
P
∞Ω
CV
Check the investigation item No. 2.
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Then replace the unit.
Replace the power supply unit.
Disconnect the PN wiring, and then
check the drive unit side.
Replace the power supply unit.
Abnormal
{
Short-circuit/∞Ω
Several 100Ω
Short-circuit/∞Ω
Several 100Ω
Power supply: Memory error/AD error
An error was detected in the internal memory or A/D converter.
Investigation details
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Alarm No.
6F
1) The power supply unit side is
abnormal.
2) The drive unit side is abnormal.
Remedies
Replace the power supply unit.
Investigation results
Remedies
The alarm occurs each time READY Replace the unit.
is turned ON.
The alarm occurs occasionally.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
CV
{
{
Power supply error
No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication error was detected.
Investigation details
Check the LED display on the power
supply unit.
2
Check the rotary switch setting.
3
Check the communication cable
(CN4) connected with the drive unit.
Investigation results
"F" is flickering.
Another alarm code is flickering.
"0" is displayed.
"F" is displayed.
"8" is displayed.
"b", "C", "d" is displayed.
Something else is displayed.
0 or 4 is set.
A value other than the above is set.
There is a problem with the wiring or
shield.
There is no problem.
(Note) Alarm 6F is detected at the same time other power supply alarms occur.
II - 126
Remedies
An A/D converter error has occurred.
Check the alarm No. "6E" items.
Check items of each alarm No.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the alarm No. "68" items.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check the alarm No. "68" items.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Correctly set the rotary switch.
Replace the cable.
CV
{
{
{
Replace the unit.
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Power supply: External emergency stop error
A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and CNC emergency stop input continued for 30
seconds.
CV
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the connection between
Not wired.
Correctly wire the external
{
external emergency stop and NC
emergency stop and NC emergency
emergency stop.
stop.
Check if there is any abnormality in
No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
the unit's ambient environment.
The grounding is incomplete.
Take remedies according to the
{
causes of the abnormality.
Additionally ground and review.
Alarm No.
70
1
2
Alarm No.
71
1
2
Power supply: Instantaneous power interruption
The power was momentarily interrupted.
Investigation details
Investigate the sequence to check
whether the contactor has been
turned OFF with an emergency stop
button, etc.
Check the repeatability.
3
Check whether the power input wire
and contactor are correctly wired.
4
Check the power voltage waveform
with a synchroscope.
Alarm No.
72
1
1
2
Investigation results
The contactor has been turned OFF
externally.
The contactor has not been turned
OFF.
The alarm occurs each time READY
is turned ON.
The alarm occurs at a certain
operation.
Remedies
Review the machine sequence.
When turning the contactor OFF with
external means, such as an
emergency stop button, this alarm
can be avoided by inputting NC
emergency stop at the same time.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
CV
{
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check the investigation item No. 1.
If there is no problem, check the
investigation item No. 3.
The alarm occurs occasionally during Check the investigation item No. 4.
operation.
The wiring is incorrect.
Correctly connect.
There is no problem.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
An instantaneous power failure or
Correct the power facility.
voltage drop occurs frequently.
There is no problem.
Replace the unit.
{
{
{
Power supply: Fan stop
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat occurred in the power module.
Investigation details
Turn the unit power ON again, and
confirm the rotation of the fan.
Note) Assure more than 10 seconds
for the time from when the
power is turned OFF till when it
is turned ON. For the fan used
for the drive unit, assuring
more than 10 seconds for the
time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned
ON is required.
Check if the connector connected to
a fan is disconnected.
Check if oil or cutting chips are
adhered to the fan.
Investigation results
The fan is rotating, and an alarm did
not occur again.
The fan did not rotate. Or, an alarm
occurred again.
Remedies
Continue to use.
The power may be turned ON without
assuring more than 10 seconds for
the time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned ON.
Leave for more than 10 seconds, and
turn the power ON again.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The connector is disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected.
Correctly connect the connector.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Oil or cutting chips are adhered.
Improve the use environment and
replace the drive unit.
Oil or cutting chips are not adhered.
The cable may be broken.
Replace the drive unit.
II - 127
CV
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Power supply: Over regeneration
Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded. This
alarm cannot be reset for 15 min from the occurrence. Leave the drive system energized for more
than 15 min, then turn the power ON to reset the alarm.
CV
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the alarm occurrence state
The regenerative load value
Check whether the state is affected
and regenerative load displayed on
increases when the power is turned
by power fluctuation, grounding or
the NC Monitor screen while
ON and the motor is not rotated.
noise. If there is no problem, replace
changing the operation mode.
the unit.
The regenerative load value
A-CR : Check the investigation
increases each time the motor
item No. 2.
{
decelerates, and the alarm occurs.
C1-CV : Check the investigation
item No. 4.
The regenerative load value
A-CR : Check the investigation
increases each time the motor
item No. 2.
decelerates, but the alarm does not
C1-CV : Ease the operation mode.
occur when the operation mode is
eased.
Check whether the parameter
The setting is incorrect.
Correctly set. (Check the alarm No.
(regenerative resistor type) of the
"6D" items.)
{
drive unit controlling the power
The setting is correct.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
supply unit is correct.
Check the regenerative resistor's
The regenerative resistor is
Replace the regenerative resistor.
state.
abnormal.
{
• Is oil adhered?
There is no problem.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
• Measure the resistance value.
{
Check the alarm No. "75" items.
Alarm No.
73
1
2
3
4
Power supply: Overvoltage
L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value. As the voltage between L+ and L- is
high immediately after this alarm, another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time. Wait
more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
CV
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the repeatability.
The alarm occurs each time the
Check the investigation item No. 3.
motor decelerates.
{
The alarm occurs occasionally.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the power supply's alarm
Auxiliary regeneration frequency over Limit the occurrence of the excessive
history.
(E8) occurs just before the
instantaneous regeneration by not
over-voltage occurs.
decelerating multiple axes at the
{
same time.
Others.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check the power capacity.
The power capacity is insufficient.
Increase the power capacity.
{
The specified power capacity is
Check the investigation item No. 4.
secured.
Measure the voltage across wires.
The voltage drops to 170V or less
Increase the power capacity.
occasionally.
• Is the voltage 170V or more even
when the motor is accelerating?
The difference of the voltage across Improve the power phase balance.
{
wires is 10V or more.
The difference of the voltage across Check the investigation item No. 5.
wires is less than 10V.
Measure the power voltage with a
The power voltage is distorted.
Improve the source of the distortion.
synchroscope, and check whether
Install an AC reactor.
{
there is any distortion.
The power voltage waveform is not
Check the investigation item No. 6.
• Are there any other devices
abnormal.
causing the power distortion?
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
{
the unit's ambient environment.
environment.
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)
Alarm No.
75
1
2
3
4
5
6
II - 128
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Power supply: External emergency stop setting error
The rotary switch setting of external emergency stop is not correct, or a wrong external emergency stop
signal is input.
CV
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
Check the rotary switch setting.
When using external emergency
Set the rotary switch to "4".
{
stop, rotary switch is not set to "4".
Check if there is any abnormality in
No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
the unit's ambient environment.
The grounding is incomplete.
Take remedies according to the
{
causes of the abnormality.
Additionally ground and review.
Alarm No.
76
1
2
Alarm No.
77
1
2
3
4
Investigation details
Confirm that the fan is properly
rotating.
Check whether the heat dissipating
fins are dirty.
Measure the power supply unit's
ambient temperature.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Alarm No.
88
1
2
3
Power supply: Power module overheat
Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.
Investigation results
Large amounts of cutting oil or cutting
chips, etc., are adhered, or the
rotation is slow.
The fan is properly rotating.
Cutting oil or cutting chips, etc., are
adhered, and the fins are clogged.
The fins are normal.
55°C or more
Remedies
Clean or replace the fan.
CV
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Clean the fins.
{
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Improve the ventilation and cooling
for the power distribution panel.
Less than 55°C.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
{
{
Watchdog
The system does not operate correctly.
Investigation details
Check whether the servo or spindle
software version was changed
recently.
Check the repeatability.
Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment.
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Investigation results
The version was changed.
Remedies
Change software version back to the
original.
The version was not changed.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The error is always repeated.
Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3.
occurs sometimes thereafter.
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
environment.
II - 129
SV SP
{
{
{
{
{
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.3 Troubleshooting for each warning No.
Absolute position detector: Revolution counter error
An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute position detector. The absolute
position data cannot be compensated.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Check if there is any abnormality in
Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Check the repeatability.
Occurs frequently.
Replace the detector.
{ {
Is not repeated.
Check the investigation item No. 1.
Warning No.
9E
1
2
Battery voltage drop
The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector dropped. The absolute position
data is retained.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
SV SP
Measure the battery (MDS-A-BT)
Less than 3V.
Replace the battery unit.
{
voltage.
3V or more.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check whether the NC bus cable is
The cable is disconnected.
Correctly connect.
{
disconnected.
The cable is not disconnected.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Check whether the battery wire in the The cable is broken.
Replace the cable.
{
detector cable is broken.
The cable is not broken.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Replace the drive unit.
Improved.
Replace the drive unit.
Not improved.
Replace the detector.
{
(With the absolute position system,
the zero point must be established.)
Warning No.
9F
1
2
3
4
(Note) When warning 9F occurs, do not turn the drive unit power OFF to ensure that the absolute position data is held.
Replace the battery with the drive unit power ON.
Warning No.
A6
1
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "45" items.
Warning No.
E1
1
2
Fan stop warning
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
Investigation results
Investigation details
Check if the motor is hot.
Check if an error occurs when
executing acceleration/deceleration
operation.
Investigation results
Motor is hot.
Motor is not hot.
Error is not found in operation. Thus,
operation is possible.
Check the alarm No. "50" items.
Warning No.
E4
1
2
1
Remedies
SV SP
Check the alarm No. "50" items.
{
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Ease the operation patter, if possible.
If no alarm occurs, operation can be
continued as it is.
{
Check the investigation item 3 or later
of Alarm No. 50.
{ {
Set parameter warning
An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received from the CNC.
Investigation details
Check the error parameter No.
Investigation results
SV001 to SV256
SP001 to SP256
Check the spindle control input 4/bit 0 Selected other than 000, 001, 010
to 2.
and 100 when the alarm occurred.
Warning No.
E6
SV SP
{ {
Overload warning
Overload detection level exceeded 80%.
Error is found in operation.
3
Remedies
Remedies
Set the value within the designated
setting range.
Correctly select.
SV SP
{
{
{
Control axis detachment warning
Control axis detachment was commanded.
Investigation details
Investigation results
Remedies
The status in which removal of the control axis was commanded from the NC is indicated.
II - 130
SV SP
{
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
Warning No.
E7
1
2
3
4
Investigation details
Check if the emergency stop is
applied on the NC side.
Investigation results
The emergency stop is applied.
The emergency stop is cancelled.
Cancel the emergency stop.
Normally starts up.
"E7" remains displayed.
Check whether an alarm is occurring An alarm is occurring in another drive
in another drive unit.
unit.
An alarm is not occurring.
Turn the power of NC and 200VAC (400V) ON again
Warning No.
E9
1
2
1
Measure the input voltage of the
CN23 connector. (While emergency
stop is cancelled.)
1
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Investigation results
Remedies
CV
{
Investigation results
Use is not allowed.
Use is allowed.
24V is input.
24V is not input.
Remedies
Invalidate the external emergency
stop.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the power supply unit.
Check whether the external
emergency stop cable is broken, or
check the external contact operation.
CV
Remedies
CV
{
{
Power supply: Over regeneration warning
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "73" items.
Warning No.
EE
SV SP
In external emergency stop state
External emergency stop signal was input.
Investigation details
Check whether the specifications
allow use of the external emergency
stop.
Warning No.
EB
Remedies
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Normal.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Reset the alarm in the other drive
unit.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Instantaneous power interruption warning
The power was momentarily interrupted.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "71" items.
Warning No.
EA
1
In NC emergency stop state
Emergency stop was input from the CNC.
Investigation results
{
Power supply: Fan stop warning
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
Investigation details
Check the alarm No. "72" items.
Investigation results
Remedies
CV
{
II - 131
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.4 Parameter numbers during initial parameter error
If an initial parameter error (alarm 37) occurs, the alarm and the No. of the parameter set exceeding the
setting range will appear on the NC Diagnosis screen as shown below.
S02 Initial parameter error {{{{ †
{{{{ : Error parameter No.
†
: Axis name
If an error No. larger than the servo parameter No. is displayed for the servo drive unit (MDS-D/DH-V1/V2),
the alarm is occurring for several related parameters. Refer to the following table, and correctly set the
parameters.
Error parameter No.
Details
Related parameters
2301
The following settings are overflowing.
• Electronic gears
• Position loop gain
• Speed feedback
SV001, SV002 SV003,
SV018
SV019, SV020
SV049
2302
The absolute position parameter is valid when OSE104 and
OSE105 are connected.
SV017, SV025
II - 132
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.5 Troubleshooting the spindle system when there is no alarm or warning
If an abnormality is observed in the spindle system but no alarm or warning has occurred, refer to the
following table and check the state.
[1] The rotation speed command and actual rotation speed do not match.
1
2
3
Investigation item
Check the speed command.
Check whether there is slipping
between the motor and spindle.
(When connected with a belt or
clutch.)
Check the spindle parameters
(SP026, SP129 and following).
Investigation results
The speed command is not input
correctly.
The speed command is correct.
There is slipping.
No particular problems found.
Remedies
Input the correct speed command.
The correct values are not set.
The correct values are set.
Set the correct values.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
[2] The starting time is long or has increased in length.
1
2
3
Investigation item
Check whether the friction torque
has increased.
Manually rotate the motor bearings
and check the movement.
Check whether the torque limit
signal has been input.
Investigation results
The friction torque has increased.
No particular problems found.
The bearings do not rotate
smoothly.
The bearings rotate smoothly.
The signal has been input.
The signal is not input.
Remedies
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Replace the spindle motor.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Do not input this signal.
Replace the drive unit.
[3] The motor stops during cutting.
1
2
Investigation item
Check the load rate during cutting.
Investigation results
The load meter sways over 120%
during cutting.
No particular problems found.
Carry out the same investigations and remedies as section (4).
Remedies
Reduce the load.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
[4] The vibration and noise (gear noise), etc., are large.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Investigation item
Check the machine's dynamic
balance. (Coast from the maximum
speed.)
Check whether there is a resonance
point in the machine. (Coast from
the maximum speed.)
Check the machine's backlash.
Investigation results
The same noise is heard during
coasting.
No particular problems found.
Vibration and noise increase at a
set rotation speed during coasting.
No particular problems found.
The backlash is great.
No particular problems found.
The vibration and noise levels will
increase when the setting value is
set to approx. half.
The symptoms do not change
even if the above value is set.
Remedies
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Check the spindle parameter
Change the setting value.
settings.
Note that the impact response will
(SP005:VGN1, SP006:VIA1,
drop.
SP007:VIL1, SP008:VGN2,
Return the setting values to the
SP009:VIA2, SP010:VIL2,
original values.
SP014:PY1)
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly connect the connector.
unit side and detector side) and
loose).
check if they are disconnected.
The connector is not disconnected Check the investigation item No. 6.
(or loose).
Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or
Replace the detector cable.
connection of the speed detector
disconnected.
Correct the connection.
cable with a tester.
The connection is normal.
Replace the drive unit.
II - 133
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
[5] The spindle coasts during deceleration.
1
Investigation item
Check whether there is slipping
between the motor and spindle.
(When connected with a belt or
clutch.)
Investigation results
There is slipping.
No particular problems found.
Remedies
Repair the machine side.
Replace the drive unit.
[6] The rotation does not stabilize.
1
2
3
4
Investigation item
Investigation results
Check the spindle parameter SP005 The rotation stabilizes when the
(SP008) settings.
settings values are both set to
approx. double.
The symptoms do not change
even when the above value is set.
Manually shake the speed detector
connectors (spindle drive unit side
and speed detector side) to check if
they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
connection of the speed detector
cable with a tester.
(Especially check the shield wiring.)
Investigate the wiring and
installation environment.
1) Is the ground correctly
connected?
2) Are there any noise-generating
devices near the drive unit?
Remedies
Change the setting value.
Note that the gear noise may
increase.
Return the setting values to the
original values.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
The connector is disconnected (or Correctly connect the connector.
loose).
The connector is not disconnected Check the investigation item No. 3.
(or loose).
The connection is faulty or
Replace the detector cable.
disconnected.
Correct the connection.
The connection is normal.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
1) The grounding is incomplete.
2) The alarm occurs easily when a
specific device operates.
No particular problems found.
Correctly ground.
Use noise measures on the device
described on the left.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
[7] The speed does not rise above a set level.
1
2
3
4
5
Investigation item
Check the speed command.
Check whether the override input is
input from the machine operation
panel.
Check whether the load has
suddenly become heavier.
Manually rotate the motor bearings
and check the movement.
Manually shake the speed detector
connectors (spindle drive unit side
and speed detector side) to check if
they are disconnected.
Turn the power OFF, and check the
connection of the speed detector
cable with a tester.
(Especially check the shield wiring.)
Investigation results
The speed command is not input
correctly.
The speed command is input
correctly.
The load has become heavier.
No particular problems found.
The bearings do not rotate
smoothly.
The bearings rotate smoothly.
The connector is disconnected (or
loose).
The connector is not disconnected
(or loose).
The connection is faulty or
disconnected.
The waveform is normal.
II - 134
Remedies
Input the correct speed command.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
Repair the machine side.
Check the investigation item No. 3.
Replace the spindle motor.
Check the investigation item No. 4.
Correctly connect the connector.
Check the investigation item No. 5.
Replace the detector cable.
Correct the connection.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
III
Explanation of Parameters
1. Outline
1.1 Screen Transition Chart
1. Outline
1.1 Screen Transition Chart
The menus for screens related to maintenance appear when the function key Mainte is pressed.
The parameter menu appears when the menu key Param is pressed.
Process
parameters
Control
parameters
Axis
parameters
Operation
parameters
I/O
parameters
Ethernet
parameters
Computer
link
parameters
Subprogram
storage
destination
parameters
Base
system
parameters
Base axis
specification
parameters
Base
common
parameters
Axis
specifications
parameters
Absolute
position
parameters
Servo
parameters
Spindle
specification
parameters
Spindle
parameters
Rotary axis
configuration
parameters
PLC timer
PLC
integrated
timer
PLC
counter
PLC
constants
Selecting
the PLC bit
Error
compensation
parameters
Error data
Macro list
Position
switches
Auxiliary
axis
parameters
Open
param 1
Open
param 2
Barrier data
User parameters
Zero point
return
parameters
Machine parameters
(Note) There are user parameter dedicated menus in the screens related to setup. The menu configuration
differs slightly from the above configuration. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.
1.2 Unit
(1) Input setting unit and number of decimal digits
The number of digits in the decimal section of the parameters related to length is determined by the input
setting unit.
The input setting unit is set with parameter "#1003 iunit".
Input setting
unit
No. of digits in
decimal section
B
3
0 to 999.999 (mm)
C
4
0 to 999.9999 (mm)
D
5
0 to 999.99999 (mm)
E
6
0 to 999.999999 (mm)
Example of setting range
The setting ranges indicated in this manual use the input setting unit "B".
III - 1
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<WRK COUNT> (No. of workpieces machined)
【#8001】
WRK COUNT M
Set the M code for counting the number of the workpiece repeated machining.
The number of the M-codes set by this parameter is counted.
The No. will not be counted when set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 99
【#8002】
WRK COUNT
Set the initial value of the number of workpiece machining. The number of current workpiece
machining is displayed.
---Setting range--0 to 999999
【#8003】
WRK COUNT LIMIT
Set the maximum number of workpiece machining.
A signal will be output to PLC when the number of machining times is counted to this limit.
---Setting range--0 to 999999
<AUTO TLM> (Automatic tool length measurement)
【#8004】
SPEED
Set the feedrate during automatic tool length measurement.
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#8005】
ZONE r
Set the distance between the measurement point and deceleration start point.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8006】
ZONE d
Set the tolerable range of the measurement point.
An alarm will occur when the sensor signal turns ON before the range, set by this parameter, has
not been reached from the measurement point, or when the signal does not turn ON after the range
is passed.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 2
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<AUTO CORNER OVR.> (Automatic corner override)
【#8007】
OVERRIDE
Set the override value for automatic corner override.
---Setting range--0 to 100 (%)
【#8008】
MAX ANGLE
Set the maximum corner opening angle where deceleration should start automatically.
When the angle is larger than this value‚ deceleration will not start.
---Setting range--0 to 180 (°)
【#8009】
DSC. ZONE
Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner.
Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
<T-TIP OFFSET> (Wear data input)
【#8010】
ABS. MAX.
for L system only
Set the maximum value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount.
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 99.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applies)
【#8011】
INC. MAX.
for L system only
Set the maximum value for when inputting the tool wear compensation amount in the incremental
mode.
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 99.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applies)
III - 3
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle)
【#8012】
G73 n
for M system only
Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle).
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8013】
G83 n
Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling cycle).
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8014】
CDZ-VALE
for L system only
Set the screw cut up amount for G76 and G78 (thread cutting cycle).
---Setting range--0 to 127 (0.1 lead)
【#8015】
CDZ-ANGLE
for L system only
Set the screw cut up angle for G76 and G78 (thread cutting cycle).
---Setting range--0 to 89 (°)
【#8016】
G71 MINIMUM
for L system only
Set the minimum value of the last cutting amount by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).
The cutting amount of the last cutting will be the remainder. When the remainder is smaller than this
parameter setting, the last cycle will not be executed.
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8017】
G71 DELTA-D
for L system only
Set the change amount of the rough cutting cycle.
The rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) cutting amount repeats d+Δd, d, d-Δd using the value (d)
commanded with D as a reference. Set the change amount Δd.
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8018】
G84/G74 n
for M system only
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 4
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<PRECISION> (High-accuracy control)
【#8019】
R COMP
Set a compensation coefficient for reducing a control error in the reduction of a corner roundness
and arch radius.
The larger the setup value, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the
corner will go down, the cycle time will be extended.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 99 (%)
Theor R decrease
The value calculated with the following data is displayed for the theoretical radius reduction error
amount ΔR (mm).
Command
path
ΔR
F
+
Path after
servo
control
Theoretical radius reduction amount at arc center
【#8020】
DCC. angle
Set up the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner.
When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-accuracy mode is larger than the set value, it will
be determined as a corner and the speed will go down to sharpen the edge.
θ
If the set value is smaller than θ,
the speed goes down to optimize
the corner.
(Note) If "0" is set, it will be handled as 5 degrees.
---Setting range--0 to 89 (degrees)
0: The angle will be 5°.
【#8021】
COMP_CHANGE
Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the
high-accuracy control mode.
0: Share ("#8019 R COMP" is applied.)
1: Separate
・ Corner : #8022 CORNER COMP
・ Curve : #8023 CURVE COMP
(Note) Set "1" when using SSS control.
III - 5
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8022】
CORNER COMP
Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during
the high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1".
---Setting range---1000 to 99 (%)
【#8023】
CURVE COMP
Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the radius reduction amount at the
curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1".
For theoretical radius reduction error amount, refer to "Theor R decrease" in "#8019 R COMP"
---Setting range---1000 to 99 (%)
<SPILINE> (High-accuracy spline)
【#8025】
SPLINE ON
for M system only
Select whether to enable the spline function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Spline interpolation is valid during G61.2 modal, regardless of this setting.
【#8026】
CANCEL ANG.
for M system only
Set the angle where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled.
When the angle made by blocks exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation will be
canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed
angle.
---Setting range--0 to 180 (°)
0: 180 (°)
【#8027】
Toler-1
for M system only
Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the
tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally
about 10 μm)
When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear.
---Setting range--0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8028】
Toler-2
for M system only
Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the
tolerance applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally
about 10 μm)
When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear.
---Setting range--0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8029】
FairingL
for M system only
Set the length of the block subject to fairing.
(Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".)
---Setting range--0 to 100.000 (mm)
III - 6
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8030】
MINUTE LENGS for M system only
Set the fine-segment length where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled.
When the length of one block exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation is canceled
temporarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a little smaller than one block length of
the program.
If "-1" is set, spline interpolation will be performed regardless of block length.
---Setting range---1 to 127 (mm)
0: 1 (mm)
<Fairing>
【#8033】
Fairing ON
for M system only
Select whether to use the fairing function.
0: Not use
1: Use
Fairing function is enabled during G61.2 modal, regardless of this setting.
【#8034】
AccClamp ON
for M system only
Select the method for clamping the cutting speed.
0: Clamp with parameter "#2002 clamp" or the corner deceleration function.
1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration judgment.
(Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".)
【#8036】
CordecJudge
for M system only
Select the condition to decide a corner.
0: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block.
1: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block, excluding minute blocks.
(Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".)
【#8037】
CorJudgeL
for M system only
Set the length of the block to be excluded when deciding a corner.
(Enabled when "#8036 CordecJudge" is set to "1".)
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
<C-MODAL> (C axis normal line)
【#8041】
C-rot.R
Set the length from the center of the normal line control axis to the tool tip. This is used to calculate
the turning speed at the block joint.
This is enabled during the normal line control type II.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8042】
C-ins.R
Set the radius of the arc to be automatically inserted into the corner during normal line control.
This is enabled during the normal line control type I.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8043】
Tool HDL FD OFS
Set the length from the tool holder to the tool tip.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 7
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8044】
UNIT*10
Set the command increment scale.
The scale will be "1" when "0" is set.
---Setting range--0 to 10000 (fold)
0: One fold
<FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle)
【#8051】
G71 THICK
Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72)
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8052】
G71 PULL UP
Set the amount of pull-up when returning to the cutting start point for the rough cutting cycle (G71.
G72).
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8053】
G73 U
Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8054】
G73 W
Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8055】
G73 R
Set how many times cutting will be performed in the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range--0 to 99999 (times)
【#8056】
G74 RETRACT
Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the cutting-off cycle (G74, G75).
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8057】
G76 LAST-D
Set the amount of final cut-in by the compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8058】
G76 TIMES
Set how many times the amount of final cut-in cycle (G76 finish margin) will be divided in the
compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range--0 to 99 (times)
III - 8
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8059】
G76 ANGLE
Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range--0 to 99 (°)
<3-dimensional tool radius compensation>
【#8071】
3-D CMP
for M system only
Set the value of the denominator constants for 3-dimensional tool radius compensation.
Set the value of "p" in the following formula.
Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p
Vx, Vy, Vz : X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes
i, j, k : Program command value
r : Offset
p =√(i2 + j2 + k2) when the set value is "0".
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999
<Scaling>
【#8072】
SCALING P
for M system only
Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification in the machining program specified by G50 or G51
command.
This parameter will be valid when the program specifies no scale factor.
---Setting range---99.999999 to 99.999999
<Spiral interpolation>
【#8075】
SpiralEndErr
for M system only
Set the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position, commanded by the spiral
or conical interpolation command with the command format type 2, differs from the end point
position obtained from the speed and increment/decrement amount.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8078】
Screen Saver Timer
Set the period of time before turn-OFF of the display unit backlight.
When "0" is set, the backlight is not turned OFF.
---Setting range--0 to 60 (min)
0: The backlight is not turned OFF
<Deep hole drilling cycle>
【#8083】
G83S modeM
for M system only
Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.
---Setting range--1 to 99999999
【#8084】
G83S Clearance for M system only
Set the clearance amount for the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle (G83).
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
III - 9
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8085】
G83S Forward F for M system only
Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the small diameter deep hole drilling
cycle (G83).
---Setting range--0 to 99999 (mm/min)
【#8086】
G83S Back F
for M system only
Set the speed for returning from the hole bottom during the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle
(G83).
---Setting range--0 to 99999 (mm/min)
<SSS control>
【#8090】
SSS ON
for M system only
Set whether to enable the SSS control with G05 P10000.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8091】
StdLength
for M system only
Set the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape.
To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a large value. To enable sufficient deceleration,
set a small value.
If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will be applied.
---Setting range--0 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8092】
ClampCoeff
for M system only
Set the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments.
Coefficient = √setting value
---Setting range--1 to 100
【#8093】
StepLeng
for M system only
Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as
the CAM path difference [Tolerance].)
If "0" is set, the standard value (5µm) will be applied.
If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps.
---Setting range---1.000 to 0.100 (mm)
【#8094】
DccWaitAdd
for M system only
Set the time to wait for deceleration when the speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.
---Setting range--0 to 100 (ms)
III - 10
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<Coord rotation>
【#8621】
Coord rot plane (H)
Set the plane (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
Usually, set the name of the 1st axis.
When not set, "X" axis will be set.
---Setting range--Axis name
【#8622】
Coord rot plane (V)
Set the plane (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
Usually, set the name of the 2nd axis.
When not set, "Y" axis will be set.
---Setting range--Axis name
【#8623】
Coord rot centr (H)
Set the center coordinates (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
---Setting range---999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8624】
Coord rot centr (V)
Set the center coordinates (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
---Setting range---999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8625】
Coord rot vctr (H)
Set the vector components (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically
calculated.
---Setting range---999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8626】
Coord rot vctr (V)
Set the vector components (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically
calculated.
---Setting range---999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8627】
Coord rot angle
Set the rotation angle for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation vector (#8625, #8626) will be "0".
---Setting range---360.000 to 360.000 (°)
III - 11
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<TLM>
【#8701】
Tool length
Set the length to the touch tool tip.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8702】
Tool Dia
Set the diameter of the sphere at the touch tool tip.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8703】
OFFSET X
This sets the deviation amount (X direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8704】
OFFSET Y
Set the deviation amount (Y direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8705】
RETURN
Set the one-time return distance for contacting again.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8706】
FEED
Set the feedrate when contacting again.
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#8707】
Skip past amout (H)
Set the difference (horizontal axis direction) between the skip read value and actual skip position.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8708】
Skip past amout (V)
Set the difference (vertical axis direction) between the skip read value and actual skip position.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8709】
EXT work sign rvs
Select when using the external workpiece coordinate system with Z shift.
Select whether to reverse the sign.
0: External workpiece offset (Z shift) without sign reversal
1: External workpiece offset (Z shift) with sign reversal
【#8710】
EXT work ofs invld
Set whether to enable external workpiece offset subtraction when setting the workpiece coordinate
offset.
0: Not subtract the external workpiece offset. (Conventional specification)
1: Subtract the external workpiece offset.
III - 12
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
【#8711】
TLM L meas axis
Set the tool length measurement axis.
Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name.
---Setting range--Axis name
(Note) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 3rd axis name will be set as default.
【#8712】
TLM D meas axis
Set the tool diameter measurement axis.
Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name.
---Setting range--Axis name
(Note) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 1st axis name will be set as default.
【#19001】
Syn.tap(,S)cancel
0: Retain the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return
1: Cancel the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return with G80
【#19002】
Zero-point mark
Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic trace and 2D check.
0: Machine coordinates zero point (same as conventional method)
1: Workpiece coordinate zero point
【#19003】
PRG coord rot type
Select the start point of the initial travel command after G68 command.
0: Calculate the end position using the current position on the local coordinate system before
rotating, without rotating the start point in accordance with the coordinates rotation.
1: Calculate the end position, assuming that the start point rotates in accordance with the
coordinates rotation.
III - 13
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters
<Surface speed control>
【#19425】
ManualB Std R1
Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed.
When the setting value of #19425 is larger than that of "#19427 ManualB Std R2", #19425 setting
will be used as surface speed control standard radius 2: #19427 setting will be used as surface
speed control standard radius 1.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#19426】
ManualB Std F1
This sets the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 1 (ManualB Std R1).
When the setting value of #19426 is larger than that of "#19428 ManualB Std F2", #19426 setting
will be used as surface speed control standard speed 2: #19427 setting will be used as surface
speed control standard speed 1.
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (°/min)
【#19427】
ManualB Std R2
Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed.
When the same value is set as "#19425 ManualB Std R1", the surface speed control standard
speed 1 (ManualB Std F1) will be selected as the rotary axis speed if the radius is less than that
value. The surface speed control standard speed 2 (ManualB Std F2) is selected if larger than the
set value.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#19428】
ManualB Std F2
Set the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 2 (ManualB Std R2).
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (°/min)
III - 14
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters
【#8101】
MACRO SINGLE
Select how to control the blocks where the user macro command continues.
0: Do not stop while macro blocks continue.
1: Stop every block during signal block operation.
【#8102】
COLL. ALM OFF
Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: An alarm will be output and operation stops when an interference is judged.
1: Changes the path to avoid interference.
【#8103】
COLL. CHK OFF
Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: Performs interference check.
1: Does not perform interference check.
【#8105】
EDIT LOCK B
Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999 in the memory.
0: Enable the editing.
1: Prohibit the editing of above programs.
When "1" is set, the file cannot be opened.
【#8106】
G46 NO REV-ERR
for L system only
Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).
0: An alarm will be output and operation will stop when the compensation direction is reversed (G41
-> G42’ G42 -> G41).
1: An alarm won't occur when the compensation direction is reversed, and the current compensation
direction will be maintained.
【#8107】
R COMPENSATION
Select whether to move to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command during arc
cutting mode.
0: Move to the inside, making the arc smaller than the command value.
1: Compensate the movement to the inside.
【#8108】
R COMP Select
Select the arc radius error compensation target.
0: Perform compensation over all axes.
1: Perform compensation axis by axis.
(Note) This parameter is effective only when "#8107 R COMPENSATION" is "1".
【#8109】
HOST LINK
Select whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port.
0: Disable (Enable normal RS-232C communication.)
1: Enable (Disable normal RS-232C communication.)
III - 15
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters
【#8110】
G71/G72 POCKET
Select whether to enable the pocket machining when there is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting
cycle (G71, G72) finishing program.
0: OFF
1: ON
【#8111】
Milling Radius
Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.
0: All axes radius command
1: Each axis setting (follows "#1019 dia")
(Note) This parameter is valid only in the milling (cylindrical/polar coordinate) interpolation mode.
【#8112】
DECIMAL PNT-P
Select whether to enable the decimal point command for G04 address P.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8113】
Milling Init G16
Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.
#8113
#8114
Plane
0
0
G17 plane
0
1
G19 plane
1
0
G16 plane
1
1
0: Not G16 plane
1: G16 plane
(Note) This parameter is valid for the G code system 2 or 3 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3" or "4").
【#8114】
Milling Init G19
Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.
#8113
#8114
Plane
0
0
G17 plane
0
1
G19 plane
1
0
G16 plane
1
1
0: Not G19 plane
1: G19 plane
(Note) This parameter is valid for the G code system 2 or 3 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3" or "4").
【#8116】
Coord rot para invd
Select whether to enable the coordinate rotation by the parameters.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8117】
OFS Diam DESIGN
Select tool radius or tool diameter compensation amount to be specified.
0: Tool radius compensation amount
1: Tool diameter compensation amount
【#8119】
Comp. unit switch
Select the setting unit of compensation amount that has no decimal point.
0: 1mm (or 1inch) unit
1: The minimum command unit (follows "#1003 iunit")
III - 16
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters
【#8121】
Screen Capture
Select whether to enable the screen capture function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note1) By setting this parameter to "1", and by keeping pushing the [SHIFT] key, screen capture
will be executed.
(Note2) This parameter is valid only with M70 Series.
【#8122】
Keep G43 MDL M-REF
Select whether to keep the tool length offset by high speed manual reference position return during
tool length offset.
0: Will not be kept (Cancel)
1: Kept
【#8124】
Mirr img at reset
Select the operation type of the mirror image by parameter setting and the mirror image by external
input.
0: The current mirror image is canceled, and new mirror image will start with the machine position
at reset as the mirror center.
1: The mirror center is kept to continue the mirror image.
【#8145】
Validate F1 digit
Select whether to execute the F command with a 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical
command.
0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (with the feedrate specified by the parameters "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1189
F5")
【#8154(PR)】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#8155】
Sub-pro interrupt
Select the method for the user macro interrupt.
0: The user macro interrupt of macro type
1: The user macro interrupt of sub-program type
【#8156】
Fine thread cut E
Select the address E type when cutting an inch screw.
0: Specify the number of threads per inch for inch screw cutting.
1: Specify the precision lead for inch screw cutting.
III - 17
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters
【#8157】
Radius comp type B (M system) / Nose R comp type B (L system)
For M system
Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel
commands are operated during radius compensation.
0: The processing does not handle the start-up or cancel command block: handle the offset vector in
the direction vertical to that of the command instead.
1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next
block.
For L system
Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel
commands are operated during nose R or radius compensation.
0: The processing does not handle the start-up or cancel command block: handle the offset vector in
the direction vertical to that of the command instead.
1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next
block.
【#8158】
Init const sur spd
Select the initial state after power-ON.
0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode.
1: Constant surface speed control mode.
【#8159】
Synchronous tap
Select whether to use the floating tap chuck in G74 and G84 tap cycles.
0: With a floating tapping chuck
1: Without a floating tapping chuck
【#8160】
Start point alarm
Select an operation when the operation start point cannot be found while moving to the next block of
G117.
0: The auxiliary function is enabled after the block for the movement has finished.
1: The program error (P33) occurs.
III - 18
2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters
【#8201】
AX. RELEASE
Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target.
0: Control as normal.
1: Remove from control target.
【#8202】
OT-CHECK OFF
Select whether to enable the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8203】
OT-CHECK-CANCEL
When the simple absolute position method ("#2049 type" is "9") is selected, the stored stroke limits I,
II (or IIB) and IB can be disabled until the first reference position return is executed after the power is
turned ON.
0: Enable (according to #8202)
1: Temporarily cancel
(Note) "#8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL" affects all the stored stroke limits.
【#8204】
OT-CHECK-N
Set the coordinates of the (-) direction in the movable range of the stored stroke limit II or the lower
limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.
If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid.
If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the prohibited range will be between two points
even when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse.
When II is selected, the entire range will be prohibited if #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8205】
OT-CHECK-P
Set the coordinates of the (+) direction in the movable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper
limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8206】
TOOL CHG. P
Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return).
Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8207】
G76/87 IGNR
for M system only
Select whether to enable the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring).
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8208】
G76/87 (-)
for M system only
Select the shift direction at G76 and G87.
0: Shift to (+) direction
1: Shift to (-) direction
【#8209】
G60 SHIFT
for M system only
Set the last positioning direction and distance for a G60 (unidirectional positioning) command.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
III - 19
2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters
【#8210】
OT INSIDE
Select whether the stored stoke limit function set by #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from
moving to the inside or outside of the specified range.
0: Inhibits outside area (Select stored stroke limit II.)
1: Inhibits inside area (Select stored stroke limit II B.)
【#8211】
MIRR. IMAGE
Select whether to enable the parameter mirror image function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8213(PR)】
Rotation axis type
Select the rotation type (short-cut valid/invalid) or linear type (workpiece coordinate linear type/all
coordinate linear type).
This parameter is enabled only when "#1017 rot" is set to "1". (Note)
0: Short-cut invalid
1: Short-cut valid
2: Workpiece coordinate linear type
3: All coordinate linear type
(Note) The movement method is as follows by the specified rotation axis type.
Setting value
0
Display range: 0° to 359.999°
Workpiece
coordinate value
Machine
coordinate
value/relative
position
1
2
3
Display range: 0° to ±99999.999°
Display range: 0° to 359.999°
Display range:
0° to ±99999.999°
ABS command The incremental amount from Moves with In the same manner as the normal
the end point to the current
a short-cut linear axis, moves according to the sign
position is divided by 360, and to the end by the amount obtained by subtracting
the axis moves by the
point.
the current position from the end point.
remainder amount according to
the sign.
INC command Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded incremental
amount starting at the current position.
The movement to the middle point applies to the ABS command or the INC
Reference
position return command.
Returns with movement within 360 degrees from the
middle point to reference position.
【#8215】
Moves and returns in the
reference position direction
for the difference from the
current position to the
reference position.
TLM standard length
Set the TLM standard length.
TLM standard length is the distance from a tool replacement point (reference position) to the
measurement basic point (surface) which is used to measure the tool length.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 20
2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters
【#8216】
Type in G28 return
Select the performance after establishing the reference position in reference position return
command.
0: Moves to the reference position.
1: Won't move to the reference position.
【#8217】
Check start point
Set a drawing start position in graphic check of each axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 21
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
【#8901】
Counter type 1
Set the type of counter displayed at the upper left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#8902】
Counter type 2
Set the type of counter displayed at the lower left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#8903】
Counter type 3
Set the type of counter displayed at the upper right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
III - 22
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
【#8904】
Counter type 4
Set the type of counter displayed at the lower right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#8905】
Counter type 5
Set the type of counter displayed at the left of the Manual display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#8906】
Counter type 6
Set the type of counter displayed at the right of the Manual display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Work coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip work coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#8910】
Edit undo
Set whether to enable the Undo function during program edit on the Monitor screen or Edit screen.
0: Disable
1: Enable
III - 23
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
【#8914】
Auto Top search
Select the operation method for restart search type 2.
0: It is necessary to set the top search position arbitrarily.
1: The restart search is executed from O No. that is designated as head.
【#8915】
Auto backup day 1
When the NC power is ON after the designated date was passed over, the automatic backup is
executed.
When "-1" is set to "Auto backup day 1", the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power
ON.
When "0" is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4", the automatic backup is not executed. It is
possible to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a month.
---Setting range---1 to 31
("-1" can be set for "Auto backup day 1" only.)
【#8916】
Auto backup day 2
When the NC power is ON after the designated date was passed over, the automatic backup is
executed.
When "-1" is set to "Auto backup day 1", the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power
ON.
When "0" is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4", the automatic backup is not executed. It is
possible to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a month.
---Setting range---1 to 31
("-1" can be set for "Auto backup day 1" only.)
【#8917】
Auto backup day 3
When the NC power is ON after the designated date was passed over, the automatic backup is
executed.
When "-1" is set to "Auto backup day 1", the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power
ON.
When "0" is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4", the automatic backup is not executed. It is
possible to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a month.
---Setting range---1 to 31
("-1" can be set for "Auto backup day 1" only.)
【#8918】
Auto backup day 4
When the NC power is ON after the designated date was passed over, the automatic backup is
executed.
When "-1" is set to "Auto backup day 1", the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power
ON.
When "0" is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4", the automatic backup is not executed. It is
possible to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a month.
---Setting range---1 to 31
("-1" can be set for "Auto backup day 1" only.)
【#8919】
Auto backup device
Select the automatic backup target device.
*The setting range differs according to the model.
---Setting range--[M700 Series]
0: DS
1: HD
2: Memory card
[M70 Series]
0: Memory card
III - 24
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
【#8920】
3D tool ofs select
Select the method to calculate the drawing position when drawing a solid.
With 3D drawing, the drawing position (tool tip position) is calculated with the method designated
with this parameter, and the image is drawn.
0: Machine position ± tool shape setting window data
1: Machine position ± tool compensation amount
2: Machine position ± tool shape setting window data
3: Machine position ± tool shape setting window data
【#8921】
Mass Edit select
Select the editing mode for the machining programs saved in HD, FD, and memory card.
When the program size is 1.0MB (When "#8910 Edit Undo" is invalid, 2.0MB) or more, mass-editing
will be applied.
0: Regular editing mode
1: Mass-editing mode
【#8922】
T-reg-dup check
Set whether to enable the duplication check in registering tools to magazine pots, and in setting tool
Nos. for spindle/standby.
0: Duplication check valid for all valid magazines
1: Duplication check invalid
2: Duplication check valid only for the selected magazine
【#8923(PR)】
Hide Edit-IO menu
Set whether to enable the edit-in/out menu.
When disabled, the edit-input/output menu won't appear.
However, the maintenance-in/out menu is always enabled regardless of this parameter setting.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8924】
MEAS. CONFIRM MSG
Select whether to display a confirming message when attempting to write compensation data for
tool measurement, or coordinate system data for workpiece measurement.
0: Not display a confirming message
1: Display a confirming message
【#8925】
SP on 1st part sys
Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 1st part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
display is valid.
High-order: Select an upper side spindle No.
Low-order: Select a lower side spindle No.
(Note 1) When "00" is set, spindles will be displayed in a default order (the 1st spindle on the upper
side, the 2nd spindle on the lower side)
(Note 2) If you designate a bigger number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or either the
high-order or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle will be displayed.
---Setting range--High-order: 0 to 6
Low-order: 0 to 6
III - 25
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters
【#8926】
SP on 2nd part sys
Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 2nd part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
display is valid.
High-order: Select an upper side spindle No.
Low-order: Select a lower side spindle No.
(Note 1) When "00" is set, spindles will be displayed in a default order (the 1st spindle on the upper
side, the 2nd spindle on the lower side)
(Note 2) If you designate a bigger number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or either the
high-order or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle will be displayed.
---Setting range--High-order: 0 to 6
Low-order: 0 to 6
【#8927】
SP on 3rd part sys
Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 3rd part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
display is valid.
High-order: Select an upper side spindle No.
Low-order: Select a lower side spindle No.
(Note 1) When "00" is set, spindles will be displayed in a default order (the 1st spindle on the upper
side, the 2nd spindle on the lower side)
(Note 2) If you designate a bigger number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or either the
high-order or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle will be displayed.
---Setting range--High-order: 0 to 6
Low-order: 0 to 6
【#8928】
SP on 4th part sys
Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 4th part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
display is valid.
High-order: Select an upper side spindle No.
Low-order: Select a lower side spindle No.
(Note 1) When "00" is set, spindles will be displayed in a default order (the 1st spindle on the upper
side, the 2nd spindle on the lower side)
(Note 2) If you designate a bigger number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or either the
high-order or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle will be displayed.
---Setting range--High-order: 0 to 6
Low-order: 0 to 6
III - 26
2. User Parameters
2.5 Barrier Data
2.5 Barrier Data (For L system only)
【#8300】
P0
Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier.
Set the center coordinate (radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8301】
P1
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8302】
P2
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8303】
P3
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8304】
P4
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8305】
P5
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8306】
P6
Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8310】
Barrier ON
Select whether to enable the chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: Disable (Setting from special display unit will be enabled)
1: Enable
III - 27
2. User Parameters
2.5 Barrier Data
【#8311】
P7
Set the area of the left spindle section.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8312】
P8
Set the area of the left spindle section.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8313】
P9
Set the area of the right spindle section.
X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value)
Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8314】
P10
Set the area of the right spindle section.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#8315】
Barrier Type (L)
Select the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
【#8316】
Barrier Type (R)
Select the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
【#8317】
ELIV. AX. Name
Set the name of the delivery axis when the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable.
When using the multi-part system method and the delivery axis is an axis in the other part system,
designate the axis including the part system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the part system is not
designated as A and B, the set part system will be used.
---Setting range--A/B/.. (axis name)
1A/1B/..
2A/2B/.. (with part system designated)
0: Cancel
【#8318】
Stock Angle (L)
Set the angle for the left tailstock end section.
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set).
---Setting range--0 to 180 (°)
0: 90° (default)
III - 28
2. User Parameters
2.5 Barrier Data
【#8319】
Stock Angle (R)
Set the angle for the right tailstock end section.
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set).
---Setting range--0 to 180 (°)
0: 90° (default)
III - 29
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting‚ outputting or
referring to data‚ or when performing tape operation.
9001 to 9018 parameters:
Set which channel to connect which device to for each I/O application.
9101 to 9528 parameters:
Set the transmission speed, etc., for each input/output device.
Up to five types of input/output device parameters can be set in device 0 to 4.
【#9001】
DATA IN PORT No.
Select the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9002】
DATA IN DEV. No.
Select the device No. for inputting the data.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9003】
DATA OUT PORT No.
Select the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9004】
DATA OUT DEV. No.
Select the device No. for outputting the data.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9005】
TAPE MODE PORT No.
Select the input port for running with the tape mode.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9006】
TAPE MODE DEV. No.
Select the device No. to be run with the tape mode.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9007】
MACRO PRINT PORT No.
Select the output port used for the user macro DPRINT command.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9008】
MACRO PRINT DEV. No.
Select the device No. used for the DPRINT command.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
III - 30
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9009】
PLC IN/OUT PORT No.
Select the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9010】
PLC IN/OUT DEV. No.
Select the device No. used for the PLC input/output.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9011】
REMOTE PRG IN PORT No.
Select the port for inputting remote programs.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9012】
REMOTE PRG IN DEV. No.
Select the device No. used to input remote programs.
The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9013】
EXT UNIT PORT No.
Select the port for communication with an external unit.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9014】
EXT UNIT DEV. No.
Select the unit No. used for communication with an external unit
(The unit Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9017】
HANDY TERMINAL PORT No.
Select the port for communication with a handy terminal.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9018】
HANDY TERMINAL DEV. No.
Select the device No. used for communication with a handy terminal.
(The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#9051】
Data I/O port
Select whether to use display side serial port or NC side serial port for data input/output function.
0: Display side serial port
1: Display side serial port
2: NC side serial port
(Note) The setting range differs according to the model.
【#9052】
Tape mode port
Select whether to use display side serial port or NC side serial port for tape mode.
0: NC side serial port
1: Display side serial port
2: NC side serial port
(Note) The setting range differs according to the model.
III - 31
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9101】
DEV0 DEVICE NAME
Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
---Setting range--Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9102】
DEV0 BAUD RATE
Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
【#9103】
DEV0 STOP BIT
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9104】
DEV0 PARITY CHECK
Select whether to add the parity check bit to the data.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9105】
DEV0 EVEN PARITY
Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. This parameter is ignored when no parity is
added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9106】
DEV0 CHR. LENGTH
Set the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9107】
DEV0 TERMINATR TYP
Select the code to terminate data reading.
0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
III - 32
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9108】
DEV0 HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
【#9109】
DEV0 DC CODE PRTY
Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9111】
DEV0 DC2/4 OUTPUT
Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
---Setting range--DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
【#9112】
DEV0 CR OUTPUT
Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9113】
DEV0 EIA OUTPUT
Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
【#9114】
DEV0 FEED CHR.
Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
---Setting range--0 to 999 (characters)
【#9115】
DEV0 PARITY V
Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
【#9116】
DEV0 TIME-OUT (sec)
Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 30 (s)
【#9117】
DEV0 DR OFF
Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
III - 33
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9118】
DEV0 DATA ASCII
Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code
(Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
【#9119】
DEV0 INPUT TYPE
Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input
【#9121】
DEV0 EIA CODE [
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9122】
DEV0 EIA CODE ]
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" ] ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9123】
DEV0 EIA CODE #
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9124】
DEV0 EIA CODE *
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"∗".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9125】
DEV0 EIA CODE =
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"=".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9126】
DEV0 EIA CODE :
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" : ".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 34
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9127】
DEV0 EIA CODE $
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"$".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9128】
DEV0 EIA CODE !
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"!".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9201】
DEV1 DEVICE NAME
Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
<Setting range>
Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9202】
DEV1 BAUD RATE
Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
【#9203】
DEV1 STOP BIT
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9204 DEV1 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted to for the parity check.
<Setting range>
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9204】
DEV1 PARITY CHECK
Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9205】
DEV1 EVEN PARITY
Select whether even or odd parity will be used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when
no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
III - 35
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9206】
DEV1 CHR. LENGTH
Select the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9204 DEV1 PARITY CHECK".
<Setting range>
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9207】
DEV1 TERMINATR TYP
Select the code to terminate data reading.
0,3: EOR
1,2: EOB or EOR
【#9208】
DEV1 HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
【#9209】
DEV1 DC CODE PRTY
Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9211】
DEV1 DC2/4 OUTPUT
Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
<Setting range>
DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
【#9212】
DEV1 CR OUTPUT
Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9213】
DEV1 EIA OUTPUT
Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
【#9214】
DEV1 FEED CHR.
Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
<Setting range>
0 to 999 (characters)
【#9215】
DEV1 PARITY V
Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
III - 36
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9216】
DEV1 TIME-OUT (sec)
Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
<Setting range>
0 to 30 (s)
【#9217】
DEV1 DR OFF
Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9218】
DEV1 DATA ASCII
Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code
(Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
【#9219】
DEV1 INPUT TYPE
Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input
【#9221】
DEV1 EIA CODE [
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9222】
DEV1 EIA CODE ]
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" ] ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9223】
DEV1 EIA CODE #
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified. .
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9224】
DEV1 EIA CODE ∗
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"∗".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 37
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9225】
DEV1 EIA CODE =
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"=".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9226】
DEV1 EIA CODE :
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" : ".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9227】
DEV1 EIA CODE $
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"$".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9228】
DEV1 EIA CODE !
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"!".
When output with EIA code‚ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9301】
DEV2 DEVICE NAME
Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
<Setting range>
Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9302】
DEV2 BAUD RATE
Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
【#9303】
DEV2 STOP BIT
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9304 DEV2 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted to for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
III - 38
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9304】
DEV2 PARITY CHECK
Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9305】
DEV2 EVEN PARITY
Select whether even or odd parity will be used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when
no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9306】
DEV2 CHR. LENGTH
Select the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9304 DEV2 PARITY CHECK".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9307】
DEV2 TERMINATR TYP
Select the code to terminate data reading.
0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
【#9308】
DEV2 HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
【#9309】
DEV2 DC CODE PRTY
Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9311】
DEV2 DC2/4 OUTPUT
Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
<Setting range>
DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
【#9312】
DEV2 CR OUTPUT
Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9313】
DEV2 EIA OUTPUT
Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
III - 39
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9314】
DEV2 FEED CHR.
Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
<Setting range>
0 to 999 (characters)
【#9315】
DEV2 PARITY V
Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
【#9316】
DEV2 TIME-OUT (sec)
Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
<Setting range>
0 to 30 (s)
【#9317】
DEV2 DR OFF
Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9318】
DEV2 DATA ASCII
Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code
(Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
【#9319】
DEV2 INPUT TYPE
Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input
【#9321】
DEV2 EIA CODE [
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9322】
DEV2 EIA CODE ]
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" ] ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9323】
DEV2 EIA CODE #
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 40
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9324】
DEV2 EIA CODE ∗
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"∗".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9325】
DEV2 EIA CODE =
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"=".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9326】
DEV2 EIA CODE :
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" : ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9327】
DEV2 EIA CODE $
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"$".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9328】
DEV2 EIA CODE !
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"!".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9401】
DEV3 DEVICE NAME
Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
<Setting range>
Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9402】
DEV3 BAUD RATE
Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
III - 41
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9403】
DEV3 STOP BIT
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9404 DEV3 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted to for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9404】
DEV3 PARITY CHECK
Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9405】
DEV3 EVEN PARITY
Select whether even or odd parity will be used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when
no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9406】
DEV3 CHR. LENGTH
Select the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9404 DEV3 PARITY CHECK".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9407】
DEV3 TERMINATR TYP
Select the code to terminate data reading.
0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
【#9408】
DEV3 HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
【#9409】
DEV3 DC CODE PRTY
Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9411】
DEV3 DC2/4 OUTPUT
Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
<Setting range>
DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
III - 42
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9412】
DEV3 CR OUTPUT
Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9413】
DEV3 EIA OUTPUT
Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
【#9414】
DEV3 FEED CHR.
Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
<Setting range>
0 to 999 (characters)
【#9415】
DEV3 PARITY V
Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
【#9416】
DEV3 TIME-OUT (sec)
Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
<Setting range>
0 to 30 (s)
【#9417】
DEV3 DR OFF
Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9418】
DEV3 DATA ASCII
Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code
(Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
【#9419】
DEV3 INPUT TYPE
Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input.
【#9421】
DEV3 EIA CODE [
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 43
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9422】
DEV3 EIA CODE ]
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" ] ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9423】
DEV3 EIA CODE #
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9424】
DEV3 EIA CODE ∗
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"∗".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9425】
DEV3 EIA CODE =
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"=".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9426】
DEV3 EIA CODE :
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" : ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9427】
DEV3 EIA CODE $
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"$".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9428】
DEV3 EIA CODE !
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"!".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 44
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9501】
DEV4 DEVICE NAME
Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
<Setting range>
Use alphabet characters‚ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9502】
DEV4 BAUD RATE
Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
【#9503】
DEV4 STOP BIT
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9504 DEV4 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted to for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9504】
DEV4 PARITY CHECK
Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9505】
DEV4 EVEN PARITY
Select whether even or odd parity will be used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when
no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9506】
DEV4 CHR. LENGTH
Select the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9504 DEV4 PARITY CHECK".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9507】
DEV4 TERMINATR TYP
Select the code to terminate data reading.
0. 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
【#9508】
DEV4 HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
III - 45
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9509】
DEV4 DC CODE PRTY
Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9511】
DEV4 DC2/4 OUTPUT
Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
<Setting range>
DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
【#9512】
DEV4 CR OUTPUT
Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9513】
DEV4 EIA OUTPUT
Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
【#9514】
DEV4 FEED CHR.
Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
<Setting range>
0 to 999 (characters)
【#9515】
DEV4 PARITY V
Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
【#9516】
DEV4 TIME-OUT (sec)
Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
<Setting range>
0 to 30 (s)
【#9517】
DEV4 DR OFF
Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9518】
DEV4 DATA ASCII
Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code
(Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
【#9519】
DEV4 INPUT TYPE
Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input.
III - 46
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9521】
DEV4 EIA CODE [
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9522】
DEV4 EIA CODE ]
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" ] ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9523】
DEV4 EIA CODE #
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9524】
DEV4 EIA CODE ∗
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"∗".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9525】
DEV4 EIA CODE =
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"=".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9526】
DEV4 EIA CODE :
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
" : ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9527】
DEV4 EIA CODE $
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"$".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 47
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters
【#9528】
DEV4 EIA CODE !
Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"!".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
<Setting range>
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
III - 48
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
Set the parameters related to Ethernet input/output.
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
9701 to 9706 parameters:
When several TCP/IP drivers are installed and the IP address is set manually ("#9701 IP address
automatic setting" is set to 0), the same setting will be made for all parameters.
9711 to 9781 parameters:
Set the server information required for using the Ethernet function.
Server information for up to four units can be set.
【#9701(PR)】
IP addr auto set
The IP address is automatically assigned from the server.
0: Manual setting
1: Automatic setting
(Note) When the automatic setting is selected, "#11005 PC IP address, PC Subnet, PC Gateway"
will be invalid.
【#9706】
Host No.
Select the No. of the host to be used from host 1 to host 4.
---Setting range--1 to 4 : Host No.
【#9711】
Host1 host name
Set the host computer name.
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in C:¥windows¥hosts) or the IP address.
---Setting example--For host name: mspc160
For IP address: 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9712】
Host1 user name
Set the user name when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9713】
Host1 password
Set the password when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9714】
Host1 directory
Set the directory name of the host computer.
The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as root
directory by the NC unit.
---Setting range--31 characters (alphanumeric) or less
III - 49
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9715】
Host1 host type
Select the type of the host computer.
0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment
1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid.
• #9716 Wrd pos: name
• #9717 Wrd pos: size
• #9718 Wrd pos: Dir
• #9719 Wrd pos: cmnt
• #9720 Wrd num: cmnt
【#9716】
Host 1 Wrd pos: name
Set the file name display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command
"dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9717】
Host 1 Wrd pos: size
Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9718】
Host 1 Wrd pos: Dir
Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9719】
Host 1 Wrd pos: cmnt
Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the
ftp command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9720】
Host 1 Wrd num: cmnt
Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9721】
Host 1 no total siz
Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1
when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".
0: Display
1: Not display
III - 50
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9731】
Host2 host name
Set the host computer name.
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in C:¥windows¥hosts) or the IP address.
---Setting example--For host name: mspc160
For IP address: 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9732】
Host2 user name
Set the user name when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9733】
Host2 password
Set the password when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9734】
Host2 directory
Set the directory name of the host computer.
The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as the root
directory by the NC unit.
---Setting range--31 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9735】
Host2 host type
Select the type of the host computer.
0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment
1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid.
• #9736 Wrd pos: name
• #9737 Wrd pos: size
• #9738 Wrd pos: Dir
• #9739 Wrd pos: cmnt
• #9740 Wrd num: cmnt
【#9736】
Host 2 Wrd pos: name
Set the file name display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command
"dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9737】
Host 2 Wrd pos: size
Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
III - 51
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9738】
Host 2 Wrd pos: Dir
Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9739】
Host 2 Wrd pos: cmnt
Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the
ftp command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9740】
Host 2 Wrd num: cmnt
Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9741】
Host 2 no total siz
Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1
when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".
---Setting range--0: Display
1: Not display
【#9751】
Host3 host name
Set the host computer name.
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in C:¥windows¥hosts) or the IP address.
---Setting example--For host name: mspc160
For IP address: 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9752】
Host3 user name
Set the user name when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9753】
Host3 password
Set the password when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9754】
Host3 directory
Set the directory name of the host computer.
The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as the root
directory by the NC unit.
---Setting range--31 characters (alphanumeric) or less
III - 52
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9755】
Host3 host type
Select the type of the host computer.
0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment
1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid.
• #9756 Wrd pos: name
• #9757 Wrd pos: size
• #9758 Wrd pos: Dir
• #9759 Wrd pos: cmnt
• #9760 Wrd num: cmnt
【#9756】
Host 3 Wrd pos: name
Set the file name display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command
"dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9757】
Host 3 Wrd pos: size
Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9758】
Host 3 Wrd pos: Dir
Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9759】
Host 3 Wrd pos: cmnt
Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the
ftp command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9760】
Host 3 Wrd num: cmnt
Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9761】
Host 3 no total siz
Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1
when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".
---Setting range--0: Display
1: Not display
III - 53
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9771】
Host4 host name
Set the host computer name.
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in C:¥windows¥hosts) or the IP address.
---Setting example--For host name: mspc160
For IP address: 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9772】
Host4 user name
Set the user name when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9773】
Host4 password
Set the password when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range--15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9774】
Host4 directory
Set the directory name of the host computer.
The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as the root
directory by the NC unit.
---Setting range--31 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9775】
Host4 host type
Select the type of the host computer.
0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment
1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid.
• #9776 Wrd pos: name
• #9777 Wrd pos: size
• #9778 Wrd pos: Dir
• #9779 Wrd pos: cmnt
• #9780 Wrd num: cmnt
【#9776】
Host 4 Wrd pos: name
Set the file name display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command
"dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9777】
Host 4 Wrd pos: size
Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
III - 54
2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters
【#9778】
Host 4 Wrd pos: Dir
Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9779】
Host 4 Wrd pos: cmnt
Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the
ftp command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9780】
Host 4 Wrd num: cmnt
Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range--0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9781】
Host 4 no total siz
Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1
when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".
---Setting range--0: Display
1: Not display
III - 55
2. User Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters
【#9601】
BAUD RATE
Select the rate at which data is transferred.
---Setting range--0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
8: 38400
【#9602】
Stop Bit
Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted to for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9603】
PARITY EFFECTIVE
Select whether to add the parity bit to the data.
The parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit.
1 character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
bn
Data bit
Parity bit
Start bit
Stop bit
Set this parameter according to the specifications of input/output device.
0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output
1: Add a parity bit at the input/output
【#9604】
EVEN PARITY
Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. This parameter is ignored when no parity is
added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9605】
CHR. LENGTH
Select the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9606】
HAND SHAKE
Select the transmission control method.
"3" (DC code method) should be set for computer link B.
0: No control
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
III - 56
2. User Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters
【#9607】
TIME-OUT SET
Set the time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be
detected.
"0" means infinite time-out.
---Setting range--0 to 999 (1/10s)
【#9608】
DATA CODE
Set the code to be used for the data description.
Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE".
0: ASCII code
1: ISO code
【#9609】
LINK PARAM. 1
bit1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN
Select whether to output the DC1 code after the NAK or SYN code is output.
0: Not output the DC1 code.
1: Output the DC1 code.
bit7: Enable/disable resetting
Select whether to enable the resetting in the computer link.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9610】
LINK PARAM. 2
Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code).
Select whether to add an even parity to the control code, in accordance with the I/O device
specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit to the control code
1: Add a parity bit to the control code
Bit 3: Parity V
Select whether to enable checking of parity V in one block at the input of the data.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#9611】
Link PARAM. 3
Not used. Set to "0".
【#9612】
Link PARAM. 4
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9613】
Link PARAM. 5
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9614】
START CODE
Select the code used to command the first transfer of file data.
This parameter is used for a specific user. Normally set "0".
0: DC1 (11H)
1: BEL (07H)
III - 57
2. User Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters
【#9615】
CTRL. CODE OUT
bit 0: NAK output
Select whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.
0: Not output the NAK code
1: Output the NAK code.
bit 1: SYN output
Select whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in
computer link B.
0: Not output the SYN code.
1: Output the SYN code.
bit 3: DC3 output
Select whether to send the DC3 code to the host when the communication ends in computer link B.
0: Not output the DC3 code.
1: Output the DC3 code.
【#9616】
CTRL. INTERVAL
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9617】
WAIT TIME
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9618】
PACKET LENGTH
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9619】
BUFFER SIZE
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9620】
START SIZE
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9621】
DC1 OUT SIZE
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9622】
POLLING TIMER
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9623】
TRANS. WAIT TMR
Not used. Set to “0”.
【#9624】
RETRY COUNTER
Not used. Set to “0”.
III - 58
2. User Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters
【#8880】
Subpro stor D0: dev
Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
When D0 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example)
The following will be searched:
M98 P (program No.), D0
Device: "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" device
Directory: "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" directory
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
---Setting range--Device name
Setting value
M
G
F
R
D
E
【#8881】
Display name
Memory
HD
FD
Memory card
Data server
Ethernet
Subpro stor D0: dir
Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
When D0 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev".
---Setting range--Directory 48 characters
【#8882】
Subpro stor D1: dev
Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
When D1 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example)
The following will be searched:
M98 P (program No.), D1
Device: "#8882 Subpro stor D1: dev" device
Directory: "#8883 Subpro stor D1: dir" directory
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
---Setting range---
Setting value
M
G
F
R
D
E
Display name
Memory
HD
FD
Memory card
Data server
Ethernet
III - 59
2. User Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters
【#8883】
Subpro stor D1: dir
Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
When D1 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8882 Subpro stor D1: dev".
---Setting range--Directory 48 characters
【#8884】
Subpro stor D2: dev
Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
When D2 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example)
The following will be searched:
M98 P (program No.), D2
Device: "#8884 Subpro stor D2: dev" device
Directory: "#8885 Subpro stor D2: dir" directory
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
---Setting range---
Setting value
M
G
F
R
D
E
【#8885】
Display name
Memory
HD
FD
Memory card
Data server
Ethernet
Subpro stor D2: dir
Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
When D2 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8884 Subpro stor D2: dev".
---Setting range--Directory 48 characters
III - 60
2. User Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters
【#8886】
Subpro stor D3: dev
Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
When D3 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example)
The following will be searched:
M98 P (program No.), D3
Device: "#8886 Subpro stor D3: dev" device
Directory: "#8887 Subpro stor D3: dir" directory
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
---Setting range---
Setting value
M
G
F
R
D
E
【#8887】
Display name
Memory
HD
FD
Memory card
Data server
Ethernet
Subpro stor D3: dir
Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
When D3 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8886 Subpro stor D3: dev".
---Setting range--Directory 48 characters
【#8888】
Subpro stor D4: dev
Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
When D4 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example)
The following will be searched:
M98 P (program No.), D4
Device: "#8888 Subpro stor D4: dev" device
Directory: "#8889 Subpro stor D4: dir" directory
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
---Setting range--Device name
Setting value
M
G
F
R
D
E
Display name
Memory
HD
FD
Memory card
Data server
Ethernet
III - 61
2. User Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters
【#8889】
Subpro stor D4: dir
Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
When D4 is designated at a subprogram calling, the subprogram to be called will be searched from
the directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8888 Subpro stor D4: dev".
---Setting range--Directory 48 characters
III - 62
2. User Parameters
2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1
2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1
【#10801】
Notice tel num 1
Set the call-back telephone No. used for one-touch call and operator notification.
Begin with the No. from an area code for domestic call.
Begin with a communication company No. for international call.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10802】
Comment 1
Set a comment, such as a party's name, for the notification party telephone No.1.
---Setting range--Within 20 alphanumerical characters (excluding spaces)
【#10803】
Notice tel num 2
Set the call-back telephone No. used for one-touch call and operator notification.
Begin with the No. from an area code for domestic call.
Begin with a communication company No. for international call.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10804】
Comment 2
Set a comment, such as a party's name, for the notification party telephone No.2.
---Setting range--Within 20 alphanumerical characters (excluding spaces)
【#10805】
Notice tel num 3
Set the call-back telephone No. used for one-touch call and operator notification.
Begin with the No. from an area code for domestic call.
Begin with a communication company No. for international call.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10806】
Comment 3
Set a comment, such as a party's name, for the notification party telephone No.3.
---Setting range--Within 20 alphanumerical characters (excluding spaces)
【#10807】
Password
Set the password for sharing of machining data.
---Setting range--4 characters (one-byte alphanumeric characters, without space)
【#10808】
Customer number
Set the user No. for sharing of machining data.
---Setting range--Within 8 characters (one-byte alphanumeric characters, without space)
【#10812】
Anshin-net valid
Select whether to enable the Anshin-net function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
III - 63
2. User Parameters
2.11 Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB-net) Parameter 1
2.11 Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB-net) Parameter 1
【#10813】
MTBnet enable
Select whether to enable the machine tool builder network system.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Standard setting: 0
(Note) Values other than "0" and "1" are invalid.
III - 64
3. Setting the Machine Parameters
3. Setting the Machine Parameters
A password must be set before the machine parameters can be set.
Machine parameter password setting method
(1) Press the function key Mainte.
The menu for the maintenance related
screen will appear.
(2) Press the menu Param.
The parameter menu will appear.
(3) Press the machine parameter selection
menu.
(Example) Menu Basesys param
A message prompting input of the password
will appear.
If the password has been input once after
the power was turned ON, the cursor will
appear at the Machine Parameter screen.
(4) Set the password and press the INPUT
key.
MPARA INPUT
The cursor will appear at the Machine
Parameter screen, and the machine
parameters can be set.
(Note 1) Refer to the section "4. Base Specification Parameters" and following for details on the
machine parameters.
(Note 2) Always turn the power OFF after setting the machine parameters.
III - 65
4. Base Specifications Parameters
4. Base Specifications Parameters
Base specification parameter is the generic term for the following three parameters.
In this Manual, the parameters are explained in order of number.
Base system parameters
#1001-#1006, #1025-#1037
#1073-#1076, #1085-#1086
#1109-#1111, #1151
#1169-#1216, #1501-#1574
#1590-#1593, #12001-#12012
Base axis specification parameters Base common parameters
#1010-#1024, #1061-#1072
#1038-#1059, #1077-#1084
#1493-#1494
#1087-#1108, #1112-#1149
#1153-#1168, #1217-#1343
#1361, #1901-#1911
#1925-#1935, #11001-#11021
#11028-#11029
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#1001(PR)】
SYS_ON System validation setup
Select the existence of PLC axes and part systems.
---Setting range--0: Not exist
1: Exist
【#1002(PR)】
axisno Number of axes
Set the number of control axes and PLC axes.
A total of 16 axes can be set.
Control axis: 0 to 8
PLC axis: 0 to 2
When set to “0”, the number of control axes in the part system will be “0”. Do not set the number of
control axes of the first part system to “0”.
(Note) The setting range differs according to the model.
【#1003(PR)】
iunit Input setup unit
Select the input setting value for each part system and the PLC axis.
Increments in parameters will follow this selection.
B : 1 µm
C : 0.1 µm
D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
【#1004(PR)】
ctrl_unit Control unit
Select the control increment for each part system and PLC axis.
Select the increment for the NC internal position data, communication data between the NC and
drive unit, and the servo travel data. Increments for some parameters, such as the pitch error and
backlash, will follow this selection.
B : 1 µm
C : 0.1 µm
D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
【#1005(PR)】
plcunit PLC unit
Select the PLC interface setting and display increment.
The PLC interface setting and display increment will follow this specification. Note that the PLC axis
will follow “#1003 iunit”.
B : 1 µm
C : 0.1 µm
D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
III - 66
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1006(PR)】
mcmpunit Machine error compensa-tion unit
Select the machine error compensation setting and display increment.
The parameters related to machine error compensation (backlash, pitch error compensation, etc.)
and PLC interface (external machine coordinate system compensation) will follow this selection.
B : 1 µm
C : 0.1 µm
D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
【#1007(PR)】
System type select System type select
Select the NC system type.
0: Machining center system (M system)
1: Lathe system (L system)
(Note 1) If the setting value is out of range, M system will be selected.
(Note 2) This parameter is exclusively for 70 series. 700 series doesn’t support this parameter.
【#1010(PR)】
srvunit
Output unit (servo)
Select the output increment to servo. The standard value is “E”.
B : 1 µm
C : 0.1 µm
D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
【#1013(PR)】
axname Axis name
Set each axis’s name with an alphabetic character.
Use the characters X‚ Y‚ Z‚ U‚ V‚ W‚ A‚ B or C.
(Note 1) Do not set the same name twice in one part system.
The same name which is used in another part system can be set.
(Note 2) The PLC name does not need to be set. (The axis name is displayed as 1 and 2.)
---Setting range--X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
【#1014(PR)】
incax Increment command axis name
Set the axis name when commanding an incremental value for the axis travel amount.
Available alphabets are the same as in “#1013 axname”.
(Note 1) Set an alphabet that is different from that of “#1013 axname”.
(Note 2) Setting is not required if absolute/incremental specification with axis names is not
performed (“#1076 Abslnc” = “0”).
---Setting range--X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
【#1015(PR)】
cunit Program command unit
Set the minimum increment of program travel command.
cunit Travel amount for travel command 1
0: Follow “#1003 iunit”
1: 0.0001 mm (0.1µm)
10: 0.001 mm (1µm)
100: 0.01 mm (10µm)
1000: 0.1 mm (100µm)
10000: 1.0 mm
If there is a decimal point in travel command‚ the decimal point position will be handled as 1mm
regardless of this setting.
III - 67
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1017(PR)】
rot Rotational axis
Select whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear axis.
When rotary axis is set, the axis will be controlled with the rotary axis's coordinate system. Set the
rotary axis type with "#8213 Rotation axis type".
0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis
【#1018(PR)】
ccw
Motor CCW
Select the direction of the motor rotation to the command direction.
0: Clockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command
1: Counterclockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command
【#1019(PR)】
dia Diameter specification axis
Select the command method of program travel amount.
When the travel amount is commanded with the diameter dimensions‚ the travel distance will be
5mm when the command is 10mm of travel distance.
The travel amount per pulse will also be halved during manual pulse feed.
If diameter is selected, tool length, the wear compensation amount, and the workpiece coordinate
offset will be displayed in diameter value. Other parameters concerning length will always be
displayed in radius value.
0: Command with travel amount
1: Command with diameter dimension
【#1020(PR)】
sp_ax Spindle Interpolation
Select "1" when using the spindle for the contour control of NC axis (C-axis).
0: Servo axis is used for contour control.
1: Spindle is used for contour control.
【#1021(PR)】
mcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo)
Using a 4-digit number, set the drive unit interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to
be used when connecting a servo drive unit.
Axis No.
Not used (Set to “0”)
Drive unit interface channel No.
【#1022(PR)】
axname2 2nd axis name
Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.)
Always use an alphabetic character (A to Z) for the first character.
---Setting range--A to Z and 1 to 9 (Two digits)
(Setting will be cleared when “0” is set)
【#1023(PR)】
crsadr
Command address during cross machining
Set the axis name for issuing a command to this axis during cross machining control.
---Setting range--A to Z
(Setting will be cleared when “0” is set)
【#1024(PR)】
crsinc Incremental command address during cross machining
Set the axis name for issuing an incremental command to this axis during cross machining control.
---Setting range--A to Z
(Setting will be cleared when “0” is set)
III - 68
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1025】
l_plane Initial plane selection
Select the plane to be selected when the power is turned ON or reset.
0: X-Y plane (G17 command state)
1: X-Y plane (G17 command state)
2: Z-X plane (G18 command state)
3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state)
【#1026】
base_l Base axis I
Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane.
Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname".
If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis
specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank.
Normally‚ when X‚ Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l‚_J‚_K‚ the following relation will be
established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
Specify the desired axis name to set an axis address other than above.
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1027】
base_J Base axis J
Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane.
Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname".
If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis
specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank.
Normally‚ when X‚ Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l‚_J‚_K‚ the following relation will be
established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
Specify the desired axis name to set an axis address other than above.
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1028】
base_K Base axis K
Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane.
Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname".
If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis
specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank.
Normally‚ when X‚ Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l‚_J‚_K‚ the following relation will be
established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
Specify the desired axis name to set an axis address other than above.
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1029】
aux_I Flat axis I
Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1026 base_I".
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1030】
aux_J Flat axis J
Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1027 base_J".
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
III - 69
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1031】
aux_K Flat axis K
Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1028 base_K".
---Setting range--Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1037(PR)】
cmdtyp
Command type
Set the G code list and compensation type for programs.
cmdtyp
G code list
Compensation type
1
List 1 (for M)
Type A
(one compensation amount for one compensation No.)
2
List 1 (for M)
3
List 2 (for L)
4
List 3 (for L)
Type B
(shape and wear compensation amounts
for one compensation No.)
Type C
(shape and wear compensation amounts
for one compensation No.)
Ditto
5
List 4 (for special L)
Ditto
6
List 5 (for special L)
Ditto
7
List 6 (for special L)
Ditto
8
List 7 (for special L)
Ditto
9
List 8 (for M)
M2 format type A
Type A
(one compensation amount for one compensation No.)
10
List 8 (for M)
M2 format type B
Type B
(shape and wear amounts for one compensation No.)
There are some items in the specifications that can be used or cannot be used according to the
value set in this parameter.
The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type.
【#1038】
plcsel Ladder selection
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1039(PR)】
spinno Number of spindles
Select the number of spindles.
0: No spindle
1 to 6: One to Six spindles
(Note) The setting range differs according to the model.
【#1040(PR)】
M_inch Constant input (inch)
Select the unit system for setting and display regarding machine parameter and PLC interface’s
position, length and speed.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
III - 70
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1041(PR)】
l_inch
Initial state (inch)
Select the unit system for the program travel amount when the power is turned ON or reset and for
position display.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
(Note) Selection of inch and metric unit
When the setting value of "#1041 I_inch" is changed, the unit of length is changed after reset. The
following parameters concerning length, however, are not changed automatically. Change the
setting values of following parameters according to the new unit system.
Tool compensation amount
(Tool length compensation amount, tool wear compensation amount and tool tip compensation
amount)
Workpiece coordinate offset
#8004 SPEED
#8027 Toler-1
#8056 G74 RETRACT
#8005 ZONE r
#8028 Toler-2
#8057 G76 LAST-D
#8006 ZONE d
#8029 FairingL
#8075 SpiralEndErr
#8009 DSC. ZONE
#8030 MINUTE LENGS
#8084 G83S Clearance
#8010 ABS. MAX.
#8037 CorJudgeL
Machining parameter #8011 INC. MAX.
#8041 C-rot. R
#8085 G83S Forward F
#8012 G73n
#8042 C-ins. R
#8086 G83S Back F
#8013 G83n
#8051 G71 THICK
#8016 G71 MINIMUM #8052 G71 PULL UP
#8017 G71 DELTA-D #8053 G73 U
#8018 G84/G74n
#8054 G73 W
#8204 OT-CHECK-N
#8205 OT-CHECK-P
Axis parameter
#8206 TOOL CHG.P
#8209 G60 Shift
#8300-#8306, #8311-#8314
Barrier data
Base specifications
#1084 RadErr
parameter
"#8004 SPEED" is 10 inches/min. unit for the inch system.
【#1042(PR)】
pcinch PLC axis command (inch)
Select the unit system for the commands to the PLC axis.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
III - 71
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1043】
lang Select language displayed
Select the display language.
0: English (Standard)
1: Japanese (Standard)
11: German (Option)
12: French (Option)
13: Italian (Option)
14: Spanish (Option)
15: Traditional Chinese (Option)
16: Korean (Option)
17: Portuguese (Option)
18: Dutch (Option)
19: Swedish (Option)
20: Hungarian (Option)
21: Polish (Option)
22: Simplified Chinese (Option)
23: Russian (Option)
24: Turkish (Option)
25: Czech (Option)
(Note) A language which can be displayed is different according to each series.
【#1044(PR)】
auxno
MR-J2-CT Connections
Set the number of MR-J2-CTs connected.
(Note) The number of MR-J2-CTs possible to connect and setting range are different according to
the model.
Check the specifications of each series.
【#1045(PR)】
nskno
Megatorgue motor connections
Set the number of NSK megatorque motors connected. When a value other than “0” is set, 2nd
miscellaneous function data will be output as signed binary data.
---Setting range--0 to 16
【#1051(PR)】
MemTol Tool compensation memory common for part systems
0: Tool compensation memory separate for part systems
1: Tool compensation memory common for part systems
【#1052(PR)】
MemVal No. of common variables shared in part system designation
0: Common variables common for part systems (number fixed)
#100 - : Per part system
#500 - : Common for part systems
1: Common variables common for part systems (number designation)
#100 - : Designate with V1comN
#500 - : Designate with V0comN
(Note) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned
ON.
So always execute format.
The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again.
---Setting order--(1) MemVal changeover -> (2) Turn power ON again -> (3) Format ->(4) Turn power ON again
【#1061(PR)】
intabs
Manual ABS updating
Select whether to update the absolute position data during automatic handle interrupt.
This parameter is enabled only when "#1145 l_abs" is set to “1”.
0: Do not update (coordinate system shifted the amount of the interruption)
1: Update (same coordinates as when interrupt did not occur will be applied)
III - 72
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1062】
T_cmp Tool compensation function
Select whether the tool length compensation and wear compensation are enabled during T
command execution.
Setting value
0
1
2
3
【#1063】
Tool length compensation Wear compensation
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
mandog Manual dog-type
Select the manual reference position return method for the second return (after the coordinate
system is established) and later.
The initial reference position return after the power ON is performed with dog-type return, and the
coordinate system will be established.
(This setting is not required when the absolute position detection is used.)
0: High speed return
1: Dog-type
【#1064(PR)】
svof
Error correction
Select whether to correct the error when the servo is OFF.
0: Not correct the error
1: Correct the error
【#1068(PR)】
slavno
Slave axis number
Set the axis number of the slave axis in synchronous control.
The axis number is an NC number excluding the spindle and PLC axis.
Two or more slave axes cannot be set for one master axis.
This parameter cannot be set for a slave axis.
When using the multi-part system, the relation of the master axis and slave axis cannot extend over
part systems.
0: No slave axis
1 to 16: First to sixteenth axis
【#1069】
no_dsp Axis with no counter display
Select whether to display the axis counter or not.
This setting is enabled on the counter display screen (relative position counter, etc.).
0: Display
1: Not display
【#1070】
axoff Axis removal
Select whether to enable or disable axis removal control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1072】
chop_ax Chopping axis
Select the chopping axis.
0: Non-chopping axis
1: Chopping axis
【#1073】
I_Absm Initial absolute setting
Select the mode (absolute or incremental) at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Incremental setting
1: Absolute setting
III - 73
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1074】
l_Sync
Initial synchronous feed
Select the feedrate mode at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute)
1: Synchronous feed (feed per revolution)
【#1075】
I_G00 Initial G00
Select the linear command mode at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state)
1: Positioning (G00 command state)
【#1076】
Abslnc ABS/INC address
for L system only
Select the command method for the absolute and incremental commands.
0: Use G command for the absolute and incremental commands.
1: Use axis name for the absolute and incremental commands.
(The axis name in "#1013 axname" will be the absolute command, "#1014 incax" will be the
incremental command.)
When "1" is selected, using two axis names, one each for the absolute and incremental commands,
allows to issue the absolute and incremental commands appropriately to an axis.
【#1077】
radius Incremental command for diameter specification axis
Select whether the incremental command of the diameter specification axis (“#1019 dia” is set to
“1”) uses the diameter value or radius value.
0: Diameter value
1: Radius value
【#1078】
Decpt2 Decimal point type 2
Select the increment of position commands that do not have a decimal point.
0: Minimum input command unit (follows "#1015 cunit")
1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.)
【#1079】
F1digt Validate F1 digit
Select the F command method.
0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (feedrate set with “#1185 spd_F1” – “#1189 F5”)
【#1080】
Dril_Z (For M system only)
Specify boring axis
Select a fixed cycle hole drilling axis.
0: Use an axis vertical to the selected plane as hole drilling axis.
1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis regardless of the selected plane.
【#1081】
Gmac_P Give priority to G code parameter
Select the G code priority relationship during the macro call with G command.
0: Priority is on G code used in the system
1: Priority is on registered G code for call
【#1082】
Geomet Geometric
Select the type of geometric to use.
0: Not use
1: Use only geometric I
2: Use geometric I and IB
With geometric, specific address codes are used for exclusive meanings. Thus, if A or C is used for
the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous command code, the A used for the axis name may function as
the geometric's angle designation. Pay special attention to axis names, etc., when using this
function.
III - 74
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1084】
RadErr Arc error
Set the tolerable error range when the end point deviates from the center coordinate in the circular
command.
---Setting range--0 to 1.000 (mm)
【#1085】
G00Drn G00 dry run
Select whether to apply dry run (feed at manual setting speed instead of command feedrate) to the
G00 command.
0: Not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate)
1: Apply to G00. (move at manual setting speed)
【#1086】
G0lntp G00 non-interpolation
Select the G00 travel path type.
0: Move linearly toward the end point. (interpolation type)
1: Move to the end point of each axis at the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (non-interpolation)
(Note) If this parameter is set to "1", neither of the following functions will be available: rapid traverse
constant inclination acceleration/deceleration and rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step
acceleration/deceleration.
【#1087】
G96_G0 Constant surface speed control by rapid traverse feed command
Select how to handle the surface speed for the G00 command when using the constant surface
speed control function.
0: Calculate the surface speed constantly even during G00 movement
1: Calculate the surface speed at the block end point in the G00 command
【#1088】
G30SL Disable G30 soft limit
Select how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd reference position return).
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#1091】
Mpoint Ignore middle point
Select how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference position return.
0: Pass the middle point designated in the program and move to the reference position.
1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program and move straight to the reference position.
【#1092】
Tchg _A Replace tools for additional axis
Select the movement of the additional axis at the tool change position return command.
0: The additional axis will not move
1: After the standard axis returns, the additional axis will also return to the tool change position
【#1093】
Wmvfin
Synchronization between part systems method
Slect the timing of synchronization between part systems when using the multi-part system.
When the travel command is found in the synchronization command (!, M) block:
0: Synchronize before executing travel command
1: Synchronize after executing travel command
【#1094】
Tl_SBK Select life count for single block
for L system only
Select whether to count the data units to be used for single block operation when using the tool life
management II function (L system).
0: Not count
1: Count
【#1095】
T0tfof TF output
Select how to handle TF for T00 command.
0: TF will be output
1: TF wont be output
III - 75
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1096(PR)】
T_Ltyp
Tool life management type
for L system only
Select the tool life management type.
1: Life management l
In this type, how long and how many times the program commanded tool is used are accumulated
to monitor the usage state.
2: Life management ll
This method is the same as tool life management I, but with the spare tool selection function.
A spare tool is selected from a group of tool commands commanded in the program.
Tool compensation (tool length compensation and tool radius compensation) is carried out for the
selected tool.
【#1097】
T1digt Tool wear compensation number 1-digit command
Select the number of digits of the tool wear compensation No. in the T command.
0: The 2 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and the 2 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation
No.
1: The 3 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and the 1 Iow-order digit is the wear compensation No.
This parameter will be fixed to “0” when tool life management II is selected.
【#1098】
Tlno. Tool length offset number
Select the number of digits of the tool length compensation No. in the T command.
0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No.
The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length compensation and wear compensation Nos.
1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length compensation Nos.
The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No.
【#1099】
Treset Cancel tool compensation amount
Select how to handle the tool compensation vector when resetting the system.
0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting
1: Hold the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting
When the values are cleared‚ the compensation will not be applied‚ so the axis will be shifted by the
compensation amount in the next compensation operation.
When the values are kept‚ the compensation will be applied‚ so the axis will shift the differential
amount of the compensation amount in the next compensation operation.
【#1100】
Tmove
Tool compensation
Select when to perform tool length compensation and wear compensation.
0: Compensate when T command is executed.
1: Superimpose and compensate with the travel command in the block where the T command is
located. If there is no travel command in the same block‚ compensation will be executed after the
travel command is superimposed in the next travel command block.
2: Compensate the wear amount when the T command is executed. Superimpose and
compensate the tool length compensation amount with the travel command in the same block. If
there is no travel command in the same block, compensation will be executed after the travel
command is superimposed in the next travel command block.
【#1101】
Tabsmv Tool compensation method
Select the type of travel command when “#1100 Tmove” is set to “1” or “2”.
0: Compensate regardless of the travel command type
1: Compensate only at the travel command in the absolute command
【#1102】
tlm
Manual tool length measuring system
Select the measurement method for manual tool measurement l.
0: Align tool with basic point
1: Input measurement results
(Note) Interpreted as “0” when other than “0” or “1” is set.
III - 76
for L system only
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1103】
T_life Validate life management
Select whether to use the tool life management.
0: Not use
1: Use
【#1104】
T_Com2 Tool command method 2
Select how to handle the tool command in the program when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1".
0: Handle the command as group No.
1: Handle the command as tool No.
【#1105】
T_Sel2 Tool selection method 2
Select the tool selection method when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1".
0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group.
1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from the tools used or unused in the same group.
【#1106】
Tcount Life management
for L system only
Select the input method when address N is omitted in inputting the data (G10 L3 command) for tool
life management function II.
0: Time specified input
1: Number of times specified input
【#1107】
Tllfsc Split life management display screen
for L system only
Set the number of groups to be displayed on the tool life management II (L system) screen.
0: Displayed group count 1, maximum number of registered tools: 16
1: Displayed group count 2, maximum number of registered tools: 8
2: Displayed group count 4, maximum number of registered tools: 4
【#1108】
TlrectM Life management re-count M code
Set the M code for tool life management II (L system) re-count.
---Setting range--0 to 99
【#1109】
subs_M Validate alternate M code
Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M code.
0: Disable alternate M code
1: Enable alternate M code
【#1110】
M96_M M96 alternate M code
Set an M code to replace M96 when “#1109 subs_M” is set to “1”.
---Setting range--3 to 97 (excluding 30)
【#1111】
M97_M M97 alternate M code
Specify an M code to replace M97 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1.
---Setting range--3 to 97 (excluding 30)
【#1112(PR)】
S_TRG Validate status trigger method
Select the enable conditions for the user macro interrupt signal (UIT).
0: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) turns ON
1: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON
【#1113(PR)】
INT_2 Validate interrupt method type 2
Select the performance after user macro interrupt signal (UIT) input.
0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for block being executed to end
1: Execute interrupt program after completing block being executed
III - 77
for L system only
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1114】
mcrint Macro argument initialization
Select whether to clear statements other than specified arguments by macro call.
Also select whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting.
0: Clear the non-specified arguments by macro call.
1: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call
2: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call, and clear local variables by power-ON and
resetting
【#1115】
thwait Waiting for thread cutting
Set the queue number during screw thread cutting when chamfering is disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 99 (Approx. 4 ms)
Standard seting value: 4
【#1116】
G30SLM Invalidate soft limit (manual operation)
Enable this function when disabling the soft limit check function at the second to fourth reference
position return.
0: Enable soft limit function
1: Disable soft limit function
【#1117(PR)】
H_sens Handle response switch
Select the handle response mode during handle feed.
0: Standard
1: High-speed
【#1118】 mirr_A Select how to set up the length of tools on cutter tables (opposed tables)
system only
for L
Select one of the following two methods:
• Set the current length of tools on each facing turret.
• Set a value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those
on the base turret.
0: Current length of the tools on each facing turret
1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on
the base turret
【#1119】
Tmiron Select the mirror image of each facing turret with T command
for L system only
Select whether to enable the mirror image of each facing turret with the T command.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1120(PR)】
TofVal Change macro variable
Select whether to change the macro variable (tool offset) numbers for shape compensation and
wear compensation.
0: Not change (Conventional specification)
1: Change the shape and wear compensation variable numbers each for X, Z, and R
【#1121】
edlk_c Edit lock C
Select the edit lock for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in memory.
0: Editing possible
1: Editing prohibited. The file cannot be opened.
(Note) If “#1122” is set to “1” or “2”, “1” will be set in “#1121” when the power is turned ON.
【#1122(PR)】
pglk_c Program display lock C
Select whether to prohibit the program display and search for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in
memory.
0: Program display and search is possible
1: Program display is impossible. Search is possible.
2: Program display and search is impossible
(Note) If “#1122” is set to “1” or “2”, “1” will be set in “#1121” when the power is turned ON.
III - 78
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1123】
origin Origin set prohibit
Select whether to use the origin set function.
0: Use
1: Not use
【#1124】
ofsfix Fix tool compensation No.
Select how to handle the compensation No. when the input key is pressed on the tool compensation
screen.
0: Increment the compensation No. by 1 (Same as general parameters)
1: # compensation No. does not change
When setting in sequence‚ “0” is handier. When changing and setting repeatedly while adjusting one
compensation value‚ “1” is handier
【#1125】
real_f Actual feedrate display
Select the feedrate display on the monitor screen.
0: Command speed
1: Actual travel feedrate
【#1126】
PB_G90 Playback G90
Select the method to command the playback travel amount in the playback editing.
0: Incremental value
1: Absolute value
【#1127】
DPRINT DPRINT alignment
Select the alignment for printing out with the DPRINT function.
0: No alignment‚ output s printed with left justification
1: Align the minimum digit and output
【#1128】
RstVCI Clear variables by resetting
Select how to handle the common variables when resetting.
0: Common variables won't change after resetting.
1: The following common variables will be cleared by resetting:
#100 to #149 when 100 sets of variables are provided.
#100 to #199 when 200 sets or more of variables are provided.
【#1129】
PwrVCl Clear variables by power-ON
Select how to handle the common variables when the power is turned ON.
0: The common variables are in the same state as before turning the power OFF.
1: The following common variables will be cleared when the power is turned ON:
#100 to #149 when 100 sets of variables are provided.
#100 to #199 when 200 sets or more of variables are provided.
【#1130】
set_t Display selected tool number
Select the tool command value display on the POSITION screen.
0: Display T-modal value of program command
1: Display Tool No. sent from PLC
【#1132】
CRT
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1133】
ofsmem
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1134】
LCDneg
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 79
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1135】
unt_nm Unit name
Set the unit name.
Set with 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers. If “0” is set, the unit name
won’t be displayed.
---Setting range--4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers
【#1136】
optype
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1137】
Cntsel
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1138】
Pnosel
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1139】
edtype
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1140】
Mn100 M code number
Set the first number of M code that corresponds to the setup Nos. from 100 to 199.
---Setting range0 to 99999999
【#1141】
Mn200 M code number
Set the first number of M code that corresponds to the setup Nos. from 200 to 299.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1142】
Mn300 M code number
Set the first number of M code that corresponds to the setup Nos. from 300 to 399.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1143】
Mn400 M code number
Set the first number of M code that corresponds to the setup Nos. from 400 to 499.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1144】
mdlkof MDI setup lock
Select whether to enable MDI setting in non-MDI mode.
0: Disable MDI setting
1: Enable MDI setting
【#1145】
I_abs Manual ABS parameter
Select how to handle the absolute position data during automatic handle interrupt.
0: Absolute position data will be renewed if manual ABS switch is ON. If it is OFF, data won’t be
renewed.
1: Follow the "intabs" state when "#1061 intabs" is enabled
【#1146】
Sclamp Spindle rotation speed clamp function
Select how to handle the spindle rotation speed clamp function with the G92S command.
0: G92S command is handled as a clamp command only in the G96 state (during constant surface
speed control).
G92S will be handled as normal S command in G97 state (constant surface speed OFF).
1: The S command in the same block as G92 is constantly handled as a clamp command
III - 80
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1147】
smin_V Minimum spindle rotation speed clamp type
Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp value.
0: Rotation speed setting
1: Output voltage coefficient setting
Set “#3023 smini” according to this type setting.
【#1148】
I_G611 Initial high precision
Set the high accuracy control mode for the modal state when the power is turned ON.
0: G64 (cutting mode) at power ON
1: G61.1 (high-accuracy control mode) at power ON
【#1149】
cireft Arc deceleration speed change
Select whether to decelerate at the arc entrance or exit.
0: Not decelerate
1: Decelerate
【#1151】
rstint Reset initial
Select whether to initialize (power ON state) the modals by resetting.
0: Not initialize modal state
1: Initialize modal state
【#1153】
FixbDc Hole bottom deceleration check
Select whether to perform a deceleration check or in-position check at the hole bottom in a hole
drilling cycle. This parameter is enabled only for a hole drilling cycle in which no dwell command can
be issued at the hole bottom.
0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position check
1: Perform deceleration check
2: Perform in-position check
【#1154(PR)】
pdoor
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1155】
DOOR_m
Not used. Set to "100".
---Setting range--100
【#1156】
DOOR_s
Not used. Set to "100".
---Setting range--100
【#1157】
F0atrn
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1158】
F0atno
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1163(PR)】
No rio RIO connection detection invalid
Select whether to enable or disable RIO connection detection.
0: Enable
1: Disable
If your I/O consists of only cards such as CC-LINK, setting this parameter to “1” will avoid the RIO
communication cutoff alarm.
III - 81
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1164(PR)】
ATS Automatic tuning function
Select whether to enable or disable the automatic tuning function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1166】
fixpro Fixed cycle editing
Select a type of program dealt on the edit/program list/data in/out screen, general program fixed
cycle, or machine tool builder macro program.
0: General programs can be edited, etc.
1: Fixed cycles can be edited, etc.
Password No.: The machine tool builder macro programs can be edited, etc.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1167】
e2rom
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1168】
test Simulation test
Select the test mode for the control unit.
In the test mode, test is performed with a hypothetical reference position return complete even
though the real reference position return hasn’t been completed. This is limited to test operation of
the control unit itself‚ and must not be used when the machine is connected.
0: Normal operation mode
1: Test mode
【#1169】
part system name Part system name
Set the name of each part system.
This must be set only when using multi-part system.
This name will be displayed on the screen only when the part systems must be identified.
Use a max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.
---Setting range--A max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.
【#1170】
M2name Second miscellaneous code
Set this address code when using the 2nd miscellaneous command. Set an address with A‚ B or C
that is not used for "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax".
---Setting range--A, B, C
【#1171】
taprov Tap return override
Set the tap return override value for the synchronous tapping.
When "0" is set, it will be regarded as 100%.
---Setting range--1 to 100 (%)
【#1172】
tapovr
Tap return override
Set the override value when leaving the tap end point in the synchronous tapping cycle.
The setting range is 1 to 999‚ and the unit is %.
When a value less than 100 is set‚ it will be judged as 100%.
---Setting range--1 to 999 (%)
III - 82
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1173】
dwlskp G04 skip condition
Set the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) command.
---Setting range--PLC interface input signal
Skip3
Skip2 Skip1
0:
1:
*
2:
*
3:
*
*
4:
*
5:
*
*
6:
*
*
7:
*
*
*
(* : Enable - : Disable)
【#1174】
skip_F G31 skip speed
Set the feedrate when there is no F command in the program at G31 (skip) command.
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1175】
skip1 G31.1 skip condition
Designate the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.1.
---Setting range--The setting method is same as “#1173”.
【#1176】
skip1f G31.2 skip speed
Set the skip feedrate in multi-step skip G31.1.
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1177】
skip2 G31.2 skip condition
Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.2.
---Setting range--The setting method is same as “#1173”.
【#1178】
skip2f G31.2 skip speed
Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.2.
PLC interface input signal
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Skip 3
Skip 2
-
-
Skip 1
-
-
-
{: Enable -: Disable
【#1179】
skip3 G31.3 skip condition
Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.3
---Setting range--The setting method is same as “#1173”.
III - 83
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1180】
skip3f G31.3 skip speed
Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.3.
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1181】
G96_ax Constant surface speed axis
Select the axis to be targeted for constant surface speed control.
0: Program setting will be disabled‚ and the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis
1: 1st axis
2: 2nd axis
3: 3rd axis
:
:
8: 8th axis
However, when set to other than “0”, the priority will be on the program setting.
【#1182】
thr_F Thread cutting speed
Set the screw cut up speed when not using chamfering in the thread cutting cycle.
0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate
1 to 60000 mm/min: Setting feedrate
---Setting range--0 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1183】
clmp_M M code for clamp
Set the M code for C axis clamp in hole drilling cycle.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1184】
clmp_D Dwelling time after outputting M code for unclamp
Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for C axis unclamp in hole drilling cycle.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (s)
【#1185】
spd_F1 F1 digit feedrate F1
Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min)
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1186】
spd_F2 F1 digit feedrate F2
Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min)
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1187】
spd_F3 F1 digit feedrate F3
Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min)
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1188】
spd_F4 F1 digit feedrate F4
Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min)
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
III - 84
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1189】
spd_F5 F1 digit feedrate F5
Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min)
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1190(PR)】
s_xcnt Validate inclined axis control
for L system only
Select whether to enable or disable inclined axis control.
0: Disable inclined axis control
1: Enable inclined axis control
【#1191(PR)】
s_angl Inclination angle
for L system only
Set the inclination angle (θ).
(Note) When set to "0", the angle determined by three-side setting will be applied.
---Setting range--± 80.000 (°)
【#1192(PR)】
s_zrmv Compensation at reference position return
for L system only
Select whether to perform compensation for the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis at
reference position return.
0: Perform compensation
1: Not perform compensation
【#1193】
inpos Deceleration check method 1/ Validate in-position check
The definitions are changed with the setting of "#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification
type".
<When Deceleration check method 1 is selected>
Select the deceleration check method for G0.
0: Command deceleration check
1: In-position check
<When Deceleration check method 2 is selected>
Select the deceleration confirmation method for the positioning or cutting command.
0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check
1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check
【#1194】
H_acdc Time constant 0 for handle feed
Select the time constant for manual handle feed.
0: Use time constant for G01
1: Time constant 0 (step)
【#1195】
Mmac Macro call for M command
Select whether to enable or disable M command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1196】
Smac Macro call for S command
Select whether to enable or disable S command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1197】
Tmac Macro call for T command
Select whether to enable or disable T command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1198】
M2mac Macro call with 2nd miscellaneous code
Select whether to enable or disable 2nd miscellaneous command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
III - 85
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1199】
Sselect Select initial spindle control
Select the initial condition of spindle control after power is turned ON.
0: 1st spindle control mode (G43.1)
1: Selected spindle control mode (G44.1)
2: All spindle simultaneously control mode (G47.1)
(Note) Spindle No. when G44.1 is commanded is selected with “#1534 SnG44.1”.
【#1200(PR)】
G0_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant G0
Select the acceleration and deceleration type when a rapid traverse command is issued.
0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type)
1: Acceleration and deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
(Note) When rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, this
parameter will be invalid.
【#1201(PR)】
G1_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G1
Select the acceleration and deceleration type when a linear interpolation command is issued.
0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type)
1: Acceleration and deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
【#1202】
mirofs Distance between facing turrets
for L system only
Set the distance between tools (edges) (between facing turrets).
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#1203】
TmirS1 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command
for L system only
Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 1 to 32, as facing turrets for T code mirror
image.
---Setting range--0 to FFFFFFFF
【#1204】
TmirS2 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command
for L system only
Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 33 to 64, as facing turrets for T code mirror
image.
---Setting range--0 to FFFFFFFF
【#1205】
G0bdcc Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation
0: Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied to G00.
1: Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied to G00 even in the high accuracy control
mode.
2: Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
(Note) "1" cannot be set for the 2nd part system and the following.
【#1206】
G1bF Maximum speed
Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
When high-accuracy control time constant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed
clamp speed of each axis.
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
III - 86
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1207】
G1btL Time constant
Set a cutting feed time constant when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
When "0" is set, the time constant will be clamped at 1ms.
Speed
G1bF
G1btL
Time
---Setting range--Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion : 0 to 5000 (ms)
With high-accuracy control time constant expansion : 0 to 30000 (ms)
【#1208】
RCK Arc radius error compensation factor
Set a coefficient for arc radius error compensation.
An arc radius error compensation amount can be increased or decreased between -60.0 and
+20.0%.
---Setting range---60.0 to +20.0 (%)
【#1209】
cirdcc Arc deceleration speed
Set the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit.
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
III - 87
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1210】
RstGmd Modal G code reset
Select whether to initialize G code group modals and H and D codes, which corresponds to bits as
follows, when the system is reset.
0: Initialize.
1: Not initialize.
<Description of bits for M system>
1F 1E 1D 1C
1B 1A 19 18
17 16 15 14
0 0 0 0
0 0 *
*
0 0 0 0
F E D C
B A
8
7
6
5
0 * 0 *
* 0 * 0
*
*
*
9
13 12 11 10
*
*
*
*
4
3
2
1
0
*
0 *
*
*
bit 1F: (Not used)
bit 1E: (Not used)
bit 1D: (Not used)
bit 1C: (Not used)
bit 1B: (Not used)
bit 1A: (Not used)
bit 19: Spindle clamp rotation speed initialization
bit 18: H, D codes initialization
bit 17: (Not used)
bit 16: (Not used)
bit 15: (Not used)
bit 14: (Not used)
bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization
bit 12: Group 19 G command mirror modal initialization
bit 11: Group 18 Polar coordinate command modal initialization
bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization
bit F: (Not used)
bit E: Group 15 Normal line control modal initialization
bit D: (Not used)
bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization
bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal initialization
bit A: (Not used)
bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal initialization
bit 8: (Not used)
bit 7: Group 8 Length compensation modal initialization
bit 6: Group 7 Radius compensation modal initialization
bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization
bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization
bit 3: (Not used)
bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization
bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization
bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization
The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and the D code indicates the tool radius
compensation number.
When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group 8 G modal are retained.
When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G modal are retained.
<Description of bits for M system>
1F 1E 1D 1C
1B 1A 19 18
17 16 15 14
0 0 0 0
0 0 * 0
0 0 0 *
* 0 *
*
F
B A
7
E D C
0 0 0 *
9
8
* 0 * 0
13 12 11 10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
III - 88
4. Base Specifications Parameters
bit 1F: (Not used)
bit 1E: (Not used)
bit 1D: (Not used)
bit 1C: (Not used)
bit 1B: (Not used)
bit 1A: (Not used)
bit 19: Spindle clamp rotation speed initialization
bit 18: (Not used)
bit 17: (Not used)
bit 16: (Not used)
bit 15: (Not used)
bit 14: Group 15 Facing turret mirror image initialization
bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization
bit 12: (Not used)
bit 11: Group 18 Balance cut initialization
bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization
bit F: (Not used)
bit E: (Not used)
bit D: (Not used)
bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization
bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal initialization
bit A: (Not used)
bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal initialization
bit 8: (Not used)
bit 7: (Not used)
bit 6: Group 7 Nose R compensation modal initialization
bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization
bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization
bit 3: Group 4 Barrier check modal initialization
bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization
bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization
bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization
【#1213(PR)】
proaxy Side 1 of inclination angle
for L system only
Set the length within the orthogonal coordinate of the inclined axis, a side of the triangle formed with
the inclination angle.
---Setting range--±9999.999
【#1214(PR)】
macaxy Side 2 of inclination angle
for L system only
Set the actual length of the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis, a side of the triangle
formed with the inclination angle.
---Setting range--±9999.999
【#1215(PR)】
macaxx Side 3 of inclination angle
for L system only
Set the actual length of the inclined axis, a side of the triangle formed with the inclination angle.
---Setting range--±9999.999
【#1216】
extdcc External deceleration level
Set the upper limit value of the feedrate when the external deceleration signals are enabled.
This parameter is valid when "#1239 set11/bit6" is set to "0".
---Setting range--1 to 999999 (mm/min)
III - 89
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1217】
aux01
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1218】
aux02
bit3: Parameter input/output format
Select the parameter input/output format.
0: Type I
1: Type II (related to "#1218 aux02/bit5")
bit4: External workpiece coordinate offset tool number selection
Select the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring
the coordinate offset of an external workpiece.
0: Follow the setting of "#1130 set_t".
1: Use the tool number indicated by user PLC.
bit5: Parameter I/O II spindle specification address
Select the spindle specification address of parameter I/O type II.
0: C
1: T
This parameter is also applied to the spindle specification address for input and verification.
(Note) This parameter is valid only for parameter I/O type II (when "#1218 aux02/bit3" is set to "1").
bit6: Set No. valid when program input
Select which program No. is applied when inputting programs in "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" on Data I/O
screen.
0: The No. in the input data
1: The No. set in the data setting area
bit7: Input by program overwrite
(1) Select the operation when the program to be input in "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" on Data I/O screen,
has already been registered.
0: An operation error (E65) occurs.
1: Input by overwrite.
(2) Select the operation in the high-speed program server mode, when the name of the file to be
transmitted with (IC -> host) transmission already exists in the host.
0: Prohibit overwrite
1: Enable overwrite
【#1219】
aux03
bit1: Stop high-speed PC monitoring function
Set "1" to disable the function that triggers the emergency stop when the PC high-speed processing
time is extended.
Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure.
bit5: Dog-type intermediate point
Select whether to move to the intermediate point during automatic dog-type reference position
return.
0: Not move.
1: Move.
bit7: Time constant setting changeover for soft acceleration/deceleration
Select the time constant for soft acceleration/deceleration.
0: Accelerating time is obtained with G0tL (G1tL).
1: Accelerating time is obtained with G0tL + G0t1 (G1tL + G1t1).
【#1220】
aux04
for L system only
bit 0: Tool life check timing selection
Select the criterion to judge the tool life end when the use count is incremented in tool life
management II.
0: Determine the tool life end when the incremented use count has exceeded the life count.
(Default)
(Use count > life count)
1: Determine the tool life end when the incremented use count has reached the life count.
(Use count ≥ life count)
【#1221】
aux05
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 90
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1222】
aux06
bit4: Minimum cut-in amount selection
Select the minimum cut-in amount command value for the compound thread cutting cycle (G76
command).
0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be "0".
1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be set in the CNC internal data.
bit5: Fixed cycle for compound lathe command format check selection
Select the operation when the 1st block of the fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted while the
conventional format is selected ("#1265 ext01/bit0" is set to "0").
0: Program error (P33) will occur.
1: Parameter setting value will be used.
bit7: Reference position return deceleration check method
Select the deceleration check method to be used during automatic reference position return.
0: In-position check
1: Commanded deceleration check
【#1223】
aux07
bit1: Deceleration check method 2
Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9.
0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9
1: In-position check in G1+G9
The deceleration check is not performed for the commands except G1+G9.
When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check specification type" is set to "1" (Deceleration check
specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.
bit2: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap I-point -> R-point in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3
Synchronous tap in-position check improvement".
bit3: Synchronous tap in-position check improvement
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap in-position check improvement.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Related parameters:
#1223/bit2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check
#1223/bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check
#1223/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2
bit4: Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3
Synchronous tap in-position check improvement".
bit5: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap R-point in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3
Synchronous tap in-position check improvement".
bit6: Cancel synchronous tap (, S) return
0: Retain the spindle speed (, S) in synchronous tap return
1: Cancel the spindle speed (, S) in synchronous tap return with G80
bit7: Synchronous tap method
Select the synchronous tapping method.
0: Synchronous tapping with multi-step acceleration/deceleration and rapid return
1: Conventional type synchronous tapping
III - 91
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1224】
aux08
bit0: Sampling data output
Select whether to enable the sampling data output.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1225】
aux09
bit6: Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp 2
Select whether to enable the spindle rotation speed clamp by the G92 Q command for the spindle
command rotation speed (R7000) set with the user ladder.
0: Follow the setting of "aux09/bit7".
1: Only G92 S is valid for R7000. G92 Q is invalid.
When this parameter is set to "1", setting of "aux09/bit7" is invalid.
bit7: Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp
Select whether to enable the spindle rotation speed clamp by the G92 S or Q command for the
spindle command rotation speed (R7000) set with the user ladder.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#1226】
aux10
bit0: Tool compensation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement
Select the tool compensation data to be used for external workpiece coordinate offset
measurement.
0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data
1: Tool length data
bit1: Optional block skip type
Select whether to enable the optional block skip in the middle of a block.
0: Enable only at the beginning of a block.
1: Enable in the middle of a block, as well as at the beginning of the block.
bit2: Single block stop timing
Select the timing at which the single block signal is activated.
0: When the signal goes ON while automatic operation is starting, the block will stop after finished.
1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block, the block will stop.
bit3: C-axis reference position return type
Select the C-axis reference position return type.
0: Basic position return is performed by the G28 reference position return command or by
activating the manual reference position return. The basic point dog is used.
1: When the first C-axis command is issued after the C-axis mode is entered in automatic mode,
reference position return is performed before the execution of the block. The reference position
return is also performed by the G28 reference position return command or by activating the
manual reference position return. The Z phase of the encoder is used.
bit4: S command during constant surface speed
Select whether to output a strobe signal when the S command is issued in constant surface speed
mode.
0: Not output any strobe signal in constant surface speed mode.
1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed mode.
bit5: Arbitrary allocation of dog signal
Select whether to enable the arbitrary allocation parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT.
0: Disable (Fixed device is used.)
1: Enable (Device is specified by the parameter.)
bit7: Shorten JOG stop time
Select whether to shorten the JOG stop time.
0: Not shorten (Conventional specification)
1: Shorten
III - 92
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1227】
aux11
bit0: Select PLC signal or spindle feedrate attained
Set up this option when disabling the cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained.
0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal
1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained
bit1: Select H or D code
Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on the tool life management screen when issuing
the H99 or D99 command.
0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up on the management setup screen.
1: Validates the data that is set up on the management setup screen when issuing the H99 or
D99 command.
bit2: Measures against tool setter chattering
Select a condition where a relieving operation completes after measurement with tools.
0: Sensor signals have stopped for 500 ms or longer.
1: 100μm or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped.
bit3: Absolute coordinate switching (nose R)
Select whether to display a nose position or coordinate value with the absolute coordinate counter.
0: Displays the nose position.
1: Displays the position specified by program command. Select a condition where a relieving
operation completes after measurement with tools.
bit5: Spindle rotation speed clamp
Specify whether to clamp the rotation speed in constant surface speed mode when the spindle
rotation clamp command is issued.
0: Clamps the rotation regardless of the constant surface speed mode.
1: Clamps the rotation only in constant surface speed mode.
bit7: Switch the range of tool life data to be input
Set up the range of tool life data to be input or compared.
0: Inputs or compares all of the data output.
1: Inputs or compares part of the data output
1) Tool life management I data to be input or compared tool number (D), lifetime (E), life count
(F), and auxiliary data (B).
2) Tool life management II data to be input or compared Group number (G), method (M), life
(E/F), tool number (D), and compensation number (H)
III - 93
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1228】
aux12
bit1: Switch "offset and parameter" screen
Select to switch the "offset and parameter" screen to the parameter screen.
0: Display the "offset and parameter" screen.
1: Display the "parameter" screen.
bit2: Switch data protection in data transmission mode
Select the range of data protection in data transmission mode.
0: Enable the protection for both send and receive data.
1: Enable the protection for receive data only.
bit3: Nose R specification
Select the method to specify the nose R compensation.
0: Specify the nose R compensation by shape number.
1: Specify the nose R compensation by wear number.
bit4: Select operation error or stop code
Select operation error or stop code to provide for both block start and cutting start interlocks.
0: Operation error
1: Stop code
bit5: Select constant surface speed coordinates
Select the constant surface speed coordinate.
0: Workpiece coordinate
1: Absolute value coordinate
bit6: Switch relative values displayed
Select whether to preset the relative coordinates with workpiece coordinate preset (G92.1) or
counter preset (G92).
0: Preset the relative coordinates.
1: Not preset the relative coordinates.
bit7: Protection with manual value command
Select whether to protect a manual value command.
0: Not protect. (Conventional specification)
1: Protect.
III - 94
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1229】
set01
bit0: Subprogram interrupt
Select the type of the user macro interrupt.
0: Macro type user macro interrupt
1: Sub-program type user macro interrupt
bit1: Accurate thread cutting E
Select what the address E specifies in inch screw cutting.
0: Number of threads per inch
1: Precision lead
bit2: Radius compensation type B (for M system only)
Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel
command is operated during radius compensation.
0: The processing does not handle the start-up or cancel command block: handle the offset vector in
the direction vertical to that of the command instead.
1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next
block.
bit2: Nose R compensation type B (for L system only)
Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel
commands are operated during nose R or radius compensation.
0: The processing does not handle the start-up or cancel command block: handle the offset vector in
the direction vertical to that of the command instead.
1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next
block.
bit3: Initial constant surface speed
Select the initial state after the power-ON.
0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode
1: Constant surface speed control mode
bit4: Synchronous tap
Select whether to use the floating tap chuck in G74 and G84 tapping cycles.
0: With a floating tap chuck
1: Without a floating tap chuck
bit5: Start point alarm
Select the operation when the operation start point cannot be found while executing the next block
of G117.
0: Enables the auxiliary function after the block has been executed.
1: Outputs the program error (P33).
bit6: Grid display selection
Select the grid display type on the servo monitor screen during the dog type reference position
return.
0: Distance between dog OFF and basic point (including a grid mask amount)
1: A value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and basic
point
【#1230】
set02
bit7: Macro interface input/output for each part system
Select the specification of the macro interface input/output.
0: Shared by all part systems.
1: Used independently by the part systems.
【#1231】
set03
bit0: Graphic check compatibility parameter
Select whether to return the data to the pre-starting data after having checked a machining program
that rewrites the common variables, workpiece offsets and tool offsets.
0: Return the data.
1: Not return the data.
bit4: Switch zero point mark display position
Select the position for displaying the basic point mark in the graphic trace and 2D check.
0: Machine coordinate basic point (same as conventional method)
1: Workpiece coordinate basic point
bit5: Switch graphic check counter display
Select the type of counter displayed on the Graphic Check screen.
0: Machine position counter
1: Workpiece coordinate position counter
III - 95
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1232】
set04
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1233】
set05
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1234】
set06
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1235】
set07
bit0: Helical interpolation speed 2
0: Select normal speed designation also for 3rd axis
1: Select arc plane element speed designation
bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start
When the fixed type compensation value is selected, the method can be changed to the
compensation value sequential update type after the first four cycles.
0: Disable the method changeover
1: Enable the method changeover
bit4: Selection condition of synchronous tapping gear step
Select the parameters that determine the gear step for synchronous tapping.
0: #3005 through #3008 (smax1 to 4) when "#1223 aux07/bit7" is "0".
Or #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4) when "#1223 aux07/bit7" is "1".
1: Always #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4)
【#1236】
set08
bit0: Manual rotary axis feedrate unit
Select the unit of manual rotary axis feedrate.
0: Fixed to [°/min]
1: Same speed as before (When inch command, the speed is the command speed divided by
25.4.)
bit1: Spindle speed detection
Select the pulse input source of actual spindle rotation speed (R6506/R6507) when the spindle
encoder serial connection is selected ("#3025 enc-on" is set to "2").
0: Serial input
1: Encoder input connector
bit2: Current limit droop cancel invalid
Select whether to cancel the position droop when the current limit changeover signal is canceled.
0: Cancel the droop.
1: Not cancel the droop.
bit3: Rotary axis command speed scale
Select to multiply the rotary axis command speed by 10 times.
0: Invalid
1: During initial inching, the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10. In other words, if
"F100" is commanded, the speed will be the same as when 1000°/min is commanded.
The rotary axis speed display unit will be 10°/min.
【#1237(PR)】
set09
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 96
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1238(PR)】
set10
bit0: Switch G36 function
Select the function, the automatic tool length measurement or arc thread cutting (CCW), to be
applied to G36 when the G code system 6 or 7 is selected.
0: Automatic tool length measurement
1: Arc thread cutting (CCW)
bit7: Switch operation alarm
Select whether to enable the NC alarm 5 (AL5) signal output.
0: Disable NC alarm 5 (AL5)
All operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 4 (AL4).
All operation alarms will be recorded in the alarm history.
1: Enable NC alarm 5 (AL5)
The following operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 5 (AL5), not to NC alarm 4 (AL4).
The operation alarms output to NC alarm 5 (AL5) will not be recorded in the alarm history.
・External interlock axis found
・ Cutting override zero
・ External feedrate zero
・ Block start interlock
・ Cutting block start interlock
・ Cutting interlock for spindle-spindle polygon (G51.2)
【#1239(PR)】
set11
bit0: Coil switching method
Select the coil switching method.
0: Via PLC (Y189F).
1: NC internal processing. (Y189F is invalid.)
bit1: Handle I/F selection
Select the handle connection destination.
0: Use the handle connected to the encoder communication connector.
1: Use the remote I/O unit as a priority.
When HN391/HN392 is mounted, the handle connected to the operation panel I/O unit will be used
regardless of this parameter setting.
bit3: Polygon machining mode at reset
Select whether to cancel the polygon machining mode when reset is applied.
0: Not cancel.
1: Cancel.
bit4: Invalidate G51.1 phase command
Select whether to enable the phase control with the spindle-spindle polygon function.
0: Always enable. (When R is not commanded, it will be handled as R0.)
1: Enable only at the R command.
bit5: Door interlock spindle speed clamp valid
Select whether to enable the spindle clamp speed changeover by the PLC signal.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1240(PR)】
set12
bit0: Handle input pulse
Select the handle input pulse.
0: MITSUBISHI CNC standard handle pulse
1: Handle 400 pulse
bit2: Zero point shift amount magnification
When "1" is set, the following magnification will be applied on the "#2027 G28sft Reference position
shift distance", "#2057 Near zero point +" and "#2058 Near zero point -" settings.
For 0.1µm: 10-fold
For 0.01µm: 100-fold
bit4: Optical communication automatic channel detection invalid
Select whether to enable the optical communication automatic channel detection.
0: Enable
1: Disable
III - 97
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1265(PR)】
ext01
bit0: Command format 1
Select the command format for the fixed cycle for compound lathe.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format (1 block command method)
bit1: Command format 2
Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
bit2: Command format 3
Select the command format for the hole drilling fixed cycle.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
【#1266(PR)】
ext02
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1267(PR)】
ext03
bit0: G code type
Select the high-speed high-accuracy G code type.
0: Conventional format (G61.1)
1: MITSUBISHI special format (G08P1)
【#1268(PR)】
ext04
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1269(PR)】
ext05
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1270(PR)】
ext06
bit6: Switch continuous thread cutting Z phase wait operation
Select when to start the 2nd block thread cutting when there is a command with no movement (MST
command, etc.) between the thread cutting blocks.
0: Wait for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal before starting the movement.
1: Start movement without waiting for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal.
bit7: Handle C axis coordinate during cylindrical interpolation
Specify whether to keep the rotary axis coordinate as before the cylindrical interpolation start
command is issued during the cylindrical interpolation.
0: Not keep
1: Keep
III - 98
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1271(PR)】
ext07
bit0: Mirror image operation
Select the type of mirror image operation.
0: Type 1
・ The program mirror image, external mirror image, and parameter mirror image are exclusive to
each other.
・ An increment command moves the image to the position indicated by the travel amount with the
sign inverted.
1: Type 2
・ Mirror image operation is enabled when the program mirror image (G51.1) command is issued
or when the external signal or parameter is ON.
・ An increment command moves the image to the position determined by applying the mirror
image to the absolute program coordinates.
bit1: Address specifying fixed cycle repetition count (for M system only)
Select the address that specifies the fixed cycle repetition count.
0: Address L only (Default)
1: Addresses K and L
If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously, the data at address K will be used for operation.
bit2: F-command unit
Select the unit to be used when a thread cutting lead command does not contain decimal point.
0: Type 1 (conventional specifications)
F1 -> 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev
1: Type 2
F1 -> 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev
bit3: G-code group for unidirectional positioning (for M system only)
Select the G-code group for unidirectional positioning.
0: Unmodal G code (group 00)
1: Modal G code (group 01)
Related parameter: "#8209 G60 Shift" (Set the last positioning direction and distance for each axis
applicable when the unidirectional positioning command is issued.)
bit4: Operation by independent G40 command
Select whether the radius compensation vector is canceled by the independent G40 command.
0: Type 1 (conventional specification) (Default)
The radius compensation vector will be canceled by the independent G40 command.
1: Type 2
The radius compensation vector won’t be canceled by the independent G40 command: it will be
canceled by the next travel command for the radius compensation plane.
bit5: Cut start position (for L system only)
Select the position from where cutting begins in a fixed cycle for compound lathe.
0: Conventional specification (Default)
The cut start position will be determined by the final shaping program.
1: Extended specification
The cut start position will be determined from the cycle start point.
bit6: Nose R compensation (for L system only)
Select whether to apply nose R compensation for shapes in a rough cutting cycle.
0: Conventional specification (Default)
The shape after nose R compensation in the final shaping program will be used as rough cutting
shape (when the nose R compensation for the final shaping program).
1: Extended specifications
The shape without nose R compensation in the final shaping program will be used as rough
cutting shape.
bit7: Cut amount (for L system only)
Select the operation to be performed when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut
amount of the final shaping program.
0: Conventional specification (Default)
A program error will occur when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the
final shaping program.
1: Extended specification
Rough cutting will be performed by one cut when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the
cut amount of the final shaping program.
III - 99
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1272(PR)】
ext08
bit0: Switch pocket machining operation
Select the pocket machining specification.
0: Conventional specification
Pocket machining will be selected with the H designation.
The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the Z direction.
1: Extended specification
Pocket machining will start only when both X and Z axes are specified in the first travel block after
the finished shape start block.
The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the X direction.
bit1: M function synchronous tap cycle
Specify whether to enable the M function synchronous tapping cycle.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit2: Spiral/conical interpolation command format 2
Select the command format for spiral and conical interpolation.
0: Type 1 (conventional specification)
1: Type 2 (with the number of spiral rotation L designation and the increment designation)
bit3: Switch macro call function
Select whether to shift the argument to the subprogram if nests are overlapped when per block call
(G66.1) is commanded.
0: Shift
1: Not shift (Conventional specification)
bit4: Tap cycle selection
Select the tapping cycle.
0: Pecking tapping cycle
1: Deep hole tapping cycle
bit5: Deep hole tap cycle override selection
Select whether to enable override on the pulling operation during synchronized tapping with the
deep hole tapping cycle.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit6: Switch corner chamfering/ corner R command format
Select the command format of the corner chamfering/corner R.
0: Command format I (conventional format)
Issue a command with comma (,C and ,R).
1: Command format II
In addition to command format I, addresses without comma can be used to command.
I/K or C can be used for corner chamfering, while R can be used for corner R.
bit7: Return position after macro interrupt in fixed cycle selection
Select the destination to return to after a macro interrupt in the fixed cycle.
0: Return to the block in the fixed cycle.
1: Return to the block next to the fixed cycle.
III - 100
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1273(PR)】
ext09
bit0: Switch ASIN calculation results range
Select the ASIN calculation results range.
0: -90° to 90°
1: 90° to 270°
bit1: Switch system variable unit
Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (time during automatic start).
0: 1 ms unit
1: 1 hour unit
bit2: Switch G71, G72, G73 cutting direction judgment
Select the cutting direction when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71), face rough cutting cycle
(G72) or closed loop cutting cycle (G73) is commanded.
0: Conventional specification
Determined according to the finished shape program.
1: Extended specification
Determined according to the finishing allowance and cutting allowance commanded in the
program.
bit3: Facing turret mirror image coordinate value type
Select how to show the workpiece coordinate values of the axis for which the facing turret mirror
image is valid.
0: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the same direction as those in the
workpiece machine coordinate system.
1: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the opposite direction to those in the
workpiece machine coordinate system.
bit4: Facing turret mirror image valid axis selection
Select the axis for which the facing turret mirror image is valid.
0: Fixed to 1st axis.
1: Determined according to the plane selected when the facing turret mirror image is commanded.
【#1274(PR)】
ext10
bit7: Word range check
Select whether to check that the operation expression of the word data in the program is enclosed in
brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine program is executed.
This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999 and the machine tool builder macro program.
0: Check
1: Not check
【#1275(PR)】
ext11
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1276(PR)】
ext12
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 101
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1277(PR)】
ext13
bit0: Tool life management II count type 2
Select how and when the mount or use count will be incremented in tool life management II. The
condition to output "tool group life over (TGLO)" signal will be changed accordingly.
0: Type 1 (Default)
Counts up when the spindle tool is used for cutting.
TGLO signal will be output when the last tool in selected group is judged as expired.
1: Type 2
Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a program at the time of resetting.
TGLO signal will be output when any of tool groups has reached its lifetime limit.
bit1: Tool life management II life prediction
Select whether to enable tool life prediction function in tool life management II.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit2: Tool life management II life end signal timing
Select the timing at which tool life prediction signal is output in tool life management II.
0: Output only when the ["life value" - "used value"] matches the remaining life. ("life value" - "used
value" = "remaining life")
1: Output when the ["life value" - "used value"] is less than the remaining life. ("life value" - "used
value" ≤ "remaining life")
bit3: Tool life management II life end signal tool
Select the tool for which the tool life prediction signal is output in tool life management II.
0: Output the signal tool by tool.
1: Output the signal at the last tool in the group.
bit4: Tool life management II count changeover (For M system only)
Select the tool life count method and its timing.
0: Conforms to "ext13/bit0" setting.
1: When "ext13/bit0" is set to "0":
Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a program at the time of resetting.
When "ext13/bit0" is set to "1":
Follow the setting of "Method (Mthd)" on Tool life screen.
The output condition of "tool group life over" signal conforms to "ext13/bit0".
【#1278(PR)】
ext14
bit0: Program restart method selection
Select the program restart type.
0: Restart type A
1: Restart type B
【#1279(PR)】
ext15
bit0: Part system synchronization method
Select the part system synchronization method.
0: If one part system is not in the automatic operation, the synchronization command will be
ignored and the next block will be executed.
1: Operate according to the "waiting ignore" signal.
If the "waiting ignore" signal is set to "1", the synchronization command will be ignored. When set
to "0", synchronization will be applied.
bit1: Interrupt amount during machine lock
Select when to cancel the interruption amount during machine lock.
0: When resetting
1: During manual reference position return (not when resetting)
bit2: Selection of cutting start interlock target block
Select whether to enable the cutting start interlock for successive cutting blocks.
0: Enable
1: Disable
III - 102
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1280(PR)】
ext16
bit0: I/F per axis during cross machining control
Select how to handle the following PLC interface for axes interchanged with cross machining
control.
・ Mirror image
・ Manual/automatic interlock
・ Manual/automatic machine lock
0: Follows axis configuration before cross machining control.
1: Follows axis configuration after cross machining control.
(Example) The device No. of automatic interlock (+) for X1 will be as follows when the cross
machining is executed with the 1st axis (X1) in the 1st part system and 1st axis (X2) in the 2nd part
system.
When "0" is set: Y820 (interface for 1st axis in 1st part system)
When "1" is set: Y828 (interface for 1st axis in 2nd part system)
(Note) If the number of axes in the part system changes with cross machining, the interface of the
target axis may change when this parameter is set to "1".
(Example) When 1st part system's C axis is moved to 2nd part system with a 1st part system (X, Z,
C, Y) and 2nd part system (X, Z) configuration:
When "1" is set: Y82A, Y7CA, Y8AA and later will be the interface for the C axis moved to the 2nd
part system. Y7C2, Y822, Y8A2 and later will be the interface of the Y axis in the 1st part system,
because the axes following the removed C axis (third place) are shifted up.
bit1: Cross machining control cancel with reset
Select whether to cancel the cross machining control when reset is applied.
0: Cancel.
1: Not cancel.
bit2: Interchange coordinate position display
Select whether to display interchanged (or moved) coordinate positions in the cross machining
control.
This setting will be applied when the axes are moved, as well as when the axes are interchanged.
0: Display interchanged (or moved) coordinate positions.
1: Display coordinate positions without being interchanged (nor moved).
(Example) When 1st part system's C axis is moved to 2nd part system with a 1st part system (X, Z,
C, Y) and 2nd part system (X, Z) configuration:
1st part system: X, Z and Y coordinate positions are displayed.
2nd part system: X, Z and C coordinate positions are displayed.
bit3: Reset operation for synchronization/super-imposition control
Select whether to cancel synchronization/superimposition control when reset is applied.
0: Cancel.
1: Not cancel.
III - 103
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1281(PR)】
ext17
bit0: Zero point return operation changeover parameter
(Zero point setting operation)
The "Operation error 1036" will occur regardless of this parameter, and regardless of manual or
automatic operation.
(High-speed zero point return)
0: <During manual operation>
The master axis and slave axis will simultaneously start zero point return. Even if one of the axes
reaches the zero point, the other axis will continue to move until it reaches the zero point. Thus, if
the difference of the master axis and slave axis feedback position before zero point return is larger
than the tolerable synchronization error amount, the error "Operation error 0051" will occur during
zero point return.
0: <During automatic operation>
The master axis and slave axis will simultaneously start zero point return. When the master axis
reaches the zero point, the slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional relation of the master axis and
slave axis established before zero point return is maintained.
1: <During manual operation> <During automatic operation>
The master axis and slave axis will simultaneously start zero point return. When the master axis
reaches the zero point, the slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional relation of the master axis and
slave axis established before zero point return is maintained.
bit3: Synchronous control Operation setting
Select whether to automatically align the positioning of slave axis with that of master axis when the
axis subject to synchronous control is changed from servo OFF to servo ON.
0: Not align.
1: Align.
Bit5: High-speed synchronous tapping valid
Select whether to enable high-speed synchronous tapping.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1282(PR)】
ext18
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1283(PR)】
ext19
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1284(PR)】
ext20
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1285(PR)】
ext21
bit0: Multi-part system program generation and operation
Select whether to use Multi-part system program management.
0: Not use
1: Use
(Note) When this parameter is changed, the power must be turned OFF and ON, and the system
formatted. When "1" is not set to two or more "#1001 SYS_ON" [1] to [4], this parameter will not be
valid even if this parameter is set to "1".
bit1: Changeover of method to select operation program
Select how to search a program to operate.
0: Select a program in the selected part system with operation search.
1: Select a common part system program with operation search. (A common part system program
No. will be selected.)
III - 104
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1286(PR)】
ext22
bit0: Program input/output method selection
Select the program input/output method.
0: Only the programs in the selected part system are input/output.
1: The designated programs are output for all part systems.
bit2: O No. for program input No.
Select the operation when the same program No. is input during data input.
0: The O No. is handled as a character string data.
1: The O No. is handled as a program No. Whether to overwrite the program or cause an error is
decided by "#1218 bit7 Input by program overwrite".
bit3: No O No. at machining program input
Select whether to enable the machining program input even if there is no program No. (O No.).
The program No. is fixed to 01 in this case.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1287(PR)】
ext23
bit4: Relative coordinate display
(M system)
0: Display the actual position including tool length offset.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool length offset.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including tool shape compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool shape
compensation.
bit5: Relative coordinate display
(M system)
0: Display the actual position including tool radius compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool radius
compensation.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including nose R compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding nose R
compensation.
【#1288(PR)】
ext24
bit0: MDI program clear
Select whether to clear the MDI programs when MDI operation ends, the power is turned ON again,
reset is input, or emergency stop is canceled.
0: Not clear.
1: Clear (save only % programs).
【#1289(PR)】
ext25
bit0: Tool radius compensation switch corner judgment method (Nose R compensation)
Select the criterion to execute the outer rounding at the small corner in tool radius compensation.
(L system)
0: The corner angle is 0°; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is the same. (Conventional
method)
1: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is almost the
same. (Method for rounding minute corner angle)
(M system)
0: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02. (Conventional method)
1: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is almost the
same. (Method for rounding minute corner angle)
【#1290(PR)】
ext26
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1291(PR)】
ext27
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 105
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1292(PR)】
ext28
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1293(PR)】
ext29
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1294(PR)】
ext30
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1295(PR)】
ext31
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1296(PR)】
ext32
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1297(PR)】
ext33
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1298(PR)】
ext34
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1299(PR)】
ext35
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1300(PR)】
ext36
bit0: Multiple spindle control II
Select multiple spindle control I or II.
0: Multiple spindle control I (L system only)
1: Multiple spindle control II (select from ladder)
bit7: Spindle synchronization command method
Select the spindle synchronization command method.
0: Spindle synchronization with PLC I/F
1: Spindle synchronization with machining program
【#1301】
nrfchk Near reference position check method
Select the method to judge the "near reference position".
0: Conventional method
1: Command machine position is used.
2: Feedback position is used.
【#1302】
AutoRP Automatic return by program restart
Select the method to move to the restart position when restarting the program.
0: Move the system manually to the restart position and then restart the program.
1: The system automatically moves to the restart position at the first activation after the program
restarts.
【#1303(PR)】
V1comN No. of #100 address part system common variables
Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #100.
This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1".
---Setting range--0 to 100
【#1304(PR)】
V0comN No. of #500 address part system common variables
Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #500.
This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1".
---Setting range--0 to 500
III - 106
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1306】
InpsTyp
Deceleration check specification type
Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check.
0: Deceleration check specification type 1
G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/bit1".
1: Deceleration check specification type 2
G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".
【#1309(PR)】
GType
Switch command format
Select which is used to command the reverse tap.
0: G84.1/G88.1
1: D command with the value changed to negative
【#1310】
WtMmin Minimum value for synchronization M code
Set the minimum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
---Setting range--0, 100 to 99999999
【#1311】
WtMmax Maximum value for synchronization M code
Set the maximum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
---Setting range--0, 100 to 99999999
【#1312】
T_base Tool life management standard number
Set the standard No. for the tool life management.
When the value specified by the T code command exceeds the set value in this parameter, the set
value will be subtracted from the command value, which will be used as tool group No. for tool life
management.
When the value specified by the T code command is equal to or less than the set value, the T code
will be handled as a normal T code and not subjected to tool life management.
When "0" is set in this parameter, the T code command will always specify a group No. (Valid for
M-system tool life management II.)
---Setting range--0 to 9999
【#1313】
TapDw1 Synchronous tap hole bottom wait time
Set the hole bottom wait time for synchronous tapping.
When P address is specified, the greater value will be used as the hole bottom wait time. When an
in-position check is performed at the hole bottom, the wait time will be provided after the completion
of the in-position check.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap
in-position check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position
check).
---Setting range--0 to 999 (ms)
【#1314】
TapInp Synchronous tap in-position check width (tap axis)
Set the hole bottom in-position check width for synchronous tapping.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap
in-position check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position
check).
---Setting range--0.000 to 99.999
III - 107
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1316(PR)】
CrossCom Reference of common variables common for part systems
Select whether to use the common variables from #100100 to #800199.
0: Not use
1: Use
This parameter is valid only when the number of variable sets is set to 600 or more.
When this parameter is set to "1", variables from #100100 to #100110 will not be available as the
system variables for PLC data read function, and the setting of "#1052 MemVal" will be invalid.
【#1324(PR)】
Chop_R Chopping compensation value fixing method
Set the head No. of the R register used as the compensation amount save area during fixed
compensation amount method.
When the first number is an odd number, the operation message "Setting error" appears.
When the value overlaps with the chopping control data area, the operation message "Setting error"
appears.
---Setting range--8300 to 9782
(Only the even number)
(Within backup area)
【#1326】
PLC Const Ext. Number PLC constant extension number
Set the number of PLC constant extension points.
---Setting range--0 to 750
【#1327】
3D ATC type
Tool change method specification
Select the tool change method for determining the tool to draw solids.
With 3D drawing, the tool will be changed by the method designated with this parameter, and then
the image will be drawn.
0: With one standby tool
1: With two standby tools
2: With no standby tool
【#1328】
TLM type
Tool measurement standard positions election
Select the tool measurement method.
0: Use the machine position at TLM switch ON as 0.
1: Use the machine basic point as standard.
【#1329】
Emgcnt Emergency stop contactor shut-off time
Set the time taken for the drive section's main power to be shut-off when the confirmation of all the
axes' stop failed after the emergency stop state.
The contactor shut-off signal is output as soon as all the axes are confirmed stopped if the
confirmation is done prior to the set time.
When there is no safety observation option or "0" is set, the shut-off time will be 30(s).
---Setting range--0 to 60 (s)
【#1330(PR)】
MC_dp1 Contactor weld detection device 1
When safety observation is executed, set the I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact
signal used for the contactor weld detection.
If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed.
---Setting range--000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1331(PR)】
MC_dp2 Contactor weld detection device 2
When safety observation is executed, set the I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary B contact
signal used for the contactor weld detection.
If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed.
---Setting range--000 to 02FF (HEX)
III - 108
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1332(PR)】
F-bus init delay Fieldbus communication error invalid time
Tuning the power ON, start the communication, and then set the time where Fieldbus
communication error is not detected. Set this in 0.1 second increment.
---Setting range--0 to 255 (0.1s)
Standard: 0
【#1333】
LMC restrain Lost motion compensation restraint in handle mode
Select whether to restrain the lost motion compensation in handle mode.
0: Restrain
1: Not restrain
【#1334】
DI/DO refresh cycl
DI/DO refresh cycle
Select the DI/DO refresh cycle.
0: Standard mode
1: High-speed mode 1
2: High-speed mode 2
(Note 1) This parameter is valid for M700 and M70 (typeA) series. "Standard mode" is applied to
M70 (typeB) regardless of this parameter.
(Note 2) The speed may not be high if number of ladder steps is excessive.
(Note 3) If high-speed mode is selected, the fine segment processing performance may degrade.
【#1335】
man_smg Manual feed acceleration/deceleration selection
Select the acceleration/deceleration mode in jog feed, incremental feed and manual reference
position return (when rapid traverse signal OFF).
0: Acceleration/Deceleration for rapid traverse
1: Acceleration/Deceleration for cutting feed
【#1336(PR)】
#400_Valtype
#400 address variable type
Select whether the #400-level variables are used as machine tool builder macro variables or as
common variables.
0: #400 to #449 are not available; #450 to #499 are used as machine tool builder macro variables.
1: #400 to #499 are used as common variables
(Note) 700 sets of common variables are required for using #400 to #499 as common variables. If
this parameter is set to "1" while the number of common variables is not set to 700, this parameter
setting will be regarded as "0".
【#1338(PR)】
rev data save trg
Trigger switching to save arbitrary reverse run data
Select the condition to start/stop saving reverse run data.
0: Start when the reverse run control mode signal is turned ON. Stop when turned OFF.
1: Start when the reverse run control mode signal is ON and macro interrupt is valid (M96/ION).
Stop when the reverse run control mode signal is OFF or macro interruption is finished (M97/IOF)
(compatible with M500M).
【#1361(PR)】
aux_acc Auxiliary axis acceleration/deceleration type
Select the acceleration/deceleration type of auxiliary axis in PLC axis indexing.
0: Acceleration/deceleration with constant time
1: Acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
【#1493(PR)】
ref_syn
Synchronization at zero point initialization
0: Master axis and slave axis determine their zero points individually.
1: The zero points of both master and slave axes are determined by initializing the master axis's
zero point.
The slave axis moves in perfect synchronization with the master axis.
Set this to "1" for speed/current command synchronization control.
III - 109
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1494(PR)】
dsp_ax_change Axis order of counter display
Set this in order to change the axis order of counter display.
The axes will be displayed in ascending order of the setting values "1" to "8".
However, axis whose setting is "0" will be displayed after axes whose settings are between "1" and
"8" are displayed.
(Note 1) When the same value is set for more than one axis, axis that is displayed on the left side on
the parameter screen will be first displayed.
(Note 2) When both of mixed synchronization control (option) and interchange coordinate position
display ("1280 ext16/bit2" OFF) are valid, and when there are two or more valid part systems, this
parameter will be ignored.
---Setting range--1 to 8: Axes are displayed in ascending order.
Other than 1 to 8: Axes are displayed after the display of the axes with setting value "1" to "8".
【#1501】
polyax
Rotational tool axis number
for L system only
Set the number of the rotational tool axis used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set "0" when not
using polygon machining (spindle-servo axis), or when using spindle-spindle polygon machining. A
value exceeding the base specification parameter "#1002 axisno" cannot be specified.
This parameter is valid when the G code system is 6 or 7 (7 or 8 is set in base specification
parameter "#1037 cmdtyp").
【#1502】
G0Ipfg G1 -> G0 deceleration check
Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G0.
0: Not perform
1: Perform
【#1503】
G1Ipfg G1 -> G1 deceleration check
Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G1.
0: Not perform
1: Perform
【#1505】
ckref2 Second reference position return check
Select whether the check is carried out at the specified position in manual second reference position
return mode upon completion of spindle orientation or at second reference position return interlock
signal.
0: Upon completion of spindle orientation
1: At second reference position return interlock signal
【#1506】
F1_FM Upper limit of F1 digit feedrate
Set the maximum value up to which the F 1-digit feedrate can be changed.
---Setting range--0 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1507】
F1_K F1 digit feedrate change constant
Set the constant that determines the speed change rate per manual handle graduation in F 1-digit
feedrate change mode.
---Setting range--0 to 32767
【#1510】
DOOR_H Shorten door interlock II axis stop time
Select whether to shorten the time during which the axis is stopped when the door is opened.
0 : Use the conventional axis stop time.
1 : Shorten the axis stop time.
(Note) When the door interlock II signal is input via a ladder, the conventional axis stop time will be
used.
III - 110
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1511】
DOORPm
Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each part system
Set the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each part system.
A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified.
Device number "000" is invalid.
Set device number "100" when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input.
Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each part system) "
---Setting range--000 to 2FF
(hexadecimal)
【#1512】
DOORPs Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each part system
Set the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each part system.
(Set the same value as that of #1155.)
Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each part system)"
---Setting range--000 to 2FF
(hexadecimal)
【#1513】
stapM M code for synchronous tap selection
Set the M code for the synchronous tapping selection.
Select the synchronous tapping mode using the miscellaneous function code of the value set in this
parameter. The M function command can be issued immediately before the tap command or in the
same block. This function is valid only when "1" is set in "#1272 ext08/bit1 (Enable/disable
M-function synchronous tap cycle)".
(Note) Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99.
---Setting range--0 to 99999999
【#1514】
expLinax Exponential function interpolation linear axis
Set the axis name for the linear axis used in exponential function interpolation.
---Setting range--A to Z
【#1515】
expRotax
Exponential function interpolation rotary axis
Set the axis name for the rotary axis used in exponential function interpolation.
---Setting range--A to Z
【#1516】
mill_ax Milling axis name
Set the name of the rotary axis used in milling interpolation. Only one rotary axis can be set.
When there is no E command in issuing the G12.1 command, this parameter will be followed.
---Setting range--A to Z
【#1517】
mill_C Milling interpolation hypothetical axis name
Select the hypothetical axis command name for milling interpolation.
When there is no D command in issuing the milling interpolation command, this parameter will be
followed.
0: Y axis command
1: Command rotary axis name.
【#1518】
polm
Spindle-spindle polygon Workpiece spindle No.
Set the workpiece axis No. used in spindle-spindle polygon machining.
(Note) The 1st spindle will be selected when "0" is set.
III - 111
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1519】
pols Spindle-spindle polygonTool spndle No.
Set the number of the rotaty tool spindle used in spindle-spindle polygon machining.
(Note) The 2nd spindle will be selected when "0" is set.
【#1520(PR)】
Tchg34 Additional axis tool compensation operation
Select axis to carry out the additional axis' tool compensation function.
0: 3rd axis.
1: 4th axis.
【#1521】
C_min Minimum turning angle
Set the minimum turning angle of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line
control.
---Setting range--0.000 to 360.000 (°)
(Input setting increment applies)
【#1522(PR)】
C_axis Normal line control axis
Set the number of the axis for normal line control.
Set a rotary axis No.
0: Normal line control disabled
1 to 8: Axis No. (number of control axes)
【#1523】
C_feed Normal line control axis turning speed
Set the turning speed of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line control.
Set a value that does not exceed the normal line control axis' clamp speed ("#2002 clamp").
This is valid with normal line control type I.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000
(°/min)
【#1524】
C_type
Normal line control type
Select the normal line control type.
0: Normal line control type I
1: Normal line control type II
【#1533】
millPax Pole coordinate linear axis name
Set the linear axis name used for pole coordinate interpolation.
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y or Z
【#1534】
SnG44.1 Spindle No. for G44.1 command
Set the selected spindle No. for the G44.1 command.
The setting range differs according to the model.
If a spindle that does not exist is set, the 2nd spindle will be used. Note that if there is only one
spindle, the 1st spindle will be used.
0: 2nd spindle
1: 1st spindle
2: 2nd spindle
3: 3rd spindle
4: 4th spindle
【#1535】
C_leng Minimum turning movement amount
Set the minimum turning movement amount of the normal line control axis at the block joint during
normal line control.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applies)
III - 112
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1537】
crsax[1] Cross machining control axis
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1538】
crsax[2]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1539】
crsax[3]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1540】
crsax[4]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1541】
crsax[5]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1542】
crsax[6]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
III - 113
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1543】
crsax[7]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1544】
crsax[8]
Set the axis to be interchanged during cross machining control.
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining control) request signal is input, or the name of
the axis to be shifted to that part system.
---Setting range--Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1561】
3Dcdc Switch workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordinate conversion
Select the workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordinate conversion.
0: Workpiece coordinate system
1: G68 program coordinate system
(Note) The special display unit's absolute coordinates also follow this parameter setting.
【#1562】
3Dremc Switch remaining command display during 3D coordinate conversion
Select the remaining command display during 3D coordinate conversion.
0: Workpiece coordinate system
1: G68 program coordinate system
【#1563】
3Dcdrc Switch coordinate reading during 3D coordinate conversion
Select the coordinate system of the workpiece/skip coordinate read value in the 3D coordinate
conversion modal.
0: G68 program coordinate system
1: Workpiece (local) coordinate system
【#1564】
3Dspd Hole drilling speed during 3D coordinate conversion
Select the rapid traverse rate for the hole drilling cycle during 3D coordinate conversion.
0: The cutting feed clamp speed is used.
Other than 0: The set speed is used.
Note that if the rapid traverse rate is exceeded, the speed will be clamped at the rapid traverse rate.
【#1565】
helgear Helical machining base axis
Set the base axis for helix angle calculation in helical machining. When no setting, Z axis will be
used.
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#1566】 3DSelctDrillaxMode Switch drill axis's mode from rapid traverse during 3D coordinate
conversion
Select the rapid traverse mode in non-drilling blocks among a drilling cycle to the cutting feed mode
during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
0: Rapid traverse mode. The speed follows the setting of "#2001 rapid".
1: Cutting feed mode. The speed follows the setting of "#1564 3Dspd".
【#1568】
SfiltG1 G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter
Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range--0 to 200 (ms)
III - 114
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1569】
SfiltG0 G00 soft acceleration/deceleration filter
Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate for the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range--0 to 200 (ms)
【#1570】
Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2
Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate in pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration.
This will be invalid when "0" or "1" is set.
---Setting range--0 to 26 (ms)
【#1571】
SSSdis SSS control adjustment coefficient fixed value selection
Fix the shape recognition range for SSS control.
【#1572】
Cirorp Arc command overlap
This eliminates speed fluctuations at the joint of the arc and straight line and arc and arc.
Set as a bit unit.
0: Do not overlap the arc command blocks
1: Overlap the arc command blocks
bit0 : Arc command during high-speed high-accuracy control II
bit1 : Arc command during high-speed machining mode II
bit2 : Arc command during high-accuracy control (G61.1)
bit3 : Arc command during cutting mode (G64)
The line command block and arc command block won't be overlapped during G61.2 modal
regardless of this setting.
(Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control.
【#1573】
Ret1 Return type 1
Select the axis to be moved later after tool return.
This is referred to with the movement path (transit point #1 -> interrupt point).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit.
bit0 : Transit point #1 1st axis
bit1 : Transit point #1 2nd axis
bit2 : Transit point #1 3rd axis
bit3 : Transit point #1 4th axis
bit4 : Transit point #1 5th axis
bit5 : Transit point #1 6th axis
bit6 : Transit point #1 7th axis
bit7 : Transit point #1 8th axis
---Setting range--00000000 to 11111111 (Binary)
III - 115
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1574】
Ret2 Return type 2
Select the axis to be moved later after tool return.
This is referred to with the movement path (return start point -> transit point #2).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit.
bit0 : Transit point #2 1st axis
bit1 : Transit point #2 2nd axis
bit2 : Transit point #2 3rd axis
bit3 : Transit point #2 4th axis
bit4 : Transit point #2 5th axis
bit5 : Transit point #2 6th axis
bit6 : Transit point #2 7th axis
bit7 : Transit point #2 8th axis
---Setting range--00000000 to 11111111 (Binary)
【#1590】
Animate ax direct Machine status animated display axis ± direction
<bit0>
0: 1st axis + direction is set to the right direction.
1: 1st axis + direction is set to the left direction.
<bit1>
0: 2nd axis + direction is set to the rear direction.
1: 2nd axis + direction is set to the front direction.
<bit2>
0: 3rd axis + direction is set to the top direction.
1: 3rd axis + direction is set to the bottom direction.
【#1591】
Animate ax-1 Machine status animated display axis name (1st axis)
Set the name of the 1st axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is
not specified, the current 1st axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z
【#1592】
Animate ax-2 Machine status animated display axis name (2nd axis)
Set the name of the 2nd axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is
not specified, the current 2nd axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z
【#1593】
Animate ax-3 Machine status animated display axis name (3rd axis)
Set the name of the 3rd axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is
not specified, the current 3rd axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z
【#1901(PR)】
station addr
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1902(PR)】
Din size
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1903(PR)】
Dout size
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1904(PR)】
data length
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 116
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#1905(PR)】
baud rate
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1906(PR)】
stop bit
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1907(PR)】
parity check
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1908(PR)】
even parity
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1909(PR)】
Tout (ini)
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1910(PR)】
Tout (run)
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1911(PR)】
clock select
Not used. Set to "0".
【#1925】
EtherNet Start of service
Start or stop the Ethernet communication function.
0: Stop
1: Start
【#1926(PR)】
Grobal IP address IP address
Set the main CPU's IP address.
Set the NC IP address seen from an external source.
【#1927(PR)】
Global Subnet mask Subnet mask
Set the subnet mask for the IP address.
【#1928(PR)】
Global Gateway address Gateway
Set the IP address for the gateway.
【#1929】
Port number Port No.
Set the port No. for the service function.
---Setting range--1 to 9999
(Set 2000 when not connected to the Ethernet.)
【#1930(PR)】
Host address Host address
Set the host's IP address.
【#1931(PR)】
Host number Host No.
Set the host's port No.
---Setting range--1 to 9999
【#1934(PR)】
Local IP address
Set the HMI side CPU's IP address.
【#1935(PR)】
Local Subnet mask
Set the HMI side CPU's subnet mask.
III - 117
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#11001(PR)】
APC type APC screen display type selection
Set the type of screen displayed with the pallet program registration screen.
0: Standard pallet registration screen
1: Pallet 4-page registration screen
【#11002(PR)】
Valid pallet num Number of pallets setting
Set the number of pallets validated on the pallet program registration screen.
---Setting range--2 to 12 (Interpreted as 2 when 0 is set.)
【#11003(PR)】
APLC valid APLC valid
Temporarily disable APLC.
Normally set "1".
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#11004(PR)】
PLCauto-run enable PLC automatic startup valid
Select starting condition of the built-in PLC.
0: Start PLC after NC screen startup
1: Start PLC at NC startup
(Note) When standard NC screen is not used, set "1".
【#11005(PR)】
PC IP address IP address setting
Set the IP address for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
Set the IP address for the display unit on which the automatic power OFF will be executed.
(Note) When "0.0.0.0" is input, "192.168.100.2" is automatically set.
*This parameter is used only for 700 Series.
PC subnet
Set the subnet mask for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
PC Gateway
Set the gateway for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
【#11006】
PC Port number Port No. setting
Set the port No. for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
(Note 1) When "0" is input, "55555" is automatically set.
(Note 2) When changing the parameter, set the same value in "PD_Control_Port" in the PC side
environment setting file.
---Setting range--0 to 65535
【#11007】
PC Timeout Communication timeout time setting
Set the NC side communication timeout time.
(Note 1) When "0" is input, "30" is automatically set.
(Note 2) When the value greater than "300" is set, a setting error occurs.
(Note 3) When changing the parameter, set the same value in "PD_Time_out" in the PC side
environment setting file.
---Setting range--0 to 300 (s)
【#11009(PR)】
M2 label O M2 label O
Select the program number label when using the M2 format.
0: Label L
1: Label O
III - 118
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#11010(PR)】
Software keyboard
Software keyboard
Select with touch panel whether to use software keyboard.
0: Do not use
1: Use
2: Use (Note)
(Note) Software keyboard automatically appears on a specific screen. (for M70 Series only).
【#11011】
Handy TERM. PW. Handy terminal password
Set the password used for the handy terminal customized downloading.
Blank (when "0" is set) and "0000" are regarded as no password.
Not the password of a new customizing file but the password of the customizing file downloaded to
the last handy terminal is set.
Set blank or "0000" when initially downloading.
---Setting range--0000 to 9999
【#11012(PR)】
16 axes for 1ch Connecting 16 axes for 1ch
Select the maximum number of axes (sum of the NC axis, spindle, and PLC axis) connected to the
drive unit interface (channel 1) when not using the extension unit (FCU7-EX891+HN552)
0: Up to 8 axes can be connected to channel 1.
1: Up to 16 axes can be connected to channel 1.
Note that "OMR-DD function" cannot be used. This parameter is disabled when the extension unit is
connected. It is possible to connect only up to eight axes or less per channel.
【#11013】
3D_MChk Invalidate 3D machine interference check
Select whether to enable the 3D machine interference check function.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#11014】
Chk_len1 1st-step interference check distance
Set the 1st-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
【#11015】
Chk_len2 2nd-step interference check distance
Set the 2nd-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
【#11016】
Expand_Rate Shape expansion rate
Set the model shape expansion rate to be used for 3D machine interference check. This parameter
is used for expanding a model shape to be used for 3D machine interference check. The
interference check is performed using a shape expanded by the amount of [Check length (mm) x
Shape expansion rate (%)].
---Setting range--0 to 300(%)
【#11017】
T-ofs set at run Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation valid
Select whether to enable the tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation and
operation pause.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#11018】
M password hold
Select whether to enable the "Machine user" password holding.
When this is set to "1", the "Machine user" password will be held.
0: Enable
1: Disable
III - 119
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#11019】
2-system display 2-part system simultaneous display
Select whether to validate 2-part system simultaneous display on operation screen.
0: Display one part system on operation screen
1: Display two part systems simultaneously on operation screen
(Note 1) Unless you set "1" in two or more of "#1001 SYS_ON [1] to [4]", two-part system
simultaneous display will fail regardless of this parameter.
【#11021】
PLC mesg disp type
Format of PLC alarm and operator message
Select the format of PLC alarms and operator messages to be displayed on the bottom right of the
screen.
0: Display up to the first 40 characters.
1: If text is longer than 40 characters, divide it into two and display separately. (Classification No.
is displayed together)
【#11028】
Tolerance Arc Cent Tolerable correction value of arc center error
Set the tolerable correction value for the calculated coordinate value error of R-specified circular
center.
When a difference between "a line between the start and end points" and "commanded radius x 2"
is the tolerance or smaller, the error is corrected so that the middle of a line between the start and
end points will be the arc center.
When [Setting value < 0] : 0 (Not correct)
When [Setting value = 0] : 2 x minimum setting increment
When [Setting value > 0] : Setting value
---Setting range---1 to 0.100(mm)
【#11029】
Arc to G1 no Cent Change command from arc to linear when no arc center designation
Select the operation when arc center or radius designation is omitted from arc command.
0: Program error
1: Change into linear command
【#12001】 ManualB RectanA xH Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersecting part system
axis name (horizontal)
Set the part system axis name ("#1013 axname") for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis
direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant speed will be applied without using
constant surface speed control.
---Setting range--Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#12002】 ManualB RectanA xV Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersecting part system
axis name (vertical)
Set the part system axis name ("#1013 axname") for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis
direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant speed will be applied without using
constant surface speed control.
---Setting range--Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#12003】 ManualB RotCent erH Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center machine
position (horizontal)
Set the machine coordinate position (horizontal axis) at the center of the rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 120
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#12004】 ManualB RotCent erV Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center machine
position (vertical)
Set the machine coordinate position (vertical axis) at the center of the rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#12005(PR)】
Mfig Number of M
Set the number of M that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range--1 to 4
【#12006(PR)】
Mbin M binary
Data type
Output data
0
BCD
1
Unsigned binary
-1
Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value "1" is output for "-1".
For singed binary:
"-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
---Setting range--Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12007(PR)】
Sfig Number of S
Set the number of spindles.
(Note 1) The setting range differs according to the model.
(Note 2) Sfig is set in the range of 1 to 4. However, the number of outputs by Sfig cannot be
controlled. Thus, only one S command is output regardless of the Sfig setting value.
---Setting range--1 to 6
【#12008(PR)】
Sbin
S binary
Data type
Output data
0
BCD
1
Unsigned binary
-1
Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value "1" is output for "-1".
For singed binary:
"-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
(Note 1) Sbin can be set with "-1", "0" and "1", but the S command cannot be BCD output.
If BCD (0) is selected for Sbin, it will be handled as a singed binary (-1).
---Setting range--Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12009(PR)】
Tfig Number of T
Set the number of T that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range--1 to 4
III - 121
4. Base Specifications Parameters
【#12010(PR)】
Tbin T binary
Data type
Output data
0
BCD
1
Unsigned binary
-1
Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value "1" is output for "-1".
For singed binary:
"-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
---Setting range--Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12011(PR)】
Bfig Number of B
Set the number of T that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range--1 to 4
【#12012(PR)】
Bbin
B binary
Data type
Output data
0
BCD
1
Unsigned binary
-1
Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value "1" is output for "-1".
For singed binary:
"-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
---Setting range--Data type
(-1,0,1)
III - 122
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#2001】
rapid Rapid traverse rate
Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis.
(Note) The maximum value to be set depends on the machine specifications.
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2002】
clamp Cutting feedrate for clamp function
Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this value, the clamp will be applied at this feedrate.
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
III - 123
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
【#2003(PR)】
smgst
Acceleration and deceleration modes
Set acceleration and deceleration control modes.
bit
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OT3 OT2 OT1 C3
C1
L
R3
R1 LR
(Note) Set "0" in null bits (excluding bit2 and bit6 when the soft acceleration/deceleration is
selected.)
<Combination of acceleration/deceleration patterns and bit patterns>
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Step
Acceleration
Linear acceleration
/deceleration
/deceleration
types
Primary delay
Exponential acceleration
and linear deceleration
Soft acceleration
/deceleration
R3(bit3)
C3(bit7)
0
0
-(bit2)
-(bit6)
0
0
R1(bit1)
C1(bit5)
0
0
LR(bit0)
LC(bit4)
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
(Note) R1 > R3 when both R1 and R3 contain 1.
<Stroke end stop types>
Type
Linear deceleration
Position loop step stop
Speed loop step stop
Position loop step stop
OT2
0
1
0
1
OT3
0
0
1
1
Stroke end signal
Speed
Time
G0t1
2 G 0 t 1 (OT1=1,OT2=OT3=0)
G 0 t 1 (OT1=OT2=OT3=0)
(Note) OT1 is valid under the following conditions (valid for dog type zero point return):
- Stop type: Linear deceleration
- Acceleration/Deceleration mode: Exponential acceleration and Linear deceleration
---Setting range--0/1
【#2004】
G0tL G0 time constant (linear)
Set a linear control time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear
acceleration/deceleration) or F (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst
Acceleration and deceleration modes".
Speed
Time
G0tL
G0tL
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
III - 124
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
【#2005】
G0t1 G0 time constant(primary delay) / Second-step time constant for soft
acceleration/deceleration
Set a primary-delay time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3
(exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and
deceleration modes".
When the soft acceleration/deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
<Rapid traverse feed with primary delay>
Speed
Time
G0t1
G0t1
<Rapid traverse feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration>
Speed
Time
G0t1
2×G0t1
---Soft acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Time
G0t1
G0t1
G0t1
G0tL
G0t1
G0tL
---Setting range--1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2006】
G0t2
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2007】
G1tL G1 time constant (linear)
Set a linear control time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration/deceleration) or F
(soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration or deceleration modes".
Speed
Time
G1tL
G1tL
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
III - 125
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
【#2008】
G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)/Second-step time constant for soft
acceleration/deceleration
Set the primary delay time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed
with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst
acceleration/deceleration modes".
When the soft acceleration or deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
<Cutting feed with primary delay>
Speed
Time
G1t1
G1t1
<Cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration>
Speed
Time
G1t1
2×G1t1
---Soft acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Time
G1t1
G1t1
G1tL
G1t1
G1t1
G1tL
---Setting range--1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2009】
G1t2
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2010】
fwd_g Feed forward gain
Set a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical control error will be. However, if a machine
vibration occurs, set the smaller value.
---Setting range--0 to 200 (%)
【#2011】
G0back G0 backlash
Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement
command in rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode.
---Setting range---9999999 to 9999999
III - 126
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
【#2012】
G1back G1 backlash
Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement
command in cutting mode.
---Setting range---9999999 to 9999999
【#2013】
OT - Soft limit I –
Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Set the coordinate in the negative direction for the movable area of stored stroke limit 1. The
coordinate in the positive direction is set in "#2014 OT+".
To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and "#8205 OT+".
When the same value (other than "0") is set in this parameter and "#2014 OT+", this function will be
disabled.
Basic machine coordinate
OT- (X)
OT+ (Z)
OT+ (X)
OT- (Z)
Movable area
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2014】
OT + Soft limit I +
Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Set the coordinate in the positive direction for the movable area of stored stroke limit 1. The
coordinate in the negative direction is set in "#2013 OT-".
To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and"#8205 OT+".
When the same value (other than "0") is set in this parameter and "#2013 OT-", this function will be
disabled.
Basic machine coordinate
OT- (X)
OT+ (Z)
OT+ (X)
OT- (Z)
Movable area
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2015】
t1m1- Negative direction sensor of tool setter
Set a sensor position in the negative direction when using the tool setter.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2016】
t1m1+ Positive direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length
Set the sensor position in the positive direction when using the tool setter.
When the TLM is used, set the distance from a tool change point (reference position) to the
measurement basic point (surface) in order to measure the tool length.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
III - 127
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
【#2017】
tap_g Axis servo gain
Set the position loop gain for special operations (synchronized tapping, interpolation with spindle C
axis, etc.).
Set the value in 0.25 increments.
The standard setting value is "10".
---Setting range--0.25 to 200.00 (rad/s)
【#2018(PR)】
no_srv Operation with no servo control
Select when performing test operation without connecting the drive unit and motor.
0: Normal operation
1: Test operation
When "1" is set, the operation will be possible even if drive units and motor are not connected,
because the drive system alarm will be ignored.
This parameter is used for test operation during start up: Do not use during normal operation.
If "1" is set during normal operation‚ errors will not be detected even if they occur.
【#2019】
revnum Return steps
Set the steps required for reference position return for each axis.
0: Not execute reference position return.
1 to max. number of NC axes: Steps required for reference position return
---Setting range--0 to max. number of NC axes
【#2020】
o_chkp Spindle orientation completion check during second reference position return
Set the distance from the second reference position to the position for checking that the spindle
orientation has completed during second reference position return.
When the set value is "0", the above check will be omitted.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2021】
out_f Maximum speed outside soft limit range
Set the maximum speed outside the soft limit range.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2022】
G30SLX Validate soft limit (automatic and manual)
Select whether to disable a soft limit check during the second to the fourth reference position return
in both automatic and manual operation modes.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#2023】
ozfmin Set up ATC speed lower limit
Set the minimum speed outside the soft limit range during the second to the fourth reference
position return.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2024】
synerr
Allowable error
Set the maximum synchronization error, allowable at the synchronization error check, for the master
axis.
When "0" is set, the error check will not be carried out.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 128
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#2025】
G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate
Set a rapid traverse rate for the dog type reference position return command.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection.
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2026】
G28crp G28 approach speed
Set the approach speed to the reference position.
(Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10°/min) only when using the Z-phase type encoder (#1226
aux10/bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis reference position return type. The same unit is used for both
the micrometric and sub-micrometric specifications.
---Setting range--1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#2027】
G28sft Reference position shift distance
Set the distance from the electrical zero-point detection position to the reference position.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection.
(Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold and E: 1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting unit ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2028】
grmask Grip mask amount
Set the distance where the grid point will be ignored when near-point dog OFF signals are close to
that grid point during reference position return.
Near-point dog
Grid mask setup distance
The grid mask is valid for one grid.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2029】
grspc Grid interval
Set a detector grid interval.
Generally, set the value equal to the ball screw pitch. However, if the detector grid interval is not
equal to the screw pitch when measured with a linear scale, set the detector grid interval.
To reduce the grid interval, use its divisors.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection.
---Setting range--0.000 to 999.999 (mm)
III - 129
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
【#2030(PR)】
dir (-)
Reference position direction (-)
Select which side of the near-point dog the reference position is established.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
Directions in which reference position is established as viewed from the near-point dog
+ direction
- direction
Grid
Reference position
Near-point dog
Reference position
Grid
Near-point dog
【#2031】
noref Axis without reference position
Select whether the reference position is provided for the axis.
0: Reference position is provided. (Normal controlled axis)
1: No reference position is provided.
When "1" is set, reference position return is not required before automatic operation starts.
【#2032】
nochk Whether reference position return is completed not checked
Select whether to check the reference position return completion.
0: Check the reference position return completion.
1: Not check the reference position return completion.
When "1" is set, the absolute and incremental commands can be executed even if dog type (or Z
phase pulse system) reference position return is not completed.
Note that this setting is available for a rotary axis only.
【#2033】
zp_no Z phase pulse system reference position return spindle encoder No.
Set the spindle encoder No. to be used when the reference position return is performed with the Z
phase pulse of the spindle encoder.
0: Dog type
1 to 6: Spindle No.
*The setting range differs according to the model.
---Setting range--0 to 6
【#2034】
rfpofs Distance-coded reference position detection offset
Set the offset value from the position for the initial reference position setting to the machine's actual
basic point in reference position return in the distance-coded reference position detection.
Input the value of the machine value counter that is displayed immediately after the reference
position is established.
When the power is turned ON and this parameter is set to "0", the manual reference position return
is regarded as initial reference position setting.
If this parameter is set to "0", automatic operation won't be available.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 130
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
【#2035】
srchmax Distance-coded reference position detection scan distance
Set the maximum distance for scanning the reference marks when the reference position is not
established in the distance-coded reference position detection.
For the scan distance, set the distance that fully covers the number of reference marks as you wish
to detect.
(Example) When adding about 10% of additional coverage:
Scan distance = Base reference mark interval [mm] * 2 * 1.1
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2036】
slv_adjust Reference position adjustment value
Set the distance from the first grid point after leaving the near point dog on the slave axis to the
position where the reference position is actually established in dog-type reference position return in
synchronous control. (Reference position shift amount is not included.)
The adjustment value will be automatically set in the slave axis's parameter according to the
reference position adjustment complete signal from PLC.
Fine adjustment is also available from the parameter screen.
In the distance-coded reference position detection, the reference position adjustment value will be
invalid.
Master axis start position
G28sft
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Master axis
Near-point dog
Slave axis
Slave axis start position
Grid
(6)
Reference position adjustment amount G28sft
(7)
Reference position
adjustment
completion signal
ON
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
(Note 1) This parameter is enabled when the synchronization at zero point initialization ("#1493
ref_syn" = "1" of the master axis) is applied.
(Note 2) This parameter can be set when one of the following settings is applied.
● Relative position detection ("#2049 type" = "0")
● Dog-type absolute position detection ("#2049 type" = "3")
● Simple absolute position ("#2049 type" = "9")
(Note 3) Set "0" when using the speed/current command synchronization control.
(Note 4) A setting unit of this parameter is [mm]. It is not influenced by the content of the following
parameters setting.
● "#1003 iunit"
● "#1004 ctrl_unit"
● "#1005 plcunit"
● "#1040 M_inch"
● "#1041 I_inch"
● "#1240 set12/bit2" (Zero point shift amount magnification)
(Note 5) The number of the significant digits after decimal point follows "#1004 ctrl_unit"
(Note 6) A change of this parameter requires reference position return. When the automatic
operation starts without reference position return, an alarm will occur.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999999 (mm)
III - 131
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
【#2037】
G53ofs Reference position #1
Set the position of the first reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Basic machine coordinate
M
Reference position #1
(#2037 G53ofs)
Reference position #2
(#2038 #2_rfp)
Reference position #3
(#2039 #3_rfp)
Reference position #4
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range--±999999.999 (mm)
【#2038】
#2_rfp Reference position #2
Set the position of the second reference position from the zero point of the basic machine
coordinate.
Basic machine coordinate
M
Reference position #1
(#2037 G53ofs)
Reference position #2
(#2038 #2_rfp)
Reference position #3
(#2039 #3_rfp)
Reference position #4
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range--±999999.999 (mm)
III - 132
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters
【#2039】
#3_rfp Reference position #3
Set the position of the third reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Basic machine coordinate
M
Reference position #1
(#2037 G53ofs)
Reference position #2
(#2038 #2_rfp)
Reference position #3
(#2039 #3_rfp)
Reference position #4
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range--±999999.999 (mm)
【#2040】
#4_rfp Reference position #4
Set the position of the fourth reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Basic machine coordinate
M
Reference position #1
(#2037 G53ofs)
Reference position #2
(#2038 #2_rfp)
Reference position #3
(#2039 #3_rfp)
Reference position #4
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range--±999999.999 (mm)
III - 133
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#2049(PR)】
type
Absolute position detection method
Select the absolute position zero point alignment method.
0: Not absolute position detection
1: Stopper method (push against mechanical stopper)
2: Marked point alignment method (align to alignment point)
3: Dog-type (align with dog and near point detection switch)
4: Marked point alignment method II (Align to alignment mark. Grid return won't be performed after
marked point alignment)
9: Simple absolute position (Not absolute position detection‚ but the position when the power is
turned off is registered.)
【#2050】
absdir Basic point of Z direction
Select the direction of the grid point immediately before the machine basic position (basic point of
detector) in the marked point alignment.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
【#2051】
check Check
Set the tolerable range of travel distance (deviation distance) while the power is turned OFF.
If the difference of the positions when the power is turned OFF and when turned ON again is larger
than this value‚ an alarm will be output.
Set "0" to omit the check.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2054】
clpush Current limit (%)
Set the current limit value during the stopper operation in the dogless-type absolute position
detection.
The setting value is the ratio of the current limit value to the rated current value.
---Setting range--0 to 100 (%)
【#2055】
pushf Push speed
Set the feedrate for the automatic initial setting during stopper method.
---Setting range--1 to 999 (mm/min)
【#2056】
aproch Approach
Set the approach distance of the stopper when deciding the absolute position basic point with the
stopper method.
After using stopper once‚ the tool returns with this distance‚ and then use stopper again.
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
III - 134
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters
【#2057】
nrefp Near zero point +
Set the positive direction width where the near reference position signal is output.
When set to "0"‚ the width will be equivalent to the grid width setting.
(Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applied)
【#2058】
nrefn Near zero point Set the negative direction width where the near reference position signal is output.
When set to "0"‚ the width will be equivalent to the grid width setting.
(Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
---Setting range--0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applied)
【#2059】
zerbas Select zero point parameter and basic point
Select which is to be the zero point coordinate position during absolute position initial setting.
0: Position where the axis was stopped.
1: Grid point just before stopper.
III - 135
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#2061】
OT_1B- Soft limit IBSet the coordinate of the lower limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
If the same value (non-zero) with the same sign as that of "#2062 OT_IB+" is set, the stored stroke
limit IB function will be disabled.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2062】
OT_1B+ Soft limit IB+
Set the coordinate of the upper limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2063】
OT_1B type
Soft limit IB type
Select the type that applies the settings of "#2062 OT_IB+" and "#2061 OT_IB-" in stored stroke
limit I.
0: Soft limit IB
1: The settings are invalid
2: Soft limit IC
3: Soft limit is checked for the inclined axis control axis with the program coordinate system.
(Note) This is valid only for inclined axis' base axis and inclined axis.
【#2068】
G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain
Set a feed forward gain for G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
The larger the setting value, the shorter the positioning time during in-position checking.
If a machine vibration occurs, set the smaller value.
---Setting range--0 to 200 (%)
【#2069】
Rcoeff Axis arc radius error correction coefficient
Set the percentage to increase or decrease the arc radius error correction amount for each axis.
---Setting range---100.0 to +100.0 (%)
【#2070(PR)】
div_RT
Rotational axis division count
Set the number of divisions of one turn of the rotary axis under control.
(Example) When "36" is set, one turn is supposed to be 36.000.
(Note 1) When "0" is set, the normal rotary axis (360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed.
(Note 2) If this parameter is changed when the absolute position detection specification is used,
absolute position data will be lost. Initialization must be performed again.
---Setting range--0 to 999
III - 136
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2071】
s_axis Inclined axis selection
For L system only
Select whether the axis is to be under the inclined-axis control or to be the base axis corresponding
to the inclined axis.
0: Not to be under the inclined-axis control
1: Inclined axis
2: Base axis corresponding to inclined axis
(Note) Each of "1" and "2" values must be set for only one axis. If either value is set for two or more
axes, inclined-axis control does not work.
【#2072】
rslimt Restart limit
Set the most minus (-) side position where restart search is possible.
If the machine is positioned on the more minus (-) side than the set value in T-command restart
mode, restart search in type 3 will be disabled.
---Setting range--±9999.999 (mm)
【#2073】
zrn_dog Origin dog Random assignment device
Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the
fixed device.
(Note 1) This parameter is valid when "1" is set in "#1226 aux10/bit5".
(Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set the existing device number. If the existing device
number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed
for an axis to which the "near-point dog ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range--0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#2074】
H/W_OT+
H/W OT+ Random assignment device
Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the OT (+) g signal to a position other than the
fixed device.
(Note 1) This parameter is valid when "1" is set in "#1226 aux10/bit5".
(Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set the existing device number. If the existing device
number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed
for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range--0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#2075】
H/W_OT- H/W OT- Random assignment device
Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the OT (-) signal to a position other than the
fixed device.
(Note 1) This parameter is valid when "1" is set in "#1226 aux10/bit5".
(Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set the existing device number. If the existing device
number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be performed
for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range--0000 to 02FF (HEX)
III - 137
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2076】
index_x Index table indexing axis
Select whether the axis is a normal axis or an index table indexing axis.
0: Normal axis
1: Index table indexing axis
(Note) This parameter is valid only for the NC axis. The parameter is invalid if set for the PLC axis.
【#2077】
G0inps G0 in-position width
Set the in-position width for G0.
Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied.
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2078】
G1inps G1 in-position width
Set the in-position width for G1.
Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied.
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2079(PR)】
chcomp Chopping compensation coefficient
Set the coefficient to be applied to the compensation amount for the insufficient amount caused by
servo delay during chopping.
---Setting range--0 to 10 (standard value: 8)
【#2080】
chwid Bottom dead center position width
Set the tolerance between the commanded stroke and actual stroke.
Compensation will be applied during chopping so that the result of [command width - maximum
stroke of top or bottom dead point/ 2] will be within this tolerance.
---Setting range--0 to 10.000 (mm)
【#2081】
chclsp Maximum chopping speed
Set the clamp speed in chopping operation.
When "0" is set‚ the clamp speed will be determined by "#2002 clamp".
---Setting range--0 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#2082】
a_rstax Restart position return order
Set the No. for each axis in order from the 1st automatically returning axis to the restart position.
When "0" is set, the axis will not return.
Note that when "0" is set for all axes, all of the axes will return simultaneously.
---Setting range--0 to 8
III - 138
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2084】
G60_ax Unidirectional positioning operation selection
Select how to operate the unidirectional positioning when the positioning command (G00) is issued.
0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to the command and modal.
1: Carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of the command and modal.
Set "1" for the axis to carry out the unidirectional positioning at every positioning command,
regardless of whether the unidirectional positioning command and modal are issued.
<Related parameters>
"#8209 G60 SHIFT" and "#2076 index_x"
【#2087】
syncnt
Synchronization/super-imposition control setting for each axis
Set the polarity of synchronous axis with respect to basic axis to the bit corresponding to each axis.
0: Polarity with respect to basic axis is positive
1: Polarity with respect to basic axis is negative
---Setting range--0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#2088】
bsax_sy Reference axis for synchronous control
Set the basic axis for synchronous control with the 2nd axis name (axname2).
A numerical character cannot be set as the 1st character.
---Setting range--Axis name
【#2089】
bsax_pl Reference axis for superimposition control
Set the basic axis for superimposition control with the 2nd axis name (axname2).
A numerical character cannot be set as the 1st character.
---Setting range--Axis name
【#2090】
plrapid Rapid traverse rate for super-imposition control
Set the rapid traverse rate for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate".)
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2091】
plclamp Cutting feed clamp speed for super-imposition control
Set the cutting feed clamp speed for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2002 clamp Cutting feed clamp speed".)
---Setting range--1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2092】
plG0tL G0 time constant for superimposition control (linear)
Set the G0 time constant (linear) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)".)
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2093】
plG0t1 G0 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)
Set the G0 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2005 G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay".)
---Setting range--1 to 5000 (ms)
III - 139
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2094】
plG1tL G1 time constant for superimposition control (linear)
Set the G1 time constant (linear) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)".)
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2095】
plG1t1 G1 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)
Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)".)
---Setting range--1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2096】
crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed
Set the minimum clamp speed for corner deceleration in the high-accuracy control mode. Normally
set "0".
(Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2097】
tlml2- Sub side tool setter - direction sensor
Set the sensor position (on sub side) in the (-) direction when using the tool setter on the sub spindle
side.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2098】
tlml2+ Sub side tool setter + direction sensor
Set the sensor position (on sub side) in (+) direction when using the tool setter on the sub spindle
side.
---Setting range--±99999.999 (mm)
【#2102】
skip_tL Skip time constant linear
Set a linear control time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration)
or "F" (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration
modes".
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2103】
skip_t1 Skip time constant primary delay / Second-step time constant for soft
acceleration/deceleration
Set a primary-delay time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with primary delay) or C3 (exponential
acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration
modes".
When the soft acceleration/deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
---Setting range--1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2106】
Index unit Indexing unit
Set the indexing unit to which the rotary axis can be positioned.
---Setting range--0 to 360 (°)
III - 140
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2109】
Rapid (H-precision) Rapid traverse rate for high-accuracy control mode
Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. "#2001 rapid" will be
used when "0" is set.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2110】
Clamp (H-precision) Cutting feed clamp speed for high-accuracy control mode
Set the cutting feed maximum speed for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. "#2002
clamp" will be used when "0" is set.
---Setting range--0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2111】
Blf valid
Quadrant protrusion compensation valid
Set whether to enable the quadrant protrusion compensation.
0: Disable
1: Enable
If either of "#2112 Blf motor inertia", "#2115 Blf motor stl trq" or "#2113 Blf visc friction" is set to "0",
quadrant protrusion compensation will not work even if this parameter is set to "1".
【#2112】
Blf motor inertia Motor inertia
Set the motor inertia for quadrant protrusion compensation.
Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor.
---Setting range--1 to 32000 (10-6kgm2)
【#2113】
Blf visc friction Viscous friction
Set the viscous friction for quadrant protrusion compensation.
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually
adjust the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a recess will form on the inner side of the circle, and if large, a
protrusion will form on the outer side of the circle. When the value is appropriate, a spike-shaped
quadrant protrusion will form based on normal step-shaped backlash.
---Setting range--1 to 32767 (1/16 Nm/(rad/s))
【#2114】
Blf fwdg Compensation FF gain
Set the feed forward gain for quadrant protrusion compensation.
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually
adjust the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a large quadrant protrusion will form, and if large, a recess will form
on the inner side of the circle.
---Setting range--0 to 1000 (%)
【#2115】
Blf motor stl trq Motor stall torque
Set the motor rated current for quadrant protrusion compensation.
Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor.
---Setting range--1 to 16000 (1/256 Nm)
III - 141
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2118(PR) 】
SscDrSel Speed monitor Door selection
Select which door group of the speed monitoring the spindle belongs to.
0000: Door 1 group.
0001: Door 1 group.
0002: Door 2 group.
0003: Door 1 and 2 group.
The speed monitoring will not be executed when "#2313 SV113 SSF8/BitF" is OFF regardless of
this parameter.
The selected door group must be set when setting the synchronous control.
The spindle/C axis control enables the door selection in "#3071 SscDrSelSp" for the corresponding
spindle.
【#2121】
vbacklash valid
Variable backlash valid/continuous
Select whether the variable backlash is to be invalid/valid/continuous.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Continuous
("#2011 G0back" and "#2012 G1back" will not work when valid or continuous status is selected.)
【#2122】
G0vback+
Variable G0 backlash +
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse.
(+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
【#2123】
G0vback=
Variable G0 backlash =
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse.
(+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
【#2124】
G0vback-
Variable G0 backlash -
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse.
(+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
【#2125】
G1vback+
Variable G1 backlash +
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed.
(+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999(Interpolation unit)
【#2126】
G1vback=
Variable G1 backlash =
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed.
(+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
III - 142
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2127】
G1vback-
Variable G1 backlash -
Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed.
(+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
【#2128】
G1vback feed1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover speed 1
Set the speed range during cutting feed.
(The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.)
Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider
whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range--0 to 480000 (mm/min)
【#2129】
G1vback feed2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover speed 2
Set the range of the speed during cutting feed.
(The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.)
Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider
whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range--0 to 480000 (mm/min)
【#2130】
G1vback dist1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover distance 1
Set the range of the distance during cutting feed.
(The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.)
Note that the distance range is identified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether
the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range--0 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2131】
G1vback dist2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover distance 2
Set the range of the distance during cutting feed.
(The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.)
Note that the distance range is identified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether
the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range--0 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2132】
vback pos1 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point position 1
Set the range of the center of the end point position.
(The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.)
The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set
value should be larger or smaller than other values.
(Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as
the position - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point.
(Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and
2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied:
If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the compensation amount
changeover speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large.
---Setting range---999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
III - 143
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2133】
vback pos2 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point position 2
Set the range of the center of the end point position.
(The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.)
The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set
value should be larger or smaller than other values.
(Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as
the position - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point.
(Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and
2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied:
If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the compensation amount
changeover speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large.
---Setting range---999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2134】
vback arc K Variable backlash arc compensation coefficient
Set the arc compensation coefficient.
---Setting range--0 to 300 (%)
【#2135】
vback feed refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (speed)
Select the speed range to be used as the reference position.
0: Low speed
1: Medium speed
2: High speed
【#2136】
vback pos refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (end point position)
Select the end point range to be used as the reference position.
0: Position + range
1: Position center range
2: Position - range
【#2137】
vback dir refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (entry direction)
Select the entry direction to be used as the reference position.
0: Entry direction +
1: Entry direction -
【#2138】
vback pos center Continuous variable backlash position center point
Set the position center point. (This is used only when continuous variable backlash is set with
"#2121 vbacklash valid".) Set a value between "#2132 vback pos1" and "#2133 vbackpos2" for the
position center point.
(Note 1) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and
2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be applied:
If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the compensation amount
changeover speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be large.
---Setting range---999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2139】
omrff_off
OMR-FF invalid
Select whether to enable or temporarily disable the OMR-FF control when OMR-FF is valid.
0: Enable
1: Temporarily disable
When "1" is selected while OMR-FF is valid, OMR-FF can be temporarily disabled and conventional
feed forward control can be applied instead.
III - 144
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2140(PR)】
Ssc Svof Filter Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF
Set the error detection time of command speed monitoring and feedback speed monitoring during
servo OFF.
An alarm will occur if the time, for which the speed has been exceeding the safe speed or safe
rotation speed, exceeds the error detection time set in this parameter.
If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms).
---Setting range--0 to 9999 (ms)
【#2141】
chtL Chopping first-step time constant for soft acceleration and deceleration
Set the first-step time constant for the chopping axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied.
Note that, however, there may be cases where actual time constant is shorter than the set time
constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated according to the feedrate so that the
acceleration rate during acceleration/deceleration (clamp speed/chopping time constant) will be
constant.
When "0" is set, "#2007 G1tL" will be valid.
Speed [mm/min]
chclsp
cht1
Time [ms]
chtL
---Setting range--0 to 4000 (ms)
【#2142】
cht1 Chopping second-step time constant for soft acceleration and deceleration
Set the second-step time constant for the chopping axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is
applied.
Note that, however, there may be cases where actual time constant is shorter than the set time
constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated so that the ratio between first-step
and second-step time constant will be constant.
When "0" is set, "#2008 G1t1" will be valid.
---Setting range--0 to 4000 (ms)
【#2146】 Blf_L1 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation 1
Set the distance for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent increasing-type
backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
When "#2146 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation
function will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 145
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2147】 Blf_L2 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation 2
Set the distance for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent increasing-type
backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
When "#2146 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation
function will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2148】
Blf_E1 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation 1
Set the compensation amount for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent
increasing-type backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
When "#2146 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation
function will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit)
【#2149】
Blf_E2 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation 2
Set the compensation amount for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent
increasing-type backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
When "#2146 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation
function will be disabled.
---Setting range--0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit)
【#2150】
Rot_len Farthest distance from rotary axis center
Set the farthest distance of the rotating part from the rotation center. When "0" is set, this distance
will conform to the rotary axis' specification speed.
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
III - 146
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2
【#2151】
rated_spd Rated speed
Set the maximum speed which can be driven with the motor's maximum torque.
(Note 1) This parameter's setting value must be smaller than "#2001 rapid Rapid traverse". If bigger,
constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
(Note 2) If rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, and also if
this parameter is set to "0", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
Speed
Torque
rapid
rated_spd
Speed
rated_spd
G0t_rated
Time
rapid
---Setting range--0 to 1000000(mm/min)
【#2152】
acc_rate Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate
Set the rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate in rapid traverse.
(Note) If this parameter is set to "0" or "100", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be
applied.
Acceleration
amax
amin
acc_rate =
amax
x 100
amin
Speed
rated_spd
rapid
---Setting range--0 to 100(%)
【#2153】
G0t_rated G0 time constant up to rated speed (multi-step acceleration/deceleration)
Set the acceleration rate up to the rated speed of rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step
acceleration/deceleration.
*If this parameter is set to "0", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
---Setting range--0 to 4000(ms)
(G0t_rapid) G0 time constant up to rapid traverse speed (multi-step acceleration/deceleration)
Set the acceleration time until the rapid traverse speed of rapid traverse constant inclination
multi-step acceleration/deceleration is applied.
(Note) Set the acceleration time when a pertinent axis is operated independently.
【#2155】
hob_fwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing machining
Set the feed forward gain when controlling as workpiece axis of tool spindle synchronization II
(hobbing).
---Setting range--0 to 200 (%)
III - 147
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is
turned ON again, the parameter is validated.
! CAUTION
!
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
【#2201(PR)】
SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio
Set the gear ratio in the motor side when there is the gear between the servomotor’s shaft and
machine (ball screw, etc.).
For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and an initial
parameter error (servo alarm 37) may occur.
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#2202(PR)】
SV002 PC2 Machine side gear ratio
Set the gear ratio in the motor side when there is the gear between the servomotor’s shaft and
machine (ball screw, etc.).
For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and an initial
parameter error (servo alarm 37) may occur.
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#2203】
SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1
Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33".
The higher the setting value is, the more accurately the command can be followed, and the shorter
the settling time in positioning gets, however, note that a bigger shock will be applied to the machine
during acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
---Setting range--1 - 200 (rad/s)
【#2204】
SV004 PGN2 Position loop gain 2
When using the SHG control, set this parameter with SV003 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC).
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (rad/s)
【#2205】
SV005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1
Set the speed loop gain.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be; however, vibration tends to
occur.
When vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 - 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 - 80% of the value at which the vibration stops.
---Setting range--1 - 9999
III - 148
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2206】
SV006 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2
Set the speed loop gain at the motor limitation speed with "SV029 (VCS) Speed at the change of
speed loop gain".
Use this to suppress noise at high speed during rapid traverse, etc. Then, the speed loop gain
decreases at faster speed than the setting value of "SV029 (VCS) Speed at the change of speed
loop gain".
When not using, set to "0".
Gain
VGN1
VGN2
VCS
VLMT
Speed
---Setting range---1000 - 9999
【#2207】
SV007 VIL
Speed loop delay compensation
Set this parameter when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, or overshooting occurs in
positioning.
Select the method of the speed loop delay compensation with the parameter "#2207
SV027(SSF1)/Bit1,0(vcnt)".
When setting this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset "SV032 (TOF)".
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#2208】
SV008 VIA
Speed loop lead compensation
Set the gain of the speed loop integral control.
Standard setting: 1364
Standard setting in the SHG control: 1900
Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing this by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when
the position droop does not stabilize (10 - 20Hz).
---Setting range--1 - 9999
【#2209】
SV009 IQA Current loop q axis lead compensation
Set the fixed value of each motor.
Set the standard value for each motor described in the standard parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#2210】
SV010 IDA Current loop d axis lead compensation
Set the fixed value of each motor.
Set the standard value for each motor described in the standard parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#2211】
SV011 IQG Current loop q axis gain
Set the fixed value of each motor.
Set the standard value for each motor described in the standard parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
III - 149
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2212】
SV012 IDG Current loop d axis gain
Set the fixed value of each motor.
Set the standard value for each motor described in the standard parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
【#2213】
SV013 ILMT Current limit value
Set the current (torque) limit value in a normal operation.
This is a limit value in both forward run and reverse run directions.
When the standard setting value "800" is set, the maximum torque will be determined by the
specification of the motor.
Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall torque.
---Setting range--0 - 999
【#2214】
SV014 ILMTsp Current limit value in special control
Set the current (torque) limit value in a special operation (absolute position initial setting, stopper
control, etc).
This is a limit value in both forward run and reverse run directions.
Set to "800" when not using.
Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall torque.
---Setting range--0 - 999
【#2215】
SV015 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain
When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, set this parameter to the axis that is
delaying. The standard setting value is "0". The standard setting in the SHG control is "100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 - 100 at a time.
---Setting range--0 - 999 (%)
【#2216】
SV016 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1
Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion,
backlash, etc.) at quadrant change is too large.
This compensates the torque at quadrant change (when an axis feed direction is reversed) by the
proportion (%) to the stall torque.
Select whether to enable the lost motion compensation and the compensation method with the
parameter "#2227 SV027 (SSF1)/ Bit9, 8".
---Setting range---1 - 200
Note that the range will be "-1 - 20000" when SV082/bit2 is "1".
III - 150
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2217(PR)】
SV017 SPEC1 Servo specification selection 1
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
UGSJ
URO
Bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
dfbx
Dual feedback control
0: Stop 1: Start
Bit-2
seqh
sequence
0: Normal 1: High-speed
Bit-3
vfb
Speed feedback filter
0: Stop 1: Start (2250Hz)
Bit-4
fdir
Position feedback
0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity
Bit-5, 6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-7
abs
Position control
0: Incremental 1: Absolute position control
Bit-8 - B
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-F - C
spm
Motor series selection
0000: HF, HP motor (200V specifications) 0010: HF-H, HP-H motor (400V specifications)
Bit-1
【#2218(PR)】
SV018 PIT
Ball screw pitch
Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis.
---Setting range--1 - 32767 (mm/rev)
【#2219(PR)】
SV019 RNG1 Position detector resolution
For the semi-closed loop control
Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2).
For the full-closed loop control
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch.
OSA18 (Hxn-A48) (260,000 p/rev) ----------- SV019 = 260
OSA105 (Hxn-A51) (1,000,000 p/rev) ------- SV019 = 1000
OSA166 (Hxn-A74) (16,000,000 p/rev) ----- SV019 = 16000
MDS-B-HR (Analog cycle/512 division) ----- SV019 = Set them with SV117 (RNG1ex).
For the setting value when using a linear scale, etc., refer to the section related to the detector
setting in the drive unit instruction manual
【#2220(PR)】
SV020 RNG2 Speed detector resolution
Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor side detector.
Detector model name
SV020 setting
OSA18 (Hxn-A48) (260,000 p/rev) ----------- SV019 = 260
OSA105 (Hxn-A51) (1,000,000 p/rev) ------- SV019 = 1000
OSA166 (Hxn-A74) (16,000,000 p/rev) ----- SV019 = 16000
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (kp/rev)
III - 151
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2221】
SV021 OLT Overload detection time constant
Normally set this parameter to "60".
---Setting range--1 - 999 (s)
【#2222】
SV022 OLL Overload detection level
Set the current detection level of "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) as a percentage in respect to the stall
current.
Normally set this parameter to "150". (For machine tool builder adjustment.)
---Setting range--110 - 500 (Stall current %)
【#2223】
SV023 OD1 Excessive error detection width during servo ON
Set the excessive error detection width in servo ON.
<Standard setting value>
OD1=OD2= (Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]) / (60×PGN1) / 2 [mm]
If this parameter is set to "0", the excessive error detection will not be performed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (mm)
【#2224】
SV024 INP
In-position detection width
Set the in-position detection width.
Set the positioning accuracy required for the machine.
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy will be. However, the cycle time (settling
time) becomes longer. The standard setting value is "50".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (µm)
III - 152
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2225(PR)】
SV025 MTYP Motor/Detector type
Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
The setting value is a four-digit hex (HEX).
HEX-
4
3
2
1
mtyp
ent
pen
HEX-1, 2
mtyp
Motor type
Set the motor type. Set this according to SV017/bitC-F.
For SV017/bitC-F(spm)=0 (200V standard motor series)
HF75xxx-yyy
: HEX2, 1 = 01h
HP54xxx-yyy
HF105xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 02h
HP104xxx-yyy
HF54xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 03h
HP154xxx-yyy
HF104xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 04h
HP224xxx-yyy
HF154xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 05h
HP204xxx-yyy
HF204xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 07h
HP354xxx-yyy
HF354xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 08h
HP454xxx-yyy
HF453xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 09h
HP704xxx-yyy
HF703xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 0Ah
HP903xxx-yyy
HF903xxx-yyy
:
HEX2, 1 = 0Bh
HP1103xxx-yyy
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
For SV017/bitC-F(spm)=2 (400V standard motor series)
HF-H75xxx-yyy
: HEX2, 1 = 01h
HP-H 54xxx-yyy
:
HF-H 105xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 02h
HP-H 104xxx-yyy :
HF-H 54xxx-yyy
: HEX2, 1 = 03h
HP-H 154xxx-yyy :
HF-H 104xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 04h
HP-H 224xxx-yyy :
HF-H 154xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 05h
HP-H 204xxx-yyy :
HF-H 204xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 07h
HP-H 354xxx-yyy :
HF-H 354xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 08h
HP-H 454xxx-yyy :
HF-H 453xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 09h
HP-H 704xxx-yyy :
HF-H 703xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 0Ah
HP-H 903xxx-yyy :
HF-H 903xxx-yyy : HEX2, 1 = 0Bh
HP-H 1103xxx-yyy :
(xxx: Code of brake, shaft shape, etc., yyy: Detector code)
HEX-3
ent
Speed detector
OSA18(HFaaaxxx-A48): HEX3=2
OSA105(HFaaaxxx-A51): HEX3=2
OSA166(HFaaaxxx-A74): HEX3=2
HEX-4
pen
Position detector
For semi-closed loop
OSA18(HFaaaxxx-A48): HEX4=2
OSA105(HFaaaxxx-A51): HEX4=2
OSA166(HFaaaxxx-A74): HEX4=2
For full-closed loop
OSA105-ET2, OSA166-ET2: HEX4 = 6h
MDS-B-HR: HEX4 = Ah
【#2226】
SV026 OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF
Set the excessive error detection width when servo OFF.
For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of SV023 (OD1).
When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be performed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (mm)
III - 153
HEX2, 1 = 11h
HEX2, 1 = 12h
HEX2, 1 = 13h
HEX2, 1 = 1Bh
HEX2, 1 = 14h
HEX2, 1 = 15h
HEX2, 1 = 16h
HEX2, 1 = 17h
HEX2, 1 = 18h
HEX2, 1 = 19h
HEX2, 1 = 11h
HEX2, 1 = 12h
HEX2, 1 = 13h
HEX2, 1 = 1Bh
HEX2, 1 = 14h
HEX2, 1 = 15h
HEX2, 1 = 16h
HEX2, 1 = 17h
HEX2, 1 = 18h
HEX2, 1 = 19h
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2227】
SV027 SSF1 Servo function selection 1
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
Bit-1,0
vcnt
Speed loop delay compensation execution changeover
00: Disable 01: Changeover type 1 10: Changeover type 2 11: Setting prohibited
Bit-3,2
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-5,4
vfct
Jitter compensation pulse number
00: Disable 01: 1 pulse 10: 2 pulses 11: 3 pulses
Bit-7,6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-9,8
lmc
Lost motion compensation type selection
00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Type 2 11: Setting prohibited
(Set the compensation amount in SV016 and SV041.)
(Note) When "SV082/lmc3" is set to "1", the lost motion compensation type 3 will be selected.
Bit-B,A
ovs
Overshoot compensation type selection
00: Compensation stop 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: Type 3
(Set the compensation amount in SV031 and SV042.)
Bit-C
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-D
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-E
zrn2
Set to "1". (Fixed)
Bit-F
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2228】
SV028
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2229】
SV029 VCS Speed at the change of speed loop gain
If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid traverse, etc, this noise can be reduced by
lowering the speed loop gain at high speed.
Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes, and use this together with SV006 (VGN2).
(Refer to SV006.)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (r/min)
【#2230】
SV030 IVC
Voltage non-sensitive band compensation
When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated.
When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed.
If adjustment is necessary, adjust the value by 10% at a time from 100%.
If the value is too large, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.
---Setting range--0 - 255 (%)
III - 154
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2231】
SV031 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1
Set the compensation amount of the motor torque during positioning.
This is enabled only when the overshooting compensation SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected.
---Setting range---1 - 100 (Stall current %)
Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Stall current 0.01%) when"SV082/bit2" is "1",
【#2232】
SV032 TOF Torque offset 1
Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined axis.
When the vertical axis pull up function is enabled, the pull up compensation direction is determined
by this parameter's sign. When set to "0", the vertical axis pull up will not be executed.
---Setting range---100 - 100 (Stall current %)
【#2233】
SV033 SSF2 Servo function selection 2
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
\WR
Bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-1,2,3
nfd1
Depth of Notch filter 1
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 1.
Bit3,2,1=000: -∞
Bit3,2,1=001: -18.1[dB]
Bit3,2,1=010: -12.0[dB] Bit3,2,1=011: -8.5[dB]
Bit3,2,1=100: -6.0[dB]
Bit3,2,1=101: -4.1[dB]
Bit3,2,1=110: -2.5[dB]
Bit3,2,1=111: -1.2[dB]
Set the adaptive frequency of Notch filter 1 in "#2238 SV0038 FHz1".
Bit-4
nf3
Notch filter 3
0: Stop
1: Start (1125Hz)
Bit-5,6,7
nfd2
Depth of Notch filter 2
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 2.
Bit7,6,5=000: -∞
Bit7,6,5=001: -18.1[dB]
Bit7,6,5=010: -12.0[dB]
Bit7,6,5=011: -8.5[dB]
Bit7,6,5=100: -6.0[dB]
Bit7,6,5=101: -4.1[dB]
Bit7,6,5=110: -2.5[dB]
Bit7,6,5=111: -1.2[dB]
Set the adaptive frequency of Notch filter 2 in "#2246 SV0046 FHz2".
Bit-8,9,A,B,C
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-D
rps
Safety observation safety speed setting increment
0: mm/min
1: 100mm/min
Bit-E
zup
Vertical axis pull up function
0: Stop
1: Enable
Bit-F
lmc2a
Lost motion compensation 2 timing
0: Normal
1: Change
III - 155
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2234】
SV034 SSF3 Servo function selection 3
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
Bit-0 - B
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-C,D,E,F ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 non-sensitive ban
Set the non-sensitive band of the model position droop in increments of 2µm.
When using feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for the model position droop and
ignore the model overshooting.
Bit-F,E,D,C=0000: 0µm
Bit-F,E,D,C=0001: 2µm
Bit-F,E,D,C=0010: 4µm
【#2235】
SV035 SSF4 Servo function selection 4
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
ENV
Bit-0 - 6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-7
ckab
No signal detection 2
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit-8 - E
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-F
clt
Inertia ratio display
0: Setting for normal use
1: Display the total inertia ratio estimated at acceleration/deceleration at the inertia ratio on the
servo monitor screen
III - 156
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2236(PR)】
SV036 PTYP
Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type
Power supply type
When connecting a power supply unit, set a code for each power supply unit.
RV[R
TV[R
COR
Bit-0 - 7
ptyp
External emergency stop setting
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled"
Power supply unit is not connected
: 0000h
MDS-D-CV-37 / MDS-DH-CV-37
: 0004h
MDS-D-CV-75 / MDS-DH-CV-75
: 0008h
MDS-D-CV-110 / MDS-DH-CV-110
: 0011h
MDS-D-CV-185 / MDS-DH-CV-185
: 0019h
MDS-D-CV-300 / MDS-DH-CV-300
: 0030h
MDS-D-CV-370 / MDS-DH-CV-370
: 0037h
MDS-D-CV-450 / MDS-DH-CV-450
: 0045h
MDS-D-CV-550
: 0055h
MDS-DH-CV-750
: 0075h
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled"
Power supply unit is not connected
: 0000h
MDS-D-CV-37 / MDS-DH-CV-37
: 0044h
MDS-D-CV-75 / MDS-DH-CV-75
: 0048h
MDS-D-CV-110 / MDS-DH-CV-110
: 0051h
MDS-D-CV-185 / MDS-DH-CV-185
: 0059h
MDS-D-CV-300 / MDS-DH-CV-300
: 0070h
MDS-D-CV-370 / MDS-DH-CV-370
: 0077h
MDS-D-CV-450 / MDS-DH-CV-450
: 0085h
MDS-D-CV-550
: 0095h
MDS-DH-CV-750
: 00B5h
Bit-8 - B
rtyp
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-C - F
amp
Not used. Set to "0".
Regenerative resistor type
Set the regenerative resistor type.
(Note) These bits are used only in MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 series.
GOIZ
TV[R
COR
Bit-0 - 3
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-4 - 7
emgx
External emergency stop function
Set the external emergency stop function. (Do not set a value other than specified.)
0: Disable
4: Enable
Bit-8 - B
Bit-C - F
rtyp
amp
For "amp = 1"
"rtyp" setting value
0: Resistor built-in drive unit
1: Setting prohibited
2: MR-RB032
3: MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK
4: MR-RB32 or GZG200W120OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
5: MR-RB30 or GZG200W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
III - 157
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
6: MR-RB50 or GZG300W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
7: MR-RB31 or GZG200W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
8: MR-RB51 or GZG300W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
9 - F: Setting prohibited
For "amp = 2"
"rtyp" setting value
0 - 3: Setting prohibited
4: FCUA-RB22
5: FCUA-RB37
6: FCUA-RB55
7, 8: Setting prohibited
9: R-UNIT2
A - C: Setting prohibited
D: FCUA-RB75/2 2 units
E, F: Setting prohibited
【#2237】
SV037 JL
Load inertia scale
Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertia" in respect to the motor inertia.
SV037(JL) = ( Jm+Jl / Jm ) × 100
Jm : Motor inertia
Jl : Motor axis conversion load inertia
For linear motor, set the gross mass of the moving sections in kg unit.
---Setting range--0 - 5000 (%)
(For linear motor, the unit is "kg".)
【#2238】
SV038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 80 or more)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#2239】
SV039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing
Set this parameter when the lost motion compensation timing does not match.
Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
---Setting range--0 - 2000 (ms)
【#2240】
SV040 LMCT Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band
Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control.
When "0" is set, the actual value to be set is 2µm. Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.
---Setting range--0 - 255 (µm)
【#2241】
SV041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2
Set this parameter as well as SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to vary the lost motion
compensation amount depending on the command directions.
Normally set this parameter to "0".
---Setting range---1 - 200 (Stall current %)
Note that when SV082/bit2 is "1", -1 - 20000 (Stall current 0.01%)
III - 158
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2242】
SV042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2
Set this parameter as well as SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to vary the overshooting
compensation amount depending on the command directions.
Normally set this parameter to "0".
---Setting range---1 - 100 (Stall current %)
Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Stall current 0.01%) when SV082/bit2 is "1".
【#2243】
SV043 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency
Set the disturbance observer filter band.
Normally set this parameter to "100".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 1000 (rad/s)
【#2244】
SV044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain
Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100 - 300".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV043 (OBS1).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 500 (%)
【#2245】
SV045
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2246】
SV046 FHz2 Notch filter frequency 2
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 80 or more.)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#2247】
SV047 EC
Inductive voltage compensation gain
Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Normally set this parameter to "100".
If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain.
---Setting range--0 - 200 (%)
【#2248】
SV048 EMGrt Vertical axis drop prevention time
Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis from dropping by delaying READY OFF until the
brake works when the emergency stop occurs.
Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the value where the axis does not drop.
When using a motor with a break of HF(-H) Series or HP(-H) Series, set to "200ms" as a standard.
---Setting range--0 - 20000 (ms)
【#2249】
SV049 PGN1sp Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control
Set the position loop gain during spindle synchronization control (synchronous tapping and
synchronization control with spindle C-axis).
Set the same value as the value of the position loop gain for spindle synchronous tapping control.
When performing the SHG control, set this parameter with SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
---Setting range--1 - 200 (rad/s)
III - 159
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2250】
SV050 PGN2sp Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control
When using SHG control during spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping and
synchronization control with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058
(SHGCsp).
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (rad/s)
【#2251】
SV051 DFBT Dual feed back control time constant
Set the control time constant in dual feed back.
When "0" is set, the actual value to be set is 1ms.
The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to the semi-closed control, so the limit of the
position loop gain will be raised.
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (ms)
【#2252】
SV052 DFBN Dual feedback control non-sensitive band
Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control.
Normally set this parameter to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (µm)
【#2253】
SV053 OD3 Excessive error detection width in special control
Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON in a special control (initial absolute position
setting, stopper control, etc.).
When "0" is set, excessive error detection won’t be performed when servo ON during a special
control.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (mm)
【#2254】
SV054 ORE Overrun detection width in closed loop control
Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control.
When the gap between the motor side detector and the linear scale (machine side detector)
exceeds the value set by this parameter, it will be judged to be overrun and "Alarm 43" will be
detected.
When "-1" is set, the alarm detection will not be performed.
When "0" is set, overrun will be detected with a 2mm width.
---Setting range---1 - 32767 (mm)
【#2255】
SV055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop
Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop is input to the point when READY OFF
is compulsorily executed.
Set the maximum value "+ 100ms" of the SV056 setting value of the servo drive unit which the
power supply unit and the main circuit are connected with.
In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the gate off will be delayed for the length of time set by
SV048 even if SV055’s value is smaller than that of SV048.
---Setting range--0 - 20000 (ms)
【#2256】
SV056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop
Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop.
Set the value of 0.9-fold rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant used in the
acceleration/deceleration. This is because the friction torque will act as a deceleration torque when
the motor decelerates, which enables the machine to stop quickly.
When preventing an impact at the acceleration/deceleration from being given to the machine, set
the same value as the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 20000 (ms)
III - 160
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2257】
SV057 SHGC SHG control gain
When performing the SHG control, set this parameter with S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2).
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 1200 (rad/s)
【#2258】
SV058 SHGCsp SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control
When using SHG control during spindle synchronization control (synchronous tapping and
synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050
(PGN2sp).
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 1200 (rad/s)
【#2259】
SV059
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2260】
SV060
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2261】
SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel.
When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" for the axis on the side to which the data will not be output.
---Setting range---1 - 127
【#2262】
SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel.
When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" for the axis on the side to which the data will not be output.
---Setting range---1 - 127
【#2263】
SV063 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 output scale
Set the output scale in increment of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---32768 - 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#2264】
SV064 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 output scale
Set the output scale with a 1/100 increment.
When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---32768 - 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#2265】
SV065 TLC Machine side compensation spring constant
Set the machine side compensation spring constant.
For semi-closed loop control, the machine side compensation amount can be approximated with the
following expression.
2
9
Compensation amount = Command speed F(mm/min) ×SV065 / (Radius R(mm) × 10 ) (µm)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range---32768 - 32767
【#2266 - 2280】 SV066 - SV080
These parameters are set automatically by the NC system.
III - 161
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2281(PR)】
SV081
Not used. Set - "0".
【#2282】
SV082 SSF5 Servo function selection 5
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
NOEV
NOE
EEW
FQU
FKU
Bit-F,E,D,C dis
Digital signal input selection
0000(000xh): No signal
0001(100xh): Safety observation function door state signal
Bit-B - A
dos3
Digital signal output selection 3
00: Not used
10: Contactor control signal output
Bit-9 - 3
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-2
ccu Lost motion overshoot compensation compensation amount setting
increment
0: Stall rated current %
1: Stall rated current 0.01%
Bit-1
lmc3
Lost motion compensation type3
0: Stop
1: Start
Bit-0
lmct Lost motion compensation 3 adjustment time measurement enabled
0: Setting for normal use
1: Adjustment time measurement enabled
【#2283】
SV083 SSF6 Servo function selection 6
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
PHF
PHF
Bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-1,2,3
nfd4
Depth of Notch filter 4
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 4.
Bit 3,2,1=000: -∞
Bit 3,2,1=001: -18.1[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=010: -12.0[dB] Bit 3,2,1=011: -8.5[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=100: -6.0[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=101: -4.1[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=110: -2.5[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=111: -1.2[dB]
Set the adaptive frequency of Notch filter 4 in "#2287 SV0087 FHz4".
Bit-4
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-5,6,7
nfd5
Depth of Notch filter 5
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 5.
Bit 7,6,5=000: -∞
Bit 7,6,5=001: -18.1[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=010: -12.0[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=011: -8.5[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=100: -6.0[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=101: -4.1[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=110: -2.5[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=111: -1.2[dB]
Set the adaptive frequency of Notch filter 5 in "#2288 SV0088 FHz5".
Bit-8 - F
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 162
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2284】
SV084 SSF7 Servo function selection 7
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
KTOU
Bit-0
【#2285】
irms
Motor current display
0: Normal motor current display 1: Effective motor current display
SV085 LMCk Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant
Set the machine system's spring constant when using lost motion compensation type 3.
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (0.01%/µm)
【#2286】
SV086 LMCc Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient
Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using lost motion compensation type 3.
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (0.01%/µm)
【#2287】
SV087 FHz4 Notch filter frequency 4
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 80 or more)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#2288】
SV088 FHz5 Notch filter frequency 5
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs. (Enabled at 80 or more)
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#2289】
SV089 TQMAX Kq Torque maximizing control Kp
Normally set this parameter to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (0.01%/µm)
【#2290】
SV090 TQMAX Kd Torque maximizing control Kd
Normally set this parameter to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (0.01%/•s/mm)
【#2291 - 2293】
SV091 - SV093
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 163
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2294】
SV094 MPV Magnetic pole position error detection speed
In the magnetic polar position detection function, the command motor speed and motor speed at the
position command stop are monitored.
The command motor speed level and motor speed level at the position command stop are set with
"r/min" increment.
When the command motor speed level is set to "0", the magnetic polar position error is detected at
10r/min. Set to “10” as a standard setting applied when the magnetic polar position error detection
function is enabled. This will detect the magnetic polar position error when the motor speed is
“100r/min”.
When not using, set to "0".
Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ----------- Command motor speed level (10r/min)
Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed level (10r/min)
---Setting range--0 - 31999
【#2295】
SV095 ZUPD Vertical axis pull up distance
Set this parameter to adjust the pull up distance when the vertical axis pull up function is enabled.
For a rotary motor, 8/1000 of a rotation at the motor end is internally set as the pull up distance,
when the pull up function is enabled and this parameter is set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2000 (μm)
【#2296 - 2312】
SV096 - SV112
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2313】
SV113 SSF8 Servo function selection 8
Select the servo specifications.
A function is assigned to each bit.
Set this parameter by converting to hexadecimal.
Bit- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ssc
Bit-0 - E
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-F
ssc
0: Stop
1: Start
【#2314】
Safety observation function
SV114 SSF9 Servo function selection 9
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2315】
SV115 SSF10 Servo function selection 10
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2316】
SV116 SSF11 Servo function selection 11
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2317(PR)】
SV117 RNG1ex Expansion position detector resolution
Set this parameter when using a special position detector.
Normally set this parameter to "0".
Refer to the section related to the detector setting in the drive unit instruction manual.
III - 164
6. Servo Parameters
6.1 Details for servo parameters
【#2318(PR)】
SV118 RNG2ex Expansion speed detector resolution
Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor side detector.
OSA18 ------ SV118 = 0
OSA105 ---- SV118 = 0
OSA166 ---- SV118 = 0
---Setting range--16
0 - 32767 ( x 2 p/rev)
【#2319 - 2437】
SV119 - SV237
Not used. Set to "0".
【#2438】
SV238 SSCFEED Safety observation Safety speed
Set the machine’s safety speed for the safety observation function.
Set this parameter within the following setting ranges.
For linear axis: 2000mm/min or less
For rotary axis: 18000°/min (50r/min) or less
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 18000 (mm/min) or (°/min)
【#2439】
SV239 SSCRPM Safety observation Safety motor speed
Set the motor’s safety speed for the safety observation function.
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#2440 - 2456】
SV240 - SV256
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 165
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
The standard parameters for each motor are given below.
The standard parameters are set to drive the isolated motor. When setting the parameters with the actual
machine, set the parameters according to the machine specifications and detector being used, etc.
(a) 200V Standard motor HF Series
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-D-V1-
HF75
HF105
HF54
HF104
HF154
HF204
HF354
HF453
HF703
HF903
20
20
40
40
80
80
160
160
160W
320
SV001
PC1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV002
PC2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV003
PGN1
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
SV004
PGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV005
VGN1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SV006
VGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV007
VIL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV008
VIA
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
SV009
IQA
20480
10240
20480
10240
10240
8192
8192
6144
6144
4096
SV010
IDA
20480
10240
20480
10240
10240
8192
8192
6144
6144
4096
SV011
IQG
768
512
3072
1280
1536
2048
2048
2048
2048
1536
SV012
IDG
768
512
3072
1280
1536
2048
2048
2048
2048
1536
SV013
ILMT
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV014
ILMTsp
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV015
FFC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV016
LMC1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV017
SPEC
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV018
PIT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV019
RNG1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV020
RNG2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV021
OLT
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
SV022
OLL
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
SV023
OD1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
SV024
INP
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
SV025
MTYP
xx01
xx02
xx03
xx04
xx05
xx07
xx08
xx09
xx0A
xx0B
SV026
OD2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
SV027
SSF1
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
SV028
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV029
VCS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV030
IVC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV031
OVS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV032
TOF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
III - 166
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-D-V1-
HF75
HF105
HF54
HF104
HF154
HF204
HF354
HF453
HF703
HF903
20
20
40
40
80
80
160
160
160W
320
SV033
SSF2
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV034
SSF3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV035
SSF4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV036
PTYP
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV037
JL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV038
FHz1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV039
LMCD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV040
LMCT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV041
LMC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV042
OVS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV043
OBS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV044
OBS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV045
TRUB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV046
FHz2
SV047
EC1
SV048
EMGrt
SV049
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGN1sp
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
SV050
PGN2sp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV051
DFBT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV052
DFBN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV053
OD3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV054
ORE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV055
EMGx
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV056
EMGt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV057
SHGC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV058
SHGCsp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV059
TCNV
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV060
TLMT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV061
DA1NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV062
DA2NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV063
DA1MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV064
DA2MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV065
TLC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
SV066
:
SV256
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.
III - 167
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
(b) 200V Standard motor HP Series
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-D-V1-
HP54
HP104
HP154
HP204
HP354
HP454
HP704
40
40
80
80
160
160
160W
HP903 HP1103
320
320W
SV001
PC1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV002
PC2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV003
PGN1
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
SV004
PGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV005
VGN1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SV006
VGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV007
VIL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV008
VIA
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
SV009
IQA
8192
4096
6144
3072
4096
3072
3072
2048
2048
SV010
IDA
8192
4096
6144
3072
4096
3072
3072
2048
2048
SV011
IQG
1280
768
1536
1024
1280
1024
1024
1280
1280
SV012
IDG
1280
768
1536
1024
1280
1024
1024
1280
1280
SV013
ILMT
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV014
ILMTsp
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV015
FFC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV016
LMC1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV017
SPEC
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV018
PIT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV019
RNG1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV020
RNG2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV021
OLT
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
SV022
OLL
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
SV023
OD1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
SV024
INP
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
SV025
MTYP
xx11
xx12
xx13
xx14
xx15
xx16
xx17
xx18
xx19
SV026
OD2
SV027
SSF1
SV028
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV029
VCS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV030
IVC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV031
OVS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV032
TOF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
III - 168
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-D-V1-
HP54
HP104
HP154
HP204
HP354
HP454
HP704
40
40
80
80
160
160
160W
HP903 HP1103
320
320W
SV033
SSF2
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV034
SSF3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV035
SSF4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV036
PTYP
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV037
JL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV038
FHz1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV039
LMCD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV040
LMCT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV041
LMC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV042
OVS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV043
OBS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV044
OBS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV045
TRUB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV046
FHz2
SV047
EC1
SV048
EMGrt
SV049
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGN1sp
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
SV050
PGN2sp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV051
DFBT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV052
DFBN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV053
OD3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV054
ORE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV055
EMGx
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV056
EMGt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV057
SHGC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV058
SHGCsp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV059
TCNV
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV060
TLMT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV061
DA1NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV062
DA2NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV063
DA1MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV064
DA2MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV065
TLC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
SV066
:
SV256
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.
III - 169
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
(c) 400V Standard motor HF-H Series
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-DH-V1-
HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
10
10
20
20
40
40
80
80
80W
160
SV001
PC1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV002
PC2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV003
PGN1
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
SV004
PGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV005
VGN1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SV006
VGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV007
VIL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV008
VIA
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
SV009
IQA
20480
10240
20480
10240
15360
8192
8192
6144
6144
6144
SV010
IDA
20480
10240
20480
10240
15360
8192
8192
6144
6144
6144
SV011
IQG
768
512
3072
1280
2048
2048
2048
2048
2048
2048
SV012
IDG
768
512
3072
1280
2048
2048
2048
2048
2048
2048
SV013
ILMT
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV014
ILMTsp
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV015
FFC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV016
LMC1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV017
SPEC
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
SV018
PIT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV019
RNG1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV020
RNG2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV021
OLT
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
SV022
OLL
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
SV023
OD1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
SV024
INP
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
SV025
MTYP
xx01
xx02
xx03
xx04
xx05
xx07
xx08
xx09
xx0A
xx0B
SV026
OD2
SV027
SSF1
SV028
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV029
VCS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV030
IVC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV031
OVS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV032
TOF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
III - 170
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-DH-V1-
HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
10
10
20
20
40
40
80
80
80W
160
SV033
SSF2
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV034
SSF3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV035
SSF4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV036
PTYP
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV037
JL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV038
FHz1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV039
LMCD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV040
LMCT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV041
LMC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV042
OVS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV043
OBS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV044
OBS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV045
TRUB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV046
FHz2
SV047
EC1
SV048
EMGrt
SV049
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGN1sp
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
SV050
PGN2sp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV051
DFBT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV052
DFBN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV053
OD3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV054
ORE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV055
EMGx
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV056
EMGt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV057
SHGC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV058
SHGCsp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV059
TCNV
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV060
TLMT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV061
DA1NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV062
DA2NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV063
DA1MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV064
DA2MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV065
TLC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
SV066
:
SV256
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.
III - 171
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
(d) 400V Standard motor HP-H Series
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-DH-V1-
HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
20
20
40
40
80
80
80W
160
160W
SV001
PC1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV002
PC2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV003
PGN1
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
SV004
PGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV005
VGN1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
SV006
VGN2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV007
VIL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV008
VIA
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
SV009
IQA
8192
4096
6144
3072
4096
3072
3072
2048
2048
SV010
IDA
8192
4096
6144
3072
4096
3072
3072
2048
2048
SV011
IQG
1280
768
1536
1024
1280
1024
1024
1280
1280
SV012
IDG
1280
768
1536
1024
1280
1024
1024
1280
1280
SV013
ILMT
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV014
ILMTsp
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
SV015
FFC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV016
LMC1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV017
SPEC
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
SV018
PIT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV019
RNG1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV020
RNG2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SV021
OLT
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
SV022
OLL
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
SV023
OD1
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
SV024
INP
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
SV025
MTYP
xx11
xx12
xx13
xx14
xx15
xx16
xx17
xx18
xx19
SV026
OD2
SV027
SSF1
SV028
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV029
VCS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV030
IVC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV031
OVS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV032
TOF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
III - 172
6. Servo Parameters
6.2 List of standard parameters for each servomotor
Motor
Drive unit
MDS-DH-V1-
HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
20
20
40
40
80
80
80W
160
160W
SV033
SSF2
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV034
SSF3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV035
SSF4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV036
PTYP
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
SV037
JL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV038
FHz1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV039
LMCD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV040
LMCT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV041
LMC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV042
OVS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV043
OBS1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV044
OBS2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV045
TRUB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV046
FHz2
SV047
EC1
SV048
EMGrt
SV049
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PGN1sp
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
SV050
PGN2sp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV051
DFBT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV052
DFBN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV053
OD3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV054
ORE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV055
EMGx
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV056
EMGt
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV057
SHGC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV058
SHGCsp
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV059
TCNV
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV060
TLMT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV061
DA1NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV062
DA2NO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV063
DA1MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV064
DA2MPY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SV065
TLC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
SV066
:
SV256
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.
III - 173
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
6.3 Supplement
6.3.1 D/A Output No.
6.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series
(1) D/A output specifications
Item
Explanation
No. of channels
2ch
Output cycle
Output precision
Output voltage
range
0.8ms (min. value)
12bit
Output
magnification
setting
CN9 connector
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
-32768% to +32767% (1%
scale)
Output pin
(CN9 connector)
Others
MO1 = Pin 9
MO2 = Pin 19
GND = Pins 1, 11
The D/A output for the 2-axis
unit (MDS-D/DH-V2) is also
2ch. When using the 2-axis
unit, set -1 for the output data
(SV061, 62) of the axis that is
not to be measured.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
LG
MO1
(2) Setting the output data
Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
#
No.
Abbrev.
Parameter name
2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
III - 174
Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
LG
MO2
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
<Standard output>
No.
Standard output unit
Output data
Linear axis
Rotary axis
For 2-axis drive unit (MDS-D/DH-V2). Set the
parameters to another axis in the drive unit that is not
D/A output.
1000(r/min)/V
1000(r/min)/V
Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
500Hz/V
-1
D/A output not selected
0
1
2
3
8
Commanded rotation speed
Motor rotation speed
Torque command
Torque feedback
Machine vibration frequency
30
Collision detection estimated torque Motor stall rated ratio 100%
Collision detection disturbance
Motor stall rated ratio 100%
estimated torque
Estimated load inertia ratio
100% or 100kg
or moving sections gross weight
31
32(Note)
35
50
51
52
53
54
60
61
62
63
64
70
71
72
73
74
126
127
Disturbance observer estimated
disturbance torque
Motor stall rated ratio 100%
Position droop
1µm/V
1µm/V
1µm/V
1µm/s/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/s/V
1µm/V
1/1000°/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
1mm/V
1mm/V
1mm/V
1mm/s/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/s/V
1mm/V
1°/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
1m/V
1m/V
1m/V
1m/s/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/s/V
1m/V
1000°/V
Saw tooth wave
2.5V test data
0V to 5V
2.5V
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
(Note) The estimated load inertia ratio (unit: 100%) is applied for the rotary motor, and the moving
sections gross weight (unit: 100kg) for the linear motor.
III - 175
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
<Servo control signal>
Servo control input (NC to V1/V2)
No.
Details
Servo control output (V1/V2 to NC)
No.
Details
16384
16385
16388
16390
16391
16392
Servo control
input 1-0
Servo control
input 1-1
READY ON command
16480
Servo control
output 1-0
Servo control
output 1-1
In READY ON
Servo ON command
16481
Servo control
input 1-4
Servo control
input 1-6
Position loop gain
changeover command
Excessive error
detection width
changeover command
16484
Servo control
output 1-4
Servo control
output 1-6
In position loop gain
changeover
In excessive error
detection width
changeover
Servo control
input 1-7
Servo control
input 1-8
Alarm reset command
16487
Servo control
output 1-7
Servo control
output 1-8
In alarm
Current limit selection
command
16488
Servo control
output 1-C
Servo control
output 1-D
Servo control
output 1-E
Servo control
output 1-F
Servo control
output 2-0
In in-position
16499
Servo control
output 2-3
In zero speed
16503
Servo control
output 2-7
In external
emergency stop
Servo control
output 2-9
Servo control
output 2-A
Servo control
output 2-B
In speed monitor
Servo control
output 3-0
In control axis
detachment
16486
16492
16493
16494
16495
16496
16409
16410
16411
16416
Servo control
input 2-9
Servo control
input 2-A
Servo control
input 2-B
Speed monitor
command valid
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed (all drive
units)
16505
Servo control
input 3-0
Control axis
detachment command
16512
16506
16507
III - 176
In servo ON
In current limit
selection
In current limit
In absolute position
data loss
In warning
Z phase passed
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(self drive unit)
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
6.3.1.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series
(1) D/A output specifications
Item
Explanation
No. of channels
2ch
Output cycle
Output precision
Output voltage
0.8ms (min. value)
10bit
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
Output
magnification
setting
-32768% to +32767% (1%
scale)
MO1 = Pin 4
MO2 = Pin 14
GND = Pins 1, 11
Output pin
(CN9 connector)
(2) Setting the output data
Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
#
No.
Abbrev.
Parameter name
2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
III - 177
CN9 connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
LG
MO1
Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
LG
MO2
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
<Standard output>
Standard output unit
No.
Output data
0
1
2
3
8
Commanded rotation speed
Motor rotation speed
Torque command
Torque feedback
Machine vibration frequency
1000(r/min)/V
1000(r/min)/V
Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
500Hz/V
30
Collision detection estimated torque
Collision detection disturbance
estimated torque
Estimated load inertia ratio
or moving sections gross weight
Motor stall rated ratio 100%
31
32(Note)
35
50
51
52
53
54
60
61
62
63
64
70
71
72
73
74
126
127
Linear axis
Disturbance observer estimated
disturbance torque
Position droop
Rotary axis
Motor stall rated ratio 100%
100% or 100kg
Motor stall rated ratio 100%
1µm/V
1µm/V
1µm/V
1µm/s/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/s/V
1µm/V
1/1000°/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
1mm/V
1mm/V
1mm/V
1mm/s/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/s/V
1mm/V
1°/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
1m/V
1m/V
1m/V
1m/s/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/s/V
1m/V
1000°/V
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering servo tracking delay)
Saw tooth wave
2.5V test data
0V to 5V
2.5V
(Note) The estimated load inertia ratio (unit: 100%) is applied for the rotary motor, and the moving
sections gross weight (unit: 100kg) for the linear motor.
III - 178
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
<Servo control signal>
Servo control input (NC to SVJ3)
No.
Details
Servo control output (SVJ3 to NC)
No.
Details
16384
16385
16388
16390
16391
16392
Servo control
input 1-0
Servo control
input 1-1
READY ON command
16480
Servo control
output 1-0
Servo control
output 1-1
In READY ON
Servo ON command
16481
Servo control
input 1-4
Servo control
input 1-6
Position loop gain
changeover command
Excessive error
detection width
changeover command
16484
Servo control
output 1-4
Servo control
output 1-6
In position loop gain
changeover
In excessive error
detection width
changeover
Servo control
input 1-7
Servo control
input 1-8
Alarm reset command
16487
Servo control
output 1-7
Servo control
output 1-8
In alarm
Current limit selection
command
16488
Servo control
output 1-C
Servo control
output 1-D
Servo control
output 1-E
Servo control
output 1-F
Servo control
output 2-0
In in-position
16499
Servo control
output 2-3
In zero speed
16503
Servo control
output 2-7
In external
emergency stop
Servo control
output 2-9
Servo control
output 2-A
Servo control
output 2-B
In speed monitor
Servo control
output 3-0
In control axis
detachment
16486
16492
16493
16494
16495
16496
16409
16410
16411
16416
Servo control
input 2-9
Servo control
input 2-A
Servo control
input 2-B
Speed monitor
command valid
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed (all drive
units)
16505
Servo control
input 3-0
Control axis
detachment command
16512
16506
16507
III - 179
In servo ON
In current limit
selection
In current limit
In absolute position
data loss
In warning
Z phase passed
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(self drive unit)
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
6.3.2 Electronic Gears
The servo drive unit has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a
detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios calculated
from multiple parameters as shown below. However, each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be less than 32767.
If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No.2301 will be output.
If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications must be revised so that the
electronic gears are within the specifications range.
(1) For semi-closed loop control
Reduced fraction of
ELG1
ELG2
PC2 × RNG1
= PC1 × PIT × IUNIT (reduced fraction)
IUNIT = 2/NC (μm) command unit
1µm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1µm : IUNIT = 20
When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.
ELG1 ≤ 32767
ELG2 ≤ 32767
(2) For full-closed loop control
Reduced fraction of
PGNX
PGNY
=
PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1
PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)
When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.
PGNX ≤ 32767
PGNY ≤ 32767
And,
PGNXsp
Reduced fraction of PGNYsp =
PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1sp
PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)
When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.
PGNXsp ≤ 32767
PGNYsp ≤ 32767
III - 180
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement
6.3.3 Lost Motion Compensation
When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the +
direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise
direction, the command direction is CCW.
This rotation direction can be set with the CNC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the ± will differ
for some servo parameters according to this motor rotation direction. The servo parameters affected by
CW/CCW are shown below.
SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2)
(When different values are set for SV016 and SV041)
<Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction, the
compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion
compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity.
CW
CCW
A
X: SV041
X: SV016
B
Y: SV016
Y: SV041
C
X: SV016
X: SV041
D
Y: SV041
Y: SV016
+Y
The Y axis command
direction changes from
the + to - direction.
D
A
-X
C
The X axis command
direction changes from
the + to - direction.
+X
The X axis command
direction changes from
the - to + direction.
-Y
B
The Y axis command
direction changes from
the - to + direction.
(Note) The setting value for the parameter is "0" or "-1", the compensation amount is determined as
shown below.
Setting value
for SV016
Setting value
for SV041
Compensation
amount
in + direction
Compensation
amount
in - direction
0
0
No compensation
No compensation
n
0
n
n
0
m
m
m
n
m
n
m
n
-1
n
No compensation
-1
m
No compensation
III - 181
m
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
For parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The setting is
validated after the power is turned ON again.
【#3001】
slimt 1 Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the spindle speed for maximum motor speed with gear 00.
(Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3002】
slimt 2 Limit rotation speed (Gear: 01)
Set the spindle speed for maximum motor speed with gear 01.
(Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3003】
slimt 3 Limit rotation speed (Gear: 10)
Set the spindle speed for maximum motor speed with gear 10.
(Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3004】
slimt 4 Limit rotation speed (Gear: 11)
Set the spindle speed for maximum motor speed with gear 11.
(Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3005】
smax 1 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the maximum spindle speed with gear 00.
Set this as slimt ≥ smax.
By comparing the S command value and the values of gear 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will
be output automatically.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3006】
smax 2 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 01)
Set the maximum spindle speed with gear 01.
Set this as slimt ≥ smax.
By comparing the S command value and the values of gear 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will
be output automatically.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3007】
smax 3 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 10)
Set the maximum spindle speed with gear 10.
Set this as slimt ≥ smax.
By comparing the S command value and the values of gear 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will
be output automatically.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
III - 182
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3008】
smax 4 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 11)
Set the maximum spindle speed with gear 11.
Set this as slimt ≥ smax.
By comparing the S command value and the values of gear 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will
be output automatically.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3009】
ssift 1 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 00.
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3010】
ssift 2 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 01)
Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 01.
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3011】
ssift 3 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 10)
Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 10.
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3012】
ssift 4 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 11)
Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 11.
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3013】
stap 1 Tap rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle with gear 00.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3014】
stap 2 Tap rotation speed (Gear: 01)
Set the maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle with gear 01.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3015】
stap 3 Tap rotation speed (Gear: 10)
Set the maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle with gear 10.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
III - 183
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3016】
stap 4 Tap rotation speed (Gear: 11)
Set the maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle with gear 11.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3017】
stapt 1 Tap time constant (Gear: 00)
Set the time constant for constant inclination synchronous tapping cycle with gear 00 (linear
acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3018】
stapt 2 Tap time constant (Gear: 01)
Set the time constant for constant inclination synchronous tapping cycle with gear 01 (linear
acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3019】
stapt 3 Tap time constant (Gear: 10)
Set the time constant for constant inclination synchronous tapping cycle with gear 10 (linear
acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3020】
stapt 4 Tap time constant (Gear: 11)
Set the time constant for constant inclination synchronous tapping cycle with gear 11 (linear
acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
III - 184
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
<Relation of spindle limit rotation speed and spindle maximum rotation speed>
Spindle motor rotation speed
(r/min)
The spindle rotation speed which can be attained at the spindle motor's maximum rotation speed is set
for the limit rotation speed (slimt). This value is obtained by multiplying the gear ratio on the spindle
motor maximum rotation speed (SP017). Set the maximum rotation speed (smax) when the rotation
speed is to be limited according to the machine specifications, such as the spindle gear specifications.
Up to four value can be set for gear changeover.
SP017
0
smax1 slimt1 smax2
slimt2
smax(n)
slimt(n)
Spindle rotation speed (r/min)
<Relation of tap time constant and actual acceleration/deceleration time constant>
(For constant inclination synchronous tap cycle)
Set the acceleration time up to the tap rotation speed (stap) in the tap time constant (stapt).
Acceleration/deceleration is carried out at the same inclination for all speed commands. Up to four
values can be set for gear changeover.
Spindle speed (r/min)
stap(n)
Actual
command
0
Actual time
Time (ms)
III - 185
stapt(n)
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3021】
sori Orientation rotation speed
Set the spindle orientation speed.
Set the speed for when the spindle rotates at the constant speed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3022】
sgear Encoder gear ratio
Set the gear ratio of the spindle to the detector.
Setting value 0 ---> Detector : Spindle = 1:1
Setting value 1 ---> Detector : Spindle = 1:2
Setting value 2 ---> Detector : Spindle = 1:4
Setting value 3 ---> Detector : Spindle = 1:8
---Setting range--0-8
【#3023】
smini Minimum rotation speed
Set the minimum spindle speed.
If an S command below this setting is issued, the spindle will rotate at the minimum speed set by
this parameter.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#3024(PR)】
sout Spindle connection
Select the type of interface with a spindle drive unit.
0: No connection with a spindle
1: Dedicated network, dedicated optical communication
2 - 5: S-analog
---Setting range--0-5
【#3025(PR)】
enc-on Spindle encoder
Set the connection condition of a spindle's detector.
Setting 0 ---> Not connected
Setting 1 ---> Connected (Spindle detector connection check function is enabled.)
Setting 2 ---> Serially connected
---Setting range--0-2
【#3026】
cs_ori Selection of winding in orientation mode
0: Perform orientation using the coil selected when the orientation command is issued.
1: Use the coil L whenever the orientation command is issued.
【#3027】
cs_syn
Selection of winding in spindle synchronous mode
0: Select the coil H or L based on the actual spindle motor speed (calculated from commanded
speed) when spindle synchronization starts. (Coil switch is not performed during spindle
synchronous tapping control. This control is carried out using the coil selected at start.)
If the actual spindle motor speed is less than the setting of SP020, the coil L is selected. But if the
actual speed exceeds the setting of SP020, the coil H is selected.
1: Use the coil H whenever the spindle synchronization command is issued.
【#3028】
sprcmm Tap cycle spindle forward run/reverse run M command
Set the M codes for the spindle forward run/reverse run commands.
High-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle forward run command.
Low-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle reverse run command.
When "0" is set, the M code for spindle forward run command is handled as "3" and the M code for
spindle reverse run command as "4".
---Setting range--0 - 999999
III - 186
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3029】
tapsel Asynchro-nous tap gear selection
Select whether to use the tapping speed or maximum speed for the gear that is selected when an
asynchronous tapping command is issued.
0: Tapping speed
1: Maximum speed
This parameter is enabled only when the M-function synchronous tapping cycle enable parameter
"#1272 ext08/bit1" is ON.
【#3030】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#3031(PR)】
smcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (spindle)
Set the interface channel No. of CNC control unit to which the spindle is connected and the axis No.
within each channel.
Set this parameter in 4-digit (hexadecimal) format.
Rotary switch settings
3
2
Axis No.= 1
Channel No.=1
HEX- 4
3
0
2
1
Number of axes
Interface channel
No.
CNC
control
unit
Spindle
drive
unit
Channel No.=2
Axis No.= 1
2
n
Channel No.=m
HEX-4 : Drive unit interface channel No.
HEX-3
: Not used. Set to "0".
HEX-2, 1 : Axis No.
For a spindle to be connected to CNC via analog interface, set to "0000".
---Setting range--1001 - 1010, 2001 - 2010
【#3032】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#3035(PR)】
spunit Output unit
Select the data unit for communication with the spindle drive unit.
This selection is applied to the data communicated between the NC and spindle drive unit as well as
the spindle movement data. Note, however, that this parameter is enabled only for the MDS-D
Series spindle drive unit.
Spindle/C axis depends on this parameter setting and the C axis output unit (servo) is ignored.
When MDS-D Series is used, follow the setting of "#1003 ctrl_unit".
B: 1µm
C: 0.1µm
D: 10nm
E: 1nm
【#3037】
taps21 Synchronous tap switching spindle speed 2 (Gear: 00)
Set the spindle speed at which the 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be
switched with gear 00.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
III - 187
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3038】
taps22 Synchronous tap switching spindle speed 2 (Gear: 01)
Set the spindle speed at which the 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be
switched with gear 01.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3039】
taps23 Synchronous tap switching spindle speed 2 (Gear: 10)
Set the spindle speed at which the 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be
switched with gear 10.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3040】
taps24 Synchronous tap switching spindle speed 2 (Gear: 11)
Set the spindle speed at which the 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be
switched with gear 11.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3041】
tapt21 Synchronous tap switching time constant 2 (Gear: 00)
Set the time constant to reach synchronous tapping switching spindle speed 2 (taps21- 24) with
gear 00.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3042】
tapt22 Synchronous tap switching time constant 2 (Gear: 01)
Set the time constant to reach synchronous tapping switching spindle rotation speed 2 (taps21 - 24)
with gear 01.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3043】
tapt23 Synchronous tap switching time constant 2 (Gear: 10)
Set the time constant to reach synchronous tapping switching spindle rotation speed 2 (taps21 - 24)
with gear 10.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3044】
tapt24 Synchronous tap switching time constant 2 (Gear: 11)
Set the time constant to reach synchronous tapping switching spindle rotation speed 2 (taps21 - 24)
with gear 11.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3045】
tapt31 Synchronous tap switching time constant 3 (Gear: 00)
Set the time constant to reach the maximum speed (smax1 - 4) with gear 00.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3046】
tapt32 Synchronous tap switching time constant 3 (Gear: 01)
Set the time constant to reach the maximum speed (smax1 - 4) with gear 01.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
III - 188
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3047】
tapt33 Synchronous tap switching time constant 3 (Gear: 10)
Set the time constant to reach the maximum speed (smax1 - 4) with gear 10.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3048】
tapt34 Synchronous tap switching time constant 3 (Gear: 11)
Set the time constant to reach the maximum speed (smax1 - 4) with gear 11.
---Setting range--1 - 5000 (ms)
【#3049】
spt Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for when the commanded spindle synchronization
speed changes under spindle synchronization control.
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (ms)
【#3050】
sprlv Spindle synchronization rotation speed attainment level
Set the level of difference between the commanded synchronization spindle speeds and actual
speeds of both the basic and synchronous spindles during spindle synchronization, below which the
spindle speed synchronization complete signal will go ON.
---Setting range--0 - 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)
【#3051】
spplv Spindle phase synchroniza-tion attainment level
Set the level of phase difference between the basic and synchronous spindles during spindle
synchronization, below which the spindle phase synchronization complete signal will go ON.
---Setting range--0 - 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)
【#3052】
spplr Spindle motor spindle relative polarity
Set the spindle motor and spindle's relative polarity.
0: Positive polarity
Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation
1: Negative polarity
Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation
---Setting range--0000/0001 (HEX)
【#3053】
sppst Spindle encoder Z -phase position
Set the deviation amount from the spindle's basic point to the spindle detector's Z phase.
Obtain the deviation amount, considering a clockwise direction as positive when viewed from the
spindle's front side.
---Setting range--0 - 359999 (1/1000°)
【#3054】
sptc1 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1
Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3055】
sptc2 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2
Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
III - 189
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3056】
sptc3 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3
Set the spindle speed for changing the 3rd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3057】
sptc4 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4
Set the spindle speed for changing the 4th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3058】
sptc5 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5
Set the spindle speed for changing the 5th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3059】
sptc6 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6
Set the spindle speed for changing the 6th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3060】
sptc7 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7
Set the spindle speed for changing the 7th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant.
---Setting range--0 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3061】
spdiv1
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 1
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (sptc1) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3062】
spdiv2
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 2
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3063】
spdiv3
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 3
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3064】
spdiv4
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 4
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
III - 190
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3065】
spdiv5
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 5
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3066】
spdiv6
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 6
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant from the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) to the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7). Set this as a magnification in relation to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3067】
spdiv7
Magnification for time constant changeover speed 7
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) and higher. Set this as a magnification in
relation to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
---Setting range--0 - 127
【#3068】
symtm1 Phase synchronization start confirmation time
Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attained before phase synchronization control is
started.
When "0" is set, the time will be 0.5 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (ms)
【#3069】
symtm2 Phase synchronization end confirmation time
Set a period of waiting time for phase synchronization control's completion as a time in which the
speed stays within the attainment range.
When "0" is set, the time will be 0.5 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (ms)
【#3070】
syprt
Phase synchronization speed
Set the amount of speed fluctuation of synchronous spindle during phase synchronization control.
Set this as a proportion to commanded speed.
When "0" is set, the amount will be 100%.
---Setting range--0 - 100 (%)
【#3071(PR)】
SscDrSelSp Speed monitor Door selection
Select which door group of the speed monitoring a spindle belongs to.
0000: Belong to the door 1 group.
0001: Belong to the door 1 group.
0002: Belong to the door 2 group.
0003: Belong to the door 1 and 2 groups.
(Note) Speed monitoring is not executed when SP229:SFNC9/bitF is "OFF".
---Setting range--0000 - 0003 (HEX)
III - 191
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3072(PR)】
Ssc Svof Filter Sp Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF
Set the error detection time for when an error of command speed monitoring or feedback speed
monitoring is detected during servo OFF.
The alarm will occur if actual speed exceeds safe speed or safe rotation speed for a period of time
longer than this setting.
When "0" is set, the detection time will be 200 (ms).
---Setting range--0 - 9999 (ms)
【#3101】
sp_t 1 Time constant for spindle rotation with S command (Gear: 00)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle rotation using the S command (spindle
control mode = speed operation mode) with gear 00 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3102】
sp_t 2 Time constant for spindle rotation with S command (Gear: 01)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle rotation using the S command (spindle
control mode = speed operation mode) with gear 01 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3103】
sp_t 3 Time constant for spindle rotation with S command (Gear: 10)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle rotation using the S command (spindle
control mode = speed operation mode) with gear 10 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3104】
sp_t 4 Time constant for spindle rotation with S command (Gear: 11)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle rotation using the S command (spindle
control mode = speed operation mode) with gear11 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3105】
sut Speed reach range
Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the commanded speed, at which the speed reach signal
will be output.
---Setting range--0 - 100 (%)
III - 192
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3106】
zrn_typ
Zero point return specifications
Select the zero point return specification.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Z phase detection direction
Orientation direction
Designate zero point return/deceleration stop in synchronous tapping
Synchronous tapping zero point return direction
Synchronous tapping command polarity
Designate zero point return/deceleration stop of spindle/C axis
Spindle/C axis zero point return direction
Interpolation mode selection in orientation
Spindle zero point detection with contactless switch
Bit-F
Spindle zero point detection with contactless switch
1: Enable spindle zero point detection using proximity switch
Bit-E
Interpolation mode selection in orientation
0: Interpolation mode (Use the interpolation mode gain "SP002 PGN".)
1: Non-interpolation mode (Use the non-interpolation mode gain "SP001 PGV")
Select this when vibration occurs since the gain is too high during the orientation.
Bit-D,C,B
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-A,9
Spindle/C axis zero point return direction
00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run
Bit-8
Designate zero point return/deceleration stop of spindle/C axis
0: Zero point return 1: Deceleration stop
Bit-7
Synchronous tapping command polarity
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction
Bit-6,5
Synchronous tapping zero point return direction
00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run
Bit-4
Designate zero point return/deceleration stop in synchronous tapping
0: Zero point return
1: Deceleration stop
Bit-3
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-2,1
Orientation direction
00: Short-cut 01: Forward run 10: Reverse run
Bit-0
Z phase detection direction
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction
0: Normal
【#3107】
ori_spd Orientation command speed
Set the spindle speed during orientation command.
---Setting range--1 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3108】
ori_sft In-position shift amount for orientation
Set the orientation stop position.
The clockwise direction when viewed from the load side is considered as minus (-).
---Setting range---35999 - 35999 (0.01°)
III - 193
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3109】
zdetspd Z phase detection speed
When "#3106/bitF = 0" (Normal), set the spindle speed at initial Z phase detection.
When "#3106/bitF = 1" (Spindle zero point proximity switch detection enabled), set the spindle
speed at initial spindle zero point proximity switch detection.
(Note) When spindle zero point proximity switch detection is enabled, the rotation direction of the
orientation/zero point return (synchronous tapping, spindle/C axis) will follow Z phase detection
direction. And the speed will follow Z phase detection speed.
---Setting range--1 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3110】
tap_spd Synchronous tapping zero point return speed
Set the synchronous tapping zero point return speed.
---Setting range--1 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3111】
tap_sft Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount
Set the synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount.
---Setting range--0.00 - 35999 (0.01°)
【#3112】
cax_spd Spindle C axis zero point return speed
Set the spindle C axis zero point return speed.
---Setting range--1 - 99999 (r/min)
【#3113】
cax_sft Spindle C axis zero point return shift amount
Set the spindle C axis zero point return shift amount
---Setting range--0.00 - 359999 (0.001°)
【#3114】
cax_para_chg Spindle/C axis parameter switch
Select whether to switch detector's parameters between spindle control and C axis control during
spindle/C axis control.
0: Not switch
1: Switch
---Setting range--0/1 (Standard: 0)
【#3115】
sp2_t1 Time constant in orientation/position loop reference position return (Gear: 00)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach the spindle's limit speed (slimt) when
spindle rotates in orientation/position loop zero point return method (C axis, tapping) using gear 00
(Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
(Note) Set a value that is bigger than the values set by "#3101 sp_t1 - #3104 sp_t4".
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3116】
sp2_t2 Time constant in orientation/position loop reference position return (Gear: 01)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach the spindle's limit speed (slimt), when
spindle rotates in the orientation/position loop zero point return method (C axis, tapping) using gear
01 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
(Note) Set a value that is bigger than the values set by "#3101 sp_t1 - #3104 sp_t4".
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
III - 194
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3117】
sp2_t3 Time constant in orientation/position loop reference position return (Gear: 10)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach the spindle's limit speed (slimt), when
spindle rotates in the orientation/position loop zero point return method (C axis, tapping) using gear
10 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
(Note) Set a value that is bigger than the values set by "#3101 sp_t1 - #3104 sp_t4".
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3118】
sp2_t4 Time constant in orientation/position loop reference position return (Gear: 11)
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach the spindle's limit speed (slimt), when
spindle rotates in the orientation/position loop zero point return method (C axis, tapping) using gear
11 (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
(Note) Set a value that is bigger than the values set by "#3101 sp_t1 - #3104 sp_t4".
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3120】
staptr Time constant reduction rate in high-speed synchronous tapping
When performing high-speed synchronous tapping, set the reduction rate ofthe time constant
compared to the time constant in normal synchronous tapping. (Setting "0"or "100" will be regarded
as reduction rate zero, so the time constant won't be reduced.)
E.g.) When set to "10", time constant in high-speed synchronous tapping will be 90% of that in
normal synchronous tapping.
---Setting range--0 to 100(%)
【#3121】
tret Turret indexing
Select the validity of turret indexing.
---Setting range--0: Invalid
1: Valid
【#3122】
GRC Turret side gear ratio
Set the number of teeth on the turret side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to 00. Set a value of GRC so that the ratio of GRC to the spindle side gear ratio (#13057
SP057) will be 1:N (an integer).
If this parameter is set to "0", it will be regarded as "1".
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#3123】
tret_spd Turret indexing speed
Set the turret end indexing speed when in turret indexing.
When this parameter is set to 0, the value of Orientation command speed (#3107 ori_spd) will be
used for the turret indexing speed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767(r/min)
【#3124】
tret_t Turret indexing time constant
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach Limit rotation speed (#3001 slimt) at gear
00 when in turret indexing (linear acceleration/deceleration pattern). Set this parameter to a larger
value than #3115 sp2_t1 at gear 00.
---Setting range--0 - 30000 (ms)
【#3125】
tret_inpos Turret indexing in-position width
Set the position error range in which the index positioning complete signal is output when in turret
indexing. When this parameter is set to 0, the value of In-position width (#13024 SP024) will be
used for this width.
---Setting range--0 - 32767(1°/1000)
III - 195
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3126】
tret_fin_off Index positioning complete signal OFF time
Set the time to forcedly turn OFF the index positioning complete signal since the indexing start
signal turns ON. If this period of time has not passed yet, the index positioning complete signal will
not turn ON even at the completion of index positioning.
---Setting range--0 - 10000 (ms)
【#3127】
SPECSP Spindle specification
bit0: Select the gear chanveover method.
(0: Gear change type 1, 1: Gear change type 2)
---Setting range--0x0000 to 0xffff(hexadecimal)
【#3128】
ori_spec Orientation specification
bit0: Orientation imposition advance output (0: Invalid, 1: Valid)
---Setting range--0x0000 to 0xffff(hexadecimal)
【#3129】
cax_spec Spindle/C axis specification
Not used. Set to "0".
【#3130】
syn_spec
Spindle synchronization specification
bit0: Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) automatic compensation
selection
1: Compensate hobbing axis delay (advance) with workpiece axis.
0: No compensation.
---Setting range--0/1
【#3131】
tap_spec Synchronous tapping specification
Not used. Set to "0".
【#3132】
ori_inp2 2nd in-position width for orientation
Use this when detecting a different in-position from the normal in-position
detection, such as advancing the inposition signal. When using, set a
bigger value than the valud of the spindle parameter SP024.
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (1deg/1000)
【#3133】
spherr Hobbing axis delay (advance) allowable angle
Set the allowable angle between the commanded position and actual position
of hobbing axis when it is in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode
(X18AE ON), and also when hobbing axis and workpiece axis are synchronizing
(X18A9 ON).
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (1deg/1000)
【#3134】
sphtc Primary delay time constant for hobbing axis automatic compensation
Set the primary delay time constant of hobbing axis automatic compensation
primary delay filter control in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing).
When set to 0, primary delay filter control is invalid.
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (ms)
III - 196
7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
【#3135】
sfwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing axis
Set the feed forward gain for the hobbing axis in tool spindle
synchronization II (hobbing) mode.
---Setting range--0 to 200 (%)
【#3137】
stap_ax_off High-speed synchronous tapping disabled axis
Set the high-speed synchronous tapping disabled axis.
bit0 to bit16: High-speed synchronous tapping disabled axis
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
If communication between drive units is disabled for a certain axis, set the axis's bits of all the
spindles as disabled.
If communication between drive units is disabled for a certain spindle, set all the bits of the spindle
as disabled (0xFFFF).
(Note) Each bit (bit0 -) corresponds to the order of the axis name parameter (#1013 axname)
setting.
III - 197
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.
The spindle parameter setting and display methods differ according to the NC being used. Refer to the
instruction manuals for the NC and each spindle.
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-D Series Specifications Manual ················ IB-1500011
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-DH Series Specifications Manual·············· IB-1500003
! CAUTION
!
【#13001】
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
SP001 PGV Position loop gain Non-interpolation mode
Set the position loop gain for "Non-interpolation" control mode. The standard setting is "33".
When the setting value increases, the tracking ability to commands will be higher and the settling
time during positioning can be shorter. However, the impact applied on the machine during
acceleration/deceleration will increase.
The position loop gain will be selected according to the control mode selection command set with
control input 4/bit 2, 1, 0.
Control input 4
bit2, 1, 0 = 000: Non-interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 001: Spindle synchronization
bit 2, 1, 0 = 010: Interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 100: Interpolation
(Note) Control mode is commanded from NC.
When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC (shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to
"1".
---Setting range--1 - 200 (1/s)
【#13002】
SP002 PGN Position loop gain interpolation mode
Set the position loop gain for "Interpolation" control mode. The standard setting is "33".
When the setting value increases, the tracking ability to commands will be higher and the settling
time during positioning can be shorter. However, the impact applied on the machine during
acceleration/deceleration will increase.
The position loop gain will be selected according to the control mode selection command set with
control input 4/bit 2, 1, 0.
Control input 4
bit2, 1, 0 = 000: Non-interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 001: Spindle synchronization
bit 2, 1, 0 = 010: Interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 100: Interpolation
(Note) Control mode is commanded from NC.
When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC (shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to
"1".
---Setting range--1 - 200 (1/s)
III - 198
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13003】
SP003 PGS Position loop gain spindle synchronization
Set the position loop gain for "Spindle synchronization" control mode. The standard setting is "33".
When the setting value increases, the tracking ability to commands will be higher and the settling
time during positioning can be shorter. However, the impact applied on the machine during
acceleration/deceleration will increase.
The position loop gain can be selected according to the control mode selection command set with
control input 4/bit 2, 1, 0.
Control input 4
bit2, 1, 0 = 000: Non-interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 001: Spindle synchronization
bit 2, 1, 0 = 010: Interpolation
bit 2, 1, 0 = 100: Interpolation
(Note) Control mode is commanded from NC.
When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC (shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to
"1".
---Setting range--1 - 200 (1/s)
【#13004】
SP004
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13005】
SP005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1
Set the speed loop gain.
Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be. However, vibration tends to
occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 - 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the value at which the vibration stops.
---Setting range--1 - 9999
【#13006】
SP006 VIA1 Speed loop lead compensation 1
Set the speed loop integral control gain.
The standard setting is "1900". Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when
the position droop does not stabilize (10 - 20Hz).
---Setting range--1 - 9999
【#13007】
SP007 VIL1 Speed loop delay compensation 1
Set this parameter when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, or overshooting occurs in
positioning.
Select the control method with SP033 (SFNC1)/bit1, 0 (vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When setting this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset "SP050 (TOF)".
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#13008】
SP008 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2
Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) are used.
By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to
"1", Gain 2 can be used according to the application.
Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitC)" to
"1".
Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) for the procedures.
---Setting range--1 - 9999
III - 199
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13009】
SP009 VIA2 Speed loop lead compensation 2
Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) are used.
By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to
"1", Gain 2 can be used according to the application.
Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitC)" to
"1".
Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) for the procedures.
---Setting range--1 - 9999
【#13010】
SP010 VIL2 Speed loop delay compensation 2
Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) are used.
By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to
"1", Gain 2 can be used according to the application.
Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitC)" to
"1".
Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) for the procedures.
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#13011-13013】
SP011 - SP013
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13014】
SP014 PY1 Minimum excitation rate 1
Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. The standard setting is "50".
Set to "0" when using an IPM spindle motor.
If the gear noise, etc., is large, select a small value. However, a larger setting value is more effective
for impact response.
(Note) When setting a value "50 or more", check if there is no gear noise, motor excitation noise,
vibration during low-speed rotation or vibration when the servo is locked during orientation stop,
etc.When setting a value "less than 50", check if there is no problem with the impact load response
or rigidity during servo lock.
---Setting range--0 - 100 (%)
【#13015】
SP015 PY2 Minimum excitation rate 2
Normally, SP014 (PY1) is used.
Excitation rate 2 can be used according to the application by setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit2 (pyin),
SP035 (SFNC3)/bitA (pyn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit2 (psy) to "1".
Excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting "Minimum excitation rate 2 changeover request (control
input 5/bitB)" to "1". Refer to SP014 (PY1) for the procedures.
Set to "0" when using an IPM spindle motor.
---Setting range--0 - 100 (%)
【#13016】
SP016 DDT Phase alignment deceleration rate
Set the single-rotation position alignment deceleration rate for orientation stopping, phase alignment
during rotation and changing from non-interpolation to spindle synchronization mode during rotation.
If the load inertia is large, decrease the setting.
When the setting value increases, the orientation in-position and single-rotation position alignment
will end earlier, but the impact applied on the machine will increase.
To change the deceleration rate only during rotation command (command FΔT≠0), set this
parameter together with SP070 (KDDT).
---Setting range--1 - 32767 (0.1 (r/mn)/ms)
III - 200
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13017(PR)】
SP017 SPEC1 Spindle specifications 1
Select the spindle specifications.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F,E,D,C spm Motor series selection
0000(0xxxh): 200V specification IM spindle motor 0001(1xxxh): 200V specification IPM spindle
motor
0010(2xxxh): 400V specification IM spindle motor 0011(3xxxh): 400V specification IPM spindle
motor
Bit-5 - B
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-4
fdir
Position feedback
0: Forward polarity
1: Reverse polarity
Bit-3
vfb
Speed feedback filter
0: Disable
1: Enable (2250Hz)
Bit-2
seqh
High-speed READY ON sequence
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit-1
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-0
fdir2
Speed feedback polarity
0: Forward polarity
1: Reverse polarity
【#13018(PR)】
SP018 SPEC2 Spindle specifications 2
Select the spindle specifications.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F - 9
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-8
spsu
0: rev/min
1: x4r/min
Bit-7,6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-5
mkch
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit-4,3,2
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-1
oplp
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13019(PR)】
Speed setting unit
Coil switch function
Open loop
SP019 RNG1 Position detector resolution
Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2).
(Refer to the explanation for SP020.)
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (kp/rev)
III - 201
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13020(PR)】
SP020 RNG2 Speed detector resolution
Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor side detector.
Detector TS5691 (128 teeth): SP020 = 2000
TS5691 (180 teeth): SP020 = 2880
TS5691 (256 teeth): SP020 = 4000
TS5691 (384 teeth): SP020 = 6000
TS5691 (512 teeth): SP020 = 8000
TS5690 (64 teeth): SP020 = 2000
TS5690 (128 teeth): SP020 = 4000
TS5690 (256 teeth): SP020 = 8000
【#13021(PR)】
SP021 OLT Overload detection time constant
Set the detection time constant of the overload 1 (Alarm 50).
Set to "60" as a standard.
Set "300" when using an IPM spindle motor.
---Setting range--1 - 15300 (s)
【#13022】
SP022 OLL Overload detection level
Set the current detection level of "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) as a percentage in respect to the motor
short-time rated output current.
Set to "120" as a standard.
Set to "100" when using an IPM spindle motor.
---Setting range--1 - 200 (Short-time rated %)
【#13023】 SP023 OD1 Excessive error detection width (interpolation mode, spindle synchronization)
Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation mode and spindle synchronization.
Set to "120" as a standard.
If this parameter is set to "0", excessive error detection won't be performed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (°)
【#13024】
SP024 INP
In-position width
Set the in-position detection width.
Set the positioning accuracy required for the machine.
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy will be. However, the cycle time (settling
time) will be longer. The standard setting is "875".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13025】
SP025 INP2 2nd in-position width
Use this when detecting an in-position different from normal in-position width, such as advancing the
in-position signal. The procedure is the same as SP024 (INP). The standard setting is "875".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (°/1000)
【#13026(PR)】
SP026 TSP Maximum motor speed
Set the maximum motor speed. If the actual motor speed exceeds the set maximum speed, an
overspeed alarm will occur.
---Setting range--1 - 32767 (r/min)
III - 202
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13027】
SP027 ZSP Motor zero speed
Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed. If the actual motor speed drops below the set speed,
the zero speed detection will go ON. The standard setting is "50".
---Setting range--1 - 1000 (r/min)
【#13028】
SP028 SDTS
Speed detection set value
Set the motor speed for detecting the speed. If the actual motor speed drops below the set value,
the speed detection will go ON. The standard setting is 10% of the maximum motor speed.
---Setting range--10 - 32767 (r/min)
【#13029】
SP029 SDTR Speed detection reset width
Set the hysteresis width in which the speed detection changes from ON to OFF. If the setting value
is small, the speed detection will chatter easily. The standard setting is "30".
---Setting range--10 - 1000 (r/min)
【#13030】
SP030
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13031(PR)】
SP031 MTYP Motor type
Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
Set to "2200" (fixed value).
III - 203
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13032(PR)】
SP032 PTYP
Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type
Power supply type
When connecting a power supply unit, set a code for each power supply unit.
RV[R
TV[R
COR
Bit-0 - 7
ptyp
External emergency stop setting
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled"
Power supply unit is not connected
: 0000h
MDS-D-CV-37 / MDS-DH-CV-37
: 0004h
MDS-D-CV-75 / MDS-DH-CV-75
: 0008h
MDS-D-CV-110 / MDS-DH-CV-110
: 0011h
MDS-D-CV-185 / MDS-DH-CV-185
: 0019h
MDS-D-CV-300 / MDS-DH-CV-300
: 0030h
MDS-D-CV-370 / MDS-DH-CV-370
: 0037h
MDS-D-CV-450 / MDS-DH-CV-450
: 0045h
MDS-D-CV-550
: 0055h
MDS-DH-CV-750
: 0075h
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled"
Power supply unit is not connected
: 0000h
MDS-D-CV-37 / MDS-DH-CV-37
: 0044h
MDS-D-CV-75 / MDS-DH-CV-75
: 0048h
MDS-D-CV-110 / MDS-DH-CV-110
: 0051h
MDS-D-CV-185 / MDS-DH-CV-185
: 0059h
MDS-D-CV-300 / MDS-DH-CV-300
: 0070h
MDS-D-CV-370 / MDS-DH-CV-370
: 0077h
MDS-D-CV-450 / MDS-DH-CV-450
: 0085h
MDS-D-CV-550
: 0095h
MDS-DH-CV-750
: 00B5h
Bit-8 - B
rtyp
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-C - F
amp
Not used. Set to "0".
Regenerative resistor type
Set the regenerative resistor type.
(Note) These bits are used only in MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 series.
GOIZ
TV[R
COR
Bit-0 - 3
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-4 - 7
emgx
External emergency stop function
Set the external emergency stop function. (Do not set a value other than specified.)
0: Disable
4: Enable
Bit-8 - B
rtyp
Bit-C - F
amp
For "amp = 1"
"rtyp" setting value
0: Resistor built-in drive unit
1: Setting prohibited
2: MR-RB032
3: MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK
4: MR-RB32 or GZG200W120OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
5: MR-RB30 or GZG200W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
6: MR-RB50 or GZG300W39OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
III - 204
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
7: MR-RB31 or GZG200W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
8: MR-RB51 or GZG300W20OHMK 3 units connected in parallel
9 - F: Setting prohibited
For "amp = 2"
"rtyp" setting value
0 - 3: Setting prohibited
4: FCUA-RB22
5: FCUA-RB37
6: FCUA-RB55
7, 8: Setting prohibited
9: R-UNIT2
A - C: Setting prohibited
D: FCUA-RB75/2 2 units
E, F: Setting prohibited
【#13033】
SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F - C
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-B,A
ovs
Overshoot compensation
00: Compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Setting prohibited
11:
Compensation type 3
(Note) Set the compensation amount in SP043(OVS1) and SP042(OVS2).
Bit-9,8
lmc
Lost motion compensation
00: Compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Compensation type 2
11: Setting
prohibited
(Note) Set the compensation amount in SP048(LMC1) and SP041(LMC2).
When "SP227/lmc3" is set to "1", the lost motion compensation type 3 will be selected regardless of
this setting.
Bit-7
lmc2a
Lost motion compensation 2 timing
0: Normal timing
1: Timing changed
Bit-6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-5,4
vfct
Jitter compensation
00: Disable
01: 1 pulse
10: 2 pulse
11: 3 pulse
Bit-3,2
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-1,0
vcnt
Delay compensation changeover
00: Disable
01: Changeover type 1
10: Changeover type 2
11: Changeover type 2
III - 205
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13034】
SP034 SFNC2 Spindle function 2
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F,E,D
nfd5
Depth of Notch filter 5
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 5.
Bit F,E,D=000: -∞
Bit F,E,D=001: -18[dB]
Bit F,E,D=010: -12[dB]
Bit F,E,D=011: -9[dB]
Bit F,E,D=100: -6[dB]
Bit F,E,D=101: -4[dB]
Bit F,E,D=110: -3[dB]
Bit F,E,D=111: -1 [dB]
Bit-C
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-B,A,9
nfd4
Depth of Notch filter 4
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 4.
Bit B,A,9=000: -∞
Bit B,A,9=001: -18[dB]
Bit B,A,9=010: -12[dB]
Bit B,A,9=011: -9[dB]
Bit B,A,9=100: -6[dB]
Bit B,A,9=101: -4[dB]
Bit B,A,9=110: -3[dB]
Bit B,A,9=111: -1 [dB]
Bit-8
pwm
Current control
0: Standard current control
1: High frequency current control
Bit-7,6,5
nfd2
Depth of Notch filter 2
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 2.
Bit 7,6,5=000: -∞
Bit 7,6,5=001: -18[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=010: -12[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=011: -9[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=100: -6[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=101: -4[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=110: -3[dB]
Bit 7,6,5=111: -1 [dB]
Bit-4
nfd3
Notch filter 3(1125Hz)
0: Stop
1: Start
Bit-3,2,1
nfd1
Depth of Notch filter 1
Set the filter depth of Notch filter 1.
Bit 3,2,1=000: -∞
Bit 3,2,1=001: -18[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=010: -12[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=011: -9[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=100: -6[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=101: -4[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=110: -3[dB]
Bit 3,2,1=111: -1 [dB]
Bit-0
zck
Z phase check (ALM42)
0: Enable
1: Disable
III - 206
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13035(PR)】
SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function 3
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0
0
0
0 0 0 0
0
vgin
pyin
nopc
vgn
pyn
shgn
bit-F - D
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-C shgn
SHG control
0: Stop
1: Start
bit-B
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-A pyn
Excitation rate selection
0: Select Excitation rate 1
1: Select Excitation rate 2
bit-9 vgn
Speed loop gain set selection
0: Select Set 1
1: Select Set 2
bit-8
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-7 nopc
Phase alignment
0: Start
1: Stop
bit-6 - 3
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-2 pyin
Excitation rate selection
0: Select Excitation rate 1
1: Select Excitation rate 2
bit-1 vgin
Speed loop gain set selection
0: Select Set 1
1: Select Set 2
bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13036(PR)】
SP036 SFNC4 Spindle function 4
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
bit-F - 8
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-7 mksl Spindle coil selection
0: Select the coil commanded during synchronization
bit-6,5
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-4 shgs SHG control
0: Stop
1: Start
bit-3
Not used. Set to "0".
bit-2 pys Excitation rate selection
0: Select Excitation rate 1
1: Select Excitation rate 2
bit-1 vgs Speed loop gain set selection
0: Select Gain set 1
1: Select Gain set 2
bit-0
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 207
1: Select high-speed coil
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13037】
SP037 JL
Load inertia scale
Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertia" in respect to the motor inertia.
SP037(JL) = ( Jm+Jl / Jm ) × 100
Jm : Motor inertia
Jl : Motor axis conversion load inertia
---Setting range--0 - 5000 (%)
【#13038】
SP038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs.
(Enabled at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#13039】
SP039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing
Set this parameter when the lost motion compensation timing doest not match.
Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
---Setting range--0 - 2000 (ms)
【#13040】
SP040 LMCT Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band
Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control.
When "0" is set, the actual value to be set is 2°/1000. Adjust by increasing by 1°/1000 at a time.
---Setting range--–32768 - 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13041】
SP041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2
Set this parameter as well as SP048 (LMC1) only when you wish to vary the lost motion
compensation amount depending on the command directions.
Normally set to "0".
---Setting range---1 - 200 (Short-time rated %)
Note that the range will be" -1 - 20000" (Short-time rated 0.01%) when SP227/bit2 is "1".
【#13042】
SP042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2
Set this parameter as well as SP043 (OVS1) only when you wish to vary the overshooting
compensation amount depending on the command directions.
Normally set to "0".
---Setting range---1 - 100 (Short-time rated %)
Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Short-time rated 0.01%) when SP227/bit2 is "1".
III - 208
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13043】
SP043 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1
Set this parameter when overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor
torque during positioning.
This is enabled only when the overshooting compensation SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected.
Type 3: When "SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = 11"
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current.
Increase in increments of 1%, and find the value where overshooting does not occur.
Other than Type 3: When "SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) ≠ 11"
Overshooting compensation (Type 3) is not executed.
When you wish to vary compensation amount depending on the direction
When SP042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value of SP043 (OVS1) in both of the + and directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this
parameter as well as SP042 (OVS2).
(SP043: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in the direction of the command.
---Setting range---1 - 100 (Short-time rated %)
Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Short-time rated 0.01%) when SP227/bit2 is "1".
【#13044】
SP044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain
Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and SP045 (OBS1).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 500 (%)
【#13045】
SP045 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency
Set the disturbance observer filter band.
Normally set to "100".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and SP044 (OBS2). When not using, set to
"0".
---Setting range--0 - 1000 (rad/s)
【#13046】
SP046 FHz2 Notch filter frequency 2
Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs.
(Enabled at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#13047】
SP047 EC
Inductive voltage compensation gain
Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Normally set to "100".
If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain.
---Setting range--0 - 200 (%)
III - 209
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13048】
SP048 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1
Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion,
backlash, etc) at quadrant change is too large.
This compensates the torque at quadrant change.
This is enabled only when the lost motion compensation SP033 (SFNC1/lmc) is selected.
Type 2: When "SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) = 10"
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current.
The standard setting is double the friction torque. The compensation amount will be 0 when "0" is
set.
Other than type 2: When "SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) ≠ 10"
Lost motion compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish to vary compensation amount depending on the direction
When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of SP048 (LMC1) in both of the + and directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this
parameter as well as SP041 (LMC2).
(SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in the direction of the command.
---Setting range---1 - 200 (Short-time rated %)
Note that the range will be "-1 - 20000" (Short-time rated 0.01%) when SP227/bit2 is "1".
【#13049】
SP049 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain
When a relative error during synchronization control is too large, set this parameter to the axis that
is delaying.
The standard setting value is "0". The standard setting for the SHG control is "100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 - 100 at a time.
---Setting range--0 - 999 (%)
【#13050】
SP050 TOF Torque offset
Set the unbalance torque.
---Setting range---100 - 100 (Short-time rated %)
【#13051】
SP051
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13052】
SP052
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13053】
SP053 ODS Excessive error detection width (non-interpola-tion mode)
Set the excessive error detection width for the non-interpolation mode.
Standard setting value: ODS = Maximum motor speed [r/min]×60/PGV/2
If this parameter is set to "0", excessive error detection won't be performed.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (°)
【#13054】
SP054
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 210
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13055】
SP055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop
Set a period of time from the point when the emergency stop is input to the point when READY OFF
is compulsorily executed.
Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of SP056.
When "0" is set, READY OFF is compulsorily executed after "7000ms".
---Setting range--0 - 20000 (ms)
【#13056】
SP056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop
Set the time constant used for deceleration control during emergency stop. Set the time to stop from
the maximum motor speed (TSP).
When "0" is set, the deceleration control is executed with "7000ms".
---Setting range---20000 - 20000 (ms)
【#13057(PR)】
SP057 GRA1 Spindle side gear ratio 1
Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6,
5) is set to "00".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13058(PR)】
SP058 GRA2 Spindle side gear ratio 2
Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6,
5) is set to "01".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13059(PR)】
SP059 GRA3 Spindle side gear ratio 3
Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6,
5) is set to "10".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13060(PR)】
SP060 GRA4 Spindle side gear ratio 4
Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6,
5) is set to "11".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13061(PR)】
SP061 GRB1 Motor side gear ratio 1
Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to "00".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13062(PR)】
SP062 GRB2 Motor side gear ratio 2
Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to "01".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
III - 211
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13063(PR)】
SP063 GRB3 Motor side gear ratio 3
Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to "10".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13064(PR)】
SP064 GRB4 Motor side gear ratio 4
Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to "11".
---Setting range--1 - 32767
【#13065】
SP065 TLM1 Torque limit 1
Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "001".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13066】
SP066 TLM2 Torque limit 2
Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "010".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13067】
SP067 TLM3 Torque limit 3
Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "011".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13068】
SP068 TLM4 Torque limit 4
Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to "100".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13069】
SP069 PCMP
Phase alignment completion width
Set the single-rotation position alignment completion width for phase alignment and changing from
non-interpolation to spindle synchronization mode during rotation.
Set the rotation error that is required for machine.
When the setting value decreases, the rotation error will also decrease, but the cycle time (settling
time) will increase. The standard setting is "875".
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13070】
SP070 KDDT Phase alignment deceleration rate scale
Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) when you wish to change the deceleration rate only during rotation
command (command F⊗T≠0).
When the setting value increases, the single-rotation position alignment will be completed earlier,
but the impact applied on the machine will also increase. Set to "0" when not using this function.
---Setting range--0 - 255 (1/16-fold)
III - 212
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13071】
SP071 DIQM Variable current limit during deceleration, lower limit value
Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during
deceleration according to the motor speed.
As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the current limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use this together
with SP072 (DIQN).
When DIQM is set to 100%, the current limit value for deceleration (TMRL) set in the motor
constants will be applied.
100%
(TMLR)
DIQM
0
DIQN
Motor speed
---Setting range--0 - 999 (%)
【#13072】
SP072 DIQN Variable current limit during deceleration, break point speed
Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during
deceleration according to the motor speed.
As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the current limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use this together
with SP072 (DIQN).
When DIQM is set to 100%, the current limit value for deceleration (TMRL) set in the motor
constants will be applied.
100%
(TMLR)
DIQM
0
DIQN
Motor speed
---Setting range--1 - 32767 (r/min)
【#13073】
SP073 VGVN Variable speed gain target value
If noise is bothersome during high-speed rotation, this noise can be reduced by lowering the speed
loop gain at high speeds.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN),
and use this together with SP074 (VGVS).
Set to "0" when not using this function.
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either VGN1 or VGN2 is selected.
VGN1
(VGN2)
VGVN
0
VGVS
VLMT
(VLMT=Max. speed˜1.15)
---Setting range--0 - 100 (%)
III - 213
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13074】
SP074 VGVS
Variable speed gain change start speed
If noise is bothersome during high-speed rotation, this noise can be reduced by lowering the speed
loop gain at high speeds.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN),
and use this together with SP074 (VGVS).
Set to "0" when not using this function.
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either VGN1 or VGN2 is selected.
VGN1
(VGN2)
VGVN
0
VGVS
VLMT
(VLMT=Max. speed˜1.15)
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#13075】
SP075 DWSH Slip compensation scale during regeneration High-speed coil
Set the slip frequency scale for deceleration.
Normally, set this to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 255 (1/16-fold)
【#13076】
SP076 DWSL Slip compensation scale during regeneration Low-speed coil
Set the slip frequency scale at deceleration when using the low-speed coil.
Normally, set this to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 255 (1/16-fold)
【#13077】
SP077 IQA Q axis current advance compensation
Set the current loop gain.
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#13078】
SP078 IDA D axis current advance compensation
Set the current loop gain.
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#13079】
SP079 IQG
Q axis current gain
Set the current loop gain.
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
III - 214
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13080】
SP080 IDG D axis current gain
Set the current loop gain.
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
【#13081】
SP081 IQAL Q axis current advance compensation Low-speed coil
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#13082】
SP082 IDAL D axis current advance compensation Low-speed coil
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 20480
【#13083】
SP083 IQGL Q axis current gain Low-speed coil
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
【#13084】
SP084 IDGL D axis current gain Low-speed coil
When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics, so the value is fixed by the
motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
---Setting range--1 - 8192
【#13085】
SP085
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13086】
SP086
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13087】
SP087 FHz4 Notch filter frequency 4
Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration occurs (Enabled at 50 or more).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
【#13088】
SP088 FHz5 Notch filter frequency 5
Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration occurs (Enabled at 50 or more).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range--0 - 2250 (Hz)
III - 215
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13089 - 13112】
SP089 - SP112
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13113】
SP113 OPLP Current command value for open loop
Set the current command value for when open loop control is enabled.
When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "50" is set.
Set to "0" when not using this function.
Open loop control is enabled when SP018 (SPEC2)/bit1 (oplp) is set to "1".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13114】
SP114 MKT Coil changeover gate cutoff timer
Set the time to cut off the gate when turning the coil switch contactor OFF and ON.
Set a value longer than the coil switch contactor's OFF/ON time.
The standard setting is "150".
---Setting range--0 - 3500 (ms)
【#13115】
SP115 MKT2 Coil changeover current limit timer
Set the time to limit the current immediately after the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is completed and
the gate is turned ON. The standard setting is "25".
---Setting range--0 - 3500 (ms)
【#13116】
SP116 MKIL Coil changeover current limit value
Set the time to limit the current immediately after the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is completed and
the gate is turned ON.
The standard setting is "120".
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13117】
SP117 SETM Excessive speed deviation timer
Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm.
Set the time required for the machine.
The standard setting is "12".
---Setting range--0 - 60 (s)
【#13118 - 13120】
SP118 - SP120
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13121】
SP121 MP Kpp Magnetic pole detection position loop gain
Set the position loop gain for the magnetic polar detection loop.
This is used for the initial magnetic polar detection when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor.
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#13122】
SP122 MP Kvp
Magnetic pole detection speed loop gain
Set the speed loop gain for the magnetic polar detection loop.
This is used for the initial magnetic polar detection when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor.
---Setting range--0 - 32767
III - 216
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13123】
SP123 MP Kvi
Magnetic pole detection speed loop advance compensation
Set the speed loop advance compensation for the magnetic polar detection loop.
This is used for the initial magnetic polar detection when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor.
---Setting range--0 - 32767
【#13124】
SP124 ILMTsp Magnetic pole detection current limit value
Set the current limit value for the magnetic polar detection loop.
This is used for the initial magnetic polar detection when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor.
---Setting range--0 - 999 (Short-time rated %)
【#13125】
SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
Set the data No. you wish to output to D/A output channel.
---Setting range---1 - 3, 50, 60 or 127
【#13126】
SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
Set the data No. you wish to output to D/A output channel.
---Setting range---1 - 3, 50, 60 or 127
【#13127】
SP127 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 output scale
Set the output scale in increments of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the scale will be the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---32768 - 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#13128】
SP128 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 output scale
Set the output scale in increments of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the scale will be the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---32768 - 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#13129(PR) - 13160(PR)】
SP129 - SP160
Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed coil)
The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and
specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
【#13161(PR)-13192(PR)】
SP161 - SP192
Set the unique constants for the spindle motor (Low-speed coil).
The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and
specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
【#13193 - 13224】
SP193 - SP224
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 217
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13225】
SP225 SFNC5 Spindle function 5
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
FFKT
QXUP
Bit-F,E,D,C ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 non-sensitive band
Set the non-sensitive band for overshooting compensation type 3 in increments of 2°/1000.
When using feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for the model position droop and
ignore the model overshooting. Set to "2°/1000" as a standard.
Bit-B - 6
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-5
ddir
Proximity switch signal enable edge
0: Falling edge 1: Rising edge
Bit-4 - 0
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13226】
SP226
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13227】
SP227 SFNC7 Servo function 7
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F,E,D,C dis
Digital signal input selection
0: No signal
1: Safety observation function door state signal
4: Proximity switch signal
detection
Bit-B - 3
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-2 ccu Lost motion/overshoot compensation compensation amount setting unit
0: Short-time rated %
1: Short-time rated 0.01%
Bit-1,0
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13228】
SP228 SFNC8 Spindle function 8
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F - 1
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-0
irms
Meter display
0: Display normal load meter
1: Display effective motor current
III - 218
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13229】
SP229 SFNC9 Spindle function 9
Select the spindle functions.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
Bit-F
0: Stop
ssc
1: Start
Safety observation function
Bit-E
Not used. Set to "0".
Bit-D
rps
0: °/min
1: 100°/min
Bit-C - 0
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13230】
Safety observation speed setting unit
SP230
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13231】
SP231
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13232】
SP232
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13233】
SP233 IVC
Voltage non-sensitive band compensation
When "100%" is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated.
When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%.
If the value is too large, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.
---Setting range--0 - 255 (%)
【#13234-13236】
SP234 - SP236
Not used. Set to "0".
【#13237(PR)】
SP237 TCF Torque command filter
Set the filter for the torque command. Set to "0" when not using this function.
The standard value is "500" when using the motor side detector TS5690 or TS5691.
---Setting range--0 - 4500 (Hz)
【#13238】
SP238 SSCFEED Safety observation safety speed
Set to "0" when not using this function.
---Setting range--0 - 18000 (°/min)
【#13239】
SP239 SSCRPM Safety observation safety motor speed
Set the motor's safety speed for the safety observation function.
Set to "0" when not using this function.
---Setting range--0 - 32767 (r/min)
【#13240(PR)】
SP240
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 219
7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 Spindle Parameters
【#13241(PR) - 13256(PR)】
SP241 - SP256
This is automatically set by the NC system.
III - 220
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
7.3 Supplement
7.3.1 D/A Output Numbers
7.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series
(1) D/A output specifications
Item
No. of channels
Output cycle
Output precision
Output voltage
range
Output
magnification
setting
Output pin
(CN9 connector)
Explanation
2ch
0.8ms (min. value)
12bit
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
CN9 connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
±32768
MO1 = Pin 9
MO2 = Pin 19
LG = Pin 1, 11
Name
LG
MO1
(2) Setting the output data
Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
#
No.
Abbrev.
Parameter name
13125 SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
13126 SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
III - 221
Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
LG
MO2
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
<Standard output>
No.
Output unit
for standard setting
Output data
-1
0
1
2
3
D/A output stop
Commanded motor rotation speed
Motor rotation speed
Torque current command
Torque current feedback
1000(r/min)/V
1000(r/min)/V
Short time rated ratio 100%/V
Short time rated ratio 100%/V
35
Disturbance observer estimated
disturbance torque
Short time rated torque current value ratio
100%/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/s/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1°/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/s/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/s/V
50
51
52
53
54
60
61
62
63
64
70
71
72
73
74
126
127
Saw tooth wave
2.5V test data output
1/1000°/V
1°/V
1000°/V
0V to 5V
2.5V
III - 222
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
<Spindle control signal>
Spindle control input (NC to SP)
No.
Details
16384
16385
16391
16392
16393
16394
16409
16410
16411
16432
16433
16434
16436
16437
16438
Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No.
Details
Spindle control
input 1-0
Spindle control
input 1-1
READY ON
command
Servo ON command
16480 Spindle control
output 1-0
16481 Spindle control
output 1-1
Spindle control
input 1-7
Spindle control
input 1-8
Spindle control
input 1-9
Spindle control
input 1-A
Alarm reset command
16487 Spindle control
output 1-7
16488 Spindle control
output 1-8
16489 Spindle control
output 1-9
16490 Spindle control
output 1-A
In alarm
16492 Spindle control
output 1-C
In in-position
16495 Spindle control
output 1-F
16496 Spindle control
output 2-0
In warning
16499 Spindle control
output 2-3
In zero speed
16503 Spindle control
output 2-7
In external
emergency stop
Torque limit 1
selection command
Torque limit 2
selection command
Torque limit 3
selection command
In ready ON
In servo ON
In torque limit 1
selection
In torque limit 2
selection
In torque limit 3
selection
Z phase passed
Spindle control
input 2-9
Spindle control
input 2-A
Spindle control
input 2-B
Speed monitor
command valid
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(all drive units)
16505 Spindle control
output 2-9
16506 Spindle control
output 2-A
16507 Spindle control
output 2-B
In speed monitor
Spindle control
input 4-0
Spindle control
input 4-1
Spindle control
input 4-2
Spindle control
input 4-4
Spindle control
input 4-5
Spindle control
input 4-6
Spindle control mode
selection command 1
Spindle control mode
selection command 2
Spindle control mode
selection command 3
Gear changeover
command
Gear selection
command 1
Gear selection
command 2
16528 Spindle control
output 4-0
16529 Spindle control
output 4-1
16530 Spindle control
output 4-2
16532 Spindle control
output 4-4
16533 Spindle control
output 4-5
16534 Spindle control
output 4-6
In spindle control
mode selection 1
In spindle control
mode selection 2
In spindle control
mode selection 3
In gear changeover
command
In gear selection 1
III - 223
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(self drive unit)
In gear selection 2
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
Spindle control input (NC to SP)
No.
16445 Spindle control
input 4-D
Spindle control output (SP to NC)
Details
No.
16541 Spindle control
output 4-D
In L coil selection
16545 Spindle control
output 5-1
Speed detection
16550 Spindle control
output 5-6
In coil changeover
16554 Spindle control
output 5-A
In phase
synchronization
suppression
16555 Spindle control
output 5-B
16460 Spindle control
input 5-C
16461 Spindle control
input 5-D
Phase
synchronization
suppression
command
Minimum excitation
rate 2 changeover
request
Speed gain set 2
changeover request
Zero point
re-detection request
16462 Spindle control
input 5-E
Spindle holding
force up
16558 Spindle control
output 5-E
16559 Spindle control
output 5-F
In minimum
excitation rate 2
selection
In speed gain set 2
selection
Zero point
re-detection
complete
Spindle holding
force up completed
In 2nd in-position
16458 Spindle control
input 5-A
16459 Spindle control
input 5-B
L coil selection
command
Details
III - 224
16556 Spindle control
output 5-C
16557 Spindle control
output 5-D
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
7.3.1.2 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series
(1) D/A output specifications
Item
No. of channels
Output cycle
Output precision
Output voltage
range
Output
magnification
setting
Output pin
(CN9 connector)
Explanation
2ch
0.8ms (min. value)
10bit
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
±32768
MO1 = Pin 4
MO2 = Pin 14
GND = Pins 1, 11
III - 225
CN9 connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
LG
MO1
Pin
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Name
LG
MO2
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
(2) Setting the output data
Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
#
No.
Abbrev.
Parameter name
13125 SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
13126 SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
<Standard output>
No.
Output unit
for standard setting
Output data
0
1
2
3
Commanded motor rotation speed
Motor rotation speed
Torque current command
Torque current feedback
1000(r/min)/V
1000(r/min)/V
Short time rated ratio 100%/V
Short time rated ratio 100%/V
35
Disturbance observer estimated
disturbance torque
Short time rated torque current value ratio
100%/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/V
1/1000°/s/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1°/V
1°/V
1°/V
1°/s/V
Position droop
Position command
Position feedback
Position F⊿T
Deviation from ideal position
(considering spindle tracking delay)
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/V
1000°/s/V
50
51
52
53
54
60
61
62
63
64
70
71
72
73
74
126
127
Saw tooth wave
2.5V test data output
1/1000°/V
1°/V
1000°/V
0V to 5V
2.5V
III - 226
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
<Spindle control signal>
Spindle control input (NC to SP)
No.
Details
Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No.
Details
16384 Spindle control
input 1-0
16385 Spindle control
input 1-1
READY ON
command
Servo ON command
16480 Spindle control
output 1-0
16481 Spindle control
output 1-1
16391 Spindle control
input 1-7
16392 Spindle control
input 1-8
16393 Spindle control
input 1-9
16394 Spindle control
input 1-A
Alarm reset
command
Torque limit 1
selection command
Torque limit 2
selection command
Torque limit 3
selection command
16487 Spindle control
output 1-7
16488 Spindle control
output 1-8
16489 Spindle control
output 1-9
16490 Spindle control
output 1-A
In alarm
16492 Spindle control
output 1-C
In in-position
16495 Spindle control
output 1-F
16496 Spindle control
output 2-0
In warning
16499 Spindle control
output 2-3
In zero speed
16503 Spindle control
output 2-7
In external
emergency stop
In ready ON
In servo ON
In torque limit 1
selection
In torque limit 2
selection
In torque limit 3
selection
Z phase passed
16409 Spindle control
input 2-9
16410 Spindle control
input 2-A
16411 Spindle control
input 2-B
Speed monitor
command valid
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(all drive units)
16505 Spindle control
output 2-9
16506 Spindle control
output 2-A
16507 Spindle control
output 2-B
In speed monitor
16432 Spindle control
input 4-0
16433 Spindle control
input 4-1
16434 Spindle control
input 4-2
16436 Spindle control
input 4-4
16437 Spindle control
input 4-5
16438 Spindle control
input 4-6
Spindle control mode
selection command 1
Spindle control mode
selection command 2
Spindle control mode
selection command 3
Gear changeover
command
Gear selection
command 1
Gear selection
command 2
16528 Spindle control
output 4-0
16529 Spindle control
output 4-1
16530 Spindle control
output 4-2
16532 Spindle control
output 4-4
16533 Spindle control
output 4-5
16534 Spindle control
output 4-6
In spindle control
mode selection 1
In spindle control
mode selection 2
In spindle control
mode selection 3
In gear changeover
command
In gear selection 1
III - 227
In door closed
(controller)
In door closed
(self drive unit)
In gear selection 2
7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 Supplement
Spindle control input (NC to SP)
No.
16445 Spindle control
input 4-D
Spindle control output (SP to NC)
Details
No.
16541 Spindle control
output 4-D
In L coil selection
16545 Spindle control
output 5-1
Speed detection
16550 Spindle control
output 5-6
In coil changeover
16554 Spindle control
output 5-A
In phase
synchronization
suppression
16555 Spindle control
output 5-B
16460 Spindle control
input 5-C
16461 Spindle control
input 5-D
Phase
synchronization
suppression
command
Minimum excitation
rate 2 changeover
request
Speed gain set 2
changeover request
Zero point
re-detection request
16462 Spindle control
input 5-E
Spindle holding
force up
16558 Spindle control
output 5-E
16559 Spindle control
output 5-F
In minimum
excitation rate 2
selection
In speed gain set 2
selection
Zero point
re-detection
complete
In spindle holding
force up
In 2nd in-position
16458 Spindle control
input 5-A
16459 Spindle control
input 5-B
L coil selection
command
Details
III - 228
16556 Spindle control
output 5-C
16557 Spindle control
output 5-D
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.
【#7900(PR)】
RCDAX_I Orthogonal coordinate horizontal axis name
Set the name of the horizontal axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range--A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7901(PR)】
RCDAX_J Orthogonal coordinate vertical axis name
Set the name of the vertical axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range--A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7902(PR)】
RCDAX_K Orthogonal coordinate height axis name
Set the name of the height axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range--A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7903】
G92_CRD Origin zero set coordinate selection
Select the coordinate to preset when issuing an origin zero command (G92X_Y_Z_;).
0: Tool center coordinate
1: Holder center coordinate
【#7904】
NO_TIP Tool handle feed function selection
Select whether to enable the tool handle feed.
0: Enable (tool handle feed)
1: Disable (standard)
【#7905】
NO_ABS Selection of tool axis travel amount display at manual ABS switch ON/OFF
Select how to update the display of tool axis travel amount.
0: Update at ABS switch OFF
1: Update at every ON and OFF of ABS switch
【#7906】
PASSTYP Singular point passage type
Select the movement after passing a singular point.
0: Type 1
A/B axis rotation angle will be in the same sign direction as that when the tool center point control
started.
1: Type 2
C axis rotation amount on the singular point will be smaller.
【#7907】
CHK_ANG Near singular judgment angle
Set the angle for judging a position near the singular point.
---Setting range--0.000 to 5.000 (°)
【#7908】
SLCT_PRG_COORD Programming coordinate system selection
Select the coordinate system for the programming coordinate.
0: Table coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system (coordinate system that rotates together with workpiece)
【#7909】
IJK_VEC_MR Posture vector mirror image selection
Select whether to enable the mirror image on the posture vector (IJK) when Type 2 is selected in
"#7906 PASSTYP".
0: Disable
1: Enable
III - 229
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
【#7910】
SLCT_INT_MODE Interpolation method selection
Select the interpolation method.
0: Joint interpolation method
1: Single axis rotation interpolation method
【#7911】
SLCT_STANDARD_POS Rotary axis basic position selection
Select the basic position of the rotary axis.
0: Workpiece coordinate zero point
1: The position when the tool center point is commanded.
(Note) Even if the position is changed, it is not changed during tool center point control. It is
changed when next tool center point control will be commanded.
【#7913】
MCHN_SPEED_CTRL Machine speed fluctuation suppression
Select whether to suppress the machine speed fluctuation due to rotary axis movement.
0: Suppress
1: Do not suppress
【#7920(PR)】
SLCT_T1 Rotary axis selection
Select in which axis direction to rotate the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
If the tool axis is inclined, use the second digit to set the axis direction in which the tool axis is
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) 0 to 99 can be set from the screen, but if an invalid value is set, the operation error "M01
0127 Rot axis parameter error" will occur when the power supply is turned ON.
---Setting range--0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7921(PR)】
TIANGT1 Inclination angle
Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type base-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as plus direction.
---Setting range---359.999 to 359.999 (°)
(Follow as "#1003 iunit Input setup unit".)
【#7922(PR)】
ROTAXT1 Rotary axis name
Set the name of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
Set "0" when the axis has the mechanical axis specifications. (The setting is, however, invalid in the
tool center point control.)
---Setting range--0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7923】
DIR_T1 Rotation direction
Select the rotation direction of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7924】
COFST1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary
axis and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 230
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
【#7925】
COFST1V
Vertical axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis
and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7926】
COFST1T
Height axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the height axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis
and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7927】
CERRT1H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the tool rotating type base-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7928】
CERRT1V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type base-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7930(PR)】
SLCT_T2 Rotary axis center
Select in which axis direction to rotate the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
If the tool axis is inclined, use the second digit to set the axis direction in which the tool axis is
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) 0 to 99 can be set from the screen, but if an invalid value is set, the operation error "M01
0127 Rot axis parameter error" will occur when the power supply is turned ON.
---Setting range--0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7931(PR)】
TIANGT2 Inclination angle
Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type tool-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as plus direction.
---Setting range---359.999 to 359.999 (°)
(Follow as "#1003 iunit Input setup unit".)
【#7932(PR)】
ROTAXT2 Rotary axis name
Set the name of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
Set "0" when the axis has the mechanical axis specifications. (The setting is, however, invalid in the
tool center point control.)
---Setting range--0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7933】
DIR_T2 Rotation direction
Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
III - 231
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
【#7934】
COFST2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation
center of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7935】
COFST2V
Vertical axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation
center of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7936】
COFST2T
Height axis rotation center offset
Set the distance in the height axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation
center of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7937】
CERRT2H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7938】
CERRT2V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7940(PR)】
SLCT_W1 Rotary axis selection
Select in which axis direction to rotate the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
If the tool axis is inclined, use the second digit to set the axis direction in which the tool axis is
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) 0 to 99 can be set from the screen, but if an invalid value is set, the operation error "M01
0127 Rot axis parameter error" will occur when the power supply is turned ON.
---Setting range--0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7941(PR)】
TIANGW1 Inclination angle
Set the inclination angle if the table-rotation type base-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as plus direction.
---Setting range---359.999 to 359.999 (°)
(Follow as "#1003 iunit Input setup unit".)
III - 232
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
【#7942(PR)】
ROTAXW1 Rotary axis name
Set the name of the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
Set "0" when the axis has the mechanical axis specifications. (The setting is, however, invalid in the
tool center point control.)
---Setting range--0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7943】
DIR_W1 Rotation direction
Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7944】
COFSW1H
Horizontal axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the horizontal axis direction from
the machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7945】
COFSW1V Vertical axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the vertical axis direction from the
machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7946】
COFSW1T Height axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the height axis direction from the
machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7947】
CERRW1H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the table rotating type
base-side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7948】
CERRW1V
Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the table rotating type base-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7950(PR)】
SLCT_W2 Rotary axis selection
Set in which direction to rotate the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
If the tool axis is inclined, use the second digit to set the axis direction in which the tool axis is
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) 0 to 99 can be set from the screen, but if an invalid value is set, the operation error "M01
0127 Rot axis parameter error" will occur when the power supply is turned ON.
---Setting range--0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
III - 233
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
【#7951(PR)】
TIANGW2 Inclination angle
Set the inclination angle if the table rotatiing type workpiece-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the
angle regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as minus direction.
---Setting range---359.999 to 359.999 (°)
(Follow as "#1003 iunit Input setup unit".)
【#7952(PR)】
ROTAXW2 Rotary axis name
Set the name of the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
Set "0" when the axis has the mechanical axis specifications. (The setting is, however, invalid in the
tool center point control.)
---Setting range--0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7953】
DIR_W2 Rotation direction
Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7954】
COFSW2H
Horizontal axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the horizontal axis direction
between rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7955】
COFSW2V Vertical axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the vertical axis direction between
rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7956】
COFSW2T Height axis rotation center offset
When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the height axis direction between
rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7957】
CERRW2H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the table rotating type
workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7958】
CERRW2V
Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount
Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the table rotating type
workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
III - 234
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline
Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and
memorized relative position compensation.
(1) Memorized pitch error compensation
According to the specified parameters‚ this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball
screw pitch error‚ etc.
With the reference position defined as the base‚ set the compensation amount in the division points
obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1. 1)
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system.
Select the desired method with the #4000:Pinc. Machine position is compensated between division
points n and n+1 as much as compensation amount between them by linear approximation.
Real machine
position
Ideal machine
position
Real machine position for
which no compensation
has been made
S
S
S
Command machine
position
Reference position
Compensation
amount
Fig. 1.1
Compensation
amount
between
division points
S: Division point
S
S
S
n
n+1
n+2
Command machine position
Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
III - 235
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline
(2) Memorized relative position compensation
This method‚ according to the parameters specified in advance‚ compensates the relative position error
between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand.
For this‚ as shown in Fig. 1. 2‚ specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the
division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis.
The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This
axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate axis
that is orthogonal to the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis.
The section between division points n and n+1 is compensated smoothly by linear approximation.
Actual machine position
of compensation axis
Actual machine position for
which no compensation
has been made
S: Division point
Reference position
Compensation
amount
Fig. 1.2
【#4000(PR)】
S
S
S
n
n+1
n+2
T
T
T
Command machine
position along base axis
Command machine position
Compensation amount
between division points
Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
Pinc Machine error compensation increment method
Select the method to set the machine error compensation data.
---Setting range--0: Absolute amount method
1: Incremental amount method
III - 236
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline
<1st axis>
【#4001】
cmpax Basic axis
Set a name of the basic axis for machine error compensation.
(1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the name of the axis to be compensated.
(2) For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be the basic axis.
Set "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-part system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd part system: 2Z
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C
【#4002】
drcax Compensation axis
Set a name of the compensation axis for machine error compensation.
(1) For pitch error compensation, set the same axis name as in "#4001 cmpax".
(2) For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be actually compensated.
Set "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-part system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd part system: 2Z
---Setting range--Axis name such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C
【#4003】
rdvno
Division point number at reference position
Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference position. As the reference position is
actually the base position, there is no compensation No. Therefore set the number that is
decremented by 1.
---Setting range--4101 to 5124
【#4004】
mdvno
Division point number at the most negative side
Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the negative side.
---Setting range--4101 to 5124
【#4005】
pdvno
Division point number at the most positive side
Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the positive side.
---Setting range--4101 to 5124
【#4006】
sc Compensation scale factor
Set the scale factor for the compensation amount.
---Setting range--0 to 99
【#4007】
spcdv Division interval
Set the interval to divide the basic axis.
Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these intervals.
---Setting range--1 to 9999999 (control unit applied)
III - 237
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline
2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis 9th axis 10th axis
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
#
4101
y
y
y
5124
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
Item
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
Set the parameters
corresponding to the 1st
axis’ parameters 4001 to
4007 for each axis.
A maximum of 6 axes can
be controlled‚ but as the
relative position is
compensated‚ settings for
10 axes can be made.
Details
Setting range
Set the compensation amount for each axis. -32768 to 32767
The actual
compensa-tion amount
will be the value
obtained by multiplying
the setting value with
the compensation
scale.
III - 238
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.2 Setting Compensation Data
9.2 Setting Compensation Data
Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system.
"#4000:Pinc" 0: Absolute system
1: Incremental system
(1) Absolute system
Feed from the reference position to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 2.1. The following is
obtained at this time. Set it as the compensation amount.
(Specified position - Real machine position) × 2 (Unit of output)
For example‚ assume that the feed from the reference position to the +100mm position is executed. Also‚
assume that the real machine position is 99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the
compensation amount used at the +100mm position:
(100000 - 99990) × 2 = 20 pulses
The resultant value is defined as the compensation amount. Assume that the real machine position
resulting when feed to the -100mm position is executed‚ is -99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value is
defined as the compensation amount used at the -100mm position:
(-100000 - (-99990)) × 2 = -20 pulses
-100
+99.990
Compensation
amount:
20 pulses
(10um)
Compensation
amount:
-20 pulses
(-10um)
-99.990
+100
Fig. 2.1
(2) Incremental system
Fig. 2.2 contains a machine position that is placed in the positive direction with respect to the reference
position. Assume that feed from division n-1 to n (division interval) is executed. In this case‚ the following
value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval - Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)
III - 239
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.2 Setting Compensation Data
(3) Fig. 2.3 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the reference
position. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this case‚
the following value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval + Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)
1
n
n+1
n: Division point compensation number
1: Division interval
n-1
n
1
Fig. 2.2
Fig. 2.3
Unit
: Unit of output
Range : -128 to 127
(Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting. The actual unit of compensation pulses depends
on the compensation scale factor.
III - 240
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
(1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno":
Compensation amount
in incremental system
(1)
(3)
(-3)
(-2)
(0)
(3)
Error
#4101
#4102
3
#4103
#4104
#4105
#4106
2
1
Base axis machine
coordinate
-1
-2
-3
(3)
Compensation amount
in absolute system
Division point number
(-2)
(0)
(-2)
(-1)
rdvno
4103
Specified machine position -300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000
mdvno
4101
Real machine position
pdvno
4106
Compensa- Incremental
tion amount Absolute
#4101
(1)
#4102
#4103
#4104
#4105
#4106
-299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999
2
6
-6
-4
0
6
-2
0
6
-4
-4
2
If the setting range ("mdvno" to "pdvno") is exceeded‚ the compensation will be based on compensation
amount at "mdvno" or "pdvno".
III - 241
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range:
Compensation amount
in incremental system
(-2)
(1)
(0)
(3)
(1)
Error
3
#4113
#4114
#4115
#4116
#4117
2
1
Base axis machine
coordinate
-1
-2
-3
(-2)
(-1)
Compensation amount
in absolute system
(-1)
(2)
(3)
Division point number
Compensa- Incremental
tion amount Absolute
#4113
-4
#4114
2
#4115
0
#4116
6
#4117
2
rdvno
mdvno
4112
4113
-4
-2
-2
4
6
pdvno
4117
If the machine position exceeds "pdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on the compensation amount at
"pdvno". If the machine position is negative in this case‚ no compensation will be executed.
III - 242
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range:
Compensation amount
in incremental system
(-1)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(0)
(-3)
Error
#4125
#4126
#4127
#4128
#4129
#4130
3
2
1
Base axis
machine
coordinate
-1
-2
-3
(3)
(3)
(2)
(-1)
Compensation amount
in absolute system
Division point number
Compensa-ti Incremental
on amount
Absolute
(-2)
(-1)
#4125
-2
#4126
2
#4127
6
#4128
2
#4129
0
#4130
-6
rdvno
mdvno
4130
4125
-2
-4
-2
4
6
6
pdvno
4130
If the machine position exceeds "mdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at
"mdvno".
III - 243
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis
(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference position:
Compensation
amount in
incremental system
Error
3
#4135
#4136
(-1)
(-1)
#4137
(1)
(3)
#4138
#4140
#4139
2
1
Base axis machine
coordinate
-1
-2
-3
Compensation
amount in
absolute system
(-1)
(-2)
(1)
(2)
Division point number
Compensa-ti Incremental
on amount
Absolute
#4135
#4136
#4137
#4138
#4139
#4140
rdvno
4134
-2
-2
6
2
mdvno
4136
-2
-4
2
4
pdvno
4140
In this case‚ the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting rule applies
also when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine positions and no
reference position.
III - 244
9. Machine Error Compensation
9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis
9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis
Compensation amount
in incremental system
(-2)
(1)
(0)
(3)
(1)
(-3)
Error
3
#4123
#4125
#4124
#4126
#4128
#4127
2
1
360°
Base axis machine
coordinate
-1
-2
-3
(-2)
(-1)
(-1)
Compensation amount
in absolute system
(2)
(3)
(0)
Division point number
Compensa-ti Incremental
on amount
Absolute
#4123
-4
#4124
2
#4125
0
#4126
6
#4127
2
#4128
-6
rdvno
mdvno
4122
4123
-4
-2
-2
4
6
0
pdvno
4128
In this case‚ the sum of the compensation amounts set according to the incremental system is always "0".
For the absolute system‚ the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0".
III - 245
10. PLC Constants
10.1 PLC Timer
10. PLC Constants
10.1 PLC Timer
#
PLC device
16000
:
:
:
:
16703
T0
:
:
:
:
T703
Item
PLC timer
<10ms/100ms>
Details
Set the time for the timer used in the PLC
program (ladder).
The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are
identified by the command used.
(Note) This setting value is valid when
parameter "#6449 bit0" in the
following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to
"0".
Setting range
0 to 32767
(×10ms or ×100ms)
(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable timer)
(Note 2) The fixed timer and variable timer range can be set with the bit selection parameters (#6454/bit0 to
bit3).
No. of
points
Range
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
All points
None
#16000 to #16099
#16000 to #16199
#16000 to #16299
#16000 to #16399
#16000 to #16499
#16000 to #16599
#16000 to #16703
Bit selection parameter (#6454)
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
III - 246
Fixed timer/
variable timer
All fixed timers
Variable timers in
range on left
All variable timers
10. PLC Constants
10.2 PLC Integrated Timer
10.2 PLC Integrated Timer
#
PLC device
17000
:
:
17063
ST0
:
:
ST63
Item
Details
Setting range
PLC integrated Set the time for the integrated timer used with 0 to 32767 (×100ms)
timer
the PLC program (ladder).
<100ms INC.> (Note) This setting value is valid when
parameter "#6449 bit0" in the following
"[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
integrated timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable integrated
timer)
(Note 2) The fixed integrated timer and variable integrated timer range can be set with the bit selection
parameters (#6454/bit5 to bit7).
No. of
points
Range
0
None
20
#17000 to #17019
40
#17000 to #17039
All points #17000 to #17063
Bit selection parameter (#6453)
bit7
bit6
bit5
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Fixed integrated timer/
variable integrated timer
All fixed integrated timers
Variable integrated timers in
range on left
All variable integrated timers
10.3 PLC Counter
#
PLC device
17200
:
:
:
17455
C000
:
:
:
C255
Item
Counter
Details
Setting range
Set the time for the counter used with the PLC 0 to 32767
program (ladder).
(Note) This setting value is valid when
parameter "#6449 bit1" in the following
"[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
(Note 1) Setting the counter setting value from the setting and display unit
The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed counter)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable counter)
(Note 2) The fixed counter and variable counter range can be set with the bit selection parameters
(#6454/bit4 to bit7).
No. of
points
Range
0
40
80
120
160
200
240
All points
None
#17200 to #17239
#17200 to #17279
#17200 to #17319
#17200 to #17359
#17200 to #17399
#17200 to #17439
#17200 to #17455
Bit selection parameter (#6454)
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
III - 247
Fixed counter/
variable counter
All fixed counters
Variable counter in
range on left
All variable counters
10. PLC Constants
10.4 PLC Constants
10.4 PLC Constants
#
PLC device
Item
18001 R7500,7501 PLC constant
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
18150 R7798,7799
Details
Setting range
Set the value to be set in the data type R -99999999 to
register used in the PLC program (ladder). 99999999
Even if the data is set in the R register that
corresponds to the PLC side when this
parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not
change. Enter a different screen once‚
and then select this screen again.
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit
#
6401
6402
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6495
6496
PLC device
Item
R7800-Low Bit selection
R7800-High
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
R7847-Low
R7847-High
Details
Setting range
This is the bit type parameter used in the 0: OFF
PLC program (ladder).
1: ON
Even if the data is set in the R register that
corresponds to the PLC side when this
parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not
change. Enter a different screen once‚
and then select this screen again. Some
of the parameters following #6449 may be
fixed according to the usage purpose.
Refer to the PLC Program Development
On-board Instruction Manual.
6497
6498
:
:
:
:
:
6595
6596
R7848-Low Bit selection
R7848-High expansion
:
:
:
:
:
R7897-Low
R7897-High
This is the bit type parameter (expansion) 0: OFF
used in the PLC program (ladder).
1: ON
Even if the data is set in the R register that
corresponds to the PLC side when this
parameter is displayed‚ the screen will not
change. Enter a different screen once‚
and then select this screen again.
III - 248
10. PLC Constants
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit
Table: "Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496"
0
Symbol
7
name
#6449 Control unit
R7824 L temperature
1
#6450
R7824 H
-
-
2
#6451
R7825 L
-
-
3
#6452
R7825 H
-
-
4
#6453
R7826 L
6
5
4
-
-
-
alarm ON
-
Serial GPP
communication ON
-
3
2
Integrating
Counter C
timer ST
retention
retention
Operator
message
ON
-
-
-
-
-
Serial handy
terminal
communication
ON
-
-
-
-
1
0
PLC counter
program ON
1
PLC timer
program ON
0
Alarm
message
R type F type ON
Simple mode
ON
-
-
-
PLC integrated timer
Number of variable integrated timer
Message language selection code
points setting
5
#6454
R7826 H
6
#6455
R7827 L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
#6456
R7827 H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
#6457
R7828 L
9
#6458
R7828 H
#6459
A R7829 L
Counter C number of variable/fixed points setting
Timer T number of variable/fixed points setting
High-speed input specification 1
High-speed input specification 2
High-speed input specification 3
#6460
R7829
H
B
High-speed input specification spare
#6461
C R7830 L
High-speed output specification 1
#6462
R7830
H
D
#6463
E R7831 L
#6464
R7831
H
F
High-speed output specification 2
High-speed output specification 3
High-speed output specification spare
III - 249
10. PLC Constants
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit
0
Symbol
name
#6465
R7832 L
1
#6466
R7832 H
2
#6467
R7833 L
3
#6468
R7833 H
4
#6469
R7834 L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
#6470
R7834 H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
#6471
R7835 L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
#6472
R7835 H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
#6473
R7836 L
9
#6474
R7836 H
A
#6475
R7837 L
B
#6476
R7837 H
C
#6477
R7838 L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
#6478
R7838 H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
#6479
R7839 L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
F
#6480
R7839 H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
High-speed input specification spare
High-speed output specification spare
(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0.
(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi.
III - 250
11. Macro List
11. Macro List
#
Item
7001 M [01]
to
to
7091 M [10]
Details
Setting range (unit)
<Code>
1 to 9999
Set the M code used for calling out the macro with the
M command.
This is valid when "#1195 Mmac" is set to 1.
7002
to
7092
<Type>
Set the macro call out type.
0
M98 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
1
G65 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
2
G66 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
3
G66.1 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
0 to 3
others M98 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
7003
to
7093
<Program No.>
Set the No. of the program to be called out.
M2mac
7102
Program name or file
name
(up to 32 characters)
Set the type and program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd
miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the "#1170
M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is set to 1.
<Type>
0 to 3
Same as the M call macro.
7103
<Program No.>
Same as the M call macro.
Program name or file
name
(up to 32 characters)
7201 G [01]
to
to
7291 G [10]
<Code>
Set the G code to be used when calling the macro
with a G command. Do not set a G code used in the
system.
1 to 255
7202
to
7292
<Type>
Same as the M call Marco.
0 to 3
7203
to
7293
<Program No.>
Same as the M call Marco.
Program name or file
name
(up to 32 characters)
Smac
Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with an S command.
This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to 1.
7302
<Type>
Same as the M call Marco.
0 to 3
7303
<Program No.>
Same as the M call Marco.
Program name or file
name
(up to 32 characters)
Tmac
Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with a T command.
This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to 1.
7312
<Type>
Same as the M call macro.
0 to 3
7313
<Program No.>
Same as the M call macro.
Program name or file
name
(up to 32 characters)
III - 251
11. Macro List
#
Item
7401 ASCII
[01]
Details
The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to
7405) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Setting range
Valid
7402
Code
Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the
ASCII code.
L system:
A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K,
M, Q, R, S, T
M system:
A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q,
R, S, T
7403
Type
0 to 3
7404
Program
No.
Set the macro call type.
0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1
Set the program No. called with macro call.
7405
Variable
7411 ASCII
[02]
Valid
7412
0/1
0 to 99999999
When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set
after the ASCII code.
The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to
7415) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
100 to 149
Code
Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the
ASCII code.
L system:
A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K,
M, Q, R, S, T
M system:
A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q,
R, S, T
7413
Type
Set the macro call type.
0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1
0 to 3
7414
Program
No.
Set the program No. called with macro call.
0 to 99999999
7415
Variable
When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set
after the ASCII code.
100 to 149
III - 252
0/1
12. Position Switch
12. Position Switch
The position switch (PSW) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the
machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding
coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance. When the machine reaches the
imaginary dog position‚ a signal is output to the PLC interface. The position switch thus works as an
imaginary dog switch.
#
7500
Item
High-speed
switching of
position switch
Details
Setting range (unit)
Specify whether to perform position switch 0/1
area checking at high speeds.
0: Do not perform position switch area
checking at high speed (do it the same
as before).
1: Perform position switch area checking
at high speed.
75…1 <axis>
Axis name
Specify the name of the axis for which a
position switch is provided.
75…2 <dog1>
Imaginary dog
position 1
When the machine enters the range
-99999.999 to
between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, 99999.999
a signal is output to the PLC.
(mm)
75…3 <dog2>
Imaginary dog
position 2
1st part system device
2nd part system device
75…4 <check>
Selection of area
check method
0/1
When position switch area checking at
high speed is selected, specify the mode
of area checking, i.e., whether to use the
command type machine position or
detector feedback position, for each
position switch point.
0: Use the command type machine
position as the machine position for
position switch area checking.
1: Use the detector feedback position as
the machine position for position switch
area checking.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when
1 set in "#7500 Pcheck. "
Pcheck
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
or C axis address
: X1D00
: X1D20
Position switch Nos. of PSW1 to PSW24 and signal devices
Part system 1 Part system 2
device
device
<axis>
<dog1>
<dog2>
<check>
PSW1
#7501
#7502
#7503
#7504
X1D00
X1D20
PSW2
#7511
#7512
#7513
#7514
X1D01
X1D21
PSW3
#7521
#7522
#7523
#7524
X1D02
X1D22
PSW4
#7531
#7532
#7533
#7534
X1D03
X1D23
:
PSW24
:
#7731
:
#7732
:
#7733
:
#7734
:
X1D17
:
X1D37
Instead of the dog switch provided on the machine axis‚ the coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions
(dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axis of the axis name preset with axis are set with the position switches
(PSW1 - PSW24). When the machine reaches the position‚ the signal is output to the device corresponding to
the PLC interface.
III - 253
12. Position Switch
Example of settings of dog1 and dog2 and operation
Setting of dog1 and
dog2
dog1, dog2 position
dog1 < dog2
dog1 > dog2
dog1 = dog2
dog1
dog2
Operation
dog2
dog1
Basic machine coordinate
system zero point
A signal is output between
dog1 and dog2.
Imaginary
dog
A signal is output between
dog2 and dog1.
dog1
PSW
width
dog2
If dog1 equals dog2‚ the
dog1 position triggers a
signal.
dog1 = dog2
Rotary axis
Setting of dog1 and dog2
dog1 < dog2
dog1, dog2 position
dog2
dog1
(Example)
dog1 = 30.000
dog2 = 330.000
dog1
dog2
(Example)
dog1 = -30.000
dog2 = 30.000
dog1 > dog2
dog1
dog2
(Example)
dog1 = 330.000
dog2 = 30.000
|dog1 - dog2| ≥ 360
dog2 dog1
(Example)
dog1 = 30.000
dog2 = 390.000
III - 254
Description
A signal is output
between dog1 and dog2.
A signal is also output
when dog1 is negative.
A signal is output
between dog2 and dog1.
A signal is kept output
when the difference
between dog1 and dog2
exceeds 360 degrees.
12. Position Switch
12.1 Canceling the Position Switch
12.1 Canceling the Position Switch
To cancel the position switch‚ enter the number (#75 1) of the position switch to be canceled in # ( ) of the
setting field‚ enter a slash "/" in DATA ( )‚ then press the INPUT key. This deletes the axis name for the
specified position switch‚ thus invalidating the position switch.
The data specified for <dog1> and <dog2> are still stored in memory. To validate the position switch again‚
therefore‚ it is enough to specify the axis name only.
III - 255
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.
【#50001(PR)】
MSR
Motor series
Set the motor series. When set to the default value ("0000"), the system will automatically judge the
series.
---Setting range--0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
【#50002(PR)】
RTY Regeneration option type
Set the regenerative resistor type.
Default value: 0000
0000: Drive unit standard built-in resistor (10CT has no built-in resistor)
0100: Setting prohibited
0200: MR-RB032 (30W)
0300: MR-RB12 (100W)
0400: MR-RB32 (300W)
0500: MR-RB30 (300W)
0600: MR-RB50 (500W)
0700 to 0F00: Setting prohibited
Do not set values that are not written here.
【#50003(PR)】
PC1 Motor side gear ratio (machine rotation ratio)
Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side and the number of gear teeth on the machine side as
an integer reduced to its lowest terms.
Set the total gear ratio if there are multiple gear levels.
For rotary axes, set the motor rotation speed per machine rotation.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 32767
【#50004(PR)】
PC2 Machine side gear ratio (motor rotation ratio)
Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side and the number of gear teeth on the machine side as
an integer reduced to its lowest terms.
Set the total gear ratio if there are multiple gear levels.
For rotary axes, set the motor rotation speed per machine rotation.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 32767
【#50005(PR)】
PIT Feed pitch
Set the feed pitch.
Set "360" (default value) for rotary axes.
Set the feed lead for linear axes.
---Setting range--1 to 32767(° or mm)
【#50006】
INP In-position detection width
Set the position droop for the in-position detection.
In-position will be detected when the position droop reaches the setting value or less.
Default value: 50
---Setting range--1 to 32767 (1/1000° or µm)
III - 256
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50007】
ATU Auto-tuning
Set the adjustment of the auto-tuning.
Default value: 0102
***1: Low response (low-rigidity loads, loads which easily vibrate)
***2: Standard setting value
***3:
***4:
***5: High response (high-rigidity loads, loads which do not easily vibrate)
**0*: Standard friction amount
**1*: Large friction amount (set the position loop gain slightly lower)
*0**: Only auto-tuning PG2, VG2, VIC, and GD2
*1**: Only auto-tuning PG1, PG2, VG1, VG2, VIC, and GD2 (total gain). (Standard setting)
*2**: No auto-tuning
Do not set values that are not explained here.
【#50008】
PG1 Position loop gain 1
Set the position loop gain of the model loop. This parameter determines the trackability to a position
command.
Default value: 70
---Setting range--4 to 1000 (1/s)
【#50009】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50010】
EMGt Deceleration control time constant
Set the deceleration time from the clamp speed (Aspeed1). Set the same value as the
acceleration/deceleration time constant used for the normal rapid traverse.
Default value: 500
---Setting range--0 to 32768 (ms)
【#50011】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50012】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50013】
MBR Vertical axis drop prevention time
Set the time to delay the servo OFF during servo OFF command. Increase the setting by 100ms at a
time and set the minimum value where the axis does not drop.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--0 to 1000 (ms)
III - 257
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50014】
NCH Notch filter No.
Set the frequency of the machine resonance suppression filter.
0: Not used
1: 1125 (Hz)
2: 563
3: 375
4: 282
5: 225
6: 188
7: 161
【#50015】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50016】
JIT Jitter compensation
Set the number of pulses that ignore the jitter compensation.
0: The function is not used.
1 to 3: 1 to 3 pulses ignore.
【#50017】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50018】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50019】
PG2 Position loop gain 2
Set the position loop gain of the actual loop.
Determine the position responsiveness to external disturbance.
Default value: 25
---Setting range--1 to 500 (1/s)
【#50020】
VG1 Speed loop gain 1
Set the speed loop gain of the model loop.
This parameter determines the tracking ability to a speed command.
Default value: 1200
---Setting range--20 to 5000 (1/s)
【#50021】
VG2 Speed loop gain 2
Set the speed loop gain of the actual loop.
This parameter determines the speed responsiveness to external disturbance.
Default value: 600
---Setting range--20 to 8000 (1/s)
【#50022】
VIC Speed integral compensation
Set the characteristics of the speed low-frequency region.
Default value: 20
---Setting range--1 to 1000 (ms)
III - 258
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50023】
VDC Speed differential compensation
Set the speed differential compensation to reduce overshoot.
When the default value "1000" is set, the normal PI control will start.
Adjust the overshoot amount by lowering in increments of 20.
---Setting range--0 to 1000
【#50024】
DG2 Load inertia ratio
Set the ratio of load inertia to motor inertia.
Default value: 2.0
---Setting range--0.0 to 50.0 (fold)
【#50025】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50030(PR)】
MTY Motor type
Set the motor type. When set to the default value ("0000"), the system will automatically judge the
type.
---Setting range--0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
【#50050】
MD1 D/A output channel 1 data No.
Set the Nos. of the data to output on D/A output channel 1.
Default value: 0000
0000: Speed feedback (with sign) Maximum speed = 8V
0001: Current feedback (with sign) Maximum current (torque) = 8V
0002: Speed feedback (without sign)
Maximum speed = 8V
0003: Current feedback (without sign)
Maximum current (torque) = 8V
0004: Current command Maximum current (torque) = 8V
0005: Command FΔT
100000 [degrees/min] = 10V
0006: Position droop 1 (1/1)
2048 [pulse] = 10V
0007: Position droop 2 (1/4)
8192 [pulse] = 10V
0008: Position droop 3 (1/16)
32768 [pulse] = 10V
0009: Position droop 4 (1/32)
65536 [pulse] = 10V
000A: Position droop 5 (1/64)
131072 [pulse] = 10V
【#50051】
MO1 D/A output channel 1 output offset
Set this parameter when the zero level of D/A output channel 1 is not equal to zero.
---Setting range---999 to 999 (mV)
【#50052】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50053】
MD2 D/A output channel 2 data No.
Set the Nos. of the data to output on D/A output channel 2.
Descriptions are the same as in "#50050 MD1".
Default value: 0000
---Setting range--0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
III - 259
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50054】
MO2 D/A output channel 2 output offset
Set this parameter when the zero level of D/A output channel 2 is not equal to zero.
Default value: 0
---Setting range---999 to 999 (mV)
【#50055】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50100(PR)】
station Number of indexing stations
Set the number of stations.
For linear axes, this value is expressed by: number of divisions = number of stations - 1.
Default value: 2
---Setting range--2 to 360
【#50101(PR)】
Cont1 Control parameter 1
The bits that are not explained here must be set to the default value.
bit
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Default value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
bit1:
0: High-speed zero point return after the establishment of zero point
1: Dog-type return for each reference position return
bit8:
0: Reference position return direction (+)
1: Reference position return direction (-)
bit9:
0: Rotation direction determined by operation control signal (DIR)
1: Rotation direction in the shortcut direction
bitA
0: Machine basic position becomes the basic point.
1: Electrical basic position becomes the basic point.
bitD
0: Creation of coordinate zero point is valid.
1: Zero point is established at power supply ON position.
bitE
0: Rotation direction in operation control signal (DIR) or in the shortcut direction
1: Rotation direction in the arbitrary position command sign direction
bitF
0: Stopper direction is in the positioning direction.
1: Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount.
III - 260
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50102(PR)】
Cont2 Control parameter 2
The bits that are not explained here must be set to the default value.
bit
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Default value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
bit1:
0: Error not corrected at servo OFF
1: Error corrected at servo OFF
bit2:
0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis
bit3:
0: Station assignment direction CW
1: Station assignment direction CCW
bit4:
0: Uniform assignment
1: Non-uniform assignment
bit5:
0: DO channel standard assignment
1: DO channel reverse assignment
bit6:
0: 2-wire detector communication
1: 4-wire detector communication
bit7:
0: Incremental detection
1: Absolute position detection
【#50103(PR)】
EmgCont Emergency stop control
The bits that are not explained here must be set to the default value.
bit
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Default value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
bit0:
0: Enable external emergency stop
1: Disable external emergency stop
bit1:
0: Dynamic brake stop at emergency stop
1: Deceleration control stop at emergency stop
bit2:
0: Enable NC bus emergency stop input
1: Disable NC bus emergency stop input
bit3:
0: Enable NC bus emergency stop output
1: Disable NC bus emergency stop output
【#50104(PR)】
tleng
Linear axis stroke length
Set the travel stroke length for linear axis.
The set value for this parameter will be ignored when non-uniform assignments are set or random
positions are commanded.
Default value: 100.000
---Setting range--0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)
III - 261
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50110】
ZRNspeed Reference position return speed
Set the clamp value of the feedrate when a reference position return is carried out.
The feedrate applies the manual operation speed in the parameter group selected at the time, which
is clamped by this parameter set value.
Default value: 1000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50111】
ZRNcreep Reference position return creep speed
Set the approach speed to the reference position after dog detection during a reference position
return.
Default value: 200
---Setting range--1 to 65535 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50112】
grid mask Grid mask
Set the amount that the dog is artificially extended. Normally set the half amount of the grid spacing.
Default value: 0
---Setting range--0 to 65536 (1/1000° or µm)
【#50113(PR)】
grspc Grid spacing
Select the number of divisions in the grid spacing that is the conventional motor rotation travel
amount.
The setting values "1", "2", "3" and "4" divide into 2, 4, 8 and 16 divisions respectively.
Default value: 0
---Setting range--0 to 4 ("1 / (n-th power of 2)" divisions)
【#50114】
ZRNshift Reference position shift amount
Set the shift amount in a dog-type reference position return from the electrical basic position, which
is determined on the grid, to the reference position.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range--0 to 65536 (1/1000° or µm)
【#50115】
ST. ofset
Station offset
Set the distance (offset) from the reference position to station 1.
Default value: 0
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50116(PR)】
ABS base Absolute position zero point
Set the travel distance in shifting the machine coordinate basic point from the standard point during
absolute position initializing.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 262
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50117】
Limit(+) Soft limit (+)
Set the upper limit for commands in the plus direction.
Commands in the plus direction beyond this set value are not possible.
If the machine is in a position exceeding the setting value, commands in the minus direction will be
possible.
If "#50117 Limit(+)" and "#50118 Limit(-)" are set to the same value, the soft limit function will not
operate.
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#50118】
Limit(-) Soft limit (-)
Set the lower limit for commands in the minus direction.
Commands in the minus direction beyond this set value are not possible.
If the machine is in a position exceeding the setting value, commands in the plus direction will be
possible.
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#50120】
ABS Type
Absolute position detection parameter
The bits that are not explained here must be set to the default value.
bit
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Default value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
bit1:
0: Dogless-type method initializing
1: Dog-type method initializing
bit2:
0: Machine end stopper method initializing
1: Marked point alignment method initializing
bit3:
0: Electrical basic position direction (+)
1: Electrical basic position direction (–)
【#50123(PR)】
ABS check Absolute position power OFF tolerable movement value
Set the tolerable amount of travel for a machine that travels during power OFF in an absolute
position detection system. The "Absolute position power OFF movement exceeded (ABS)" signal
will turn ON if the machine travels more than this setting value during power OFF.
The travel amount will not be checked when this parameter is set to "0.000".
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50130】
backlash Backlash compensa-tion amount
Set the backlash compensation amount.
Default value: 0
---Setting range--0 to 9999 (1/1000° or µm)
【#50132】
Not used. Set to "0".
III - 263
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50133】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50134】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50135】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#50150】
Aspeed1
Operation parameter group 1 Automatic operation speed
Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
This parameter is regarded as the clamp value for the automatic operation speeds and manual
operation speeds of all operation groups.
A speed exceeding Aspeed1 cannot be commanded, even if it is set in a parameter.
Default value: 5000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50151】
Mspeed1 Operation parameter group 1 Manual operation speed
Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when operation parameter group 1 is
selected.
Default value: 2000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50152】
time1.1 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
When operating at a lower speed than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate
at the inclination determined above.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the
acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--1 to 9999 (ms)
【#50153】
time1.2 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
Set this parameter when carrying out S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Set the total time of the
non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. When "1" is set, linear
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 999 (ms)
III - 264
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50154】
TL1 Operation parameter group 1 Torque limit value
Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the
default value when torque limit is not especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as torque limit value when
positioning to the stopper starting coordinates.
Default value: 500
---Setting range--1 to 500 (%)
【#50155】
OD1 Operation parameter group 1 Excessive error detection width
Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
The excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than
this setting value.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as excessive error detection width
when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (° or mm)
【#50156】
just1 Operation parameter group 1 Set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (JST) or "automatic set position reached"
(JSTA) signal is output when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
"Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station.
During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same
condition.
These signals will turn OFF when the machine position moves away from the station over this value.
Default value: 0.500
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50157】
near1 Operation parameter group 1 Near set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when operation
parameter group 1 is selected.
"Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine position is near any station position.
This value is generally set wider than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0".
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50158】
Aspeed2
Operation parameter group 2 Automatic operation speed
Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 2 is selected.
Default value: 5000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50159】
Mspeed2 Operation parameter group 2 Manual operation speed
Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when operation parameter group 2 is
selected.
Default value: 2000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
III - 265
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50160】
time2.1 Operation parameter group 2 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 2 is selected.
When operating at a lower speed than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate
at the inclination determined above.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the
acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--1 to 9999 (ms)
【#50161】
time2.2 Operation parameter group 2 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
Set this parameter when carrying out S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Set the total time of the
non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. When "1" is set, linear
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 999 (ms)
【#50162】
TL2 Operation parameter group 2 Torque limit value
Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 2 is selected. At the default
value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the default value
when torque limit is not especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as torque limit value during the
stopper operation.
Default value: 500
---Setting range--1 to 500 (%)
【#50163】
OD2 Operation parameter group 2 Excessive error detection width
Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 2 is selected.
The excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than
this setting value.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as excessive error detection width
during the stopper operation.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (° or mm)
【#50164】
just2 Operation parameter group 2 Set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (JST) or "automatic set position reached"
(JSTA) signal is output when operation parameter group 2 is selected.
"Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station.
During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same
condition.
These signals will turn OFF when the machine position moves away from the station over this value.
Default value: 0.500
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 266
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50165】
near2 Operation parameter group 2 Near set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when operation
parameter group 2 is selected.
"Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine position is near any station position.
This value is generally set wider than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0".
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50166】
Aspeed3
Operation parameter group 3 Automatic operation speed
Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 3 is selected.
Default value: 5000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50167】
Mspeed3 Operation parameter group 3 Manual operation speed
Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when operation parameter group 3 is
selected.
Default value: 2000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50168】
time3.1 Operation parameter group 3 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 3 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
When operating at a lower speed than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate
at the inclination determined above.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the
acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--1 to 9999 (ms)
【#50169】
time3.2 Operation parameter group 3 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
Set this parameter when carrying out S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Set the total time of the
non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. When "1" is set, linear
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 999 (ms)
【#50170】
TL3 Operation parameter group 3 Torque limit value
Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 3 is selected.
At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the
default value when torque limit is not especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as pressing torque limit value after
completion of the positioning.
Default value: 500
---Setting range--1 to 500 (%)
III - 267
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50171】
OD3 Operation parameter group 3 Excessive error detection width
Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 3 is selected.
The excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than
this setting value.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as excessive error detection width
during pressing after completion of the positioning.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (° or mm)
【#50172】
just3 Operation parameter group 3 Set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (JST) or "automatic set position reached"
(JSTA) signal is output when operation parameter group 3 is selected.
"Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station.
During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same
condition.
These signals will turn OFF when the machine position moves away from the station over this value.
Default value: 0.500
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50173】
near3 Operation parameter group 3 Near set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when operation
parameter group 3 is selected.
"Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine position is near any station position.
This value is generally set wider than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0".
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50174】
Aspeed4
Operation parameter group 4 Automatic operation speed
Set the feedrate during automatic operation when operation parameter group 4 is selected.
Default value: 5000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50175】
Mspeed4 Operation parameter group 4 Manual operation speed
Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when operation parameter group 4 is
selected.
Default value: 2000
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#50176】
time4.1 Operation parameter group 4 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 4 is selected.
When operating at a lower speed than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate
at the inclination determined above.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the
acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--1 to 9999 (ms)
III - 268
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50177】
time4.2 Operation parameter group 4 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
Set this parameter when carrying out S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Set the total time of the
non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. When "1" is set, linear
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Default value: 1
---Setting range--1 to 999 (ms)
【#50178】
TL4 Operation parameter group 4 Torque limit value
Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 4 is selected.
At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the
default value when torque limit is not especially required.
In the stopper method initializing mode in absolute position detection system, this is regarded as
torque limit value during stopper operation.
Default value: 500
---Setting range--1 to 500 (%)
【#50179】
OD4 Operation parameter group 4 Excessive error detection width
Set the excessive error detection width when operation parameter group 4 is selected. The
excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than this
setting value.
In the stopper method initializing mode in absolute position detection system, this is regarded as
excessive error detection width during stopper operation.
Default value: 100
---Setting range--0 to 32767 (° or mm)
【#50180】
just4 Operation parameter group 4 Set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (JST) or "automatic set position reached"
(JSTA) signal is output when operation parameter group 4 is selected.
"Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station.
During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same
condition.
These signals will turn OFF when the machine position moves away from the station over this value.
Default value: 0.500
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50181】
near4 Operation parameter group 4 Near set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when operation
parameter group 4 is selected.
"Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine position is near any station position.
This value is generally set wider than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0".
Default value: 1.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50190】
stpos2 Station 2 coordinate
Set the station 2 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 269
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50191】
stpos3 Station 3 coordinate
Set the station 3 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50192】
stpos4 Station 4 coordinate
Set the station 4 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50193】
stpos5 Station 5 coordinate
Set the station 5 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50194】
stpos6 Station 6 coordinate
Set the station 6 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50195】
stpos7 Station 7 coordinate
Set the station 7 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50196】
stpos8 Station 8 coordinate
Set the station 8 coordinate value when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50197】
stpos9 Station 9 coordinate
Set the coordinate of each station when non-uniform assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 270
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50200】
PSWcheck PSW detection method
Select the criterion for the output of position switches 1 to 8.
bit0 to 7 correspond to position switches 1 to 8.
0: Judged by the machine position of the command system.
1: Judged by the machine FB position (actual position).
The bits that are not written here must be set to "0".
【#50201】
PSW1 dog1 PSW1 area setting 1
Set "PSW1 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 1 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50202】
PSW1 dog2 PSW1 area setting 2
Set "PSW1 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 1 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50203】
PSW2 dog1 PSW2 area setting 1
Set "PSW2 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 2 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50204】
PSW2 dog2 PSW2 area setting 2
Set "PSW2 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 2 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50205】
PSW3 dog1 PSW3 area setting 1
Set "PSW3 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 3 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 271
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50206】
PSW3 dog2 PSW3 area setting 2
Set "PSW3 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 3 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50207】
PSW4 dog1 PSW4 area setting 1
Set "PSW4 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 4 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50208】
PSW4 dog2 PSW4 area setting 2
Set "PSW4 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 4 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50209】
PSW5 dog1 PSW5 area setting 1
Set "PSW5 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 5 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50210】
PSW5 dog2 PSW5 area setting 2
Set "PSW5 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 5 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 272
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50211】
PSW6 dog1 PSW6 area setting 1
Set "PSW6 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 6 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50212】
PSW6 dog2 PSW6 area setting 2
Set "PSW6 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 6 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50213】
PSW7 dog1 PSW7 area setting 1
Set "PSW7 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 7 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50214】
PSW7 dog2 PSW7 area setting 2
Set "PSW7 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 7 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50215】
PSW8 dog1 PSW8 area setting 1
Set "PSW8 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 8 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 273
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter
【#50216】
PSW8 dog2 PSW8 area setting 2
Set "PSW8 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 8 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#50220】
push.1 Stopper amount
Set the command stroke of the stopper operation in the stopper positioning.
Default value: 0.000
---Setting range--0.000 to 359.999 (° or mm)
【#50221】
push.t1 Stopper standby time
Set the standby time from the stopper starting coordinate positioning to the stopper operation start
in the stopper positioning.
Default value: 0
---Setting range--0 to 9999 (ms)
【#50222】
push.t2 Stopper torque release time
Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the changeover of the stopper torque in
the stopper positioning.
Default value: 0
---Setting range--0 to 9999 (ms)
【#50223】
push.t3 Set position signal output delay time
Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the output of the “automatic set position
reached” (JSTA), “set position reached” (JST) or “near set position” (NEAR) signal in the stopper
positioning.
Default setting: 0
---Setting range--0 to 9999 (ms)
III - 274
14. Open Parameter
14. Open Parameter
【#29001】
Open param 1
Set LONG data.
#29001 to #29896 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily.
---Setting range---
【#29901】
Open param 2
Set DOUBLE data.
#29901 to #29996 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily.
---Setting range---
III - 275
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
15. CC-Link Parameter
Be sure to stop the PLC ladder before changing the parameters.
When the parameter has been changed, PLC ladder scanning starts and parameters are updated to set no
need to turn the power ON.
CC-Link parameters cannot be changed by G10 command.
(Note) “Master station” and “Local/standby master station” next to the Details column shows whether
these settings are required or not. “×” means to set “0”.
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
“n” in the table represents the extenpansion slot No.(n=1 to 3).
Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.
【#24001+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn station No. CC-Link station No.
Set the station No. of the CC-Link I/F unit.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
-1: Invalid
0: Master station
1 to 64: Slave station
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range---1 to 64
III - 276
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24002+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn line-spd&Mode CC-Link transmission rate and mode
Select the transmission rate and operation mode of the CC-Link I/F unit.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Setting
value
Transmission
rate (bps)
0
156K
1
625K
2
2.5M
3
5M
4
10M
5
156K
6
625K
7
2.5M
8
5M
9
10M
10
156K
11
625K
12
2.5M
13
5M
14
10M
Mode
Online
Circuit test
Hardware test
(Note) Perform hardware
test after removing
the CC-Link cable.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0 to 14
【#24003+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn set fault sta Setting of data link faulty station
Select whether to clear or hold the data input from the data link faulty station.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: Clear
1: Hold
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
---Master station--Set to "0" or "1".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0" or "1".
III - 277
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24004+40(n-1)】
SLn PLC stop set Setting at PLC STOP
Set whether to refresh or compulsorily clear the slave stations at PLC STOP.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: Refresh
1: Compulsorily clear
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
---Master station--Set to "0" or "1".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0" or "1".
【#24005+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn occ stations Number of occupied stations
Set the number of occupied local and standby master stations.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
---Master station--Set to "0".
---Local/standby master station--Set to either of "1" to "4".
---Setting range--0 to 4
【#24006+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn extended cyc
Extended cyclic setting
Set the magnification for the extended cyclic operation of the local station whose type corresponds
to Ver.2.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "1" for the local station whose type corresponds to Ver.1.
This function is out of specifications when the protocol version is Ver.1. The setting for the local
station is fixed to "1".
---Master station--Set to "0".
---Local/standby master station--Set to either of "1", "2", "4" or "8".
---Setting range--0,1,2,4,8 (fold)
【#24007+40(n-1)】
SLn conn modules Number of connected modules
Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, standby master
station and reserved stations connected to the master station.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
---Master station--Set to either of "1" to "64".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 64 (modules)
III - 278
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24008+40(n-1)】
SLn num of retries Number of retries
Set the number of retries for when a communication error occurs.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
---Master station--Set to either of "1" or "7".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 7 (times)
【#24009+40(n-1)】
SLn auto ret mdls Number of automatic return modules
Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and standby
master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
---Master station--Set to either of "1" or "10".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 10 (modules)
【#24010+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn STBY master st Standby master station
Set the station No. of the standby master station.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no standby master station is provided.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set "0" (fixed) for the local station.
Set "1" (fixed) for the standby station.
---Setting range--0 to 64
【#24011+40(n-1)】
SLn ope at NC down Operation at NC down
Set the data link status for when the master station failure occurs.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: Fixed to stop
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
---Master station--Set to "0" (fixed).
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
III - 279
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24012+40(n-1)】
SLn scan mode Scan mode
Select whether to synchronize the link scan with one ladder scan.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: Fixed to synchronize
---Master station--Set to "0" (fixed).
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
【#24013+40(n-1)】
SLn delay time Delay time
Set the delay time.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: (Fixed value)
---Master station--Set to "0" (fixed).
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
【#24014+40(n-1)】
SLn RX dev name Remote input (RX) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote input (RX) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) X
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,X,M,L,B,D,W,R
III - 280
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24015+40(n-1)】
SLn RX dev No.
Remote input (RX) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote input (RX) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1000
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--X: 0 to 5FF
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24016+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn RY dev name Remote output (RY) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote output (RY) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) Y
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,Y,M,L,B,D,W,R
III - 281
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24017+40(n-1)】
SLn RY dev No.
Remote output (RY) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote output (RY) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1000
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--Y: 0 to 5FF
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24018+40(n-1)】
SLn RWr dev name Remote register (RWr) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) W
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,M,L,B,D,W,R
III - 282
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24019+40(n-1)】
SLn RWr dev No.
Remote register (RWr) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1FF0
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24020+40(n-1)】
SLn RWw dev name Remote register (RWw) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) W
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,M,L,B,D,W,R
III - 283
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24021+40(n-1)】
SLn RWw dev No. Remote register (RWw) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1FF0
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24022+40(n-1)】
SLn SB dev name Special relay (SB) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) SB
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,M,L,B,D,W,R,SB
III - 284
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24023+40(n-1)】
SLn SB dev No.
Special relay (SB) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1F0
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
SB: 0 to 1FF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24024+40(n-1)】
SLn SW dev name Special relay (SW) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Example) SW
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--0,M,L,B,D,W,R,SW
III - 285
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1
【#24025+40(n-1)】
SLn SW dev No. Special relay (SW) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1F0
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Setting range--M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
SW: 0 to 1FF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24026+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn Protocol Ver
Protocol version
Select the CC-Link version mode that has been set to the slide switch SW1-2 on the CC-Link unit
(HN566/HN567).
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
0: Ver.2
1: Ver.1
Ver.2 mode has been set to SW1-2 as default.
---Master station--Set to "0" or "1".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0" or "1".
III - 286
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2
Use these parameters when NC is master station.
The ordinal number of the unit, assigned in ascending order of station No., is entered in “m” (m=1 to 64).
Parameters for each station are set in series in the order of units regardless of each station No.
(Example)When the 1st slave station occupies 4 stations, set the station No.5 to the parameters #24136 to
#24139 for the 2nd.
Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.
【#24121+15(m-1)】
CNm station type Station type
Set the type of the connected remote station, local station, intelligent device station and standby
master station.
0: No setting
1: Ver.1 remote I/O station
2: Ver.1 remote device station
3: Ver.1 intelligent device station
4: Ver.2 remote device station
5: Ver.2 intelligent device station
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
---Master station--Set to either of "0" to "5".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
【#24122+15(m-1)】
CNm extended cyc
Extended cyclic setting
Select the magnification for the extended cycling operation of the connected remote, local and
intelligent stations.
Set "1" when the protocol version is Ver.1.
Set "0" when no setting is required.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64)
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0,1,2,4,8 (times)
【#24123+15(m-1)】
CNm occ stations Number of occupied stations
Set the number of the occupied stations by the connected remote, local and intelligent stations.
Set 1 for 8 points I/O and 16 points I/O.
Set "0" when no setting is required.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 4 (stations occupied)
III - 287
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2
【#24124+15(m-1)】
CNm station No.
Station No.
Set the station No. of the connected remote, local and intelligent stations.
Set "0" when no setting is required.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0 to 64
【#24125+15(m-1)】
CNm remote sta pt Remote station points
Select the number of points of the connected remote station.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
The details of setting values differ with each protocol version and station type.
Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ver.1, remote I/O station)
0: 0 point (reserved station)
1: 8 points
2: 8 points + 8 points reserved
3: 16 points
4: 32 points
•Setting 0 is valid only for the reserved station. When 0 is set for the other stations, the number of
points will be 32.
• Set the value so that the total number of points of remote I/O stations connected in series will be
multiple of 16.
(Example 1) 2 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" for each
(Example 2) 3 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" for the first and the second I/O, "2" for the third.
Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ver.1 except remote I/O station)
0: 0 point (reserved station)
1 to 4: Automatically calculated
• 0 point is valid only for the reserved station. When 0 is set for the other stations, the number of
points will be automatically calculated.
• Unless 0 is set, the number of points will be automatically calculated with the number of occupied
stations and the setting value of the extended cycling.
Protocol: Ver.1 (for all station types)
0 to 4: Automatically calculated
• 0 cannot be set even for the reserved station.
• Automatically calculated with the setting value of the number of occupied stations.
---Master station--Set a value corresponding to the protocol version and the station type.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
【#24126+15(m-1)】
CNm set rsvd sta Reserved station
Set the reserved/error invalid station.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
0: No setting
1: Reserved station
2: Error invalid station
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
---Master station--Set either of "0" to "2".
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
III - 288
15. CC-Link Parameter
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2
【#24131+15(m-1)】
CNm send size Send buffer size
Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the local station, standby master station and
intelligent device station when in transient transmission.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
(Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0, 64 to 4096 (words)
【#24132+15(m-1)】
CNm receive size Receive buffer size
Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the local station, standby master station and
intelligent device station when in transient transmission.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
(Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0, 64 to 4096 (words)
【#24133+15(m-1)】
CNm auto bfr size Automatic update buffer size
Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the local station, standby master station and
intelligent device station when in transient transmission.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Master station--Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station--Set to "0".
---Setting range--0, 128 to 4096 (words)
III - 289
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
Although Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2 are set on the different screens, they share some
items.
“Anshin-net parameter 2” and “MTB-net parameter 2” column shows whether the item is displayed on their
screens.
Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.
【#10901(PR)】
Modem tel num
Set the PHS modem's registered No. (telephone No.).
This is used for the authentication by the host.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10902(PR)】
Num dispatch call
Set a call No. to Call Center.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10903(PR)】
Num arrival call 1
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10904(PR)】
Num arrival call 2
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10905(PR)】
Num arrival call 3
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
III - 290
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10906(PR)】
Num arrival call 4
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10907(PR)】
Num arrival call 5
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10908(PR)】
Num dispatch call
Set a call No. to a machine tool builder.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10909(PR)】
Num arrival call 1
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10910(PR)】
Num arrival call 2
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10911(PR)】
Num arrival call 3
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
III - 291
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10912(PR)】
Num arrival call 4
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10913(PR)】
Num arrival call 5
Set the caller's No.: the other party’s telephone No. that is used for INIT authentication.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls.
Enter from the communication company No. for international calls.
This is used to distinguish between received calls from Call Center and those from machine tool
builder.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range--Within 28 characters
【#10914】
Auto select anet
Set whether to change to the Anshin-net screen when a call is automatically dispatched from the
NC.
(Currently not used.)
0: Not change
1: Change
【#10915】
Num retry
Set the number of times to retry when a control command transmission error occurs.
Standard setting: 3
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#10916】
Command time out
Set the timeout time for reception command standby.
Standard setting: 30 (s)
---Setting range--0 to 65535 (s)
【#10917】
Frequ of redial
Set the number of times to redial.
Standard setting: 3
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
---Setting range--0 to 255
【#10918】
Interval of redial
Set the redial interval.
Standard setting: 100 (s)
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
---Setting range--0 to 65535 (s)
【#10919(PR)】
Modem connect port
Select the modem connection port.
1: Port 1
2: Port 2
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
III - 292
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10920】
Dial mode select
Select the dialing method.
0: Fixed by modem (default)
1: Dial with tone (push) method
2: Dial with pulse (dial) method
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
【#10921】
Call wait time
Set the call back waiting time.
Default value: 0
This parameter is used as both Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2.
---Setting range--0 to 90 (s)
【#10922】
Machine Num
Set the machine's serial number as information for the machine tool builder to recognize the
machine.
This parameter is supposed to be input by the machine tool builder (when shipping or when starting
the machine tool builder network).
If this is set to blank, the system cannot connect with remote diagnosis tool kit.
---Setting range--Within 15 characters (one-byte alphanumeric characters)
【#10951(PR)】
Condition kind 1
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note 1) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10
and "Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" when setting "0" for "Condition num".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
III - 293
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10952(PR)】
Condition num 1
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
【#10953(PR)】
Condition kind 2
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10954(PR)】
Condition num 2
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 294
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10955(PR)】
Condition kind 3
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10956(PR)】
Condition num 3
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 295
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10957(PR)】
Condition kind 4
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10958(PR)】
Condition num 4
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 296
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10959(PR)】
Condition kind 5
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10960(PR)】
Condition num 5
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 297
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10961(PR)】
Condition kind 6
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10962(PR)】
Condition num 6
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 298
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10963(PR)】
Condition kind 7
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10964(PR)】
Condition num 7
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 299
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10965(PR)】
Condition kind 8
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10966(PR)】
Condition num 8
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 300
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10967(PR)】
Condition kind 9
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note 1) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10
and "Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" when setting "0" for "Condition num".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10968(PR)】
Condition num 9
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 301
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2
【#10969(PR)】
Condition kind 10
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm type for alarm, device (register) name for PLC signal.
<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 5 characters
【#10970(PR)】
Condition num 10
Set the condition (alarm or PLC signal) for the automatic notification of alarms.
Set the alarm No. for alarm, status value for PLC signal.
(Note) Set "0" to cancel (set blank for) any setting of #10951 to #10970, "Condition kind" 1 to 10 and
"Condition num" 1 to 10.
Input "00" to set "Condition num" to "0".
When either of "Condition kind" or "Condition num" is canceled, the condition will not be available for
the automatic notification of alarms.
---Setting range--Within 4 characters
III - 302
17. PLC Axis Indexing Parameters
17. PLC Axis Indexing Parameters
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.
【#12800(PR)】
chgauxno Auxiliary axis number
Set the axis No. to be controlled as auxiliary axis using auxiliary axis interface.
---Setting range--0 to 16
【#12801(PR)】
aux_station Number of indexing stations
Set the number of stations.
For linear axis, this value is expressed by: number of divisions = number of stations -1.
---Setting range--2 to 360
【#12802(PR)】
aux_Cont1 Control parameter 1
The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
Bit3:
0: Automatic reach signal isn't interlocked with the start signal.
1: Automatic reach signal is interlocked with the start signal.
Bit4:
0: Automatic reach signal is turned ON again.
1: Automatic reach signal isn't turned ON again.
Bit5:
0: Station No. Output within fixed position.
1: Station No. Constantly output.
bit9:
0: Rotation direction determined by operation control signal (DIR)
1: Rotation direction in the shortcut direction
bitE:
0: Rotation direction in operation control signal (DIR) or in the shortcut direction
1: Rotation direction in the arbitrary position command sign direction
bitF:
0: Stopper direction is in the positioning direction.
1: Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount.
【#12803(PR)】
aux_Cont2 Control parameter 2
The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
bit4:
0: Uniform index
1: Non-uniform index
【#12804(PR)】
aux_tleng Linear axis stroke length
Set the movement stroke length for linear axes.
This parameter is meaningless at the non-uniform index or random position command.
---Setting range--0.001 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#12805】
aux_ST.offset Station offset
Set the distance (offset) from the reference position to station 1.
---Setting range---99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
III - 303
17. PLC Axis Indexing Parameters
【#12810+10(n-1)】
aux_Aspeedn Operation parameter group n Automatic operation speed
Set the feedrate during automatic operation when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
"#12810 aux_Aspeed1" is regarded as the clamp value for the automatic operation speeds and
manual operation speeds of all operation groups.
A speed exceeding "aux_Aspeed1" cannot be commanded, even if it is set in a parameter.
---Setting range--1 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#12811+10(n-1)】
aux_Mspeedn Operation parameter group n Manual operation speed
Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when "operation parameter group n" is
selected.
---Setting range--1 to 100000 ( /min or mm/min)
【#12812+10(n-1)】aux_timen.1 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the
acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part.
When operating at a speed less than the clamp speed, if "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "0", the axis will
accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set in this parameter. If "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "1",
the axis will accelerate/decelerate at the constant inclination determined by this parameter and
"aux_Aspeed1".
---Setting range--1 to 4000 (ms)
【#12813+10(n-1)】aux_timen.2 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
Set the total time of the non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. When "1" is set,
linear acceleration/deceleration will be carried out.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.
---Setti